JP7619396B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that changes the display of pictures on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the display of changing pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-074175 A

In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention given to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention given to games.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

The present invention relates to
A starting ball entry means provided in the game area;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a shot made to the starting shot means;
an acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a determination means for sequentially determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
A pattern display means having a display unit capable of variably displaying a pattern;
a game round control means for controlling the picture display means so that a game round is played when the display unit starts to display a variable display of the picture based on the judgment made by the judgment means, a stop result corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means is displayed, and the variable display of the picture is terminated, the stop result being counted as one game round;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state to a special game state when a determination result by the determination means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
a hold display control means for controlling the display of hold images so that when one ball is scored into the start ball scoring means under a circumstance where the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means has not reached the upper storage limit number, a hold image is additionally displayed in a predetermined order in the hold display area;
As a display form of the reserved display area,
a first display mode in which a player can recognize the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means based on a reserved image displayed in the reserved display area ;
a second display mode different from the first display mode, in which a player can recognize the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means based on the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area ;
There is a system in place,
The hold display control means has a display mode switching means for switching the display mode from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition,
The reserved display area has a plurality of areas each capable of displaying a reserved image ,
The first display form and the second display form have different arrangement patterns of the plurality of regions,
In the second display mode, in a situation where a predetermined number of reserved images are displayed in the plurality of areas, a player can recognize predetermined game information that is information about a game and is different from the number based on an arrangement of the predetermined number of reserved images;
When the display mode is set to the second display mode, the second display mode is configured to be continued over a plurality of times of the game,
A first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided as a variable display period of the picture in the picture display means,
a means for changing the display form to the second display form when the variable display period is the second period;
The display device is characterized in that the hold display area in the first display form is switched from a displayed state to a hidden state, and after the hidden state, the hold display area in the second display form is configured to be in a displayed state.

The present invention can effectively increase attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. This is an oblique view of the game board unit from the rear. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the configuration of the inner frame. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. A front view showing the rear pack unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. A schematic diagram showing the winning probability for each setting. A schematic diagram showing a win/lose table for the low probability mode. A schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the high probability mode. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams showing an allocation table, and FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between winning types and support modes. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device and the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the variable display control processing by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the variable start processing. (a) is a schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variable display mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a monitoring device and its related configuration. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a main control device and related configurations. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 11 is a timing chart showing switching between whether or not a setting can be changed. 13A is a flowchart showing an initial command output process according to the second embodiment; FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a setting change process; (a) A schematic diagram showing the codes contained in the initial command and the setting change command, (b) a flowchart showing the prize ball command setting process, and (c) a schematic diagram showing the information contained in the prize ball command. 13A is a flowchart showing the command response processing executed by the MPU of the dispensing control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the setting value comparison processing executed by the monitoring device in the third embodiment. 13A is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification setting process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the probability of winning at a general prize slot, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the probability of winning and settings. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the difference in normal range for each setting. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a monitoring device according to a fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing information stored in a temporary storage area of the monitoring device. 13 is a flowchart showing an abnormality notification process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between settings and reference information. 13A is a schematic diagram showing an electrical configuration in a sixth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between set values and correction coefficients. A flowchart showing the abnormality notification processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device in the seventh embodiment. 4 is a timing chart showing a flow of an abnormality notification. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for canceling an abnormality notification executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a monitoring device. 23 is a flowchart showing an abnormality notification cancellation process executed by the MPU of the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process. (a) A block diagram showing the configuration for transmitting and receiving information indicating setting values in the ninth embodiment, and (b) a flowchart showing the performance setting process for the occurrence of a missed reach, which is executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of display presentation. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting values and pattern combinations when a miss super reach C is executed. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a setting suggestion determination table. FIG. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the number of reserved reels and the stop display time of the pattern combination in the tenth embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing the flow of the presentation. A flowchart showing the presentation setting process for the occurrence of a missed reach, which is executed by the MPU of the notification/presentation control device in the eleventh embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the number of games played and the judgment reference number. FIG. A flowchart showing the variable display time setting process executed by the MPU of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display time and setting suggestions. 13 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process for the occurrence of a miss reach. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a final stop pattern combination determination table for a miss reach. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the final stopping pattern combination and the contents of the setting suggestion. 23A is a schematic diagram showing an electrical configuration in a thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram showing a setting key and a setting key switch. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a procedure for changing a set value, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a procedure for checking a set value. 5 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU of the monitoring device. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU of a main control device. 6A is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by an MPU of a monitoring device, and FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation processing. 10 is a timing chart showing a procedure for changing a setting value. 10 is a timing chart showing a procedure for changing a setting value. 4 is a timing chart showing a flow of checking a set value. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration according to a fourteenth embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU of a main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a main control device and a monitoring device in setting random value values. FIG. 23 is an oblique view of the game ball launch handle in the fifteenth embodiment, viewed from the front side of the game machine. A side view of the game ball launch handle. 13 is a flowchart showing a presentation mode determination process executed by the MPU of the notification/presentation control device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the specified number of operations and the correct/incorrect result, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and setting suggestions. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for continuous operation-compatible presentation executed by the MPU of the notification/presentation control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a game. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the configuration related to setting suggestions. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the configuration related to setting suggestions. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the configuration related to setting suggestions. 23 is a flowchart showing information acquisition processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in the sixteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing a process of setting a reserved command. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for hold notice performance executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. (a) A schematic diagram showing a non-explicit advance notice performance, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an explicit advance notice performance. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the degree of advantage when the probability of winning is within a standard range. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the state of setting suggestions, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the probability of displaying a setting suggestion image. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the change in the number of reserved balls obtained as the game progresses and the object of correction. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for setting suggestions executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between setting suggestion probability and the number of reserved acquisitions. A schematic diagram showing a modified example regarding the correction of setting suggestion probability. (a) Front view of the game board unit of the 17th embodiment, (b) schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the actuation port unit, and (c) front view of the main display unit. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the hold display. 13 is a flowchart showing the hold command and shift command response processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for the on-hold notice presentation executed by the MPU of the notification/presentation control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting suggestion process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. A flowchart showing command response processing for hold display control executed by the MPU of the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the pending display control processing executed by the MPU of the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the display mode switching processing executed by the MPU of the display control processing. (a) A schematic diagram showing the display form of the pending number display area in normal display mode, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the display form of the pending number display area in special display mode. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a normal display mode is switched to a special display mode. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between each unit hold display area. 11 is a schematic diagram showing switching from a special display mode to a normal display mode. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the hold display processing executed by the MPU of the display control device. A schematic diagram showing the shifting flow of hold icons in normal display mode. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a display pattern corresponding to a setting suggestion. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the update pattern of the pending display in the special display mode. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of setting suggestions in a special display mode. FIG. A schematic diagram showing a modified example of the pending number display area in special display mode. A schematic diagram showing an overview of the hold notification presentation in the 18th embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a first type preview performance, and (b) a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a second type preview performance. A schematic diagram showing the types of first and second type preview performances. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the first type preview performance B. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the second type preview performance B. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the on-hold notice performance executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the hold notification pattern determination process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. A flowchart showing the first type preview performance B setting process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. This is a flowchart showing the second type preview performance B setting process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. This is a flowchart showing the processing for the first type of preview performance B executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. This is a flowchart showing the processing for the second type of preview performance B executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and Figures 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the components inside the game area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a main machine part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting four long frame materials on all four sides, and is formed into a rectangular frame shape overall. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the game hall, etc.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state in which it can be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connection between the lower frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism, which allows the gaming machine main section 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 (see Figures 3 and 4).

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the gaming machine main part 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end of rotation and the right side as the tip end of rotation when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Fig. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an external shape substantially identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front area of the inner frame 13. A substantially elliptical window section 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20 so that substantially the entire area of a play area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front, and the window section 21 is blocked from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, and both glass panels 23 face each other from the front and rear with the partition in between. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the playing area PE is doubly covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame body 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one, or three or more. However, in consideration of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels and have each glass panel face each other at a specified gap from the front to the back. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a panel member made of a transparent synthetic resin instead of the glass panels.

Around the glass unit 22 (more specifically, the window section 21), various light-emitting means such as lamps are provided. For example, a circular illumination section 26 incorporating a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The circular illumination section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 that lights up when an error or other malfunction occurs is provided at the center of the circular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and on the left and right sides of the error display lamp section 27 that lights up when a prize ball is being paid out are provided. In addition, speaker sections 29 that output sound effects and background music according to the game state are provided near the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28 (see FIG. 3). The speaker section 29 switches background music according to the game state to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 that bulge toward the front are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see Figure 2). The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described below while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 34 has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33 and the function of a receiving tray for storing game balls that are fired by the game ball launching mechanism but do not reach the game area PE (see Figure 3) when the game balls are returned to the player.

In the upper bulge 31, in a portion forward of the upper tray 33 (the storage area for game balls), there is provided an operation button 35 that is operated (more specifically, pressed or pushed) by the player. The operation button 35 is an operation device that allows the player to give predetermined instructions during the progress of the game, for the purpose of performing a predetermined performance, etc. on the display screen of the pattern display device, which will be described later.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32 so as to protrude towards the front. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described below. The launch speed of the game ball increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launching handle 41 increases, and the game ball will reach the game area PE when this operation amount is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount. Furthermore, by adjusting this operation amount, the player can selectively hit the game ball into the right route or left route described below.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner, and the receiving portion is divided into left and right by a partition wall to separate the entrance portion of the front door side upper tray passage and the entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage lead to the game ball distribution section described later, and game balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

The rear surface of the front door frame 14 has protruding shafts at its upper and lower ends on the pivot base side. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 5. Figure 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the configuration within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 has been omitted in Figure 5, just like Figure 3.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50, the outer shape of which is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is disposed close to the upper frame part of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame part of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A fascia board is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The fascia board is disposed below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, its lower end part), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the fascia board. A slight clearance may be provided between the fascia board and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference, etc.

Support brackets 71, 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (left side in Figure 5). Although not shown, the support brackets 71, 72 have shafts, and bearings provided on the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shafts, so that the front door frame 14 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotation tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (the vertical frame member described later), and has front door hook members 76 arranged in a scattered manner in its longitudinal direction (vertical direction). The inner frame base body 50 has slits formed to correspond to each front door hook member 76 and hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 for protruding to the front side of the inner frame 13. The front door hook members 76 protruding through the slits are engaged with the hook receiving members 49 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. The locking device 75 also has inner frame hook members 77 that extend to the rear side of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 hook onto hook receiving members 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, locking the gaming machine main part 12 in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

The inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75) is provided with a cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (hook members 76, 77 and interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise), the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A storage recess 51 is formed in the center of the inner frame base body 50 to store the game board unit 80. The storage recess is recessed toward the rear of the gaming machine to match the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed in place by a manual locking mechanism while fitting into this storage recess 51 from the front of the gaming machine. A roughly rectangular window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the storage recess 51, and the rear structure of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b described later) protrudes through this window hole 52 to the rear of the inner frame 13. Note that almost the entire area of this window hole 52 is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is formed by integrating a game area forming body 80a, on the front of which is formed a game area PE where game balls flow down, and a back block 80b, which is provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a and on which various game parts (e.g., a variable display unit, a control device, a movable performance mechanism, a light-emitting decorative member, etc.) described later are mounted on a base body 251. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front part of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As already explained, the play area PE is covered by a glass unit 22 (more specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is positioned so that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the play area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of a play ball, i.e., so that the play balls flowing down the play area PE are not lined up front and back at the same point in the play area PE. This prevents balls from clogging the play area PE.

The game board unit 80 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be described below with reference to Figures 6 to 8. Figure 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and Figure 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as seen from the rear.

The play area forming body 80a has a plurality of openings, large and small, penetrating in the thickness direction (front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 6, each opening has a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, an operating opening 83a, 83b, a through gate 84, etc. When game balls enter the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a, 83b, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is given to the player based on the detection result. In addition, an outlet 89 is provided at the bottom of the play area forming body 80a, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections are discharged from the play area PE through the outlet 89. In the following explanation, to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 89, game balls entering the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b will also be referred to as "winning."

In addition, numerous game nails 93 are planted in the game area forming body 80a to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills 94 are arranged. The various components of these game nails 93 and windmills 94 differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and adjustments are made so that winning the above-mentioned general winning hole 81 etc. occurs with an appropriate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the play area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover this central opening 85 from the rear side of the play area forming body 80a. Behind this central opening 85, the variable display unit 252 belonging to the rear block 80b is located, and the variable display unit 252 etc. can be seen through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86) from the front of the game machine. Note that in Figure 6, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the opening cover 86 is shown by a two-dot chain line, showing the state in which the variable display unit 252 is visible.

Operating ports 83a, 83b and a through gate 84 are arranged around the central opening 85. The operating ports 83a, 83b are composed of an upper operating port 83a arranged below the variable display unit 252 and a lower operating port 83b arranged directly below the upper operating port 83a. In particular, the lower operating port (lottery trigger ball entry section) 83b is provided with an electric device 91 as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric device 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece. By changing the position of the movable piece by the drive unit, it is possible to switch between an open state (assistance state) in which a ball can be entered into the lower operating port 83b and an open state (non-assistance state) in which the ball cannot be entered and a closed state (non-assistance state) in which the ball cannot be entered.

The through gate 84 is located in the game area PE at a position upstream of the lower operating port 83b (more specifically, to the side of the variable display unit 252), and if a lottery is won when the game ball passes through the through gate 84, the electric device 91 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

When a ball enters the upper actuation port 83a, three game balls are dispensed, and when a ball enters the lower actuation port 83b, four game balls are dispensed, but the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above. However, for example, to increase the advantage of the lower actuation port 83b over the upper actuation port 83a, it is preferable to set the number of balls dispensed related to the lower actuation port 83b greater than the number of balls dispensed related to the upper actuation port 83a.

The variable winning device (special ball winning device or special ball winning means) 82 has a large winning opening that leads to the back side of the play area forming body 80a, and is provided with an opening/closing door as an opening/closing member (opening/closing means) that opens and closes the large winning opening. The opening/closing door can be switched between an open state (assistance state) in which the game ball can or can easily enter, and a closed state (non-assistance state) in which the game ball cannot or can not enter. The opening/closing door is connected to a variable winning drive unit (solenoid in detail) provided on the back side of the play area forming body 80a, and the opening/closing door is normally kept in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when an internal lottery results in a transition to an opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state) (a big win: when the result of the transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state) is obtained).

The opening and closing execution mode is a mode to which the mode will shift if a big win is won. In the opening and closing execution mode, the variable prize-winning device 82 is opened in such a way that the door is repeatedly opened for a maximum of multiple rounds (e.g., 4, 8, or 16 rounds), with one round being the passage of a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 10 prizes).

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given about the variable display unit 252. The variable display unit 252 has a pattern display device 253 that variably displays (variably displays) patterns when a winning entry into the operating port 83a, 83b is triggered. The pattern display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, for example, patterns are displayed in a line at the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by scrolling in the left and right direction. Then, when a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a preset pay line, and the above-mentioned opening and closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot) is entered. Note that the pattern display device 253 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

The play area forming body 80a is provided with a center frame 95 surrounding the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the play area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate body) from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the play area forming body 80a, so that the gap dimension between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the play ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the play area PE from colliding with the pattern display device 253, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the play area PE is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the variable display unit 252 (specifically, the center frame 95) from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side.

A stage section is formed on the upper surface of the frame section that forms the lower part of the center frame 95, allowing game balls to roll left and right. Game balls that flow in through inlets formed in the left frame section on the left and right sides of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage section through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 95. The stage section is configured so that game balls that reach the stage section tend to flow relatively easily into the upper operating port 83a, which contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game balls on the stage section.

In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered by a transparent opening cover 86, and the game ball that reaches the stage is restricted from moving toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 252).

The front of the frame portion that constitutes the lower part of the center frame 95 is provided with a first hold lamp portion 98a and a second hold lamp portion 98b. The first hold lamp portion 98a on the left corresponds to the upper actuation port 83a, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the upper actuation port 83a can be held up to four times, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the upper actuation port 83a can be displayed by lighting the first hold lamp portion 98a. The second hold lamp portion 98b on the right corresponds to the lower actuation port 83b, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the lower actuation port 83b can be held up to four times, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the lower actuation port 83b can be displayed by lighting the second hold lamp portion 98b.

The actuation openings 83a, 83b are positioned closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since a win at the actuation openings 83a, 83b can trigger a transition to a special game state, it is thought that the player will pay attention to whether or not a win will be made at the actuation openings 83a, 83b, and also to the symbol display device 253 to determine whether or not a transition to a special game state will occur. Providing the actuation openings 83a, 83b closer to the variable display unit 252 is a device to concentrate the player's attention on the area around the variable display unit 252.

A play area partitioning member 99 is disposed at the right end of the play area forming body 80a (the rotating tip of the play board unit 80 described later), which defines the play area PE together with the guide rail 100 described later. A stopper member is disposed on the play area partitioning member 99, against which game balls flying along the main display unit 87 and guide rail 100 collide. The stopper member is a buffer member disposed near the tip of the guide rail 100, and game balls that collide with the stopper member have their momentum weakened before flowing down the play area PE. In other words, the stopper member is endowed with a force-reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game balls.

Here, we will provide additional information about the main display unit 87. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the play area partition member 99, and a portion of it is positioned so as to face the glass unit 22. This facing portion is provided with a main display section that displays a predetermined image or the like. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to the main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section is controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit comprises an upper operating port display unit that displays the results of a lottery based on winning at the upper operating port 83a, and a lower operating port display unit that displays the results of a lottery based on winning at the lower operating port 83b. In the upper operating port display unit, a winning at the upper operating port 83a is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the stopping of the changing display is clearly displayed as the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the upper operating port 83a. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the upper operating port 83a is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the changing display is stopped in the upper operating port display unit, a specified pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening/closing execution mode is transitioned to.

In the lower operating port display unit, a winning entry into the lower operating port 83b is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 83b. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 83b is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the display stopping in the lower operating port display unit is stopped, a specified pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the mode is switched to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on a winning entry into any of the actuation ports 83a, 83b, a variable display is started in the corresponding actuation port display section, and after the image corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a static state, one game round corresponds to the period during which the image remains in a static state for a predetermined static display time (static display period or final display period) (until the final display ends). However, one game round is not limited to the above, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the variable display is performed in that single display area regardless of whether a winning entry into any of the actuation ports 83a, 83b occurs, it is also possible to count one game round as the period during which the variable display is started in that single display area, the variable display is stopped with the predetermined static result displayed, and then the final display ends.

In addition to the above two display sections, the main display section of the main display unit 87 also has a through gate display section that displays the lottery results based on winning at the through gate 84. The through gate display section displays the changing patterns triggered by winning at the through gate 84, and as a result of the stopping of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning at the through gate 84 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning at the through gate 84 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role opening state, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the through gate display section, the changing display is stopped, and then the electric role opening state is entered. In the electric role opening state, the electric role 91 provided in the lower operating port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that a game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is reserved up to four times, and the main display section of the main display unit 87 is provided with a reserved number display section that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display sections described above are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and visibility is guaranteed because the game balls are prevented from moving in front of these various display sections.

Referring again to FIG. 5 to explain the configuration of the inner frame 13, below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided that launches game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies the game ball to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby being integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so that it slopes upward toward the play area forming body 80a. The launch rail 112 is formed with a groove with a roughly V-shaped cross section, and is configured so that the game ball fits into the groove to determine the front-to-rear position of the game ball.

A ball stopper that stops the game balls supplied from the ball sending device 113 in the above-mentioned launch waiting position is located near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is located further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the play area forming body 80a, more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the play area forming body 80a.

The guide rail 100, together with the play area partitioning member 99 fixed to the play area forming body 80a (specifically, the front surface of the plate), partitions the play area PE so that the outer shape of the play area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is partitioned and formed by both rails 101 and 102. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 that opens at the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located at the top of the play area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In addition, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the front side of the exit portion 105 of the play area forming body 80a, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the play area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103, preventing game balls that have already reached the play area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

Each of the rails 101, 102 that make up the guide rail 100 is in the shape of an arc centered at approximately the center of the play area PE. For this reason, a game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, i.e., while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated within the game ball. In other words, when a game ball is launched so as to reach the play area PE, the area of the guide passage 103 along the outer rail 102 essentially constitutes a passing area (passing path) through which the game ball passes, and the area along the inner rail 101 is essentially an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the play area forming body 80a. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are shifted left and right near the lower edge of the play area forming body 80a. This brings the rails 100, 112 closer to the lower edge of the play area forming body 80a, while forming a predetermined gap between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is disposed below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage is molded integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and returns as a foul ball through the guide passage 103, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage through the above-mentioned gap. The foul ball passage leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This prevents interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

A rail cover 107 is provided on the left end of the play area forming body 80a so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled individually during manufacturing and maintenance work, at which time the outer rail 102 may collide with the game table or the like. The rail cover 107 is a component that is installed in consideration of such circumstances, and is provided with a protective function that prevents the outer rail 102 from being deformed due to the above-mentioned factors, etc.

A through hole is formed in the inner frame base body 50 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member 121 is disposed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 are connected to the game ball distribution section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage 122, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

An opening/closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a forward position that closes the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, this biasing force causes each opening/closing member 124 to be in a closed state, thereby preventing game balls from falling out of each passage 122, 123. In contrast, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage are connected, and further, the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage are connected.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 50 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8. Figure 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the pivot base end side (right side in Figure 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 at vertical intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. In addition, a plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

As already explained, a window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the storage recess (game board storage section) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is open to the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 stored in the storage recess 51. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back of the game board unit 80 (back block 80b), and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back of the game board unit 80 will be explained.

As already explained, the rear block 80b is attached to the rear of the play area forming body 80a. The rear block 80b has a roughly box-shaped base body 251 that is open on the side of the play area forming body 80a, and this base body 251 is fixed to the rear of the play area forming body 80a, thereby integrating the play area forming body 80a and the rear block 80b.

The front side of the base body 251 is an area for arranging the movable performance mechanism and the luminous decorative members, while the rear side is an area for arranging the control device that controls these various components and the variable display unit 252 (pattern display device 253) mentioned above.

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes from the rear side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned pattern display device 253 (see FIG. 6) and a display control device for driving the pattern display device 253 are attached to this protruding portion. The pattern display device 253 and the display control device are stacked in the front-to-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) so that the pattern display device is at the front and the display control device is at the rear. Furthermore, the notification/performance control device 140 is mounted on the rear portion of the base body 251, positioned behind the display control device.

The notification/performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification/performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device described below, and the notification/performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/performance control device 140, covering the base body 96 from the rear. The main control device unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the rear block 80b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 has a main control board that has the function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and the function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The substrate box 163 comprises a box base (front case body) of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other by a box sealing section 164 as a sealing means so that they cannot be opened, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of box sealing sections 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

The box sealing section 164 can be of any configuration as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that constitutes the box sealing section 164. The sealing process by the box sealing section 164 prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been opened once. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the multiple box sealing sections 164. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the stored main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection part between the box sealing section into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is cut. This separates the box base and box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. If the sealing process is then performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the board box 163 being opened is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily detected by looking at the board box 163.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected by the base seal 165 in an unopenable manner. More specifically, the base seal 165 has a locking hole and a locking pin, just like the box seal 164, and the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected inseparably by inserting the locking pin into the locking hole. This makes it easier to know if the board box 163 has been illegally removed.

At the front part of the main control device 162 (the part facing the rear of the gaming machine) where overlap with the back pack 201 described later is avoided, a setting key switch 167 with a key hole through which the setting change key is inserted, a setting change switch 166, and a setting value display unit 168 are provided. Details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, multiple stages of jackpot probability (three stages in detail) are set, and the setting value is changed by operating the setting change switch 166 when the setting change key inserted in the setting key switch 167 is placed in the ON position (ON state). While the setting change key is placed in the ON position, the currently selected setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 168, and the operator can change the setting while visually checking the setting value.

In the front part of the base body 251, facing the lower part of the back of the play area forming body 80a, a recovery passage (not shown) is formed that corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a and 83b and gathers in one place downstream. As a result, all game balls that win the general winning opening 81 etc. are configured to collect below the game board unit 80 via the recovery passage. In other words, the base body 251 is given the function of collecting game balls that win in the various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is provided below the game board unit 80, and game balls that have gathered below the game board unit 80 are led into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The outlet 89 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are led into the discharge passage via the outlet 89.

The base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b is also equipped with detection sensors for each of the ball entry sections described above, including a general entry port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the general entry port 81, and an operating port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the operating ports 83a and 83b, and these various detection sensors form a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and each detection sensor outputs detection information (detection signal) to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to Figures 9 and 10. Figure 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 as the main body of the back pack unit 15, and a dispensing mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage panel and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, comprises a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to at least surround the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal board 213 is provided on the top of the base 211. The external output terminal board 213 has various output terminals, which are connected to wiring WH1 that connects the gaming hall's management control device (hall computer HC) and the pachinko machine 10. Various signals output from the external output terminal board 213 (output terminals) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC via wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC is configured to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the game situation, etc. based on these various signals.

As shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13 by inserting the latch pins 214 into the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixed levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by abutting the base portion 211 from behind with the fixed levers 134 inserted into the insertion portions.

The payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is disposed on the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail 222 that gently slopes toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution section 225 provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution section 225 has the function of distributing the game balls dispensed from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that its inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the above-mentioned main body side upper tray passage 122 and front door side upper tray passage, and its outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and front door side lower tray passage.

The discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end from the front and rear. The discharge passage panel has a discharge passage that is open to the rear on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open part of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are stacked one on top of the other, with the payout control device 242 located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board that controls the payout device 224 is housed in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply/launch control device 243 has a power supply/launch control board housed in a board box 246. The power supply/launch control board generates and outputs the specified power required by various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 that constitutes the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive of the ball sending device 113.

The power supply/launch control device 243 is also provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power supply switch 247, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (ON state) and a cut-off state (OFF state).

The pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and holding various types of data, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power returns, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. For example, if the power is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement parlor closes, the state before the power outage is stored and held. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (not shown) on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These switches and the setting change switch 166 described above can be operated from the front of the machine by opening the main machine part 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the back of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the locking device 75 restricts the opening of the main machine part 12, these switches cannot be operated from the front of the machine. In other words, the above switches are difficult to operate when the main machine part 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone who does not have a key for the locking device 75 (e.g., a fraudster) to operate them from the front of the machine.

(Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 401 provided in the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 402. The MPU 402 is an element that incorporates a ROM 403 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 402, a RAM 404 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 403, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, and the like. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 402, such as the functions of the ROM 403 and the RAM 404, may be configured to be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 402 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 402 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 405 provided in the main control unit 162, a dispensing control unit 242, various detection sensors, and the like. The power outage monitoring board 405 is connected to the power supply and launch control unit 243, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power outage monitoring board 405.

As part of the various detection sensors, a winning detection sensor 391a that detects balls (winning) entering the general winning port 81, a winning detection sensor 391b that detects balls (winning) entering the variable winning device 82, a winning detection sensor 391c that detects balls (winning) entering the variable winning device 82 (large winning port), a winning detection sensor 391d that detects balls (winning) entering the upper operating port 83a, a winning detection sensor 391e that detects balls (winning) entering the lower operating port 83b, and a winning detection sensor 391f that detects balls (winning) entering the through gate 84 are connected, and the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 judges whether or not a ball has entered each entry section (ball entry judgment). In addition, the MPU 402 executes a lottery for generating a large prize based on winning entries into the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, and executes a lottery for generating a support based on winning entries into the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242, and the notification/presentation control device 140. The payout control device 242 outputs a prize ball command based on the winning judgment result for the winning ball entry section such as the above-mentioned operation port 83a, 83b, etc. In this case, when the prize ball command is output, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced. Then, when a winning ball is identified in the general winning port 81, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, when a winning ball is identified in the variable winning device 82, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output, when a winning ball is identified in the upper operation port 83a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output, and when a winning ball is identified in the lower operation port 83b, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

Various commands, such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command, are output from the main control device 162 to the notification and performance control device 140. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information, and various information is included as the predetermined number of bytes of information.

Also, connected to the output side of the MPU 402 are a variable winning drive section that opens and closes the opening and closing body (e.g., shutter member 88) of the variable winning device 82, an electric role drive section that opens and closes the electric role 91 of the lower operating port 83b, and the main display unit 87. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 401, and the MPU 402 controls the drive of the various drive sections through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 402 controls the driving of the variable winning drive unit so that the variable winning device 82 opens and closes. Also, if the support lottery for the electric role device 91 is won, the MPU 402 controls the driving of the electric role device drive unit so that the electric role device 91 opens and closes. Also, the MPU 402 controls the display of the main display unit of the main display unit 87.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and information on ball entry into various entry areas and lottery results such as jackpots are output via this external output terminal board 213 to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, etc.

The power failure monitoring board 405 relays between the main control board 401 and the power supply and launch control device 243, and is provided with the function of monitoring the stable DC voltage of 24 V, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 243. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement facility. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, it generates the operating power required for the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a specified power path. The power supply and launch control device 243 is also responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, which is driven when specified launch conditions are met.

The notification/performance control device 140 is provided with a notification/performance control board equipped with an MPU. The MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into a single chip for the MPU, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. The MPU of the notification/performance control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 installed in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 410.

The display control device 410 executes display control of the pattern display device 253 based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 140. In this case, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 253 (for example, whether or not a reach has occurred and the contents of the reach performance, etc.) and the stationary display mode of the patterns (the type of pattern combination that will finally be displayed stationary when the variable display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

Here, we will explain the configuration related to the changing display of the patterns for each game round and the contents of the changing display. In the following explanation, we will refer to Figures 12 and 13 as appropriate. Figures 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. The character ROM prestores data for nine main patterns numbered "1" to "9" (see Figs. 12(a) to (i)), and data for sub-patterns not numbered (see Fig. 12(j)).

As shown in FIG. 13(a), three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, which are an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is configured with main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 253a, the patterns of each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably, scrolling periodically in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper pattern row Z1, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In the lower pattern row Z3, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In other words, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are composed of 18 patterns. In contrast, in the middle pattern row Z2, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main pattern of "4" additionally arranged between the main pattern of "9" and the main pattern of "1", with one sub-pattern between each of these main patterns. In other words, the middle pattern row Z2 alone is composed of 20 patterns, with 10 main patterns arranged.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), the display screen 253a is designed to display three symbols per symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3×3 fashion. Five active lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5, are set on the display screen 253a. The display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. If the display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) formed on any of the active lines, a jackpot video is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a guaranteed jackpot result.

In light of the fact that the variable display of each pattern row is stopped as described above, the upper pattern row Z1 can be called the first pattern row (or first picture row), the lower pattern row Z3 can be called the second pattern row (or second picture row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called the third pattern row (or third picture row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a special jackpot result occurs, for example, the same combination of specific symbols is displayed. Also, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, for example, the same combination of non-specific symbols is displayed.

The manner in which the pattern display device 253 changes the patterns is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the changing pattern display in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the changing pattern display in the pattern rows may be set to be vertical.

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during play to perform lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, settings for the display of the main display unit 87 (main display section), and settings for the display of the pattern display device 253. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, it uses a hit random number counter C1 used for lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, a hit type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a reach random number counter C3 used for a reach lottery when the pattern display device 253 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the change display time (change display period) in the operation port display section of the main display unit 87 and the pattern display device 253. In addition, it uses an electric role release counter C4 used for lottery for whether or not to open the electric role of the electric role 91 of the lower operation port 83b.

Each time counter C1-C3, CINI, CS, C4 is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and it is a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of RAM 404. RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of a reserved area Ra for the upper actuation port, a reserved area Rb for the lower actuation port, an execution area AE, and a total reserved number storage area. The values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are stored in chronological order in this reserved ball storage area 432 according to the winning history of game balls into the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b.

Regarding each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a, and is stored in the lower actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the lower actuation port 83b.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot is stored as a win/lose table (win/lose information group) in the win/lose table storage area 421, which serves as a win/lose information group storage means in the ROM 403. As the win/lose table, a win/lose table for the low probability mode (win/lose information group for low probability) and a win/lose table for the high probability mode (win/lose information group for high probability) are set. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/lose lottery means. These win/lose tables for the low probability mode and the high probability mode are provided for each setting value, and the jackpot probability is set to a different value depending on the setting value (see FIG. 15). Specifically, a win/lose table for the low probability mode and a win/lose table for the high probability mode corresponding to setting 1, a win/lose table for the low probability mode and a win/lose table for the high probability mode corresponding to setting 2, and a win/lose table for the low probability mode and a win/lose table for the high probability mode corresponding to setting 3 are provided.

In a gaming state where the hit/lose table for the low probability mode corresponding to setting 1 (Figure 16 (a)) is referenced for the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot win (i.e., winning information) are six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the values of the hit random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results, and any other random number value corresponds to a loss result. This makes the jackpot probability 1/100.

In a gaming state where the hit/lose table for the low probability mode corresponding to setting 2 (Figure 16 (b)) is referenced for the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot win (i.e., winning information) are five: "7", "107", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to a jackpot result, and any other random number value corresponds to a losing result. This makes the jackpot probability 1/120.

In a gaming state where the hit/lose table for the low probability mode corresponding to setting 3 (Figure 16 (a)) is referenced for the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot win (i.e., winning information) are four: "7", "107", "307", and "507". In other words, of the values of the hit random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "307", and "507" correspond to a jackpot result, and any other random number value corresponds to a loss result. This makes the jackpot probability 1/150.

In this way, the order of setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1 is set to give players an advantage, and it is expected that players who want to gain even the slightest advantage in the game will play in the hope of getting setting 1.

In a game state where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode corresponding to setting 1 (FIG. 17(a)) is referenced for the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot win (i.e., winning information) are 19: "7", "36", "107", "207", "307", ... "407", "507", and "598". In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "207", "307", ... "407", "507", and "598" correspond to jackpot results, and the other random number values correspond to losing results. This makes the jackpot probability approximately 1/32.

In a game state where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode corresponding to setting 2 (FIG. 17(b)) is referenced for the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are 20: "7", "36", "107", "207", "307", ... "407", "507", and "598". In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "207", "307", ... "407", "507", and "598" correspond to jackpot results, and the other random number values correspond to losing results. This makes the jackpot probability 1/30.

In a game state where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode corresponding to setting 3 (FIG. 17(c)) is referenced for the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are 21: "7", "36", "107", "207", "307", ... "407", "507", and "598". In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "207", "307", ... "407", "507", and "598" correspond to jackpot results, and the other random number values correspond to losing results. This makes the jackpot probability approximately 1/28.

The advantage/disadvantage relationship in high probability mode is reversed from that in low probability mode, as a measure to prevent excessive bias in the degree of advantage. Even when differences in high probability mode are taken into account, the differences in low probability mode, where the game mainly progresses, are dominant, and in general, the order of advantage to the player is Setting 3 < Setting 2 < Setting 1.

It is also possible to match the advantageous and disadvantageous relationships in the high probability mode to those in the low probability mode. In other words, it is possible to set the order of increasing jackpot probability to be Setting 3 < Setting 2 < Setting 1.

Incidentally, the number and value of the random numbers that will result in a win can be any number, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after it reaches the maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, multiple jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results have differences in two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode by the electric role 91 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

The support modes for the electric device 91 at the lower operating port 83b are set to a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency at which the electric device 91 at the lower operating port 83b opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously released in a similar manner into the play area PE.

Specifically, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4, but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role opening state is won when the electric role opening state is won is set to be more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is set to be longer. In this case, when the electric role opening state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening state of the electric role 91 occurs multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time to be secured between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery is set to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the lower actuation port 83b is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the upper actuation port 83a is higher than in the lower actuation port 83b, but in the high frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the lower actuation port 83b is higher than in the upper actuation port 83a. And when a winning entry into the lower actuation port 83b occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently than the low-frequency support mode in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, a configuration for increasing the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role open lottery. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by making any one or any combination of the conditions of the number of times, open time, and winning probability different.

The winning type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the game ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when it enters the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the upper actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 404 when it enters the upper actuation port 83a, and is stored in the lower actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 404 when it enters the lower actuation port 83b.

The allocation destination of the game result for the winning type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in the allocation table storage area 422, which serves as an allocation information group storage means in the ROM 403. The contents of the allocation table will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 18. As the allocation table, an allocation table (first allocation information group) for the upper operating port shown in FIG. 18(a) and an allocation table (second allocation information group) for the lower operating port shown in FIG. 18(b) are set.

In the distribution table for the upper operation port, the following are set as distribution destinations for game results: 8R special jackpot result (high probability special game result), 8R normal jackpot result (low probability special game result), 4R special jackpot result (high probability game result), and 4R normal jackpot result (low probability game result). Specifically, in the distribution table for the upper operation port, of the hit type counter C2 values of "0 to 29", "0 to 8" corresponds to an 8R special jackpot result, "9 to 14" corresponds to an 8R normal jackpot result, "15 to 23" corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result.

In the distribution table for the lower operation port, the following are set as distribution destinations for game results: 16R special jackpot result (high probability special game result), 8R special jackpot result (high probability special game result), 8R normal jackpot result (low probability special game result), 4R special jackpot result (high probability game result), 4R normal jackpot result (low probability game result). Specifically, in the distribution table for the lower operation port, of the hit type counter C2 values of "0 to 29", "0 to 5" corresponds to a 16R special jackpot result, "6 to 11" corresponds to an 8R special jackpot result, "12 to 17" corresponds to an 8R normal jackpot result, "18 to 23" corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result.

The 16R, 8R, and 4R probability variable jackpot results are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode ends. As shown in FIG. 18(c), this high frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result occurs, and transitions to the low frequency support mode with the start of the open/close execution mode.

The 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode ends. However, as shown in FIG. 18(c), this high frequency support mode ends when the number of games played during the high frequency support mode reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) or when a jackpot result occurs before the end reference number is reached (specifically, when the open/close execution mode is started), and the mode transitions to the low frequency support mode.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a, and is stored in the lower actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the lower actuation port 83b. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, in a game that transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines whether a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually for each game state. For example, a configuration may be used in which the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is set to be greater when the support mode is a high frequency support mode than when it is a low frequency support mode.

Here, the term "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state for making a player believe that the game machine is in a state where the stop display result after the variable display is likely to be a special display result after the variable display has started on the pattern display device 253 and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, in a game machine that has a pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) capable of performing a variable display (or a changeable display) of patterns (pictures) and in which the stop display result after the variable display can be a special display result in a game round in which the game result corresponds to the open/close execution mode.

In other words, it is a display state in which the patterns of some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 are stopped to display a combination of reach patterns that may result in a combination of patterns corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, and in this state, the patterns of the remaining pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to terminating the display of changing patterns, a reach line is formed by displaying a combination of reach patterns that may result in a combination of patterns corresponding to the occurrence of an open/close execution mode on a preset effective line in the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, and the changing display of the patterns is performed using the final stopped pattern sequence while the reach line is formed.

To explain the display contents on the display screen 253a in more detail, first the display of changing patterns in the upper pattern column Z1 ends, and then when the display of changing patterns in the lower pattern column Z3 ends, a reach line is formed by the display of a numbered main pattern that constitutes the winning pattern combination on one of the active lines, and when this reach line is formed, a reach display is performed by displaying changing patterns in the middle pattern column Z2. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the display of changing patterns in the middle pattern column Z2 ends, with the main patterns that form the reach line and the numbered main patterns that constitute the winning pattern combination being displayed stopped on the reach line.

The reach display also includes a reach effect in which, while a reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are changed and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing or hiding the reach symbol combination and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a. In addition, when a reach display is being performed or before a reach display, the decision of whether or not to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 402 to determine the variation display time in the upper and lower operating port display sections of the main display unit 87 (main display section), and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 253. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is obtained when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the upper and lower operating port display sections and at the start of the pattern variation by the pattern display device 253.

The electric role opening counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, and to return to 0 after it reaches the maximum value (i.e., 250). The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric role reserve area 433 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric role 91 of the lower operating port 83b should be controlled to an open state, based on the stored value of the electric role opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric role 91 is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric role 91 is not controlled to an open state.

As already explained, the MPU 402 uses at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variation display time in the upper operation port display section and the lower operation port display section, and uses the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 when making this determination. Also, the MPU 402 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop result in the upper operation port display section and the lower operation port display section, and uses the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 when making this determination.

(Various processes executed by the main control device 162)
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described. The processes executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 are broadly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processes and normal processes that are executed to progress the game in each game round, and NMI interrupt processes that are started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Below, the main processes will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19.

(Main processing)
In the main process, first, in step S101, a start-up process is executed in response to power-on (power ON operation). Specifically, the process waits for about 500 msec, for example, to wait for various slave control devices (such as the dispensing control device 242) to become operable.

In the next step S102, it is determined whether or not 1 second, which is the permission/prohibition period, has elapsed since the start-up process of step S101. If 1 second has not elapsed, the process of step S102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of times step S102 is executed. For example, if the time required from a negative determination in step S102 to executing the process of step S102 again is 0.1 msec, it is determined that 1 second has elapsed since the start-up process of step S101 when the count value reaches 10,000. Note that the specific configuration for measuring the time is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S102 that 1 second has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, access to RAM 404 is permitted. Then, in step S104, it is determined whether a RAM erase switch provided on power supply/launch control device 243 is on, and in the following step S105, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the power outage flag storage area of RAM 404. In addition, in step S106, a RAM judgment value is calculated, and in the following step S107, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of RAM 404. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data by whether a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 404 is saved correctly.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch on the main control device. If the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process moves to steps S108 to S109. Similarly, if the power interruption occurrence information has not been set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process also moves to steps S108 to S109.

In step S108, the used area of RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and in step S109, an initialization process of RAM 404 is executed. After that, in step S110, an initial command setting process is executed to output an initial command to the dispensing control device 242, and in step S111, interrupt permission is set and the process proceeds to normal processing described below. By inputting the initial command from the main control device 162, the MPU of the dispensing control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is normal.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area is cleared in step S112, provided that the power outage flag is stored and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. After that, an initial command is output in step S110, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later. This returns the system to the state before the power was shut off.

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, a timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 20. This process is started by the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S201, a process of reading the various winning detection sensors (e.g., the above-mentioned detection sensors 391a to 391f) is executed. That is, the state of the various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Then, in step S202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the next step S203, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the next step S204, a winning process for through is executed in response to a win at the through gate 84. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and if the flag is stored, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step S203 is stored in the electric role reserve area, provided that the number of reserved roles stored in the electric role reserve area 433 is less than 4. Then, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S204, the process proceeds to step S205, where the winning process for the actuation port associated with winning at actuation ports 83a and 83b is executed. After that, the winning process for the large prize port is executed in step S206, and the winning process for the general prize port is executed in step S207, after which the timer interrupt process ends.

In the winning process for the large prize opening, a prize ball command for the large prize opening is sent to the payout control device 242 and the notification/presentation control device 140. Upon receiving the prize ball command for the large prize opening, the payout control device 242 performs processing to pay out the number of prize balls (15 balls) corresponding to the winning at the large prize opening. In this embodiment, during the opening/closing execution mode, the total number of prize balls acquired during the opening/closing execution mode is displayed on the pattern display device 253, and upon receiving the prize ball command for the large prize opening, the notification/presentation control device 140 performs display processing such as the total number of payouts.

In the winning process for the general winning port, a prize ball command for the general winning port is sent to the payout control device 242 and the notification/presentation control device 140. The payout control device 242 performs a process to pay out the number of prize balls (10 balls) corresponding to the winning at the general winning port 81 based on the reception of the prize ball command for the general winning port. In this embodiment, during the opening/closing execution mode, the total number of prize balls acquired during the opening/closing execution mode is displayed on the pattern display device 253, and the notification/presentation control device 140 performs a display process of the total number of payouts, etc. based on the reception of the prize ball command for the general winning port.

Details will be given later, but the various prize ball commands are output not only to the payout control device 242 and the notification/performance control device 140 but also to the monitoring device, and the monitoring device is configured to store the number of winning balls in each winning section based on the prize ball commands.

(Winning process for the operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 21 and 22.

In step S301, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a (won a prize). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S302, and a prize ball command (a prize ball command for the upper operating port) is set to cause the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls.

In the next step S303, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a to the hall computer HC in the game hall. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the upper operating port 83a. After that, in step S304, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, etc., and this winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, it is determined whether the game ball has entered (won) the lower operating port 83b. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b, the process proceeds to step S306, where a prize ball command (prize ball command for the lower operating port) is set to the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S302 and S306 is sent to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described below.

In the next step S307, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b to the hall computer HC in the game hall. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. After that, in step S304, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in both steps S301 and S305, i.e., if no ball has entered either the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b, the winning process ends.

Here, the information acquisition process of step S304 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

(Information Acquisition Processing)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether the number of activated pending memories N stored in the reserved ball number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 432, specifically, the number of activated pending memories N related to the ball entry portion that triggered the information acquisition process among the upper actuation port 83a and the lower actuation port 83b, is less than an upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If the number of activated pending memories N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step S402, the number of activated pending memories N of the corresponding actuation port is incremented by 1, and in step S403, the total number of reserved balls stored in the reserved ball number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In the following step S404, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS updated in the above step S203 are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area RE for the operating port, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN incremented by 1 in the above step S402. After executing the storage process, proceed to step S405.

In step S405, a display update process is executed for the first reserved lamp section 98a and the second reserved lamp section 98b, which serve as reserved number display sections. In the display update process, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the upper operating port 83a, the display of the first reserved lamp section 98a is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the lower operating port 83b, the display of the second reserved lamp section 98b is updated.

The first reservation lamp section 98a is made up of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs matches the number of reservations related to the upper operating port 83a. If the number of reservations related to the upper operating port 83a increases as a result of the current win, a process is performed to increase the number of lit LEDs accordingly. The second reservation lamp section 98b is similarly made up of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs matches the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 83b. If the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 83b increases as a result of the current win, a process is performed to increase the number of lit LEDs accordingly.

In the next step S406, a hold command is set to make the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are the sub-side (auxiliary) control devices, recognize that a win has occurred in the actuation ports 83a and 83b, and the information acquisition process ends. The hold command includes information on which of the upper actuation port 83a and the lower actuation port 83b the win is based on.

The pending command set in the pending command setting process in step S407 will be transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process described below.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 23. The normal process is a process that starts after the main process is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. In summary, the process of steps S501 to S507 is executed as a regular process with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S509 and S510 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step S501, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output processing in step S501, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side and the hall computer HC.

Specifically, it determines whether or not there is a prize ball command, and if a prize ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 242 and the notification/performance control device 140. Also, if various commands such as performance commands such as a fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command, hold command, and shift command described below are set, it sends them to the notification/performance control device 140. Also, for example, it outputs an external signal indicating that the pattern has been confirmed to the hall computer HC every time the display of the pattern fluctuation ends on the operation port display section of the main display section, outputs an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress to the hall computer HC when in the opening/closing execution mode, and outputs an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress to the hall computer HC when in the high frequency support mode.

Next, in step S502, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the next step S503, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. This game round control process performs a jackpot determination, sets the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display device 253, and controls the display of the main display unit 87.

After executing the game count control process in step S503, the process proceeds to step S504, where the game state transition process is executed. Details will be described later, but this game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game count control process in step S503 and the game state transition process in step S504 will be described later.

In the next step S505, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the electric role 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b. In this electric role support process, an electric role opening lottery is executed to determine whether or not the electric role 91 is opened using numerical information acquired from the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area 433 of the RAM 404, and if the electric role opening state is selected, the opening and closing process of the electric role 91 is executed. In addition, display control of the through gate display unit in the main display unit is performed to inform the result of the electric role opening lottery.

As already explained, the support provided by the electric device 91 is set to a low-frequency support mode or a high-frequency support mode, and a transition to one of the support modes is made by the game state transition process. If a high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 after this process, the high-frequency support mode is selected, and if the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is selected.

In the electric role support process, whether or not the high frequency support mode is selected is determined by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role device 91 opens when the electric role open state is selected is set to be greater than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer than in the low frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is selected and the electric role device 91 opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening.

Incidentally, when switching to the opening/closing execution mode, even if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the support mode is forcibly set to the low-frequency support mode.

In the next step S506, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined interval period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply/launch control device 243. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

Then, in step S507, a setting change process is executed. In the setting change process, the lottery table to be referenced is switched so that the lottery table corresponding to the setting value selected by the hall manager or the like is referenced. The setting change process will be described in detail later.

In the next step S508, it is determined whether the next timing for executing normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether one period (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, during the remaining time until the next timing for executing normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 404. Also, in step S510, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 404.

The execution time of each process in steps S501 to S507 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the timing of the next normal process execution is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated in the same way.

(Game play control process)
Next, the game play control process in step S503 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 24 to FIG.

First, in the game round control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is in the open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S602 onwards, i.e., the game round start process in steps S603 to S605 and the game round progress process in steps S606 to S609.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, step S602 determines whether a game turn is in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operating port display section of the main display unit 87 is displaying a variable or fixed value. If a game turn is not in progress, the process proceeds to steps S603 to S605 for processing to start a game turn. In the process to start a game turn, first, step S603 determines whether the total number of start reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". If the common reserved number CRN is "0", this means that no reserved information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, the game turn control process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step S604, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 432 for variable display, and in step S605, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display of the operating port display section in the main display unit 87 and the variable display of the pattern display device 253, and then this game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the fluctuation start process in step S605 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S701, the activation pending memory count N stored in the pending number storage area FE, which is the target of the current setting process, and the common pending count CRN are decremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of pending information stored in the lower actuation port pending area Rb (see FIG. 14), i.e., the activation pending memory count N (lower actuation port pending memory count RbN), is "0" or not. If the lower actuation port pending memory count RbN is "0", data setting process related to the upper actuation port display is executed, and if the lower actuation port pending memory count RbN is not "0", data setting process related to the lower actuation port display is executed.

Here, as already explained, the data setting process is executed when the common hold number is 1 or more. In this case, the data setting process determines whether the hold memory number RbN for the lower actuation port is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", that is, if hold information for variable display is stored for the lower actuation port display section, the data stored in the hold area Rb for the lower actuation port is moved to the execution area AE for variable display, regardless of whether the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the upper actuation port (see FIG. 14), that is, the operation hold memory number N (hold memory number RaN for the upper actuation port), is 1 or more. In other words, in step S702, if hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the upper actuation port and the hold area Rb for the lower actuation port, the hold information corresponding to the lower actuation port 83b is prioritized.

In the next step S703, for either the upper actuation port reserve area Ra or the lower actuation port reserve area Rb in which the data moved to the execution area AE was stored, the data stored in the first to fourth areas is shifted sequentially to the lower area side. As a result, for example, as the data in the first area is moved to the execution area AE, the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on.

In the following step S704, a shift command is set, which is information for making the notification/performance control device 140 recognize that a shift has been made to the data in the reserved area RE. After that, this data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S704 is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S501 in the normal process (Figure 23). This shift command is then sent to the display control device 410 via the notification/performance control device 140.

(Change start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S605 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S801, a win/loss determination process is executed to determine whether the reserved information referred to in the current fluctuation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, the information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the random number value obtained from the win random number counter C1, is grasped. Then, by referring to the lottery table corresponding to the current setting value and lottery mode, it is determined whether the above-mentioned acquired information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot win. For example, when the setting value is "1" and the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is determined whether the above-mentioned acquired information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot win by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to setting 1 stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of the ROM 403, and when the setting value is "1" and the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, it is determined whether the above-mentioned acquired information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot win by referring to the win/loss table for the high probability mode corresponding to setting 1 stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of the ROM 403.

In the next step S802, it is determined whether the result of the win/lose determination process in step S801 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the result corresponds to a jackpot win, the type determination process is executed in step S803.

In the type determination process, the type determination information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the random number value obtained from the winning type counter C2, is identified. In addition, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information corresponding to the guaranteed jackpot result. In more detail, if the reserved information corresponds to a ball entering the upper operating port 83a, the distribution table for the upper operating port 83a is referenced, and if the reserved information corresponds to a ball entering the lower operating port 83b, the distribution table for the lower operating port 83b is referenced to determine the type.

In the following step S804, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot win is a special jackpot result (16R special jackpot result, 8R special jackpot result, 4R special jackpot result) based on the information identified in the type determination process in step S803. If it is a special jackpot result, the stop result setting process for a special jackpot is executed in step S805, and if it is not a special jackpot result, the stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed in step S806. Also, if it is determined in step S802 that the jackpot win is not a win, the stop result setting process for a miss is executed in step S807.

As described above, the special jackpot results are roughly divided into 16R special jackpot results, 8R special jackpot results, and 4R special jackpot results. In the process of step S805, in the case of a 16R special jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 16R special jackpot result is performed, in the case of an 8R special jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R special jackpot result is performed, and in the case of a 4R special jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R special jackpot result is performed. In addition, the normal jackpot results are roughly divided into 8R normal jackpot results and 4R normal jackpot results. In the process of step S806, in the case of an 8R normal jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result is performed, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result is performed.

In each stop result setting process from step S805 to step S807, the information on the type of the picture to be finally displayed on the main display unit 87 is specified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 404. In addition, in steps S805 and S806, information for the MPU 402 to specify whether the win/loss determination result of the current game round is a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S805, either a 16R special jackpot flag, an 8R special jackpot flag, or a 4R special jackpot flag is stored, and in step S806, either an 8R normal jackpot flag or a 4R normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S805 to S807, the process for setting the variable display time is executed in step S808.

(Setting process for variable display time)
In the process of setting the variable display time, as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 27, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R variable probability jackpot flag, the 8R variable probability jackpot flag, the 4R variable probability jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

If a negative judgment is made in step S901, that is, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, it is judged whether or not a reach display will occur on the pattern display device 253 in the current game round. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, a positive judgment is made in step S802, indicating that a reach display has occurred. When determining whether or not a reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, a reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area of the ROM 403 is referenced.

If a positive judgment is made in either step S901 or step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, where the variable display time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, etc., and in the following step S904, the variable display time information is set in a variable display time counter area (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404. After that, this setting process is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot win, or when the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss and the lottery for reaching the reach is won.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display (more specifically, normal reach A-B) and a super reach display (more specifically, super reach A-C), which have different variable display modes. Variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and super reach display is set in the reach occurrence variable display time table, and variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is obtained by referencing this table. Note that, regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variable type counter CS, and the reach display corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is determined by referencing this table.

More specifically, the variable display time table for reach occurrence corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that a combination of specific symbols can be displayed statically in the case of a guaranteed jackpot result, and the variable display time is set so that a combination of non-specific symbols can be displayed statically in the case of a normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S902, in step S905, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 is referenced to obtain the variable display time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, and in step S906, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. After that, this setting process is terminated.

The variable display time information when a reach does not occur is set so that the more the number of common reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so that it is not dependent on the number of common reserved numbers CRN, and the less the number of common reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time may be. In addition, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is set so that a shorter variable display time is selected in a situation where the support mode is a high-frequency support mode than in a situation where the number of reserved information is the same, compared with a situation where the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, but this is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when a reach occurs, and a variable display time that is likely to be selected and a variable display time that is difficult to select may be different between a jackpot win and a miss reach. In addition, a variable display time table for a sure-variable jackpot, a variable display time table for a normal jackpot, a variable display time table for a miss reach, and a variable display time table for a complete miss may each be set individually. As described above, the variable display time for each game is determined using parameters such as whether or not a reach has occurred, the type of reach display, the number of pending information, and the value of the variable type counter CS.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 26), after the fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step S808, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set in step S809. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the game result. In other words, the type command includes, as information on the game result, information on the 16R special jackpot result, information on the 8R special jackpot result, information on the 4R special jackpot result, information on the 8R normal jackpot result, information on the 4R normal jackpot result, information on the miss result, and the like.

The fluctuation start command and type command set in step S809 are sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S501 of normal processing (Figure 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 for that game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and controls the lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 so that the determined performance content is executed. The notification/performance control device 140 also sends the fluctuation start command and type command to the display control device 410 while maintaining their information form.

The display control device 410 determines the variable display pattern on the symbol display device 253 for that game round based on the received variable start command and type command, and controls the display of the symbol display device 253 so that the determined variable display pattern is executed. After that, in step S810, the display of the variable pattern is started on the corresponding one of the upper operation port display section and the lower operation port display section of the main display unit 87, and then this variable start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 24), if the operating port display section of the main display unit 87 is displaying a variable value, the game round progress process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the game round progress process, first in step S606, it is determined whether the variable display time for the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of RAM 404 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 27), as described above. In addition, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S607. In the variable display process, the display mode of the corresponding one of the inlet/outlet display section and the outlet display section of the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, the game play control process is terminated.

If the change display time has elapsed, a change end process is executed in step S608. In the change end process, the information stored in RAM 404 in any of the processes in steps S805 to S807 above is identified, and the display unit for the upper operating port or the display unit for the lower operating port is controlled so that the picture corresponding to that information is displayed in a stopped state on the corresponding one of the display units for the upper operating port and the lower operating port.

In the following step S609, a variation end command is set. After that, this game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S609 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 140 in step S501 in the normal process (Figure 23). The notification/presentation control device 140 sends the received variation end command to the display control device 410 while maintaining its information form. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 410 displays the final stop pattern combination for that game round as a confirmed display (final stop display).

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode, the game proceeds to step S902, where it is determined whether or not the timing has come when the changing display of the image on the upper operation port display section or the lower operation port display section for one game round has ended. If the changing display has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If the variable display has ended, more specifically if the preset stop display time (interval time: fixed display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended, proceed to step S1003 and determine whether the game result of the current game (the result of the win/lose lottery) corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, determine whether any of the following flags are stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404: a 16R sure-win jackpot flag, an 8R sure-win jackpot flag, a 4R sure-win jackpot flag, an 8R regular jackpot flag, or a 4R regular jackpot flag. If none of the above flags are stored, the game state transition process ends.

If any of the above flags are stored, the opening and closing execution mode start process is executed in step S1004. This start process releases the operation restriction of the variable winning device 82 by the locking device, and the opening and closing operation of the variable winning device 82 is permitted until the opening and closing execution mode ends. In addition, in the start process of step S1004, an opening and closing execution mode start flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Details will be described later, but this starts the output of an external signal to the hall computer HC indicating that the opening and closing execution mode has been entered.

In the next step S1005, the opening number counter OC provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to one of "4", "8", and "16". Specifically, if the 16R sure-win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the opening number counter OC is set to "16", if the 8R sure-win flag or the 8R normal win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the opening number counter OC is set to "8", and if the 4R sure-win flag or the 4R normal win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the opening number counter OC is set to "4". The opening number counter OC functions as a means for grasping the number of times the variable winning device 82 has been opened. After executing the process of step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006, where an opening command is set.

This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S501 in the normal processing (FIG. 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode of the pattern display device 253, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/performance control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. The display control device 410 executes display control of the pattern display device 253 so that a display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a moving image of a character or the like as the display content corresponding to a big win, or a background image or the like is switched, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/performance control device 140. After executing the processing of step S1006, this game state transition processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1007. In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the big prize opening opening process is executed in step S1008.

In the large prize opening opening/closing process, first, it is determined whether the large prize opening of the variable prize device 82 is open or not. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable prize drive unit of the variable prize device 82. If the large prize opening is not open, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter OC is "0". If the value of the opening count counter OC is "0", the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the opening count counter OC is not "0", it is determined whether the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0". The opening timer counter TC is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening and closing periods (interval periods) of the large prize opening, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 20) is executed. If the value of the opening timer counter TC is not "0", this large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated.

If the value of the opening count counter OC is not "0" and the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0", the opening process of the large prize opening is executed. Specifically, the variable prize drive unit is driven to open the large prize opening. After that, the setting process (opening setting process) for the closing condition corresponding to the variable prize winning device 82 (large prize opening) is executed. Specifically, the opening timer counter TC is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec), and the winning counter PC is set to "10". After executing this setting process, an opening command indicating that the variable prize winning device 82 (large prize opening) has been opened is set, and the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening based on the reception of the opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the large prize opening of the variable prize device 82 is open, it is determined whether the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0". If the value of the opening timer counter TC is not "0", it is determined whether a game ball has entered the large prize opening based on the detection signal from the prize detection sensor 391c corresponding to the variable prize device 82 (more specifically, based on the result of step S206 above). If no prize has been won, the large prize opening opening process is terminated.

When a prize has been won at the large prize slot, the prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242 and the notification/presentation control device 140. The payout control device 242 performs processing to pay out a preset number of game balls based on receiving the prize ball command. When a prize ball command is issued during the opening/closing execution mode, the notification/presentation control device 140 performs processing to change the presentation during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, for example, to indicate that a prize has been won.

When a prize is won at the large prize opening, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1, and then it is determined whether the value of the prize counter PC is "0", and if it is not "0", the large prize opening opening opening process is terminated. If the value of the prize counter PC is "0", or if it is determined that the value of the open timer counter TC is "0", this means that the large prize opening closing condition has been met. In this case, the variable prize opening drive unit is deactivated to close the large prize opening.

Next, the opening number counter OC is updated. Specifically, if the value of the opening number counter OC is not "0", the opening number counter OC is decremented by 1, and if the value of the opening number counter OC is "0", the opening number counter OC is maintained at "0". After that, it is determined whether the updated value of the opening number counter OC is "0".
If it is determined that the value of the opening count counter OC is not "0", the opening timer counter TC is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec), a close command is set, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set close command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 23). When the notification/performance control device 140 receives a close command, it determines the content of the performance corresponding to the close command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the opening number counter is "0", the process to start the ending is executed. In this process, a waiting time for the ending in the opening and closing execution mode is set so that the player can wait without starting the next round of play. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in the ROM 403, is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Then, after setting the ending command, the main prize opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S501 of the normal process (Figure 23).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 28), after the large prize opening/closing process is executed in step S1008, it is determined in step S1009 whether the value of the opening number counter OC is "0" or not, and in step S1010 it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed or not. If the value of the opening number counter OC is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, this game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the opening number counter OC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S1011, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, first, it is determined whether the jackpot result that triggered the current open/close execution mode was a 16R variable probability jackpot result, an 8R variable probability jackpot result, or a 4R variable probability jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether a 16R variable probability jackpot flag, an 8R variable probability jackpot flag, or a 4R variable probability jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

If the jackpot result that triggered the current open/close execution mode is a 16R variable probability jackpot result, an 8R variable probability jackpot result, or a 4R variable probability jackpot result, the flag related to the transition of the game state is erased. After the erasure process is executed, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag set in this way, the win/lose table for the high probability mode will be referenced in the win/lose lottery for the subsequent game round.

Then, a high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag thus set, a win/lose table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced in the support lottery in the subsequent electric role support processing, the time for which the image changes during the support lottery is shortened (specifically, set to 2.0 seconds), and the period during which the opening is maintained after one opening is extended (specifically, set to 5.0 seconds).

On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the current open/close execution mode is an 8R normal jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result, i.e., if an 8R normal jackpot flag or a 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the flag related to the transition of the game state is erased. After the erasure process is executed, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high frequency support mode flag set in this way, the win/loss table for the high frequency support mode is referenced in the support lottery in the subsequent electric role support process, the time for displaying the variable image during the support lottery is shortened (specifically, set to 2.0 sec), and the period during which the open state is maintained after one opening is extended (specifically, set to 5.0 sec).

Unlike the case of the special jackpot result described above, an upper limit is set on the number of support times for the high-frequency support mode to which the mode transitions after a normal jackpot result. Specifically, the number of plays counter stored in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "100." This maintains the high-frequency support mode until 100 plays have been played after the end of the open/close execution mode, and when the number reaches "100," the mode transitions from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

After the game state setting process is performed, the process of ending the open/close execution mode is performed in step S1012. Specifically, the open/close execution mode flag and the jackpot flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the jackpot is stopped.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of Figure 29, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410.

The notification/performance control board 441 provided in the notification/performance control device 140 is equipped with an MPU 442. The MPU 442 has built-in ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, RAM 444 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 443 and RAM 444 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 442, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This is also true for the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game play control commands (game play control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and furthermore, opening and closing execution mode commands (opening and closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided in the front door frame 14, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 140 are sent to the display control device 410 with the information format maintained as is.

The display control device 410 includes an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are integrated into a chip, a display control board 471 on which a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 472, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 140, or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the various commands received, to control the VDP 475 (specifically, generates internal commands for the VDP 475). More specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process to identify the variable display pattern for each game round in the pattern display device 253 based on the commands sent from the notification/performance control device 140, as well as a process related to the hold notice described below, and executes a drawing process for the VDP 475 in response to the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 472 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 474.

The VDP 475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 253. The VDP 475 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 472, video RAM 477, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 477 from the character ROM 476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 253.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 253. This character ROM 476 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 476 and have each character ROM 476 store image data, etc. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 476 to store JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473.

Video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 253, and the display content of the pattern display device 253 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 477.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern on the display screen 253a is identified by the notification/performance control device 140 with reference to commands from the main control device 162, and the details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 410 based on the identification results. Specifically, the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 executes a variable display control process as part of periodic processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and this variable display control process identifies the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern. Here, the variable display control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 30.

(Variable display control process)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not a game is being played, that is, whether or not a variable display or a fixed display of the symbols for one game is being executed on the symbol display device 253. If it is determined that a game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S1102, where it is determined whether or not a variable start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1102, the variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S1102, the variable display control process is terminated after executing the variable start process described below in step S1103.

Returning to the explanation of step S1101, if a positive judgment is made in step S1101, i.e., if it is judged that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is judged whether or not a fluctuation end command sent from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step S1104, the fluctuation in progress processing is executed in step S1105, and then this fluctuation display control processing is terminated. The fluctuation in progress processing is processing for executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game round started by the fluctuation start processing.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1106, where a process for ending the variation is executed, and then this variation display control process is terminated. In the process for ending the variation, the pattern variation display and the currently being performed presentation are terminated (confirmed and stopped) in accordance with the hold information for the relevant game round. In this process, the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to perform a presentation corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, a confirmation command is output to the display control device 410, and this variation end process is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the pattern display device 253 to confirm and stop the pattern based on the received confirmation command.

(Processing for starting fluctuations)
Here, a supplementary explanation will be given on the fluctuation start process in step S1103 with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 31. The fluctuation start process is a process for starting the presentation for a game round based on receiving a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the fluctuation start process, settings such as reach display are made as the presentation for a game round.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S1201, the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent together. In step S1101, the type command received together with the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on the game result, such as information on the guaranteed jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, or information on a miss result, is identified from the command. Then, in step S1201, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type if a jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won, and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the identified information, and the identified information is stored in a register of the MPU 442.

In the next step S1202, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result, based on the information obtained in step S1201. If it corresponds to a jackpot result, that is, if it is a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in the next step S1203, a process for setting the effects for a jackpot is executed.

The jackpot performance setting process determines the stopping result of the jackpot symbols (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, if the result is a special jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be the stopping result for the current game round, where the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols marked with odd numbers) is formed on one active line L1 to L5. Also, if the result is a normal jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be the stopping result for the current game round, where the combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols marked with even numbers) is formed on one active line L1 to L5.

The type of main pattern and the effective lines L1-L5 that are stopped and displayed when a jackpot result occurs are determined randomly by lottery or the like. The final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the effective lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. At this time, a process is also executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. Note that in the following explanation, address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 444.

In addition, in the performance setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the symbols for the big win is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, in the case of a big win result, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process for the reach display, the variable display pattern table for the reach display stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443 is obtained, and the performance pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable start command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444. In the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 443 to determine the performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S1202 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, the process proceeds to step S1205, where a process for setting the effect for the reach occurrence is executed. In the process for setting the effect for the reach occurrence, the outline of the effect and the final combination of symbols to be stopped are determined. The former is similar to the process in step S1203 above, so the explanation will be used here. Since this process corresponds to a miss reach, the stop symbols are determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to a jackpot result. In other words, the stop result in which a miss reach symbol combination is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the type of miss reach symbol combination and the active lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when making this determination, the stop results on the effective lines are determined so that the same combination of symbols is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 that are the same as the symbols that form the reach line are finally stopped at a stop position that is shifted forward or backward from the reach line. After that, a process is executed to store the information on the determined stop results in the stop result address storage area.

If it is determined in step S1204 that a reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, the outline of the presentation for a complete miss and the final combination of symbols to be stopped are determined. Since this process corresponds to a complete miss, the stopping symbols are determined so that a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any one of the processes in step S1203, step S1205, or step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, a process is executed to output commands including information on the stop result and presentation pattern determined in step S1203, step S1205, or step S1206 to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 253 to execute the presentation for the current game round.

After executing the process of step S1207, in the following step S1208, a process for starting the presentation for the game round is executed, and then this process for starting the fluctuation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the presentation pattern determined in the above steps S1203, S1205, and S1206, and the presentation for the game round is started.

Here, we will provide additional information on the variable display modes of the patterns displayed on the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) based on Figure 32. Figure 32(a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and Figure 32(b) and the group of Figures 32(b) are schematic diagrams showing an overview of each variable display mode.

(Variable display mode)
As shown in Fig. 32(a), the variable display modes of the symbols executed on the display screen 253a are roughly divided into five types: complete miss, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. For each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and it is possible to grasp the outline of the variable display mode for each game based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162.

Specifically, the variable display time for a complete miss is "3 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of reserved balls), the variable display time for normal reach A is "10 sec", the variable display time for normal reach B is "15 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for normal reach A, the variable display time for super reach A is "16 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for normal reach A and B, the variable display time for super reach B is "17 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for super reach A, and the variable display time for super reach C is "18 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for other super reaches A and B. For example, if the information on the variable display time given to the command from the main control unit 162 is "15 sec", the notification/performance control unit 140 will understand that normal reach B should be executed.

In addition, in the game times corresponding to the big win result, Super Reach C > Super Reach B
The order of selection is: > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. In the game round that corresponds to a miss, the order of selection is: Complete Miss > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B >
The number of times that the number of reels is likely to be selected is determined by the number of reels that are likely to be selected, followed by Super Reach C. In other words, the longer the variable display time, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot.

Here, the variable display mode of normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b1). When normal reach A and B are selected, first the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is started, then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row (upper symbol row Z1) is ended (stopped and displayed), and the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row (lower symbol row Z3) is ended (stopped and displayed). In this way, when the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13 (a)), forming a reach line. Then, when the reach line is formed, the variable display of the middle symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) is performed, resulting in a reach display (reach variable display). After the reach display is reached, the variable display is ended by stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2. When the same symbols as those constituting the reach display stop on the reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has been won, and when other symbols stop on the same reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has not been won. In this way, the final combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed is maintained as is for a predetermined period of time. In other words, the current game round continues until the stopped display period has elapsed, and when the stopped display period has elapsed, it is permitted to move on to the next game round.

In this embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between normal reach A and normal reach B is ensured by setting a difference in the variable display time of the middle pattern row Z2 after the reach line is formed, but the method for setting the difference between the two is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the difference in the variable display time by setting a difference in the time from when the variable display begins to when the reach line is formed.

Next, the variable display mode of the super reach A, B, C will be described based on the variable display mode of the normal reach A, B described above. As shown in FIG. 32 (b2) to (b4), for the super reach A, B, C, the above-mentioned reach line is formed through the same process as for the normal reach A, B. Then, after the reach line is formed, a predetermined character is displayed as a video in conjunction with the variable display of the middle pattern column Z2, thereby performing a reach performance. Specifically, in the super reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), in the super reach B, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in the super reach C, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(Monitoring device 600)
The pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment is provided with a monitoring device 600 that monitors the operation of the main control device 162. As shown in FIG. 33, the main control device 162, the payout control device 242, and the notification/performance control device 140 are connected to the input port of the monitoring device 600. As already described, the main control device 162 is connected to various winning detection sensors 391a to 391d for the upper operation port 83a, the lower operation port 83b, the general winning port 81, and the variable winning device 82 (large winning port), and when the main control device 162 confirms winning in the upper operation port 83a, the lower operation port 83b, the general winning port 81, or the variable winning device 82 (large winning port), the main control device 162 outputs a winning ball command to the monitoring device 600 as information (signal) indicating that fact.

The MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a memory unit 604 that stores information input from the main control device 162. The memory unit 604 is composed of a first memory area 605 that mainly stores game information such as the number of wins and the number of jackpots, and a second memory area 606 that mainly stores the number of times an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine.

For example, when a prize ball command indicating a win is received from the main control device 162, the various winning number counters 621-624 arranged in the first memory area 605 that correspond to the received signal are updated (incremented). In other words, the monitoring device 600 monitors the number of winning balls at the operating ports 83a, 83b, the general winning port 81, and the variable winning device 82 (large winning port).

In addition, when a game is played by the main control device 162, confirmation information (signal) is output from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600 at the timing of the confirmation display described above (the timing at which the variable display ends). When the monitoring device 600 receives this signal, it updates (increments) the game play counter 625 arranged in the first memory area 605. In other words, the number of games is monitored by the monitoring device 600.

Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs during a game round and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode, information (signal) for the jackpot is output from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600 at the start timing of the open/close execution mode. When the monitoring device 600 receives this signal, it updates (increments) the hit counter 626 arranged in the first memory area 605. In other words, the number of hits is monitored by the monitoring device 600.

In addition, when game balls are paid out, a payout command is output from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 as a signal indicating that fact. When the monitoring device 600 receives this signal, it updates (increments) the prize ball number counter 627 arranged in the first memory area 605. In other words, the number of prize balls (the number of game balls paid out) is monitored by the monitoring device 600.

The various information stored in the first memory area 605 and the second memory area 606 is stored in association with the setting value. For example, when a win occurs at the actuation ports 83a, 83b at setting 1 and the winning information is stored, the winning information is stored with information indicating setting 1 at the time the win occurred. This makes it possible to identify which setting value each win occurred at when checking the winning situation after the fact.

The output port of the monitoring device 600 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 can appropriately acquire information stored in the monitoring device 600. The notification/performance control device 140 also has a function of displaying information stored in the monitoring device 600 on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 based on a specified request operation by the hall manager, etc.

(Settings change function)
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment is configured to have multiple setting values, and the probability of a big win can be changed by changing the setting value (setting change). The setting value is not always changeable, but is switched between permitted and prohibited depending on the situation. This embodiment is characterized by the configuration related to switching between permitted and prohibited setting changes. Below, a supplementary explanation of the configuration related to setting changes will be provided with reference to Figures 5 and 34.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the pachinko machine 10, game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 are guided to the game area PE by the guide rail 100. Game balls that flow down the game area PE are discharged from the game area PE through various ball entry sections such as the general winning port 81 or the outlet 89, and are returned to the island equipment of the game hall through a recovery passage provided on the back part of the game area forming body 80a. In addition, game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 that do not reach the game area PE are returned to the player through the guide passage 103 → foul passage formed in the front door frame 14 (passage forming unit 45).

As shown in FIG. 34, the main control device 162 is connected to a launching detection sensor 701 provided in the game ball launching mechanism 110, a foul detection sensor 702 provided in the foul ball passage of the passage forming unit 45, and a recovery detection sensor 703 provided in the recovery passage on the back side of the game board unit 80.

The launching detection sensor 701 detects the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and the main control device 162 can determine that the game ball has been launched based on the information (detection signal) from the launching detection sensor 701. The foul detection sensor 702 detects the game ball passing through the foul ball passage, and the main control device 162 can determine that the game ball has passed through the foul ball passage based on the information (detection signal) from the foul detection sensor 702. The recovery detection sensor 703 detects the game ball passing through the recovery passage, and the main control device 162 can determine that the game ball has passed through the recovery passage based on the information (detection signal) from the recovery detection sensor 703. The main control device 162 can determine whether or not a game ball remains in the play area PE based on the information from each of these detection sensors 701 to 703.

In addition, when the payout control device 242 pays out game balls, information indicating that the payout has been executed (payout command) is output to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 is capable of determining whether or not the payout of game balls has been completed based on the prize ball command sent to the payout control device 242 and the payout information obtained from the payout control device 242.

An opening detection sensor 706 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13 is connected to the pachinko machine 10, and the main control unit 162 can determine whether the inner frame 13 is open or not based on information (detection signal) from the opening detection sensor 706.

Now, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 35, we will explain the setting change process (step S507) that is executed as part of normal processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162.

(Settings change processing)
In the setting change process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the setting change key is inserted into the setting key switch 167 and switched to the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S1302, the setting change process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not a game ball remains in the game area PE based on the information from the detection sensors 701 to 703. If a negative judgment is made in step S1302, the setting change process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, it is determined whether or not there are any prize balls waiting to be paid out based on the payout information from the payout control device 242. If a negative determination is made in step S1304, the setting change process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1304, the process proceeds to step S1305. In step S1305, it is determined whether or not a predetermined waiting time has elapsed since the payout was completed.

The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 pass through a payout passage toward the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34. At this time, it takes a certain amount of time (approximately 2 seconds in this embodiment) for the game balls to reach the player. The above-mentioned waiting time is determined to be slightly longer than this required time, and in step S1305, it is estimated whether the paid-out game balls have reached the player.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1305, the setting change process ends as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306. In step S1306, it is determined whether or not a game is in progress. In other words, it is determined whether or not a variable display or a fixed display of a pattern is being performed in the operating port display unit. If a positive judgment is made in step S1306, the setting change process ends as is. If a negative judgment is made in step S1306, the process proceeds to step S1307.

In step S1307, it is determined whether or not pending information has been stored, i.e., whether or not the next round of play is pending. If a negative determination is made in step S1307, i.e., if the next round of play is pending, this setting change process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1307, the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1308, it is determined whether the inner frame 13 is open or not based on the detection information from the open detection sensor 706. If the determination in step S1308 is negative, the setting change process ends. If the determination in step S1308 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, a setting change mode start process is executed. In other words, in this embodiment, the setting change is permitted under the following conditions: (1) there are no game balls remaining in the play area PE, (2) there are no game balls waiting to be paid out, (3) the waiting time after the end of the payout has elapsed, (4) a game turn is not in progress, (5) there is no subsequent reserved information, (6) the inner frame 13 is open, and (7) the setting change key is in the ON state.

In the setting change mode start process, the currently selected setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 168, and the acceptance of setting change operations is permitted. Then, various processes related to game progress (such as game number control process in normal processing, game state transition process, electric role support process, game ball launch control process, etc.) are prohibited, and a setting change mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. With the setting change mode flag stored, a positive judgment is made in step S1301 from that point on. Note that with the setting change mode flag cleared, the various processes related to the game progress described above are resumed.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301, if a positive judgment is made in step S1301, i.e., if the device is in setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, a judgment is made as to whether or not the setting change switch 166 has been operated (setting change operation). If a positive judgment is made in step S1310, the process proceeds to step S1311, where a change operation response process is executed. Specifically, the newly selected setting value is stored by the setting change operation, and the display content is updated so that the stored setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 168.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1310, i.e., if no setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1312. In step S1312, it is judged whether or not the setting change key has been switched to the OFF state. If a negative judgment is made in step S1312, the setting change process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1313. In step S1313, the setting change process is executed. Specifically, a flag corresponding to the setting value selected at the time the setting change key was switched to the OFF state is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Specifically, if setting 1 is selected, a setting 1 corresponding flag is stored, if setting 2 is selected, a setting 2 corresponding flag is stored, and if setting 3 is selected, a setting 3 corresponding flag is stored. In subsequent processing, for example, if a setting 1 corresponding flag is stored, the winning/losing lottery table for setting 1 is referenced, if a setting 2 corresponding flag is stored, the winning/losing lottery table for setting 2 is referenced, and if a setting 3 corresponding flag is stored, the winning/losing lottery table for setting 3 is referenced.

In the next step S1314, the setting change mode end process is executed, and then this setting change process is terminated. In the setting change mode end process, the setting change mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, the display of the setting value display unit 168 described above is terminated, and the various processes described above that were prohibited are resumed.

Here, we will explain the process leading up to the setting change, with reference to the timing chart in Figure 36.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), when the winning detection sensor 391a for the general winning port detects a winning entry into the general winning port 81 at time ta1, the payout of game balls is executed at the subsequent time ta2. Ten prize balls are paid out based on a winning entry into the general winning port 81, and it takes a certain amount of time for the payout to be completed. At time ta4, which is the waiting time after the payout of the prize balls is completed at time ta3, the execution conditions (2) and (3) for the setting change are met. If the other execution conditions (1), (4) to (7) are also met, the setting change is permitted.

As already explained, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, the payout information of the game balls is transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600, and the payout information is accumulated. Then, based on the payout information, it is monitored whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally. When performing such monitoring, it is important to know under what setting value the game balls were paid out. For example, if the setting value is changed at the timing of taX between ta1 and ta2, a discrepancy occurs between the setting value corresponding to the winning information transmitted from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600 and the setting value corresponding to the payout information transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600. Such a discrepancy can be an obstacle to improving the accuracy of monitoring. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, setting changes are prohibited at least until the payout is completed. Therefore, the above-mentioned information discrepancy can be avoided in an appropriate manner, and the monitoring function can be strengthened.

Next, we will explain the relationship between the presence or absence of pending information and setting changes, with reference to Figure 36 (b).

At the timing of tb1, the winning detection sensors 391b-391c for the actuation ports detect winning at the actuation ports 83a, 83b, and based on this, the variable display of the image on the actuation port display section and the variable display of the image on the image display device 253 are started. At this time, since the number of subsequent reserved information is 0, a relatively long variable display time is set. When winning occurs at the actuation ports 83a, 83b at each of the timings of tb2 and tb3 during the variable display, the reserved information acquired based on these winnings is stored and held, and is in a standby state until the current game round is completed. After the current game round is completed, the game rounds corresponding to the subsequent reserved information are executed in order at the timings of tb4 and tb5, and the execution conditions (4) and (5) of the setting change are established at the timing of tb7 when all the reserved information is consumed. When the other execution conditions (1)-(3), (6)-(7) are established at the same time, the setting change is permitted.

In this embodiment, the reserve function is used to facilitate smooth gameplay, but this configuration creates a discrepancy between the timing of winning and the timing of the lottery. For this reason, if the settings are changed between the acquisition of the reserved information and the start of a game round (lottery timing) when subsequent reserved information is pending (see, for example, the timing of tbX), there is a concern that a game round that would normally result in a jackpot may result in a loss, or a game round that would normally result in a loss may result in a jackpot. This is undesirable because it reduces the reliability of the gaming machine's behavior. In this regard, in this embodiment, the occurrence of such inconveniences is suppressed by configuring the settings to be prohibited from being changed not only during a game round but also when subsequent reserved information is pending.

The first embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

If information about a game is suddenly erased during play, it is expected that the behavior of the gaming machine will suddenly change. For example, if game balls that would have been paid out to the player are no longer paid out, or if a game round related to the acquired special information is no longer executed, it is feared that this will confuse the player and cause a decrease in trust in the gaming machine. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment restricts changes to the setting value (setting change) when the situation is not suitable for changing the setting, so that it is possible to suppress changes in the behavior of the gaming machine during play. This can contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In more detail, when game balls remain in the game area PE, setting changes are restricted. This makes it possible to prevent game balls that would have been released under a certain setting value from entering a ball entry section such as the general winning port 81 under a different setting value. In particular, because a detection sensor is used to monitor the remaining balls, restrictions are lifted immediately after the remaining balls are discharged, eliminating unnecessary waiting time. This is advantageous in improving the convenience of the game machine when changing settings.

When a payout request occurs due to a winning combination, there is a certain amount of time lag between the ball entering and the payout. If the set value is changed during this time, it becomes unclear which set value the current payout corresponds to. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by continuing to restrict changes until the waiting time has elapsed even after the payout operation has ended, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of such inconveniences.

In gaming machines, there are cases where it becomes difficult to immediately dispense game balls due to factors such as a shortage of game balls. In such a situation, the dispensing operation may be temporarily interrupted, but will resume when a situation becomes possible for dispensing. In such cases, by restricting changes to the setting value at least until dispensing is completed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused as to which setting value the dispensed game balls correspond to.

When pending information is stored, changes to the settings are restricted. This makes it possible to effectively prevent, for example, a judgment result that does not correspond to the specified judgment information for special information that would normally correspond to the specified judgment information (e.g. winning information), or a judgment result that corresponds to the specified judgment information for special information that does not correspond to the specified judgment information.

To fulfill the conditions for executing the setting change, it is necessary to open the inner frame 13, which acts as a door. Since such actions are conspicuous, this can help prevent unauthorized changes to the setting values and improve the security function of the gaming machine.

In a configuration in which winning and the like are monitored by the monitoring device 600, there may be a slight time lag between when it is confirmed that a win has occurred and when the information is sent to the monitoring device 600. If settings are changed during this time gap, there is a possibility that inconsistencies in the information will occur. In this regard, if a configuration is adopted in which setting changes are restricted while the game is in progress, as shown in this embodiment, such inconsistencies in the information can be suitably suppressed.

The present invention is not limited to the above description of the first embodiment, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the first embodiment, or may be applied to the first embodiment in combination in part or in whole. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the presence or absence of remaining balls in the play area PE is identified based on the information from the launching detection sensor 701, the foul detection sensor 702, and the recovery detection sensor 703, and the setting change is avoided when the game balls remain in the play area PE. However, in order to avoid the setting change being made when the game balls remain in the play area PE, the following configuration is also possible. That is, it is also possible to set a waiting time based on the time required from when the game balls are launched to when they are discharged from the play area PE, prohibit the setting change from the end of the launch of the game balls until the waiting time has elapsed, and the execution condition (1) is established based on the elapse of the waiting time. In addition, in view of the fact that the launch of the game balls is executed based on the launching operation of the player, it is also possible to configure the execution condition (1) to be established when the waiting time has elapsed from the end of the launching operation of the game balls. As shown in these modified examples, in a configuration in which it is assumed that there are no remaining balls after the waiting time has elapsed, the need for additional components such as sensors can be kept to a minimum, which is advantageous in simplifying the structure of the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a waiting time for a payout of game balls based on information from the payout control device 242, and the setting change is permitted on the condition that there is no waiting time for a payout of game balls, but this is not limited to the above. For example, if the actual time from the occurrence of a win to the completion of the payout of game balls is determined to a certain extent, the waiting time may be set based on this time, and when a win occurs in a winning ball entry section corresponding to a winning ball such as the general winning opening 81, the fact that the waiting time has elapsed since the winning may be set as one of the execution conditions for the setting change.

<Modification 3>
It is also possible to configure the device to specify whether or not the dispensing device 224 is in operation, and to add the fact that the dispensing device 224 is not in operation to one of the execution conditions.

<Modification 4>
The configuration may be such that occurrence of an abnormality is monitored using information stored in the monitoring device 600, and if an abnormality occurs, the setting change is prohibited. In addition, in a configuration in which an abnormality is notified when it occurs, it is also possible to set the cancellation of the abnormality notification as one of the execution conditions for the setting change.

<Modification 5>
When the settings are changed, it is also possible to configure the system so that various game information such as reserved information and payout information stored in the RAM 404 is erased, just as when the RAM erase switch is operated. Even with this configuration, since setting changes are restricted while a game is being played, it is possible to suitably prevent the loss of benefits that would have been obtained due to setting changes during play.

<Modification 6>
It is also possible to configure the content of the reserved information to be specified in advance before the winning/losing lottery or the allocation lottery is performed in the variable start process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 (i.e. before the corresponding game round is started), and to execute a preview performance (e.g., a reserved preview performance) corresponding to the specified result before the corresponding game round (e.g., a game round that is executed in advance). In a configuration in which the preview performance suggests the lottery result in the corresponding game round, it is assumed that the preview performance that would have originally corresponded to the big win result will be terminated in the middle by changing the setting midway, or the actual game result will be inconsistent with the content of the preview performance. In this regard, by configuring the setting change to be restricted when the reserved information is stored, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Second Embodiment
One of the features of this embodiment is that the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242 cooperate to improve the security function of the gaming machine. The following describes the configuration related to this improvement, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the various configurations that are common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

The main control device 162 transmits information indicating the selected setting value to the payout control device 242 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (at startup) and when the setting is changed. The payout control device 242 is able to identify the selected setting value based on this information. First, with reference to Figs. 37 and 38(a), the process related to the transmission of the setting value executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described. Fig. 37(a) is a flowchart showing the initial command output process (S110) executed as part of the main process (see Fig. 19), Fig. 37(b) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S1313) executed as part of the normal process (see Fig. 23), and Fig. 38(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the initial command.

(Initial command output processing)
37(a), in the initial command output process, first, the current setting value is confirmed in step S1401. That is, the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is confirmed. In the following step S1402, a code (identification information of the setting value) to be added to the initial command to be output to the payout control device 242 is determined.

The following information is stored as a set value identification information group in the ROM 403 of the main control device 162. In detail, as shown in FIG. 38(a), four codes "BAA", "ABAA", "AABA", and "AAAB" are provided as codes corresponding to setting 1, four codes "BBAA", "BABA", "BAAB", and "ABAB" are provided as codes corresponding to setting 2, and four codes "BBBA", "BBAB", "BABB", and "ABBB" are provided as codes corresponding to setting 3. In the process of step S1402, one of the multiple codes corresponding to the current set value is randomly selected.

In step S1403, the code determined in step S1402 is stored in the code storage area of RAM 404. Thereafter, the code is referenced in the prize ball command setting process described below until the setting is changed. In the following step S1404, the initial command is output to a sub-control device such as the payout control device 242, and this initial command output process ends.

The code set in the initial command output process will be reset when the settings are changed. The setting change process will now be explained with reference to Figure 37(b).

(Settings change processing)
In the setting change process, first, in step S1501, the setting selected by the current setting change operation is identified. In the following step S1502, a reference table switching process is performed. This prohibits access to other lottery tables that do not correspond to the current setting value. In the following step S1503, a code (identification information of the setting value) is determined. Details of the code determination are the same as those in step S1402 above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S1504, the code determined in step S1503 is stored (overwritten) in the code storage area of RAM 404. After that, in step S1505, a setting change command is set, and this setting change process is terminated. The setting change command set in step S1505 is sent to the payout control device 242 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process.

When the MPU of the dispensing control device 242 receives an initial command or a setting change command, it identifies the setting value from the code contained in those commands and stores it in the RAM of the dispensing control device 242.

Next, the prize ball command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 38(b). The prize ball command setting process is a process executed to instruct the payout control device 242 to pay out prize balls in each winning process of steps S205 to S207.

(Ball prize command setting process)
In the prize ball command setting process, first, in step S1601, the prize destination is specified. Next, in step S1602, a process of reading the code stored in the code storage area of RAM 404 is performed. Then, in the following step S1603, a prize ball command is generated so as to include the read code. The prize ball command generated in this manner includes information indicating the number of prize balls, information indicating the prize destination, and various code information (see FIG. 38(c)), and is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process of the normal process (step S501).

Now, with reference to Figure 39 (a), we will explain the command response processing that is executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU of the dispensing control device 242.

(Command response processing)
In the command response process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether the currently received command is an initial command or a setting change command. If the determination in step S1701 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, a setting value is identified from the code contained in the command, and stored in a setting value storage area provided in the RAM of the dispensing control device 242. As with the main control device 162, a conversion table (see the schematic diagram in FIG. 38) showing the relationship between the code and the setting value is stored in advance in the ROM of the dispensing control device 242, and the setting value is identified by referring to this conversion table.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the currently received command is a prize ball command. If a negative judgment is made in step S1703, the command response process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704.

In step S1704, the conversion table is referenced, and a setting value is identified and stored from the code contained in the prize ball command received this time.

In the following step S1705, it is confirmed whether the setting value identified in step S1704 matches the setting value stored in the code storage area of the RAM. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1709. In step S1709, the value of the reserved counter provided in the various counter areas of the RAM is incremented according to the number of prize balls in the currently received prize ball command. The value of the reserved counter is cleared to 0 by conversion to a payout counter, which will be described later.

In the processing of step S1705 described above, the various setting values will basically match. On the other hand, if the setting values do not match, there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in either the main control device 162 or the payout control device 242. In such a case, rather than immediately paying out the prize balls, the payout of the prize balls will be withheld (delayed) at least until the abnormality is resolved.

After executing the abnormality notification process in the following step S1710, this command response process is terminated. In the abnormality notification process, an abnormality notification command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140. Based on receiving this abnormality notification command, the notification/performance control device 140 executes an abnormality notification on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, etc.

Returning to the explanation of step S1705, if a positive judgment is made in step S1705, i.e., if the set values match, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, the process performs a process of incrementing the payout counter value provided in various counter areas of the RAM according to the number of prize balls in the currently received prize ball command. The payout counter value is decremented each time a prize ball is paid out, and when the payout counter value becomes 0, the number of prize balls waiting to be paid out becomes 0.

After executing the processing of step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, the value of the reserved counter provided in various counter areas of the RAM is referenced to determine whether or not there are any prize balls that are reserved for payout. If a negative determination is made in step S1707, the process for this command is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1707, the process proceeds to step S1708, where the value of the reserved counter is added to the value of the payout counter. This results in the payout of any prize balls that had been reserved for payout up until that point.

The second embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The prize ball command (corresponding to "payout command information") output from the main control device 162 contains information corresponding to the set value. In the payout control device 242, the set value set in the main control device 162 can be identified from the prize ball command. In this way, by sharing the set value between the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242, the cooperation between the two control devices 162, 242 can be strengthened. Since the prize ball command is information that is output to the payout control device 242 with a certain degree of frequency as the game progresses, by adding information indicating the set value to such an existing command, the opportunities to check the set value can be increased. This is a preferable configuration for improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

When a setting change is made, the setting value information determined by the main control unit 162 is input to the payout control unit 242, which stores this setting value information. After that, when a prize ball command is received from the main control unit 162, it is determined whether or not the setting value identified from this prize ball command matches the setting value stored when the setting was changed. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior, such as replacing the main control unit 162 with an illegal one.

If there is a mismatch between the previously stored setting value and the currently specified setting value, an abnormality will be detected and the payout of game balls will be avoided. This makes it more difficult to obtain game balls illegally, and strengthens the crime prevention function of the gaming machine.

In a configuration where the decision as to whether or not to pay out game balls is based on the result of comparing the set values, there is a possibility of fraudulent acts such as clearing the set value information. In this way, if the set value information is cleared, the payout of game balls is restricted even if a winning command is input, thereby strengthening the crime prevention function.

There is a certain amount of time lag between when a prize ball command is input to the payout control device 242 and when the payout is actually performed. This time lag becomes large when prize ball commands are input continuously and the payout of game balls cannot keep up. If it is confirmed that an abnormality has occurred based on the set value, the payout of balls that have already been determined to be paid out will continue, while the payout of new prize ball commands that are determined to be abnormal will be restricted. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of inconveniences such as players not being able to receive the payout that they would normally receive due to enhanced security functions, etc.

If the set values do not match, the payout of game balls based on the prize ball command is reserved, and the reservation is released when it is confirmed that the set values match in the subsequent prize ball command. For example, since it cannot be denied that the above abnormality may occur accidentally due to the inclusion of noise, etc., by paying out the reserved balls when it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the subsequent prize ball command as described above, it is possible to effectively prevent players from suffering disadvantages due to enhanced security features, etc.

The present invention is not limited to the above description of the second embodiment, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied to the second embodiment individually, or may be applied to the second embodiment in combination in part or in whole. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the identification information of the setting value included in the initial command, the setting change command, and the prize ball command is encrypted. It is sufficient that the setting value is shared at least between the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242, and it is possible to check whether the setting value is different each time a prize ball command is received, and it is not necessary to encrypt the identification information of the setting value.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the prize ball command includes the identification information of the set value, but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242 can appropriately compare the set value, and a confirmation command including the identification information of the set value may be sent from the main control device 162 to the payout control device 242 separately from the prize ball command. For example, the confirmation command may be sent periodically, or if a state in which no game is being played (non-operating state) continues for a certain period of time, the confirmation command may be sent at the timing when the game is resumed.

However, if a confirmation command separate from the prize ball command is provided as a command sent from the main control device 162 to the payout control device 242, it is undesirable for the output timing of both commands to overlap. When sending both a prize ball command and a confirmation command to the payout control device 242, it is preferable for the configuration to give priority to the former over the latter. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the responsiveness of the payout of prize balls, even if a variety of commands are used.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment, the prize ball command includes the identification information of the set value for all the balls entering the general winning hole 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating holes 83a and 83b, but this is not limited to this. If the difference is set so that the bias in the ball entry frequency decreases in the order of the variable winning device 82 > the general winning hole 81 > the lower operating hole 83b > the upper operating hole 83a, it is sufficient that the identification information of the set value is given to the prize ball command for at least the ball entry part with the smallest bias in the ball entry frequency. In addition, in view of the fact that the bias in the ball entry frequency is large for the variable ball entry part, the prize ball command may be configured to include the identification information of the set value for the ball entry part that is not variable.

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment, the set values are compared. Alternatively or additionally, the codes may be directly compared.

Third Embodiment
In the second embodiment, the security function is improved by strengthening the cooperation between the main control device 162 and the dispensing control device 242, but in the present embodiment, one of the features is that the security function is further improved by strengthening the cooperation between the main control device 162, the dispensing control device 242, and the monitoring device 600. Since the main configuration of this embodiment is the same as that of the second embodiment, the explanation will be centered on the configuration related to the cooperation, and the explanation of the configuration common to the second embodiment will be omitted.

As described above, the prize ball command sent from the main control device 162 to the payout control device 242 contains the above code, which is identification information of the set value. This code is diverted to the payout command sent from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600. In other words, the information sent from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 also contains the code, which is identification information of the set value.

In the monitoring device 600, as in the main control device 162 and the dispensing control device 242, a conversion table (see the schematic diagram of FIG. 38) showing the relationship between the code and the set value is stored in advance, and the set value is specified by referring to this conversion table. In addition, the second storage area 606 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a set value storage area corresponding to the main control device, which stores the set value specified from the code acquired from the main control device 162, and a set value storage area corresponding to the dispensing control device, which stores the set value specified from the code acquired from the dispensing control device 242. In the monitoring device 600, by comparing the set values stored in these set value storage areas, it is possible to determine whether the main control device 162 and the dispensing control device 242 are working together normally. Below, the set value comparison process executed by the monitoring device 600 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39(b). The set value comparison process is a process that is periodically executed by the control unit of the monitoring device 600.

In the setting value comparison process, first in step S1721, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command from the main control unit 162 or a payout command from the payout control unit 242 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1721, the setting value comparison process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S1721, the process proceeds to step S1722. In step S1722, a code is read from the currently received command, and the setting value identified from that code is overwritten (updated) with the corresponding one in each of the setting value memory areas described above.

Then, in step S1723, it is determined whether the command received this time is a dispensing command from the dispensing control device 242. If a negative determination is made in step S1723, this set value comparison process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1723, the process proceeds to step S1724. In step S1724, the set value stored in the set value storage area corresponding to the main control device is compared with the set value stored in the set value storage area corresponding to the dispensing control device. If a positive determination is made in step S1724, i.e., if the two set values match, this set value comparison process is terminated. If both the main control device 162 and the dispensing control device 242 are operating normally, a positive determination is basically made in step S1724.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1724, that is, if the received command does not contain a code, or if a code is contained but the setting value is different, the process proceeds to step S1725. For example, if the setting value does not match because the dispensing control device 242 has been replaced with an unauthorized one, a negative judgment is made in step S1724.

In step S1725, processing for the occurrence of an abnormality is executed. Specifically, the occurrence of an abnormality is stored in the second memory area 606, and an abnormality notification command is output to the notification/performance control device 140. Based on the command, the notification/performance control device 140 drives the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 of the front door frame 14 to execute the abnormality notification.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the setting value may be illegally changed in order to obtain bonuses illegally. In such cases, it cannot be denied that the fact of the fraud may be concealed by tampering with the information input to the monitoring device 600. Here, as shown in this embodiment, information indicating the setting value is not only input directly from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600, but is also input to the monitoring device 600 via the payout control device 242. By comparing these pieces of information, the monitoring device 600 can determine whether the information has been tampered with. This can improve the security functions of the gaming machine.

When comparing information indicating set values, if the timing is significantly off, there is a possibility that an erroneous judgment will be made even if the setting has been changed properly. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by configuring the information indicating the set value to be input and output in accordance with the series of movements from winning to payout, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned timing deviation and appropriately improve the accuracy of the judgment result.

For example, when a prize is won at the general prize winning port 81, the prize ball command for that prize is immediately output to the payout control device 242, and the payout control device 242 pays out prize balls based on receiving this prize ball command. In other words, the timing at which the payout command is input to the monitoring device 600 is later than the timing at which the prize ball command is input. As shown in the first embodiment, when a payout of game balls is pending, the setting value cannot be changed, so the setting value of the prize ball command and the payout command input to the monitoring device 600 basically match. This configuration prevents the setting value from being different even when the gaming machine is operating normally due to an interruption of the setting change operation, etc. This is a preferable configuration for improving the reliability of the monitoring function.

The present invention is not limited to the contents of the third embodiment described above, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the third embodiment described above, or may be applied to the third embodiment in combination in part or in whole. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the comparison is performed when a payout command is received from the payout control device 242, but instead of or in addition to this, it is also possible to perform the comparison when a prize ball command is received from the main control device 162. Even in this configuration, the payout command is configured to inherit the code included in the prize ball command from the main control device 162, so it is possible to avoid the abnormality judgment not being performed properly. In addition, if the main control device 162 is illegally replaced, it is possible to identify this, which can contribute to further strengthening the crime prevention function.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the dispensing command transmitted from the dispensing control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 is provided with identification information (code) of the set value, but in order to strengthen the cooperation between the main control device 162, the monitoring device 600, and the dispensing control device 242, it is sufficient that the monitoring device 600 is able to compare the information from the main control device 162 and the dispensing control device 242. For example, the configuration may be such that the identification information of the set value is provided to a command transmitted from the dispensing control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 other than the dispensing command.

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, the payout command generated by the payout control device 242 inherits the code of the prize ball command that triggered the payout command, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to assign a setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM of the payout control device 242 to the payout command.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the winning information (monitoring information) stored in the monitoring device 600 is acquired by the notification/performance control device 140, and an abnormality notification is executed based on the acquired winning information. At this time, one of the features is that the setting value is taken into consideration when determining whether an abnormality has occurred. Hereinafter, various processes related to abnormality notification (anomaly notification setting process and abnormality detection process) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Fig. 40(a) is a flow chart showing the abnormality notification setting process, and Fig. 40(b) is a flow chart showing the abnormality notification process.

(Setting process for abnormality notification)
The abnormality notification setting process is a process executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140. As shown in Fig. 40(a), the abnormality notification setting process first determines in step S1801 whether an initial command or a setting change command has been received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the abnormality notification setting process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, it is determined whether the setting value has been changed based on the setting value information included in the initial command or the setting change command. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the setting value has not been changed and remains unchanged, this abnormality notification setting process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, the process of deleting the accumulated data (winning information) is executed. In this embodiment, the process of acquiring and storing information from the monitoring device 600 is executed from the time the setting value is changed, and when the setting is changed, the accumulated data stored up until that point is erased and new information acquisition and storage is started.

In the next step S1804, a process for setting the threshold used in abnormality determination is executed. In this embodiment, a threshold is set for each set value, and the threshold corresponding to the current set value is used in subsequent abnormality determinations. The threshold is determined by taking into consideration design errors and game conditions, etc., as the number of winnings when a specified number of game balls are released, and a certain degree of range is provided. If the actual winnings fall within this threshold, it is determined (estimated) that the gaming machine is operating normally, and if the actual winnings repeatedly fall outside the threshold, it is determined (estimated) that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine.

The abnormality judgment performed based on the winning information is the same for each of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a and 83b. Therefore, in the following explanation, the general winning opening 81 will be used as an example to explain the abnormality judgment, and the abnormality judgment for the other winning sections will not be explained. First, with reference to Figures 6 and 41, we will provide additional explanation on why thresholds are set individually for each set value. Figure 41(a) is a schematic diagram showing the probability of winning at the general winning opening 81 for each route, and Figure 41(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the threshold.

6, the play area PE is roughly divided into a left route that bypasses the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 from the left side and a right route that bypasses the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 from the right side by the center frame 95 arranged in the center of the play area PE. The left route is provided with an upper operating port 83a, and in the normal play state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the game proceeds more advantageously for the player by shooting the game ball to the left route compared to the right route. In other words, in the normal play state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the game proceeds by mainly shooting the game ball to the left route. In contrast, the right route is provided with a lower operating port 83b accompanied by an electric role 91, a variable winning device 82, and a through gate 84, and in the normal play state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the open/close execution mode, the game proceeds more advantageously for the player by shooting the game ball to the right route compared to the left route. In other words, in the normal game state and open/close execution mode that support the high frequency support mode, the game progresses by mainly shooting the game ball in the right direction.

Here, for the three general winning ports 81a-81c located on the left route, the probability of winning is 1/300 for each port, regardless of the game state, when the game ball is shot toward the left route. In other words, the probability of winning for the three general winning ports 81a-81c combined is 1/100 (see Figure 41 (a)). This probability is constant and is not affected by the game state.

The probability of winning for one general winning hole 81d located on the right route varies depending on the game state when the game ball is shot toward the right route.

Specifically, the general winning opening 81d is located at the most downstream part of the right route, and the variable winning device 82 is located upstream of the general winning opening 81d on the right route. For this reason, during the open/close execution mode, some of the game balls heading toward the general winning opening 81d flow into the variable winning device 82, preventing the general winning opening 81d from winning. For these reasons, while the probability of winning is 1/100 in the normal game state, during the open/close execution mode the probability of winning drops to 1/500.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the probability of winning when viewed from the general winning port 81 as a whole is the same at 1/100 regardless of whether the game ball is shot toward the right route or the left route, whereas in the open/close execution mode, the probability of winning when viewed from the general winning port 81 as a whole differs depending on whether the game ball is shot toward the right route or the left route.

And, as already explained, in settings 1 to 3, the probability of a jackpot result is
< Setting 2 < Setting 1. The winning probability of the general winning port 81 as a whole increases in the order of Setting 1 < Setting 2 < Setting 3 due to the difference in the opportunity to switch to the open/close execution mode. In consideration of this situation, the threshold corresponding to Setting 1, the threshold corresponding to Setting 2, and the threshold corresponding to Setting 3 are gradually differentiated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the threshold corresponding to Setting 3 is the highest, the threshold corresponding to Setting 2 is lower than the threshold corresponding to Setting 3, and the threshold corresponding to Setting 1 is lower than the threshold corresponding to Setting 2. The upper limit of each threshold is set mainly based on the winning probability when the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode continues, and the lower limit is set mainly based on the winning probability when the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the open/close execution mode are repeated (so-called consecutive wins).

The notification/performance control device 140 is configured to determine whether the probability of winning is normal or not by referring to a threshold value selected based on the current setting value. Here, the abnormality notification process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 will be explained based on FIG. 40(b).

(Abnormality Notification Processing)
In the abnormality notification process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is being notified. If the determination in step S1901 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1902, where an information acquisition process is executed. In the information acquisition process, information regarding the number of wins into the general winning opening 81 and information regarding the number of game balls shot are acquired from the monitoring device 600.

In the next step S1903, it is determined whether the conditions for determining an abnormality are met. Specifically, it is determined whether the number of game balls released after the previous abnormality determination in which a positive determination was made in step S1903 or after the setting was changed has reached a specified number. Note that in this embodiment, the specified number is 30,000, and considering that the game ball release cycle is 0.6 sec, if game balls are released continuously, the specified number will be reached after the lapse of approximately six hours.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1903, i.e., if sufficient data has not been secured, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, the probability of winning at the general winning opening 81 is calculated from the number of winnings at the general winning opening 81 and the number of game balls shot after the setting has been changed to the current setting, and it is determined whether the probability falls within the range of the above threshold.

If it is within the threshold range, a negative judgment is made in step S1905, and the abnormality notification process ends. If it is outside the threshold range, a positive judgment is made in step S1905, and the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, the value of the abnormality notification counter provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140 is updated (increased by 1).

In the following step S1907, it is determined whether the value of the abnormality notification counter has reached its maximum (five in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S1907, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1907, the process proceeds to step S1908, where abnormality notification start processing is executed. By executing the abnormality notification start processing, an abnormality notification is executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 of the front door frame 14.

Returning to the explanation of step S1901, if a positive judgment is made in step S1901, i.e., if an abnormality is being notified, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, it is judged whether or not an operation to cancel the abnormality warning has been performed. If a negative judgment is made in step S1909, the abnormality warning process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, the abnormality warning cancellation process is executed. This cancels the abnormality warning being executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27, and the value of the abnormality warning counter is cleared to "0".

When using a threshold value to determine an abnormality, the following effects can be expected by configuring the system to set a threshold value for each setting value as shown in this embodiment. For example, if the calculated winning probability falls within the range of any of the threshold values for Settings 1 to 3 as shown in winning probability Y1 in FIG. 42, or if it falls outside any of the threshold ranges as shown in winning probability Y4, there is no effect on the accuracy of the determination. However, in a configuration in which the determination results differ depending on the threshold value as shown in winning probability Y2 or winning probability Y3, there is a possibility that the accuracy of the abnormality determination will be affected. In this regard, if the system is configured to switch the threshold value for each setting value as shown in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent something that is outside the threshold range from being determined to be within the threshold range, or something that is within the threshold range from being determined to be outside the threshold range. This improves the accuracy of abnormality monitoring and contributes to improving the reliability of the monitoring function.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, due to their characteristics, the behavior of the gaming ball differs for each setting value, and the probability of the ball entering the ball entry area may differ depending on the setting value. For this reason, in a configuration in which the gaming situation is monitored and a predetermined process (e.g., an abnormality notification) is performed based on the monitoring result (determination result), it is difficult to improve the reliability of the determination result if a unique determination is made for each setting value. For example, if reference information is set to correspond to all setting values, the range of the reference information will be large, making it difficult to improve the reliability. In this regard, if reference information is set for each setting value as shown in this feature, the reliability of the determination result can be improved, and the reliability of the gaming machine (especially the monitoring device) can be suitably improved.

By configuring the system to make a judgment only on the current setting value, rather than making a judgment on all setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) assigned to the gaming machine, it is possible to simplify the judgment process. This is a preferable configuration for reducing the control load associated with the addition of a monitoring function.

The thresholds used for abnormality determination can be unified so that they are common to all set values. However, with such a configuration, it is expected that the abnormality determination may become overly strict, resulting in frequent abnormality notifications, or that the abnormality determination may become overly lenient, resulting in abnormalities being easily overlooked. In this regard, by configuring the thresholds to be used differently depending on the set value, as shown in the present embodiment, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

The fourth embodiment is not limited to the above description, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the fourth embodiment, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following configurations to the fourth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the above fourth embodiment, the variable winning device 82 is arranged on the flow path leading to the general winning port 81, but even in a configuration in which the operating port 83b accompanied by the electric role 91 is arranged on the flow path leading to the general winning port 81, the probability of winning the general winning port 81 may differ depending on the setting value. In other words, the support mode by the electric role 91 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode when a jackpot result occurs. The occurrence rate of the jackpot result that triggers the switching of the support mode differs depending on the setting value. Therefore, the probability of winning the general winning port 81 also differs depending on the setting value. In such a configuration, as in the configuration shown in this embodiment, the certainty of abnormality determination can be suitably improved by setting a difference according to the setting value in the threshold value.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the configuration has been described in which the more advantageous the setting value is for the player, the lower the winning rate for the general winning opening 81. For example, in a configuration in which the more advantageous the setting value is for the player, such as by configuring the right-route general winning opening 81 to have a higher winning probability than the left-route general winning opening 81, the threshold value is set according to such a difference in winning probability, and the threshold value for setting 3 < the threshold value for setting 2 < the threshold value for setting 1, thereby suitably improving the reliability of abnormality determination.

<Modification 3>
In a configuration in which the game state can be grasped by the notification/presentation control device 140, the threshold value may be changed depending on the game state. For example, a threshold value in a normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, a threshold value in a normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and a threshold value corresponding to the open/close execution mode may be set individually for each of the settings 1 to 3.

Fifth embodiment
As shown in the fourth embodiment, in the configuration for monitoring the probability of winning, by securing a large number of samples, it is expected that the reliability of abnormality monitoring will be further improved. In this embodiment, the main configuration is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, but the configuration is different from that of the fourth embodiment in that the number of samples is increased to further improve the reliability. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 43 and 44. Figure 43(a) is a block diagram showing a monitoring device 600, Figure 43(b) is a schematic diagram showing information stored in the monitoring device 600, and Figure 44 is a flow chart showing the abnormality notification process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140.

As shown in FIG. 43(a), the memory unit 604 of the monitoring device 600 has a temporary memory area 607 in addition to the first memory area 605 and the second memory area 606. The temporary memory area 607 has 100 addresses for each of the upper actuation port 83a, the lower actuation port 83b, the general winning port 81, and the variable winning device 82, and each address stores the number of winning balls into the target ball winning section each time a specified number (10,000 in this embodiment) of game balls are released. These winning numbers are stored in association with the setting value at that time. When new information is acquired when all addresses are filled, the information is overwritten in order starting from the oldest information.

Figure 43 (b) shows an example of a set of information for the general winning slots. Each address stores the number of winnings for each set number of shots, setting value information, and information on whether the setting has been changed. For example, address number 9 stores information that the setting value has changed from "1" to "2" midway through.

Next, the abnormality notification process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. The abnormality notification process is configured to be executed for each type of ball entry section where the probability of winning may differ depending on the set value. In the following explanation, the abnormality notification process related to monitoring winning at the general winning opening 81 will be described, and the abnormality notification process related to winning at other ball entry sections will not be described as it is similar.

(Abnormality Notification Processing)
In the abnormality notification process in this embodiment, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is being notified. If the determination in step S2001 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2002, where information acquisition processing is executed. In the information acquisition processing, information regarding the number of game balls shot is acquired from the monitoring device 600.

In the next step S2003, it is determined whether the conditions for determining an abnormality are met. Specifically, it is determined whether the number of shots has reached a specified number and the information in the temporary storage area 607 has been updated. Note that in this embodiment, the specified number is 10,000, which corresponds to approximately 100 minutes, considering that the ball shooting cycle is 0.6 seconds.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2003, i.e., if the data has not been updated, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, a process is performed in which a predetermined number of pieces of information corresponding to the same setting value as the current setting value are read from the information stored in each address of the temporary storage area 607, starting from the most recent. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, if the current setting value is "1", five pieces of information corresponding to the same setting value are read starting from the youngest address (newest information). In this case, pieces of information whose setting value has been changed midway (for example, information stored in the fifth address) are excluded from being read.

After executing the process of step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the probability of winning is calculated from the read information. In this way, by securing a large number of samples for calculating the probability of winning, the reliability of the judgment result in the judgment process of step S2006 is improved. If the probability of winning at the general winning port 81 is within the above threshold range, a negative judgment is made in step S2007, and the abnormality notification process is terminated. If it is outside the threshold range, a positive judgment is made in step S2007, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, the value of the abnormality notification counter provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140 is updated (increased by 1).

In the next step S2009, it is determined whether the value of the abnormality notification counter has reached its maximum (five in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2010, where an abnormality notification start process is executed. By executing the abnormality notification start process, an abnormality notification is executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 of the front door frame 14.

Returning to the explanation of step S2001, if a positive judgment is made in step S2001, i.e., if an abnormality is being notified, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is judged whether or not an operation to cancel the abnormality warning has been performed. If a negative judgment is made in step S2011, the abnormality warning process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2011, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, the abnormality warning cancellation process is executed. This cancels the abnormality warning being executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27, and the value of the abnormality warning counter is cleared to "0".

The information on the number of winnings stored in the monitoring device 600 is associated with a set value. Therefore, information corresponding to the same set value as the current set value can be read and reused from previously stored information (achievements). This makes it possible to prevent such accidental events from being judged as abnormal, even if a winning pattern accidentally falls outside the range of the threshold. Here, if information with a different set value is read when using past information, the accuracy of the abnormality judgment decreases. In contrast, if an abnormality judgment is performed by ignoring all past information and focusing on the current information, the possibility of judging the above-mentioned variation due to accidental circumstances as abnormal increases. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, even when past information is reused, it is possible to narrow down the set value to the same one, so the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed. Therefore, the accuracy of the abnormality judgment can be suitably improved.

If the monitoring device 600 is configured to monitor the ball entry status, for example, when an event occurs in which the frequency of ball entry significantly deviates from the design value due to deformation of the game pins, etc., it can be discovered early. This is preferable in terms of minimizing disadvantages to game halls and players and improving the reliability of the game machine. Here, in a game machine with a setting change function, the behavior of the game ball may differ depending on the setting value, and the probability of winning at various ball entry sections such as the general winning hole 81 may differ. In the monitoring device 600 shown in this embodiment, the winning information is stored in a state corresponding to the setting value. In such a configuration, the winning information can be sorted according to the setting value, so the accuracy of judgment when judging whether it is outside the above-mentioned threshold can be improved. This increases the reliability of the monitoring results in winning monitoring, and contributes to improving the reliability of the game machine.

When monitoring the winning situation, it is important to handle temporary variations in the frequency of winning. For example, if the bias in winning increases temporarily, it is difficult to determine whether this is due to accidental factors, but the variation can be reduced by reusing past information to calculate an average, etc. In other words, it is preferable to secure a certain amount of data (samples) to refer to when making a judgment. However, as described above, the stored data contains a mixture of data corresponding to different setting values, so the accuracy of the data decreases when these are referred to together. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if the winning information corresponding to the same setting value as the current setting value is selected from the winning information stored in the past and used for the judgment, the above-mentioned effect can be preferably exerted.

The present invention is not limited to the description of the fifth embodiment described above, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the fifth embodiment described above, or may be applied in part or in whole to the fifth embodiment described above in combination. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, information is stored in the temporary storage area 607 even when the setting value is changed during the process, but it is also possible to erase information when the setting value is changed during the process. By preventing addresses from being filled with information that is not actually used, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as a shortage of information that can be referenced.

<Modification 2>
If the set value is changed before the number of balls shot reaches the specified number, the information may be newly accumulated from the point when the set value is changed. This makes it possible to avoid information corresponding to multiple set values (information that is practically difficult to use).

<Modification 3>
It is also possible to set a storage upper limit for each set value for the winning number information stored in the temporary storage area 607. Even in gaming machines with a setting change function, the setting is not necessarily changed frequently, and the same setting value may be maintained for a certain period of time. In such a case, if the stored winning number information is biased due to the setting value, it is concerned that the effect of improving the certainty of abnormality determination will not be fully achieved. For example, even if settings 1 to 3 are provided as setting values, if the information for setting 1 is excessively small, it is assumed that when a determination is made for setting 1 under that situation, there will be a shortage of samples (data) that can be referred to, and the certainty of abnormality determination will decrease. In this regard, if a configuration is adopted in which an upper limit is specified for the winning number information that can be stored for each setting value as shown in this modified example, the decrease in the certainty of determination due to a shortage of samples can be suitably suppressed.

<Modification 4>
The addresses in the temporary storage area 607 may be divided for each setting value. For example, if the temporary storage area is made up of 99 addresses, 33 addresses may be assigned for setting 1, 33 addresses for setting 2, and 33 addresses for setting 3.

<Modification 5>
In the fifth embodiment, when new winning number information is stored in all addresses constituting the temporary storage area 607, the address in which the oldest winning number information is stored (address #100 in the fifth embodiment) is overwritten with the information, but this is not limited to the above. When new winning number information is stored, it is also possible to specify the number of winning number information stored for each set value, and for a set value in which the winning number information is relatively small, to overwrite the oldest information among the winning number information corresponding to that set value. This makes it possible to prevent the number of winning number information stored from becoming biased for each set value.

Sixth embodiment
In the fifth embodiment, the number of winning prizes is stored in association with the set value, and past information corresponding to the same set value as the current set value is reused to improve the certainty of abnormality determination. This embodiment is similar to the fifth embodiment in terms of improving the certainty of abnormality determination, but the specific configuration for achieving such an effect is different from the fifth embodiment. Below, referring to FIG. 46, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 46(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of information processing in the monitoring device 600, and FIG. 46(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the correction coefficient.

The prize ball command input from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600 includes information indicating the occurrence of a win and information on the setting value at the time the win occurred, as shown in Figure 46 (a). The information acquisition unit 603 of the monitoring device 600 that receives the prize ball command creates winning determination information from this information. Specifically, the winning determination information is created by multiplying the number of wins by a correction coefficient. The created winning determination information is cumulatively stored in the youngest of the above addresses (address #1). When the number of shots reaches the specified number, the stored information is shifted and the newly acquired information is stored in address #1.

Here, the correction coefficients will be described with reference to FIG. 46(b). A correction coefficient is provided for each setting value, and in this embodiment, the correction coefficient for setting 1 is "1.02", the correction coefficient for setting 2 is "1", and the correction coefficient for setting 3 is "0.97".

For example, when comparing settings 1 and 2, there is a slight difference in the actual probability of winning at the general winning port 81 when taking into account that game balls are launched into each route to the left and right as the game progresses. In detail, the probability of winning at the general winning port 81 is slightly lower in setting 1 compared to setting 2. The correction coefficient for setting 1 is the value obtained by dividing the above-mentioned probability of winning in setting 2 by the above-mentioned probability of winning in setting 1. If a win has occurred in setting 1, the number of wins is multiplied by the correction coefficient for setting 1, "1.02", to estimate the number of wins if the current setting is set to 2. In other words, wins that actually occurred in setting 1 are converted to wins that occurred in setting 2.

When comparing settings 2 and 3, there is also a slight difference in the actual probability of winning at the general winning port 81 when taking into account that game balls are launched into each route to the left and right as the game progresses. In detail, the probability of winning at the general winning port 81 is slightly higher in setting 3 compared to setting 2. Therefore, the correction coefficient for setting 3 is the value obtained by dividing the above-mentioned actual probability of winning in setting 2 by the above-mentioned actual probability of winning in setting 3. When a win has occurred in setting 3, the number of wins is multiplied by the correction coefficient for setting 3, "0.97", to estimate the number of wins if the current setting is set to 2. In other words, wins that actually occurred in setting 3 are converted to wins that occurred in setting 2.

In this embodiment, the threshold is not set for each setting value, but is common to each of settings 1 to 3. In particular, the threshold for setting 2 shown in the fourth embodiment above is a common threshold for settings 1 to 3.

When the abnormality determination process determines whether the winning probability is within the threshold range, the information stored in each address of the temporary storage area 607 of the monitoring device 600 is obtained. In this embodiment, there is no need to select information based on a set value. For these reasons, the number of addresses is also smaller than in the fifth embodiment.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, there are various settings to choose from, and the setting value when performing an abnormality determination does not necessarily match the setting value of the winning information stored in the past. Here, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, even if a stored sample is associated with a setting value different from the current setting value, it is converted to match the current setting value by correction. Therefore, it is possible to secure winning information that can be used as a sample for abnormality determination regardless of the difference in setting value. This can contribute to improving the reliability of the determination result.

In a configuration in which the variable winning device 82 is disposed upstream of the general winning opening 81d, the movement of the variable winning device 82 may cause differences in the frequency of winning at the general winning opening 81d. Therefore, in monitoring the winning status related to the general winning opening 81d, as shown in this embodiment, by determining a correction value according to the frequency of winning at the general winning opening 81d, it is possible to suitably improve the conversion accuracy when converting the stored winning information into information corresponding to the current setting value using the correction value.

The sixth embodiment is not limited to the above description, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the sixth embodiment, or may be applied in part or in whole to the sixth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment, the value obtained by multiplying the winning number by the correction coefficient is stored in the address, but the timing of the correction is arbitrary. For example, the correction may be performed when the number of game balls shot reaches a specified number or when a setting change occurs, or may be performed immediately before a judgment using a threshold value is made. Incidentally, when the correction is performed immediately before the judgment, the subject of the correction does not necessarily have to be the monitoring device 600, and the correction may be performed by the notification/performance control device 140. However, when the correction is performed immediately before the judgment, it is necessary to store the setting value together with the information indicating the winning number in the monitoring device 600. Therefore, the amount of information to be stored is likely to increase. In view of such circumstances, there is technical significance in having the corrected information stored in the monitoring device 600.

<Modification 2>
In the sixth embodiment, the correction coefficients for setting 1 and setting 3 are determined based on setting 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the correction coefficients for setting 2 and setting 3 may be determined based on setting 1, or the correction coefficients for setting 1 and setting 2 may be determined based on setting 3.

Seventh embodiment
As shown in each of the above embodiments, the use of the monitoring device 600 to monitor the main control device 162 and the like is preferable in terms of improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 and strengthening the crime prevention function. In the present embodiment, one of the features is that the above-mentioned various effects are more preferably exerted. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the above-mentioned measures will be described with reference to Figs. 47 to 50, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment. Fig. 47 is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification process, Fig. 48 is a timing chart showing the flow of the abnormality notification cancellation, Fig. 49 is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification cancellation process, and Fig. 50 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the monitoring device 600. Note that the main configuration of the present embodiment is common to the fourth embodiment, so the description of these common configurations will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 47, we will explain the abnormality notification process executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 in this embodiment.

(Abnormality Notification Processing)
In the abnormality notification process, first, in step S2101, information acquisition process is executed. In the information acquisition process, information on the number of wins into the general winning port 81 and information on the number of shot game balls are acquired from the monitoring device 600.

In the next step S2102, it is determined whether the conditions for determining an abnormality are met. Specifically, it is determined whether the number of game balls launched into the play area PE after the previous abnormality determination or the number of game balls launched into the play area PE after the setting change has reached a specified number. In this embodiment, the specified number is 30,000. As described above, the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 sec, so the number of game balls launched reaches the specified number when the game balls are launched continuously for approximately six hours.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2102, i.e., if sufficient data has not been secured, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, the probability of winning at the general winning opening 81 is calculated from the number of winnings at the general winning opening 81 and the number of game balls shot after the setting has been changed to the current value, and it is determined whether the probability is outside the range of the above threshold.

If it is outside the threshold range, an affirmative judgment is made in step S2104, and the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, the abnormality notification counter provided in the various counter area 465 of RAM 444 is incremented by "1". If it is within the threshold range, a negative judgment is made in step S2104, and the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, the abnormality notification counter provided in the various counter area 465 of RAM 444 is decremented by "1".

After executing the processing of step S2105 or step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2107. In step S2107, it is determined whether the value of the abnormality notification counter has reached a reference value. If a positive determination is made in step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether an abnormality notification is being issued. If a negative determination is made in step S2108, an abnormality notification start process is executed in step S2109, and then the abnormality notification process is terminated. By executing the abnormality notification start process, an abnormality notification (specifically, a warning that an abnormality may have occurred) is issued by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 of the front door frame 14.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2108, the abnormality notification process is terminated after executing the abnormality notification continuation process in step S2110. When the abnormality notification continuation process is executed, the abnormality notification level is raised by one level. Specifically, the volume of the warning sound output from the speaker unit 29 and the light intensity of the error display lamp unit 27 are increased.

Returning to the explanation of step S2107, if a negative judgment is made in step S2107, i.e., if the value of the abnormality notification counter is below the reference value, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is judged whether or not an abnormality notification is being made. If an abnormality notification is not being made, the abnormality notification process is terminated. If an abnormality notification is being made, the process proceeds to step S2112, where abnormality notification termination processing is executed. This cancels the abnormality notification that had been executed up until that point.

Here, the flow of canceling an abnormality notification will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In this embodiment, the abnormality notification is canceled when (1) the value of the abnormality notification counter falls below a reference value, or (2) an operation to cancel the abnormality notification is performed.

When the probability of winning goes outside the threshold, the value of the abnormality notification counter is incremented, and when the probability of winning falls within the threshold, the value of the abnormality notification counter is decremented. At timing tc1 when the value of the abnormality notification counter is incremented and reaches a reference value, which is a guideline for starting an abnormality notification, an abnormality notification is initiated by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27. If the value of the abnormality notification counter continues to exceed the reference value thereafter, the level of the abnormality notification is raised. By raising the level of the abnormality notification, the volume of the sound output from the speaker unit 29 increases and the light intensity of the error display lamp unit 27 increases. This makes it easier for players and others to pay attention to the abnormality notification.

If the hall manager cancels the abnormality alert at time tc2, the abnormality alert is temporarily cancelled. However, at this point, the value of the abnormality alert counter is still above the reference value, and at the following time tc3, the abnormality alert will be started again based on the fact that the value of the abnormality alert counter has increased to a level above the reference value. In other words, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, the abnormality alert can be temporarily stopped by simply cancelling the abnormality alert, but in order to completely end the abnormality alert, the cause of the abnormality in the probability of winning must be eliminated.

After the cause of the abnormality alarm is eliminated, it is assumed that the probability of winning will tend to fall within the threshold range, and the value of the abnormality alarm counter will be decremented each time the probability of winning is confirmed. At the timing tc4 when the value of the abnormality alarm counter falls below the reference value, the ongoing abnormality alarm will be released.

The fact that an abnormality notification is being issued can make players hesitate to play on that gaming machine. Therefore, it is expected that gaming parlors will reduce the chances of players noticing the abnormality notification by taking a temporary measure of canceling the abnormality notification, regardless of whether or not they have attempted to resolve the underlying cause. Here, different thresholds are used for each setting value to determine the probability of winning. For example, if the calculated probability of winning is trending below the threshold, the threshold can be lowered by temporarily switching the setting value to the side that is more favorable to the player.

For example, assuming that the winning probability is the winning probability Y2 shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, if the setting value is setting 3, the winning probability Y2 will deviate from the threshold value, but if the setting value is setting 2 or setting 1, the winning probability Y2 will fall within the threshold value range. In other words, if the abnormality alarm counter value increases at setting 3 and exceeds the reference value, the abnormality alarm counter value can be lowered by changing the setting value to setting 2 or setting 1. In other words, even if the cause of the abnormality alarm is not eliminated, the occurrence of the abnormality alarm can be suppressed.

In such a configuration, there is a concern that the cause of the abnormality alarm may be concealed by intentionally switching the above-mentioned setting values. One of the features of this embodiment is that a measure is taken to detect such behavior, thereby improving the reliability of the monitoring function. This measure is explained below with reference to Figures 49 and 50. Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the abnormality alarm cancellation process executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 442 of the alarm/performance control device 140, and Figure 50 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the monitoring device 600.

(Processing for canceling abnormality notification)
In the abnormality notification cancel process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. If the determination in step S2201 is negative, the abnormality notification cancel process ends. If the determination in step S2201 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2202.

In step S2202, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is being notified. If a positive determination is made in step S2202, an abnormality notification cancellation process is executed in step S2203. This cancels the abnormality notification in the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27. In the following step S2204, it is determined whether or not the current setting change operation will change the setting so that the threshold value is changed to the same side as the deviation in the winning probability.

For example, when the setting is 2, if the probability of winning falls below the lower limit of the threshold corresponding to setting 2 and falls outside the range of the threshold, a negative judgment is made in step S2204 when the setting is changed to setting 3. In the following description, this type of setting change operation is referred to as a first type release operation.

In contrast, for example, when the setting is set to 2, if the winning probability falls below the lower limit of the threshold corresponding to setting 2 and is outside the range of the threshold, a positive determination is made in step S2204 when the setting is changed to 1 by changing the setting. Similarly, for example, when the setting is set to 3, if the winning probability falls below the lower limit of the threshold corresponding to setting 3 and is outside the range of the threshold, a positive determination is made in step S2204 when the setting is changed to either setting 2 or setting 1 by changing the setting. In the following explanation, this type of setting change operation is referred to as a second type release operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, a first type release operation information transmission process is executed, and then the abnormality notification release process is terminated. In the first type release operation information transmission process, information indicating that a first type release operation has been performed is transmitted from the notification/performance control device 140 to the monitoring device 600. The second storage area 606 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a first type release operation count storage area 635 that stores the number of times the first type release operation has been performed (see FIG. 50), and the information in the first type release operation count storage area 635 is updated based on the above information. In detail, the value of the first type release operation count counter provided in the first type release operation count storage area 635 is incremented by "1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, a second type release operation information transmission process is executed, and then the abnormality notification release process is terminated. In the second type release operation information transmission process, information indicating that a second type release operation has been performed is transmitted from the notification/performance control device 140 to the monitoring device 600. The second storage area 606 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a second type release operation count storage area 636 that stores the number of times the second type release operation has been performed (see FIG. 50), and the information in the second type release operation count storage area 636 is updated based on the above information. In detail, the value of the second type release operation count counter provided in the second type release operation count storage area 636 is incremented by "1".

When a request for disclosure of information on the number of releases is made, the monitoring device 600 performs a notification process to notify the number of times the first type release operation was performed and the number of times the second type release operation was performed. This causes the number of times each release operation was performed to be displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, for example.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring information, an abnormality notification is issued. This allows the abnormality to be dealt with promptly, and prevents players, gaming halls, and the like from suffering any disadvantages. However, if the cause of the abnormality has not been resolved even after the abnormality has been dealt with, the abnormality notification will be repeated. If consideration is given to turnover of players, hall managers, and the like, it becomes difficult to determine how many times the abnormality has been repeated. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, the abnormality notification is released based on a release operation, and the number of times the release operation was performed is stored. Therefore, it is possible to know after the fact how many times the release operation has been performed. This prevents repeated abnormalities from being overlooked, and contributes to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Even if a fraudster intentionally cancels an abnormality notification to conceal the fraud, the number of times the notification was cancelled is stored. This makes it possible to infer from the stored number of times the notification was cancelled that there may have been an attempt to intentionally conceal the fraud. Incidentally, in a configuration in which the number of times an abnormality occurred or was notified is stored, for example, it may be possible to identify the fact that an abnormality occurred, but it becomes difficult to identify whether the abnormality was due to accidental factors or human factors. In light of these circumstances, there is a clear technical significance in storing the number of times the notification was cancelled.

By configuring the machine to take into account the state of the gaming machine when storing the number of releases, it is possible to improve the accuracy of estimating whether the release operation is fraudulent. For example, if a release operation is performed in a situation where it would normally be difficult or impossible to perform, it is possible to determine that the release operation is highly likely to be fraudulent.

For example, if a configuration is assumed in which the threshold for determining an abnormality differs depending on the setting value, the possibility cannot be denied that such differences could be used to commit fraud, such as concealing the occurrence of an abnormality. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, if the setting value is changed following a release operation, the number of releases is stored. This makes it possible to prevent a release operation suspected of being fraudulent from being mixed in with other release operations. This is a preferable configuration for improving the security functions of gaming machines.

In a configuration in which the frequency of winning balls into the general winning hole 81d or other winning entry points varies depending on the set value, the accuracy of the judgment result can be improved by configuring the threshold to be switched for each set value. However, in such a configuration, it cannot be denied that there is a possibility that the threshold switching function may be abused to conceal the fact that an abnormality has actually occurred, even when the situation should actually be judged to be abnormal. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if the set value (threshold) is switched in conjunction with the cancellation of the abnormality notification, such a cancellation operation can be stored separately from other cancellation operations, thereby preventing cancellation operations intended for fraudulent purposes from being overlooked.

The seventh embodiment is not limited to the above description, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the seventh embodiment, or may be applied in part or in whole to the seventh embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the seventh embodiment described above, a setting change operation that changes the threshold to the same side as the side on which the winning probability is off the threshold is stored as a second type release operation. However, if the change is to the same side and the winning probability that was previously subject to judgment falls within the range of the threshold corresponding to the new setting value, the setting change operation may also be stored as a second type release operation.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, the abnormality notification is cancelled by the setting change operation, i.e., the setting change operation also serves as the cancellation operation for the abnormality notification. However, this can be changed to a configuration in which the cancellation operation for the abnormality notification is separated from the setting change operation.

<Modification 3>
The specific form of the abnormality notification is arbitrary. When an abnormality occurs, it is possible to configure the system so that a setting suggestion, which will be described later, is likely to occur as part of the abnormality notification. This configuration can also be applied to the first to sixth embodiments.

Eighth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration related to the cancellation of an abnormality notification is different from each of the above-mentioned embodiments. Specifically, whether or not an abnormality notification is being issued is specified on the main control device 162 side, and whether or not the abnormality notification can be cancelled is also determined by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162. Below, the configuration related to the cancellation of an abnormality notification in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 51 to 53, and a description of the configuration common to the other embodiments will be omitted.

First, the abnormality notification cancellation process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 51. The abnormality notification cancellation process is executed as part of normal processing.

(Processing for canceling abnormality notification)
In the abnormality notification canceling process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is being notified. If it is determined that an abnormality is not being notified, the abnormality notification canceling process is terminated as is. If it is determined in step S2301 that an abnormality is being notified, a positive determination is made in step S2301, and the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the setting change key has been switched to the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S2302, the abnormality notification canceling process is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2303.

In step S2303, a special operation flag indicating that the setting change key has been switched to the ON state during an abnormality alarm is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S2304, an abnormality alarm cancellation process is executed. In the abnormality alarm cancellation process, an abnormality alarm cancellation command is set to cause the alarm/performance control device 140 to cancel the abnormality alarm. This abnormality alarm cancellation command is output to the alarm/performance control device 140 in the external output process of normal processing (step S501). The alarm/performance control device 140 cancels the abnormality alarm based on receiving this abnormality alarm cancellation command.

The MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 has a function to forcibly change the initial setting value for the subsequent setting change operation to a specified setting value if the setting change key is switched to the ON state during an abnormality notification. Below, the setting change process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 as part of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 52.

(Settings change processing)
In the setting change process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting change mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the process proceeds to step S2402, where it is determined whether or not the setting change key is in the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S2402, the setting change process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2402, the process proceeds to step S2403. In step S2403, it is determined whether or not a condition for transitioning to the setting change mode is satisfied. The condition for transitioning to the setting change mode is set as a condition that the setting change switch 166 has been operated in addition to the same conditions as those in the setting change process shown in FIG. 35. In other words, when the various conditions shown in FIG. 35 are satisfied, the setting change mode is transitioned to by operating the setting change switch 166 once.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, the setting change process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2403, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, it is determined whether or not a special operation flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2405.

In step S2405, the setting value before switching to the setting change mode is identified, and the identified setting value is set as the setting value when switching to the setting change mode. In other words, when switching to the setting change mode in a situation where the special operation flag is not stored, the setting value before switching to the setting change mode is carried over as the initial setting value in the setting change mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2404, if a positive judgment is made in step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2406. In step S2406, the setting value when switching to the setting change mode is set to setting 1, which is the most advantageous setting for the player, regardless of the setting value before switching to the setting change mode. In the following step S2407, the special operation flag stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased.

After executing the processing of step S2407 or step S2405, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, a setting change mode transition process is executed. In the setting change mode transition process, a setting change mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, display control is performed to cause the setting value display unit 168 to display the current setting value, and operation acceptance of the setting change switch 166 is started.

Returning to the explanation of step S2401, if a positive judgment is made in step S2401, i.e., if a setting change mode flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2409. In step S2409, it is judged whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. If a positive judgment is made in step S2409, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2410, a setting change operation response process is executed. In the setting change operation response process, display control is performed on the setting value display unit 168 so that the setting value currently selected by the setting change operation is displayed on the setting value display unit 168.

Returning to the explanation of step S2409, if a negative judgment is made in step S2409, the process proceeds to step S2411. In step S2411, it is judged whether or not the setting change key has been turned off. If a negative judgment is made in step S2411, the process for changing the setting is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2411, the process proceeds to step S2412. In step S2412, the setting change process is executed. In the setting change process, the selected setting value is identified, and the setting value is set as the setting value for the subsequent game. For example, if setting 1 is selected, a setting 1 flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, if setting 2 is selected, a setting 2 flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and if setting 3 is selected, a setting 3 flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This switches the winning/losing lottery table referenced in the subsequent lottery process.

After executing the process of step S2412, the setting change mode end process is executed in step S2413, and then this setting change process is terminated. In the setting change mode end process, the setting change mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, and display control is performed so that the setting value display unit 168 is not displayed.

Next, the main processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Main processing)
In the main process, first, in step S2501, start-up processing is executed in response to power-on. Specifically, the process waits for about 500 msec, for example, to wait for the slave control board (the dispensing control device 242, etc.) to become operable.

In the next step S2502, it is determined whether or not 1 second, which is the permission/prohibition period, has elapsed since the start-up process of step S2501. If 1 second has not elapsed, the process of step S2502 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of times step S2502 is executed. For example, if the time required from a negative determination in step S2502 to executing the process of step S2502 again is 0.1 msec, it is determined that 1 second has elapsed since the start-up process of step S2501 when the count value reaches 10,000. Note that the specific configuration for measuring the time is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S2502 that 1 second has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2503.

In step S2503, access to RAM 404 is permitted. Then, in step S2504, it is determined whether a RAM erase switch provided on power supply/launch control device 243 is on, and in the following step S2505, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the power outage flag storage area of RAM 404. In addition, in step S2506, a RAM judgment value is calculated, and in the following step S2507, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of RAM 404. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data by whether a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 404 is saved correctly.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. If the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S2508 to S2509. Similarly, if the power interruption occurrence information has not been set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process proceeds to steps S2508 to S2509. In step S2508, the used area of RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and in step S2509, the initialization process of RAM 404 is executed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been pressed, the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area is cleared in step S2515, provided that the power outage flag is stored and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal.

After executing the process of step S2515 or step S2509, the process proceeds to step S2510. In step S2510, it is determined whether or not a special operation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated. If a special operation flag is stored or the RAM clear switch has been operated, a positive determination is made in step S2510, and the process proceeds to step S2511. In step S2511, the setting value when the power is turned on is set to setting 1, which is the most advantageous setting for the player. If no special operation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, the setting value when the power is turned on is set to the same setting value as the setting value when the power is turned off. For example, if the setting was 2 when the power was turned off, the setting is set to 2.

After executing the processing of step S2511 or step S2512, proceed to step S2513. In step S2513, an initial command setting process is executed to output an initial command to the dispensing control device 242. Then, in step S2514, interrupt permission is set and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later. By inputting the initial command from the main control device 162, the MPU of the dispensing control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is proceeding normally.

If it is determined based on the monitoring results that an abnormality has occurred, the fact is notified. This can prompt, for example, the manager of the game hall to take measures against the abnormality. It is preferable for improving convenience in the game hall that the cancellation operation can be performed without eliminating the cause of the abnormality. However, in such a configuration, there is a possibility that the player and the game hall will suffer a disadvantage if the game is played again with the notification canceled without eliminating the cause of the abnormality. This is not preferable because it is a factor that reduces the reliability of the gaming machine. The setting value is managed by the game hall and is a configuration that is directly related to profits, so it is easy for the hall manager to pay attention to it. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, when the cancellation operation is performed, it is preferable to forcibly set the initial setting value at the time of the setting change to a predetermined setting value. This can suggest to the hall manager that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is, and contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

When the initial setting value is forcibly changed, if that setting value is one that is frequently used in an amusement hall, there is concern that confusion may easily arise in determining whether or not a forced change has occurred. Here, in an amusement hall, there are fewer opportunities for a setting value that is advantageous to the player to be used than for a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player to be used. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, taking such circumstances into consideration, the initial setting value is set to Setting 1, which is the most advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to suppress the confusion described above.

Settings are not necessarily changed every day, and once a setting value has been determined, it may be maintained for a certain number of days. When such circumstances are taken into consideration, the present embodiment can be used to appropriately deal with such situations by carrying out a handover/forced change of the setting value when determining the setting value at power-on.

In a gaming machine in which a gaming ball flows down the gaming area PE, there is a possibility that the gaming nail may be deformed by contacting the gaming nail arranged in the gaming area during cleaning or maintenance. If the flow path of the gaming ball changes due to such deformation, the ball may enter the game more frequently than the original design value, or may enter the game more frequently than the original design value. This is a factor that causes disadvantages to the gaming hall and the player. Therefore, by configuring the monitoring device 600 to store winning information, it is possible to identify the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience (abnormality). However, winning does not always occur at a constant frequency, and a certain degree of variation occurs when the monitoring period is short. In contrast, if the monitoring period is set long, it is possible to suppress the variation, but it takes time to identify the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. For these reasons, a configuration in which the notification based on the result of the abnormality judgment can be arbitrarily canceled has the advantage of being able to take into consideration the reliability of the judgment result and improvement of responsiveness. However, in this type of configuration, it is difficult to identify the abnormality itself by visual inspection, and there is a possibility that the fact will be forgotten after a certain amount of time has passed since the alarm was turned off. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment can effectively prevent the occurrence of such inconveniences.

The present invention is not limited to the contents of the eighth embodiment described above, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the eighth embodiment described above, or may be applied in part or in whole to the eighth embodiment described above in combination. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, when the abnormality notification is cancelled, the initial setting value at the time of transition to the setting change mode is set to setting 1, which is the most advantageous setting for the player, but any setting value may be switched to a setting value that is more advantageous for the player than the setting value before the transition to the setting change mode or when the abnormality notification is cancelled. For example, it is also possible to configure the setting to be setting 2 in the case of setting 3, setting 1 in the case of setting 2, and setting 1 to be maintained in the case of setting 1.

In addition, when the abnormality notification is cancelled, the initial setting value when switching to the setting change mode may be configured to be a different setting value from the setting value before the setting change.

<Modification 2>
It is optional whether or not to consider the cancellation operation of the abnormality notification when resetting the setting value in the main processing. In other words, it is possible to change the initial value when a setting change operation is performed to a predetermined setting value (e.g., setting 1), while maintaining the setting value in the main processing even when a cancellation operation is performed. In such a configuration, it is preferable to exclude the special operation flag from being erased by the RAM erase switch.

<Modification 3>
In the eighth embodiment, the abnormality notification is cancelled by turning the setting key to the ON state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the abnormality notification to be cancelled by operating the setting change switch 166 after turning the setting key to the ON state. In this case, the setting change mode may be directly entered by operating the setting change switch 166, or the setting change mode may be entered by performing another operation such as pressing and holding the setting change switch 166. Also, an operation unit for cancelling the abnormality notification may be provided separately from the various operation units related to the setting change.

Ninth embodiment
One of the features of this embodiment is that it is configured to suggest a setting value to the player when a predetermined suggestion condition is met while the game is in progress. Specifically, the configuration differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured to execute a suggestion of a setting value (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion) in a part of a game round in which a reach performance corresponding to a miss occurs. Below, the configuration related to the setting suggestion will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Note that explanations of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 54(a), when the power is turned on or the settings are changed, information indicating the setting value is output from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 140. The RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140 is provided with a setting value memory area 468 that stores the setting value, and by referring to this information, the notification/performance control device 140 can identify the setting value in the main control device 162.

The MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 determines whether or not to suggest a setting based on the setting value. Here, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 54(b), the process for suggesting a setting executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140, specifically the performance setting process for a missed reach that constitutes part of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 31), will be described.

(Processing for Setting Effects for Reaching Out)
In the process of setting the effect for the occurrence of a miss reach, first, in step S2601, a process of determining the variable display mode is executed. Specifically, the current variable display mode is determined based on the variable display time information included in the variable start command received from the main control device 162. For example, if the variable display time is "10 sec", a normal reach A is executed; if the variable display time is "15 sec", a normal reach B is executed; if the variable display time is "16 sec", a super reach A is executed; if the variable display time is "17 sec", a super reach B is executed; and if the variable display time is "18 sec", a super reach C is executed (see FIG. 32).

In the next step S2602, a process for determining the final stop pattern combination is executed. In detail, the pattern combination to be finally displayed (confirmed display) on the valid line on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is determined. Since this effect setting process corresponds to a miss reach, the same pattern is displayed as stopped in the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, and a different middle pattern is displayed as stopped on the valid line on which those patterns are displayed as stopped.

After executing the processing of step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603. In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the current game round corresponds to Super Reach C. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the process for setting the effect is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2604, it is determined whether the reach pattern stopped and displayed on the active line is a "7" pattern. In other words, it is determined whether a reach line is formed by the "7" patterns constituting the upper pattern row Z1 and the "7" patterns constituting the lower pattern row Z3. If a negative determination is made in step S2604, this effect setting process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2604, the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, a process for determining whether or not to make a setting suggestion is performed. Specifically, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a setting suggestion. If a decision is made in step S2605 that a setting suggestion will not be made, a negative judgment is made in step S2606, and the performance setting process is terminated. If a decision is made in step S2605 that a setting suggestion will be made, a positive judgment is made in step S2606, and the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, a process for rewriting the final stop symbol combination is executed. Specifically, a process for rewriting the symbols displayed on the active line of the middle symbol row Z2 from symbols that do not correspond to the setting suggestion to symbols that correspond to the setting suggestion is executed. In this embodiment, the symbol combinations of upper symbol: "7", middle symbol: "1", and lower symbol: "7", the symbol combinations of upper symbol: "7", middle symbol: "2", and lower symbol: "7", and the symbol combinations of upper symbol: "7", middle symbol: "4", and lower symbol: "7" correspond to the setting suggestion.

For example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), in a losing Super Reach C that does not support setting suggestions, the "5" symbol, which is a symbol that does not support setting suggestions, is displayed on the reach line formed by the "7" symbol. For this reason, even if the final stopped symbol combination is seen, it is difficult to guess the setting value from its contents. In contrast, in a losing Super Reach C that supports setting suggestions, the "1" symbol, which is a symbol that supports setting suggestions, is displayed on the reach line formed by the "7" symbol. In other words, even if the final result is a losing result, the setting value is suggested by this, and the player can guess the setting value from the suggested contents. By providing an opportunity to obtain information that is useful for guessing the setting value even in the case of a losing result, it is possible to prevent expectations for the game from rapidly decreasing due to the announcement of a losing result.

Here, we will provide additional information about the pattern of setting suggestions with reference to Figure 56. Figure 56 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the middle symbols that are displayed when a Miss Super Reach C occurs and their probability.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), when a single line miss super reach C occurs with a "7" symbol during low frequency support mode, the probability that a "1" symbol will stop in middle symbol column Z2 is 0.1% in setting 1, and the probability that a "1" symbol will stop in middle symbol column Z2 is 0% in settings 2 and 3. In other words, when a "1" symbol stops and is displayed in middle symbol column Z2, it is determined that the setting is setting 1, which is the most advantageous for the player.

The probability that the setting suggestive "2" symbol will stop and be displayed in middle symbol column Z2 is 3.4% for setting 1, 3% for setting 2, and 4% for setting 3, so there is a slight difference. When the "2" symbol stops and is displayed in middle symbol column Z2, the possibility of setting 2 is slightly lower than for settings 1 and 3.

The probability of the "3" symbol, which does not correspond to the setting suggestion, stopping and displaying in the middle symbol row Z2 is 2% for all settings 1 to 3, so there is no difference between the settings.

The probability that the setting suggestion "4" symbol will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 0.5% for setting 1, 1% for setting 2, and 0% for setting 3. In other words, when the "4" symbol is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is determined that the setting is not setting 3, which is the least favorable setting for the player, and is therefore either setting 1 or setting 2.

The probability that the "5" symbol, which does not support setting suggestions, will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 2% in all settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "6" symbol, which does not support setting suggestions, will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 40% in all settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "8" symbol, which does not support setting suggestions, will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 50% in all settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "9" symbol, which does not support setting suggestions, will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 2% in all settings 1 to 3. In other words, even if the "5", "6", "8", or "9" symbol is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is not possible to infer the setting value from this.

In the gaming machine shown in this embodiment, the expectation of a jackpot result differs depending on the number of reach lines. Specifically, it is set so that the expectation of a jackpot result is higher for a Super Reach C with double lines (2 reach lines) than for a Super Reach C with a single line (1 reach line). There is also a difference in the probability of setting suggestions so that the double line is slightly higher than the single line.

As shown in FIG. 56(b), when a double line miss super reach C occurs with the "7" and "8" symbols during low frequency support mode, the probability that the "1" symbol will stop in the middle symbol column Z2 is 1.1% in setting 1, and the probability that the "1" symbol will stop in the middle symbol column Z2 is 0% in settings 2 and 3. In other words, when the "1" symbol stops and is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is determined that the setting is setting 1, which is the most advantageous for the player.

The probability that the setting suggestive "2" symbol will stop and be displayed in middle symbol column Z2 is 1.4% for setting 1, 1% for setting 2, and 4% for setting 3. When the "2" symbol stops and is displayed in middle symbol column Z2, the possibility of setting 2 is slightly lower than for settings 1 and 3.

The probability of the "3" symbol, which does not correspond to the setting suggestion, stopping and displaying in the middle symbol row Z2 is 2% for all settings 1 to 3, so there is no difference between the settings.

The probability that the setting suggestion "4" symbol will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 1.5% for setting 1, 3% for setting 2, and 0% for setting 3. In other words, when the "4" symbol is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is determined that the setting is not setting 3, which is the least favorable setting for the player, and is therefore either setting 1 or setting 2.

The probability that the "5" symbol, which does not support setting suggestions, will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 3% in all settings from 1 to 3. The probability that the "6" symbol, which does not support setting suggestions, will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 40% in all settings from 1 to 3. The probability that the "9" symbol, which does not support setting suggestions, will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 50% in all settings from 1 to 3. In other words, no matter whether the "5", "6", or "9" symbol is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is not possible to infer the setting value from this.

As shown in FIG. 56(c), when a double line miss super reach C occurs with the "6" and "7" symbols during low frequency support mode, the probability that the "1" symbol will stop in the middle symbol column Z2 is 1.1% in setting 1, and the probability that the "1" symbol will stop in the middle symbol column Z2 is 0% in settings 2 and 3. In other words, when the "1" symbol stops and is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is determined that the setting is setting 1, which is the most advantageous for the player.

The probability that the setting suggestive "2" symbol will stop and be displayed in middle symbol column Z2 is 1.4% for setting 1, 1% for setting 2, and 4% for setting 3. When the "2" symbol stops and is displayed in middle symbol column Z2, the possibility of setting 2 is slightly lower than for settings 1 and 3.

The probability of the "3" symbol, which does not correspond to the setting suggestion, stopping and displaying in the middle symbol row Z2 is 2% for all settings 1 to 3, so there is no difference between the settings.

The probability that the setting suggestion "4" symbol will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 1.5% for setting 1, 3% for setting 2, and 0% for setting 3. In other words, when the "4" symbol is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is determined that the setting is not setting 3, which is the least favorable setting for the player, and is therefore either setting 1 or setting 2.

The probability that the "5" symbol, which does not support setting suggestions, will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 40% in all settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "8" symbol, which does not support setting suggestions, will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 50% in all settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "9" symbol, which does not support setting suggestions, will be displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 30% in all settings 1 to 3. In other words, even if the "5", "8", or "9" symbol is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is not possible to infer the setting value from this.

In this embodiment, the frequency of occurrence of a miss Super Reach C and the probability of occurrence of a setting suggestion are higher in the high-frequency support mode compared to the low-frequency support mode, and setting suggestions are favored during the high-frequency support mode. In other words, there is a chance of a setting suggestion during the high-frequency support mode.

The ninth embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the enjoyments is guessing the setting value while playing. When a reach display is executed, the player's attention to the game is likely to be heightened. By configuring the machine to suggest a setting value (setting suggestion) when the player's attention is heightened, the chances that the setting suggestion will be overlooked can be reduced.

In addition, when a reach display is executed, there is a possibility that a winning result will be announced via the reach display, and so attention to the presentation increases. However, when a loss result is announced when attention has been high in this way, there is a possibility that attention to the game will drop significantly as expectations decrease. In this regard, by configuring the game to suggest settings in conjunction with the reach display as shown in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent a significant drop in attention when a loss result occurs.

In a configuration in which the lottery result is indicated by a symbol combination stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a, when a reach display is executed, the player's attention is likely to shift from the game area PE (more specifically, the game ball flowing down the game area PE) to the display screen 253a. Therefore, if the above-mentioned setting suggestions are executed on the display screen 253a, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of setting suggestions being overlooked despite being made.

In a configuration in which a winning result is notified via a reach display, the transition to the reach display increases attention to the changing display of the patterns. In this way, a configuration in which setting suggestions are made in a situation in which attention is high can effectively reduce the chances of missing the above-mentioned result.

If the setting suggestion is implemented using the symbol combination for a losing result, it is expected that the player will pay attention to the symbol combination because the setting suggestion information may be included when the losing result is clearly displayed. With this configuration, the attention-increasing effect described above can be effectively achieved.

The higher the player's expectations, the greater the disappointment when the player is notified of a losing result. This is undesirable as it can lead to a loss of motivation to play. In light of this, a configuration in which setting suggestions are made when a reach display indicates that a symbol combination corresponding to a guaranteed big win result may be achieved, as shown in this embodiment, is preferable in terms of mitigating the loss of motivation to play when a losing result occurs.

The higher the expectation of a winning result for a reach display, the greater the disappointment when a notification of a losing result is made (a so-called hot miss). This is undesirable as it can lead to a decrease in motivation to play. In light of this situation, a configuration in which setting suggestions are executed for a super reach (super reach C), which has a high expectation, as shown in this embodiment, is preferable in terms of mitigating the decrease in motivation to play when a losing result occurs.

The present invention is not limited to the contents of the ninth embodiment described above, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the ninth embodiment described above, or may be applied to the ninth embodiment in combination in part or in whole. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the ninth embodiment, the setting suggestion is performed by the final stop symbol combination, but the specific form of the setting suggestion is arbitrary. For example, the setting suggestion may be performed by using a background image that does not correspond to the setting suggestion in combination with a background image that corresponds to the setting suggestion, or the setting suggestion may be performed by using a sound effect or BGM that does not correspond to the setting suggestion in combination with a sound effect or BGM that corresponds to the setting suggestion. In addition, it is also possible to provide a light emission form that does not correspond to the setting suggestion and a light emission form that corresponds to the setting suggestion as the light emission form of the lamp unit 26, and to use these in combination to perform the setting suggestion.

<Modification 2>
In the ninth embodiment, the setting suggestion is made during the confirmation display, but the timing at which the setting suggestion is made is arbitrary. For example, in a configuration in which the player's attention increases when the reach display starts, the setting suggestion can be made after the reach display to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion. Furthermore, if a branch to multiple reach displays occurs after the transition to the reach display, it is expected that the player's attention will increase at this branch. Therefore, the setting suggestion can be made after the branch occurs to more suitably prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion.

<Modification 3>
In the above ninth embodiment, the possibility of setting suggestion being executed is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode, but such preferential treatment is not essential. It is also possible to make the occurrence probability of setting suggestion the same in the low frequency support mode and in the high frequency support mode. In addition, it is not intended to deny the possibility of setting suggestion being executed more likely in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode.

<Modification 4>
A difference may be set in the probability of occurrence of setting suggestions between a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode and a high probability mode and a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode and a low probability mode. Unlike the former, the latter has a limit on the number of times the game can be maintained in the high-frequency support mode. It is also possible to differentiate so that the probability of occurrence of setting suggestions is higher during the high-frequency support mode with restrictions compared to during the high-frequency support mode without restrictions.

<Modification 5>
There may be provided a number of times of play in which a setting suggestion is likely to occur and a number of times of play in which a setting suggestion is unlikely to occur. It is also possible to set the number of times of play in which a setting suggestion is likely to occur and the number of times of play in which a setting suggestion is unlikely to occur individually according to a set value. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 57, when the number of times of play executed after a jackpot is in the range of 0 to 100, the occurrence probability of a setting suggestion is the same for any set value, when the number of times of play executed after a jackpot is in the range of 101 to 150, the occurrence probability of a setting suggestion is higher in settings 1 and 3 than in setting 2, and when the number of times of play executed after a jackpot is in the range of 151 to 200, the occurrence probability of a setting suggestion is higher in setting 2 than in settings 1 and 3.

<Modification 6>
It is also possible to configure the system so that the probability of a setting suggestion occurring increases when the number of games played after a jackpot reaches a preset number.

<Modification 7>
In the ninth embodiment, the setting suggestion can be executed when the super reach C is missed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or in addition to this, it is also possible to configure the setting suggestion to be executed when another super reach or normal reach is set to have a lower expectation level than the super reach C. Incidentally, the setting suggestion may be executed when multiple types of reaches are reached.

Tenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration is different from the above ninth embodiment in that the execution time of the setting suggestion is made different depending on the number of subsequent reserved information (reserved number). Below, the configuration related to the change in the execution time of the setting suggestion will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the confirmed display time (final stop time) of the pattern in the high frequency support mode and the reserved number. Note that the description of the configuration common to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

The confirmation display time is 1.5 sec in low-frequency support mode, and is shortened to 1 sec in high-frequency support mode. In other words, in high-frequency support mode, the confirmation display time is shorter than in low-frequency support mode, so there is a higher possibility that the setting suggestion will be overlooked. In this embodiment, in both low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode, the execution time of the setting suggestion is extended depending on the number of subsequent pending information stored when the setting suggestion is executed. In the following explanation, the extension mode in high-frequency support mode is explained, but a similar extension is also executed in low-frequency support mode.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 58(a), the stop display time of the pattern when the setting suggestion is not executed is 1 sec. In contrast, when the number of subsequent pending information is 0, the stop display time is the same as when the setting suggestion is not executed, when the number of subsequent pending information is 1, the time is longer than when there is 0 (e.g., 1.5 sec), when the number of subsequent pending information is 2, the time is longer than when there is 1 (e.g., 2.0 sec), when the number of subsequent pending information is 3, the time is longer than when there are 2 (e.g., 2.5 sec), and when the number of subsequent pending information is 4, the time is longer than when there are 3 (e.g., 3.0 sec). In other words, the more the number of subsequent pending information is, the longer the execution time of the setting suggestion is. This makes it possible to reduce the chance of missing the setting suggestion.

Here, in a configuration in which setting suggestions are made by statically displaying a symbol combination that corresponds to the game result, it is not desirable to extend the execution time of the setting suggestion before the timing of the final display, i.e., to advance the start timing of the setting suggestion. Therefore, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the end timing of the setting suggestion is delayed. Below, with reference to Figure 58 (b), a configuration that realizes the extension of the execution time of the setting suggestion will be described.

As shown in FIG. 58(b1), in a game in which a setting suggestion is not executed, the game will move to the game related to the subsequent pending information when the final display time has elapsed since the symbol combination corresponding to the game result was finally displayed. This will restart the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that were displayed as stopped.

In contrast, when a setting suggestion is executed, the setting suggestion may continue even after the fixed display time has elapsed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), the symbol that is stopped on the active line will begin to oscillate in the same direction as the scrolling direction (a precursor action to the start of the next round of play) while still remaining on the active line when the fixed display time has elapsed. Then, when the setting suggestion time has elapsed, the oscillating will end and the variable display will resume.

With this configuration, even if the setting suggestion time is extended beyond the confirmed display time, deterioration in the appearance of the pattern display can be suppressed.

If the execution time of the setting suggestion is short, there is a high possibility that an oversight will occur. If a player who dislikes oversights like this plays in such a way that they can buy time between play sessions, there is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine will drop significantly. In this regard, as shown in this modified example, if the setting suggestion time is configured to be longer depending on the number of pending information, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be effectively suppressed.

The present invention is not limited to the contents of the tenth embodiment described above, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the tenth embodiment, or may be applied to the tenth embodiment in combination in part or in whole. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the above tenth embodiment, the execution time of the setting suggestion is extended according to the number of subsequent pending information in both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, but this is not limited to this. Considering that the confirmation display time is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode, it is sufficient that the above extension is executed at least in the high-frequency support mode, and the extension function in the low-frequency support mode can be omitted.

<Modification 2>
In the above tenth embodiment, the increase in the number of subsequent pending information and the extension degree of the setting suggestion are constant, but this is not limited to this. The degree of extension may be increased as the number of subsequent pending information increases, or the degree of extension may be decreased as the number of subsequent pending information increases.

<Modification 3>
In the above tenth embodiment, the symbols are swung to buy time to visually confirm the symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion, but the specific configuration for buying time to visually confirm the symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is arbitrary. For example, each symbol displayed on the pay line may be changed so as to be slightly enlarged/reduced repeatedly to buy time until the scroll display starts.

Eleventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration is such that a setting suggestion can be executed for any of Miss Super Reach A to Miss Super Reach C, and one of the features is that the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion changes depending on the number of times (consecutive times) that Miss Super Reach is executed without resulting in a jackpot. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the ninth embodiment. Note that an explanation of the configuration common to the ninth embodiment will be omitted. First, the performance setting process for the occurrence of a Miss Reach in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the floor chart in FIG. 59.

(Processing for Setting Effects for Reaching Out)
In the process of setting the effect for the occurrence of a miss reach, first, in step S2701, a process of determining the variable display mode is executed. Specifically, the variable display mode this time is determined based on the variable display time information included in the variable display start command received from the main control device 162. For example, if the variable display time is "10 sec", a normal reach A is executed; if the variable display time is "15 sec", a normal reach B is executed; if the variable display time is "16 sec", a super reach A is executed; if the variable display time is "17 sec", a super reach B is executed; and if the variable display time is "18 sec", a super reach C is executed (see FIG. 32).

In the following step S2702, it is determined whether the current variable display mode determined in step S2701 is any one of Miss Super Reach A to Miss Super Reach C. If a negative determination is made in step S2702, the process of setting the effects for the occurrence of this Miss Reach is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, the number of games played after the opening and closing execution mode is completed is identified. In this embodiment, the number of games played is stored in the monitoring device 600, and the number of games played after the opening and closing execution mode is completed is identified based on this number of games.

In the next step S2704, the reference number of times for setting suggestions is determined. In this embodiment, the reference number of times for setting suggestions is configured to change depending on the number of games played after the opening and closing execution mode ends. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 60, the standard number of judgments is 20 when the number of games is 0 to 99, 19 when the number of games is 100 to 199, 18 when the number of games is 200 to 299, 17 when the number of games is 300 to 399, 16 when the number of games is 400 to 499, 15 when the number of games is 500 to 599, 14 when the number of games is 600 to 699, 13 when the number of games is 700 to 799, and 12 when the number of games is 800 or more. The number of judgments is configured to decrease as the number of games increases.

In the next step S2705, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting suggestion is possible. Specifically, the total number of executions (consecutive executions) of Miss Super Reach A through Miss Super Reach C that were executed after the end of the open/close execution mode, including the current Miss Super Reach, is compared with the determination reference number.

If the total number of executions (consecutive executions) of Miss Super Reach A through Miss Super Reach C has not reached the judgment reference number, a negative judgment is made in step S2706, and the process proceeds to step S2707. In step S2707, a process for determining a final stopping pattern combination that does not correspond to a setting suggestion is performed. As a result, the final stopping pattern combination that does not correspond to a setting suggestion is displayed as the final stop in that game round. Note that the final stopping pattern combination that does not correspond to a setting suggestion is the same as in the ninth embodiment above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

If the total number of executions (consecutive executions) of Miss Super Reach A through Miss Super Reach C reaches the judgment reference number, a positive judgment is made in step S2706, and the process proceeds to step S2708. In step S2708, a process for determining the final stopping pattern combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is performed. As a result, the final stopping pattern combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is displayed as the final stop in that game round. Note that the final stopping pattern combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is the same as in the ninth embodiment above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The probability of Miss Super Reach A through Miss Super Reach C occurring is approximately 1/45. For this reason, in many cases, the number of plays after the end of the open/close execution mode will exceed 600 times, and the reference number of times will match the total number of times (consecutive times) that Miss Super Reach A through Miss Super Reach C have been executed, causing the setting suggestion to be executed.

Expectations for a winning result are heightened when a reach display is executed. However, even if a reach display is executed, it does not necessarily result in a winning result, and there may be cases where a losing result occurs. If such an event (reach display → losing result) occurs repeatedly, it will decrease the player's willingness to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, whether or not a setting value suggestion (setting suggestion) will be executed is determined based on the number of times a losing result has been notified after the reach display. Therefore, even if the reach display is unsuccessful, the player can be given the impression that the setting suggestion is approaching, and a decrease in willingness to play can be suppressed. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

The more times the reach display turns into a miss, the more likely the setting suggestion is to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's motivation to play, even when the normal gameplay state continues.

In a configuration in which the expectation of a setting suggestion increases as the reach display turns into a miss, the player's motivation to play may decrease as the game progresses without the reach display being executed. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, if the threshold for setting suggestions is lowered the more games that are executed after the open/close execution mode, the decrease in motivation to play when the reach display does not occur can be mitigated.

The present invention is not limited to the contents of the eleventh embodiment described above, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the eleventh embodiment described above, or may be applied in part or in whole to the eleventh embodiment described above in combination. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the eleventh embodiment, the more times the game is played after the open/close execution mode, the higher the possibility of the setting suggestion being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a high probability setting suggestion zone may be provided in which the probability of the setting suggestion being generated is high over a predetermined number of times after the high frequency support mode ends.

<Modification 2>
In the eleventh embodiment, the cumulative number of missed Super Reach A to Miss Super Reach C is reset by switching to the open/close execution mode, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the possibility of setting suggestion to be determined based on the cumulative number of missed Super Reach A to Miss Super Reach C executed after the power is turned on or when the settings are changed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the judgment reference number to be reset when the power is turned on or the settings are changed.

<Modification 3>
In the above eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that whether or not a setting suggestion is made is determined based on the total number of times (consecutive times) that Miss Super Reach A through Miss Super Reach C are executed, but this can also be changed so that the configuration is such that whether or not a setting suggestion is made is determined based on the total number of times that Miss Normal Reach A through Miss Normal Reach B and Miss Super Reach A through Miss Super Reach C are executed.

<Modification 4>
It is also possible to configure the probability of occurrence of Miss Super Reach A to Miss Super Reach C to differ depending on the setting value. For example, the probability of occurrence of Miss Super Reach A to Miss Super Reach C may be configured to increase in the order of Setting 3 < Setting 2 < Setting 1.

<Modification 5>
In the eleventh embodiment, the judgment criterion count table (FIG. 60) for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion is common for each of the setting values of Settings 1 to 3, but this is not limited to this. A judgment criterion count table for Setting 1, a judgment criterion count table for Setting 2, and a judgment criterion count table for Setting 3 may be provided separately. In this case, for example,
It is advisable to configure the judgment reference number of times to be smaller in the order of <Setting 2 < Setting 3, and to provide a difference such that the probability of a setting suggestion occurring is lower for setting values that are more advantageous to the player.

Twelfth embodiment
In a pachinko machine 10 having a setting change function, if the player can see through the setting value, the player can play advantageously. For example, if the setting value is unfavorable to the player, the player can move to another gaming machine early, and if the setting value is favorable to the player, the player can play the game as long as possible with the gaming machine, thereby advantageously proceeding with the game. In such a configuration, although the effect of increasing attention to the game can be expected by making a setting suggestion, if the setting value is stored in a control device other than the main control device 162, there is a concern that the other control devices having a lower crime prevention function than the main control device 162 will be easily targeted as targets for illegal acquisition of the setting value. In this embodiment, in consideration of such circumstances, the sub-side control device is configured not to always grasp the setting information, and the main control device 162 controls whether or not the setting suggestion is made, thereby enhancing the crime prevention function of the gaming machine. Hereinafter, first, referring to FIG. 61, the setting process of the variable display time executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described. The setting process of the variable display time is executed as a part of the variable start process (see FIG. 26).

(Setting process for variable display time)
In the process of setting the variable display time, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If the determination in step S2801 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2802, where the variable display time table for jackpots stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine the variable display time. After the determination process in step S2802 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2803, where the variable display time for the current game round is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, and the process of setting the variable display time is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2801, if a negative judgment is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. If a positive judgment is made in step S2804, the process proceeds to step S2805. In step S2805, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a super reach. If a positive judgment is made in step S2805, the process proceeds to step S2806.

In step S2806, the variable display time is determined by referring to the variable display time table for missed super reaches stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. After executing the determination process of step S2806, the process proceeds to step S2803, where the variable display time for the current game round is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, and the variable display time setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2805, if a negative judgment is made in step S2805, i.e., if the current game round does not correspond to a super reach, the process proceeds to step S2807. In step S2807, the variable display time is determined by referring to the variable display time table for missed normal reaches stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. After executing the determination process of step S2807, the process proceeds to step S2803, where the variable display time for the current game round is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, and the variable display time setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2804, if a negative judgment is made in step S2804, i.e., if the current game round corresponds to a complete miss, the process proceeds to step S2808. In step S2808, the variable display time is determined by referring to the variable display time table for complete misses stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. After executing the determination process of step S2808, the process proceeds to step S2803, where the variable display time for the current game round is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, and the variable display time setting process is terminated.

The information indicating the variable display time determined in steps S2802, S2806, S2807, and S2808 is included in the variable start command output to the notification/performance control device 140. The notification/performance control device 140 is configured to determine the variable display time from this variable start command.

In this embodiment, the variable display time may differ for some of the missed super reaches depending on the setting value. Here, the relationship between the setting value and the variable display time will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 62.

If the current game round corresponds to a complete miss, the variable display time set by the main control device 162 will be 3 sec, 4 sec, 6 sec, or 8 sec regardless of the setting value. In the notification/presentation control device 140, if the variable display time specified by the main control device 162 is 3 sec, 4 sec, 6 sec, or 8 sec, the variable display mode is set to a complete miss. Although the details of the variable display time depend on the number of subsequent pending information, there is no difference in the selection probability depending on the setting value. Therefore, in the notification/presentation control device 140, it is not possible to determine which setting value is specified from the variable display time specified in the game round corresponding to a complete miss.

If the current game round corresponds to normal reach A, the variable display time that is set will be 10 seconds regardless of the setting value. In the notification/presentation control device 140, if the variable display time specified by the main control device 162 is 10 seconds, normal reach A is set as the variable display mode. Because there is no difference in the variable display time depending on the setting value, it is not possible for the notification/presentation control device 140 to determine which setting value it is from the variable display time specified in the game round that corresponds to normal reach A.

If the current game round corresponds to normal reach B, the variable display time set will be 15 seconds regardless of the setting value. In the notification/presentation control device 140, if the variable display time specified by the main control device 162 is 15 seconds, normal reach B is set as the variable display mode. Since there is no difference in the variable display time depending on the setting value, it is not possible for the notification/presentation control device 140 to determine which setting value it is from the variable display time specified in the game round corresponding to normal reach B.

If the current game round corresponds to the winning Super Reach A, the variable display time set will be 16 seconds regardless of the setting value. In the notification/presentation control device 140, if the variable display time specified by the main control device 162 is 15 seconds, the variable display mode is set to Super Reach A. Since there is no difference in the variable display time depending on the setting value, it is not possible for the notification/presentation control device 140 to determine which setting value is present from the variable display time specified in the game round corresponding to the winning Super Reach A.

If the current game round corresponds to a losing Super Reach A, the variable display time that is set will be 16 sec or 16.2 sec regardless of the setting value. In the notification/performance control device 140, if the variable display time specified by the main control device 162 is 16 sec or 16.2 sec, the variable display mode is set to Super Reach A. However, if the variable display time is 16 sec, the setting suggestion is not executed, and if the variable display time is 16.2 sec, the setting suggestion is executed. The final stop pattern combination is also used for the setting suggestion in this embodiment. Details will be described later, but in the case of a losing Super Reach A that corresponds to a setting suggestion, the corresponding special pattern combination is displayed as the final stop.

For these variable display times, the allocation probability differs for each setting value. Specifically, for setting 1, the allocation probability for 16 sec is 99.8%, and for 16.2 sec is 0.2%. For setting 2, the allocation probability for 16 sec is 99.8%, and for 16.2 sec is 0.2%. For setting 3, the allocation probability for 16 sec is 99.9%, and for 16.2 sec is 0.1%. For this reason, the probability that the special symbol combinations corresponding to the setting suggestions will be displayed differs depending on the setting value. In other words, the more opportunities there are for special symbol combinations to be displayed, the higher the expectation that it will be setting 1 or setting 2.

If the current game round corresponds to the winning Super Reach B, the variable display time set will be 17 seconds regardless of the setting value. In the notification/presentation control device 140, if the variable display time specified by the main control device 162 is 17 seconds, the variable display mode is set to Super Reach B. Since there is no difference in the variable display time depending on the setting value, it is not possible for the notification/presentation control device 140 to determine which setting value it is from the variable display time specified in the game round corresponding to the winning Super Reach B.

If the current game round corresponds to a losing Super Reach B, the variable display time that is set is 17 sec or 17.2 sec in Settings 1 and 2, and 17 sec in Setting 3. In the notification/performance control device 140, if the variable display time specified by the main control device 162 is 17 sec or 17.2 sec, the variable display mode is set to Super Reach B. However, if the variable display time is 17 sec, the setting suggestion is not executed, and if the variable display time is 17.2 sec, the setting suggestion is executed. The final stop pattern combination is also used for the setting suggestion in this embodiment. Details will be described later, but in the case of a losing Super Reach B that corresponds to a setting suggestion, the corresponding special pattern combination is displayed as the final stop.

For these variable display times, the allocation probability differs for each setting value. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, the allocation probability for 17 sec is 99.8%, and for 17.2 sec is 0.2%. In the case of setting 2, the allocation probability for 17 sec is 99.8%, and for 17.2 sec is 0.2%. In the case of setting 3, the allocation probability for 17 sec is 100%, and for 17.2 sec is 0%. For this reason, the probability that the special symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion will be displayed differs depending on the setting value. In other words, when a special symbol combination is displayed, the setting is denied to be 3, and it is confirmed that it is either setting 1 or setting 2.

If the current game round corresponds to a winning Super Reach C, the variable display time that is set will be 18 seconds regardless of the setting value. In the notification/presentation control device 140, if the variable display time specified by the main control device 162 is 18 seconds, the variable display mode is set to Super Reach C. Since there is no difference in the variable display time depending on the setting value, it is not possible for the notification/presentation control device 140 to determine which setting value it is from the variable display time specified in the game round that corresponds to a winning Super Reach C.

If the current game round corresponds to a losing Super Reach C, the variable display time that is set will be 18 sec or 18.2 sec in Settings 1 and 2, and 18 sec in Setting 3. In the notification/performance control device 140, if the variable display time specified by the main control device 162 is 18 sec or 18.2 sec, the variable display mode will be set to Super Reach C. However, if the variable display time is 18 sec, the setting suggestion will not be executed, and if the variable display time is 18.2 sec, the setting suggestion will be executed. The final stop pattern combination is also used for the setting suggestion in this embodiment. Details will be described later, but in the case of a losing Super Reach C that corresponds to a setting suggestion, the corresponding special pattern combination will be displayed as the final stop.

The distribution probability of these variable display times varies for each setting value. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, the distribution probability of 18 sec is 99.6%, and the distribution probability of 18.2 sec is 0.4%. In the case of setting 2, the distribution probability of 18 sec is 99.9%, and the distribution probability of 18.2 sec is 0.1%. In the case of setting 3, the distribution probability of 18 sec is 100%, and the distribution probability of 18.2 sec is 0%. Therefore, the probability of displaying the special symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion varies depending on the setting value. In other words, when a special symbol combination is displayed, it is determined that the setting is 3, and that the setting is either 1 or 2. In addition, when a special symbol combination is displayed, the expectation that the setting is 1, which is the most advantageous for the player, increases.

In the following explanation, the various variable display times (16.2 sec, 17.2 sec, 18.2 sec) that correspond to setting suggestions are referred to as special variable display times.

Now, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 63, the presentation setting process for the occurrence of a missed reach (step S1205 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140 will be described. The presentation setting process for the occurrence of a missed reach is executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140.

(Processing for Setting Effects for Reaching Out)
In the process of setting the effect for the occurrence of a miss reach, first, a process of determining the variable display mode is executed in step S2901. Specifically, the outline of the effect mode is specified based on the variable display time specified by the main control device 162, and the details of the effect mode (for example, the presence or absence of effects, cut-ins, etc.) are determined. After the variable display mode is determined, the final stop pattern is determined in steps S2902 to S2905.

Specifically, first, in step S2902, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the current game round corresponds to a miss and super reach. If a positive determination is made in step S2902, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the special variable display time described above.

If a negative judgment is made in either step S2902 or S2903, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, a process for determining a final stop pattern combination that does not correspond to a setting suggestion is executed. If a positive judgment is made in step S2903, the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, a process for determining a final stop pattern combination that corresponds to a setting suggestion is executed.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the final stopping symbol combinations corresponding to miss results, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 64.

When 16 sec is specified as the variable display time in the game corresponding to the miss result, the miss super reach A is executed. In this case, the final stop pattern combination is set to a pattern combination other than the pattern combination corresponding to the big win result and the special pattern combination. In contrast, when 16.2 sec is specified as the variable display time, the super reach A is also executed. In this case, the final stop pattern combination is set to the "7" pattern constituting the upper pattern row Z1, the "3" pattern constituting the middle pattern row Z2, and the "7" pattern constituting the lower pattern row Z3 on the effective line (first special pattern combination). As mentioned above, the probability of setting 3 to be set as the variable display time is set so that the latter is twice as likely as the former when comparing setting 3 with setting 1 and setting 2. Therefore, when the first special pattern combination is finally displayed, it is highly likely that it is setting 1 or setting 2 (see FIG. 65).

When 17 sec is specified as the variable display time in the game corresponding to the miss result, the miss super reach B is executed. In this case, the final stop pattern combination is set to a pattern combination other than the pattern combination corresponding to the big win result and the special pattern combination. On the other hand, when 17.2 sec is specified as the variable display time, the super reach B is also executed. In this case, the final stop pattern combination is set to the "7" pattern constituting the upper pattern row Z1, the "4" pattern constituting the middle pattern row Z2, and the "7" pattern constituting the lower pattern row Z3 on the effective line (second special pattern combination). As mentioned above, the probability of setting 17.2 sec as the variable display time is 0% in setting 3. Therefore, when the second special pattern combination is finally displayed, setting 3 is negated, and setting 1 or setting 2 is confirmed (see FIG. 65).

When 18 sec is specified as the variable display time in the game corresponding to the miss result, the miss super reach C is executed. In this case, the final stop pattern combination is set to a pattern combination other than the pattern combination corresponding to the big win result and the special pattern combination. When 18.2 sec is specified as the variable display time, the super reach C is also executed. In this case, the final stop pattern combination is set to the "7" pattern constituting the upper pattern row Z1, the "2" pattern constituting the middle pattern row Z2, and the "7" pattern constituting the lower pattern row Z3 (third special pattern combination) on the effective line. As mentioned above, the probability of setting 18.2 sec as the variable display time is 0% in setting 3. Therefore, when the second special pattern combination is finally stopped and displayed, setting 3 is denied and setting 1 or setting 2 is confirmed (see FIG. 65). When 18.1 sec is specified as the variable display time, the super reach C is also executed. In this case, the final stop symbol combination is set to the active line with the "7" symbol that constitutes the upper symbol row Z1, the "1" symbol that constitutes the middle symbol row Z2, and the "7" symbol that constitutes the lower symbol row Z3 (fourth special symbol combination). As mentioned above, the probability that 18.1 seconds will be set as the variable display time is 0% in settings 2 and 3. Therefore, if the fourth special symbol combination is the final stop display, setting 1 is confirmed (see FIG. 65).

After steps S2904 and S2905 are executed in the effect setting process for the occurrence of a miss reach, the variable display time information received from the main control device 162 is erased. Then, when the game round ends, information indicating the current setting value, etc. is erased.

The twelfth embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The variable display time information transmitted from the main control device 162 when a game round begins includes information indicating the setting value. With this configuration, the main control device 162 can indicate whether or not to suggest a setting value (setting suggestion), and it is possible to prevent setting suggestions from being improperly executed by improperly operating the notification/presentation control device 140, which has a lower defensive function than the main control device 162.

In addition, since the variable display time information transmitted from the main control device 162 is the basis for setting suggestions, there is no need for the notification/performance control device 140 to store and hold information indicating the setting value. Having a configuration in which the notification/performance control device 140, which has low defense capabilities, does not need to store the setting value is advantageous in terms of preventing the leakage of information indicating the setting value.

Furthermore, since the variable display time information that can be expected to be transmitted from the main control device 162 on a fairly regular basis also serves as information indicating the setting value, it is more difficult to target that information and illegally obtain it, compared to a configuration in which information indicating the setting value is transmitted separately.

When variable display time information indicating a special variable display time is received from the main control device 162, a suggestion is executed in the game round executed at that special variable display time. In this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to illegally read the setting value from the notification/performance control device 140, compared to a configuration in which the suggestion is carried over to a later game round.

Because the variable display mode for the normal variable display time and the variable display mode for the special variable display time are the same, it becomes difficult to identify the setting value from differences in the appearance of the variable display mode, etc.

In addition, a difference is set so that the special variable display time is slightly longer, making it easier to extend the execution period of setting suggestions by configuring them to be executed only during the relevant play count.

When Super Reach A to C are executed, it is undesirable to estimate the setting value from a slight difference in period. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by limiting the difference to an extent that the normal variable display time and the special variable display time are recognized as being the same, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

By counting the time that the pattern is displayed on the pattern display device 253, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a setting suggestion. However, as shown in this embodiment, by making the beginning of the display change common, it becomes difficult to count the execution period in order to target the number of plays in which a setting suggestion may occur.

The Super Reach, which is the basis for the setting suggestion, has a longer display time for fluctuations compared to the Normal Reach. By setting the special fluctuation display time based on the Super Reach, which has a relatively long display time for fluctuations, it is possible to make it difficult to visually identify the difference between the normal fluctuation display time and the special fluctuation display time.

When a reach display is executed, the player's expectations for a winning outcome increase, so the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the reach display. By executing a setting suggestion when the player's attention is high, the chances that the setting suggestion will be overlooked can be reduced.

The present invention is not limited to the contents of the twelfth embodiment described above, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the twelfth embodiment described above, or may be applied in part or in whole to the twelfth embodiment described above in combination. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the special variable display time is specified by the main control device 162, the setting suggestion is executed in the corresponding game round, but this is not limited to this. For example, if the special variable display time is received and subsequent reserved information exists, it is also possible to configure the setting suggestion to be executed in one of the game rounds related to the subsequent reserved information. For example, if all subsequent reserved information is the target of the setting suggestion, the more reserved information stored, the more opportunities (execution time) for executing the setting suggestion will increase. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage players who expect setting suggestions to actively participate in the game.

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the main control device 162 determines whether or not there is a setting suggestion, but the final decision may be left to the notification/performance control device 140. For example, when a predetermined restriction condition is met, it is also possible to restrict the stopping of the special symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion even if the special variable display time is specified.

In the above type of gaming machine, the symbol combination that was stopped and displayed in the last play round is maintained until the start of the next play round, except when the display screen is turned off in power saving mode or a demo screen is displayed. In such a configuration, even if the above special variable display time is specified, if no subsequent reserved information is stored, it is possible to restrict the stopping of the special symbol combination and stop a normal losing symbol combination instead of the special symbol combination.

Thirteenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration related to changing the set value (setting change) is different from each of the above-mentioned embodiments. The configuration related to the setting change in this embodiment will be described below with reference to Fig. 66, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Fig. 66(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the setting change, and Fig. 66(b) is a schematic diagram showing the setting key switch.

In the first embodiment, the setting change switch 166, the setting key switch 167, and the setting value display unit 168 were disposed on the main control board 401 of the main control device 162 (see FIG. 8, etc.). In contrast, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 608, the setting change switch 609, and the setting value display unit 610 are disposed on the monitoring board 601 of the monitoring device 600 (see FIG. 66(a)).

Now, referring to FIG. 66(b), we will provide additional explanation on the setting key K and the setting key switch 608. The setting key switch 608 has a keyhole through which the setting key K is inserted, and the setting key switch 608 switches to the ON state when the setting key K is inserted into the keyhole and turned clockwise to the ON position. The setting key switch 608 is configured such that when the setting key K is in the ON position, the setting key K remains in the ON position even if the hand (finger) is removed from the setting key K.

When the setting key K is in the ON position, it cannot be removed, but it can be removed by rotating the setting key K counterclockwise from the ON position to the OFF position (the setting key switch 608 is in the OFF state). As with the ON position, when the setting key switch 608 is in the OFF position, the setting key K is configured to remain in the OFF position even if the hand (finger) is removed from the setting key K.

When the setting key switch 608 is moved between the ON and OFF positions, an event (so-called chattering) may occur in which the setting key switch 608 repeatedly switches between the ON and OFF states in a short period of time. Such an event is an obstacle to stabilizing the operation of the gaming machine and improving its reliability. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to prevent such inconveniences from occurring. First, the procedure for changing the setting value (setting change) and the procedure for checking the setting value (setting check) will be described below with reference to FIG. 67, and then the method for preventing the effects of chattering will be described. FIG. 67(a) is a schematic diagram showing the procedure for changing the setting, and FIG. 67(b) is a schematic diagram showing the procedure for checking the setting.

When changing the setting value, as shown in FIG. 67(a), first turn off the power switch 247 (see FIG. 66) provided on the power supply/launch control device 243. With the power supply turned off, insert the setting key K into the key hole of the setting key switch 608 and turn the setting key K clockwise to switch the setting key switch 608 to the ON state. By turning the power switch 247 ON while keeping the setting key switch 608 ON, the control state of the monitoring device 600 switches to a state in which the settings can be changed (hereinafter referred to as the setting change mode). After switching to the setting change mode, the setting value is switched in a predetermined order by pressing the setting change switch 609. At this time, the currently selected setting value is displayed in a flashing manner on the setting value display unit 610, so that the operator can visually confirm the selected setting value. After the desired setting value is set by operating the setting change switch 609, turn the setting key K counterclockwise to switch the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state. This confirms the selected setting value as the new setting value to be referenced in the next game, and the setting change mode ends.

As described above, the setting can only be changed when the pachinko machine 10 is started (launched). In other words, the operation of the power switch 247 is essential to change the setting. In contrast, the setting value can only be checked when the pachinko machine 10 has finished starting up. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(b), when the power switch 247 is ON, the setting key K is inserted into the key hole of the setting key switch 608 and the setting key K is turned clockwise to switch the setting key switch 608 to the ON state. This brings the setting value display unit 610 into a state where the setting value is lit (setting check mode). After checking the setting value, the setting key K is turned counterclockwise to switch the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state. This ends the setting check mode.

Next, we will explain the specific control processing related to the above-mentioned setting change and setting confirmation executed by the monitoring device 600 and the main control device 162. First, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 68, we will explain the startup processing (start-up processing) executed by the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 when the power is turned on (when the power switch 247 is turned ON).

(Startup process)
In the startup process, first, in step S3001, access to the storage unit 604 is permitted. This allows the information stored in the storage unit 604 to be updated (changed). After the process of step S3001 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3002. In step S3002, a signal from the setting key switch 608 is read to determine whether the setting key switch 608 is in the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003.

The storage unit 604 has a non-volatile memory and is configured to be able to retain data even when the power supply is cut off. The retained data includes information on the setting value stored in the third storage area 607 (specifically, the setting value storage area 641) of the third storage area 607. In step S3003, the setting value when the power is ON is set to the same setting value as the setting value when the power is OFF, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area 641. For example, if the setting value when the power is OFF is setting 2, the setting value when the power is ON is set to setting 2.

Returning to the explanation of step S3002, if a positive judgment is made in step S3002, that is, if the setting key switch 608 is ON, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, a setting change mode transition process is executed. Specifically, a setting change mode flag is stored in the third memory area 607 of the memory unit 604, and the setting value before the power was turned off is displayed in the setting value display unit 610. When the process transitions to the setting change mode, a transition from the startup process to normal processing is avoided until the setting change is completed.

In the next step S3005, an invalid period is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the invalid period is set in a timer counter for the invalid period provided in the third memory area 607. The value of this timer counter is updated (decremented) each time a setting change process described below is executed, and the invalid period ends when the timer counter value becomes "0". When an invalid period is set in this manner, reading of a signal from the setting key switch 608 is prohibited until the invalid period ends (has elapsed), and even if the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state during the invalid period, the setting change mode continues until the invalid period has elapsed.

After executing the processing of step S3005, the process proceeds to step S3006, where the setting change processing is executed. Here, the setting change processing of step S3006 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69.

(Settings change processing)
In the setting change process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the device is in setting change mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the setting change process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3102. In step S3102, it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed based on a signal from the setting change switch 609. If a positive determination is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103. In step S3103, a change operation response process is executed.

In the change operation response process, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area 641 is rewritten to correspond to the current operation, and the display of the setting value display unit 610 is updated (changed) to correspond to the current setting value. This makes the currently selected setting value clearly visible to the operator. Note that the setting value display unit 610 shown in this embodiment is a so-called segment display, and in the selection change mode, the currently selected setting value is displayed with a flashing display, and the confirmed setting value is displayed with a lit display.

Returning to the explanation of step S3102, if a negative judgment is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the device is in an invalid period. If a positive judgment is made in step S3104, i.e., if the device is in an invalid period, the change process ends. If a negative judgment is made in step S3104, the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the device is waiting for the settings to be confirmed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the setting key switch 608 was turned OFF. If a negative judgment is made in step S3015, the process proceeds to step S3106.

In step S3106, it is determined whether the setting key switch 608 is in the OFF state. If the determination in step S3106 is negative, the setting change process is terminated. If the determination in step S3106 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3107. In step S3107, a waiting period is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the waiting period is set in a timer counter for the waiting period provided in the third memory area 607. The value of this timer counter is updated (decremented) each time the setting change process (more specifically, the determination process in step S3101) is executed, and the waiting period ends when the value of the timer counter becomes "0". When the waiting period is set in this way, reading of a signal from the setting key switch 608 is prohibited until the waiting period ends (has elapsed), and the setting change mode continues even if the setting key switch 608 is switched during the waiting period.

After the waiting period is set in step S3106, the setting value is confirmed in step S3107, and then this setting change process is terminated. In the setting value confirmation process, rewriting of the setting value storage area 641 is prohibited, and the display mode in the setting value display unit 610 is switched to one corresponding to the confirmation result. In detail, the display mode in the setting value display unit 610 is switched from a flashing display to a lit display. This clearly indicates to the operator that the setting value has been confirmed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3105, if a positive judgment is made in step S3105, the process proceeds to step S3109. In step S3109, the timer counter for the waiting period is referenced to judge whether or not it is time for the waiting period to end. If a negative judgment is made in step S3019, the setting change process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S3109, the process proceeds to step S3110. In step S3110, it is judged whether or not the setting key switch 608 is in the OFF state.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3110, the process proceeds to step S3111. In step S3111, a setting change mode termination process is executed. In the setting change mode termination process, the setting change mode flag stored in the third memory area 607 is erased, and the setting value displayed in the setting value display unit 610 is hidden. As a result of the setting change mode flag being erased, a negative judgment is made in step S3101 in the subsequent setting change process, and the process transitions from startup processing to normal processing.

If chattering occurs at the setting key switch 608, the extent of the chattering may increase, resulting in a negative judgment in step S3109. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S3112, where an extension process is executed. In the extension process, the value of the timer counter for the waiting period is incremented (reset), and the waiting period is extended. Details will be described later, but the setting key switch 608 being turned ON after transitioning to normal processing triggers a transition to setting confirmation mode. For this reason, it is not desirable to transition from startup processing to normal processing when the effects of chattering remain. Therefore, when it is expected that the effects of chattering remain, the waiting period is extended and the setting change mode is continued, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, when power supply is started, the main processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reads the setting values from the monitoring device 600. Below, the main processing executed by the MPU 402 is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 70.

(Main processing)
The steps S3210 to S3209 and S3214 in the main processing are similar to the steps S101 to S109 and S112 in the main processing described in the first embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of step S3209 or step S3214, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, it is determined whether or not the startup of the monitoring device 600 has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a notification of startup completion has been received from the monitoring device 600. If a negative determination is made in step S3210, the process waits until the notification is received.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3210, the process proceeds to step S3211. In step S3211, the setting values are read from the monitoring device 600. Specifically, the setting values set in step S3003 or S3006 above are read. After that, in step S3212, an initial command output process is executed, and in step S3213, an interrupt is permitted. Note that the processes in steps S3212 and S3213 are similar to the processes in steps S110 and S111 above. After the process in step S3213 is executed, the main process is terminated and the process transitions to normal processing.

Next, we will explain the normal processing that is periodically executed by the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 after the monitoring device 600 is started. The execution cycle of the normal processing is 10 msec, which is longer than the cycle of the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing and normal processing) executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), normal processing includes a monitoring process in step S3301 and a setting confirmation process in step S3302. In the monitoring process in step S3301, the number of games played, the number of wins, the number of jackpots, etc. are stored based on information from the main control device 162, etc. Details of this monitoring are the same as in the first embodiment, etc., so a description will be omitted (see FIG. 33, etc.). Here, the setting confirmation process in step S3302 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 71(b).

(Settings confirmation process)
In the setting confirmation process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation mode flag, which will be described later, is stored in the third storage area 607. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3402. In step S3402, a signal from the setting key switch 608 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 608 is in the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S3402, the setting confirmation process is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S3402, the setting confirmation start process of steps S3403 to S3406 is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S3403, a setting display start process is executed. This causes the current setting value to be displayed on the setting value display unit 610. Note that in the setting value confirmation mode, the setting value before confirmation is displayed in a blinking manner, while the confirmed setting value is displayed in a lit manner, making it possible to distinguish between the two.

In the next step S3404, a setting check mode transition process is executed. In the setting check mode transition process, a setting check mode flag is stored in the third memory area 607. As a result, in the subsequent setting check processes, a positive determination is made in step S3401 until the setting check mode flag is cleared.

In step S3405, an invalid period is set during which the setting key switch 608 is invalid (more specifically, signals cannot be read). Specifically, a value corresponding to the invalid period is set in a timer counter for the invalid period provided in the third memory area 607. This value is subtracted each time normal processing (see FIG. 71(a)) is executed. In this embodiment, the invalid period is specified to be multiple times the execution cycle of normal processing (more specifically, 20 msec).

Then, after executing the game progress restriction process in step S3406, this setting confirmation process is terminated. In the game progress restriction process, information for restricting the game progress is output from the monitoring device 600 to the main control device 162. When the main control device 162 receives this information, various processes related to the game progress are avoided until it receives information from the monitoring device 600 to release the restriction.

Returning to the explanation of step S3401, if a positive determination is made in step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3407. In step S3407, it is determined whether or not the process is in an invalid period. If a negative determination is made in step S3407, the process proceeds to step S3408. In step S3408, it is determined whether or not the process is in a standby period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a standby flag is stored in the third memory area 607. The standby period will be described in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3408, the process proceeds to step S3409. In step S3409, a signal from the setting key switch 608 is read, and it is judged whether the setting key switch 608 is in the OFF state. If a negative judgment is made in step S3409, the process ends this setting confirmation process. If a positive judgment is made in step S3409, the process proceeds to step S3410. In step S3410, a waiting period is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the waiting period is set in a timer counter for the waiting period provided in the third memory area 607, and a waiting flag is stored in the third memory area 607. This timer counter is updated (decremented) each time normal processing (see FIG. 71(a)) is executed.

In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 608 is turned OFF, the setting change mode is not immediately terminated, but is terminated when it is confirmed that the OFF state is maintained after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the setting key switch 608 was turned OFF.

Returning to the explanation of step S3408, if a positive judgment is made in step S3408, i.e., if the standby period is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3411. Specifically, it is judged whether or not a standby flag is stored in the third storage area 607. In step S3411, it is judged whether or not it is time for the standby period to end. Specifically, it is judged whether or not the value of the timer counter for the standby period provided in the third storage area 607 is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S3411, this setting confirmation process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S3411, the process proceeds to step S3412.

In step S3412, the signal from the setting key switch 608 is read and it is determined whether the setting key switch 608 is in the OFF state. If the determination in step S3412 is positive, processing for ending the setting confirmation mode is executed in steps S3413 to S3415.

Specifically, first, in step S3413, a process is executed to end the display of the setting value display unit 610. As a result, the setting value displayed in the setting value display unit 610 is hidden. In the following step S3414, the setting confirmation mode flag stored in the third memory area 607 is erased. Then, in step S3415, a game progress restriction release process is executed, and then this setting confirmation process is terminated. In the game progress restriction release process, information for releasing the restriction on game progress is output from the monitoring device 600 to the main control unit 162. Based on receiving this signal, the main control unit 162 releases the restrictions on various processes related to game progress.

Returning to the explanation of step S3412, if a negative judgment is made in step S3412, the process proceeds to step S3416. In step S3416, an extension process is executed. That is, if the setting key switch 608 is in the ON state even though the timing to end the standby has arrived, a process is executed to extend the standby period. Specifically, the timer counter for the standby period in the third memory area 607 is reset to the above value. This causes the standby period to be extended.

Next, the flow of changing settings will be explained with reference to the timing charts in Figures 72 and 73, and then the flow of confirming settings will be explained with reference to the timing chart in Figure 74.

As already explained, when changing the settings, it is necessary to switch the setting key switch 608 to the ON state before turning on the power switch 247. In other words, the operation of the setting key switch 608 precedes the operation of the power switch 247. In particular, the setting key switch 608 is disposed in the monitoring device 600 attached to the main control device 162, and the power switch 247 is disposed in the power supply/launch control device 243. As shown in FIG. 9, the main control device 162 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are disposed vertically, and the monitoring device 600 shown in this embodiment is disposed closer to the main control device 162 than the other control devices. As a result, the setting key switch 608 and the power switch 247 are far apart. Considering that the two switches 247 and 608 are far apart, the time lag required between the operation of the setting key switch 608 and the operation of the power switch 247 tends to be large. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72(a), even if chattering occurs when the setting key switch 608 is switched to the ON state, the power switch 247 is unlikely to be operated while chattering is occurring.

However, if the power switch 247 and the setting key switch 608 are both designed to be simple enough to be operated with one hand, the switches 247 and 608 may be operated with the other hand. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 72(b), for example, it cannot be denied that the operation timing of the setting key switch 608 and the operation timing of the power switch 247 may be very close to each other. In this case, a temporary OFF state due to chattering may cause the setting change mode to end or even the setting confirmation mode to be entered, making it necessary to redo the operation. This is of concern as being an obstacle to smooth and efficient operation.

Here, the startup process of the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 transitions to a setting change mode, and the setting change process (step S3006) is repeated at a predetermined cycle. This cycle is 10 msec, which is longer than the cycle (2 msec or 4 msec) at which the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the process. The monitoring device 600 does not control the progress of the game, so the cycle is set long, and the control load on the MPU 602 is reduced. In this way, by providing a setting key switch 608, etc. in the monitoring device 600 with the longer cycle of the two devices with different cycles, excessive reaction to chattering when it occurs can be suppressed.

The occurrence time of chattering may vary each time, and if the chattering continues for an excessively long period, the above-mentioned cycle may not be able to absorb the effects of the chattering. In this regard, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72(b), after it is confirmed that the setting key switch 608 is in the ON state at timing te2 when the power switch 247 is turned ON, an invalid period is set in which the reading of signals from the setting key switch 608 is invalid. At timing te3 when the invalid period has elapsed, the reading of signals from the setting key switch 608 is permitted, and thereafter, by switching the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state, the setting value can be confirmed and the setting change mode can be terminated. This makes it possible to suppress the effects of chattering even if it continues for an excessively long period.

After changing the setting value by operating the setting change switch 609, the setting value is confirmed by switching the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state, and the setting change mode ends. Here, as shown in FIG. 73, even if the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode does not immediately end. First, at the timing tf1 when the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state, the display mode of the setting value display unit 610 is switched from flashing to lighting to clearly inform the player that the setting value has been confirmed, and then, at the timing tf2 when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed from the timing tf1, the setting value display unit 610 goes out and the setting change mode ends.

This waiting period is also set to be longer than the cycle in which the startup process (setting change process) is executed, so that if chattering that occurs in the setting key switch 608 at timing tf1 continues beyond this cycle, i.e., if the chattering cannot be completely absorbed within the cycle, the waiting period is used to suppress its effects.

Next, we will explain the flow of setting confirmation with reference to the timing chart in Figure 74.

As already explained, when the power switch 247 is ON, the setting can be checked by switching the setting key switch 608 to the ON state. In the example of FIG. 74(a), the setting key switch 608 is switched to the ON state at timing tg1, and the setting value display unit 610 starts displaying (blinking) the setting value.

Here, in the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600, the setting confirmation process (step S3302) is repeated at a predetermined cycle. This cycle is 10 msec, which is longer than the cycle (2 msec or 4 msec) at which the process is executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162. Since the monitoring device 600 does not control the progress of the game, the cycle is set long to reduce the control load on the MPU 602. In this way, by providing a setting key switch 608 etc. in the monitoring device 600 with the longer cycle of the two devices with different cycles, it is possible to suppress excessive reaction to chattering when it occurs.

The occurrence time of chattering may vary each time, and if the chattering continues for an excessively long period of time, the above-mentioned cycle may not be able to absorb the effects of the chattering. In this regard, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74(a), at timing tg1 when the setting key switch 608 is switched to the ON state, an invalid period is set in which the reading of the signal from the setting key switch 608 is disabled. At timing tg2 when the invalid period has elapsed, the reading of the signal from the setting key switch 608 is permitted, and thereafter the setting confirmation mode can be ended by switching the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state. This makes it possible to suppress the effects of chattering even if it continues for an excessively long period of time.

When chattering causes the setting key switch 608 to frequently switch between ON and OFF states, the setting check mode must repeatedly switch ON and OFF accordingly, which not only confuses the operator but also raises concerns that it may hinder the stabilization of the gaming machine's behavior. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment can effectively suppress the effects of chattering and prevent the setting check mode from repeatedly switching ON and OFF.

In gaming machines with a setting value change function, the diversification of the behavior of the gaming machine can contribute to increasing attention to the game. However, in this type of gaming machine, an event (chattering) may occur in which the setting key switch 608 changes frequently between ON and OFF states when operated due to rattling or the like. There is concern that such an event will reduce the operational stability of the gaming machine and become a factor in reducing the reliability of the gaming machine. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the setting key switch 608 changes between the OFF and ON states, reading of the setting key switch 608 is avoided until a predetermined period (standby period or invalid period) has passed since the change. This configuration can suppress malfunctions of the gaming machine and contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In a gaming machine having two functions, changing the setting value (setting change) and checking the setting value (setting check), the operation system is unified to the setting key switch 608, so that the configuration of the gaming machine can be prevented from becoming complicated. However, in such a configuration, chattering occurs in the setting key switch 608, and the setting change mode is switched to the setting check mode against the operator's intention, which may cause inconvenience. Such a malfunction is undesirable because it causes confusion for the operator. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, when switching from the OFF state to the ON state, reading of the setting key switch 608 is avoided at least until the invalid period has elapsed, and even if the chattering occurs and the setting key switch 608 temporarily repeats ON/OFF, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from ending or the transition to the setting check mode due to the chattering. Similarly, when the setting key switch 608 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting change mode is maintained until the standby period has elapsed. Even if the setting key switch 608 is repeatedly turned on and off during this waiting period, transition to the setting confirmation mode is avoided. This configuration effectively prevents malfunctions caused by chattering.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the setting value is confirmed by switching the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state, but when the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state, a notification is immediately given that the setting value has been confirmed. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the setting key switch 608 has been switched to the OFF state but has not been properly accepted.

In gaming machines with a function for changing the setting value, the diversification of the behavior of the gaming machine can contribute to increasing the attention to the game. However, in this type of gaming machine, an event (so-called chattering) may occur in which the operating state/non-operating state is frequently switched during operation due to the rattle of the change operation means. It is feared that such an event will reduce the operational stability of the gaming machine and cause a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine. In particular, shortening the execution cycle of various game processes is effective in realizing smooth progress of the game and improved responsiveness, but chattering is easily picked up in a configuration in which operation is judged by periodic processes with a short execution cycle. In other words, it is feared that an event that would not be a big problem if the execution cycle was long may become a cause of malfunction. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, various configurations related to setting changes are arranged in the monitoring device 600, which is set so that the execution cycle of the periodic process is longer than that of the main control device 162. Therefore, it is possible to preferably reduce the occurrence of malfunctions due to the influence of chattering. This can contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

If the main components related to changing settings are located in the monitoring device 600, when a setting value is changed in the monitoring device 600 while a game is in progress, a time lag occurs before that change is reflected in the main control device 162. Therefore, when the setting key switch 608 is operated, the effects of such timing discrepancies can be avoided by regulating the processing for game progress in the main control device 162.

The present invention is not limited to the contents of the thirteenth embodiment described above, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the thirteenth embodiment described above, or may be applied in part or in whole to the thirteenth embodiment described above in combination. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting value is confirmed when the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state during the setting change mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the setting value is confirmed when the setting change mode ends after the waiting period has elapsed after the setting key switch 608 is switched to the OFF state.

<Modification 2>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting value is confirmed by switching the setting key switch 608 to the OFF state (setting key K is placed in the OFF position), but a confirmation operation unit for confirming the setting value may be provided separately from the setting key switch 608, and the setting value may be confirmed by operating the confirmation operation unit under a condition in which the setting key K is placed in the ON position. Note that it is also possible to configure an operation unit other than the setting key switch 608, such as a reset switch, to also function as the confirmation operation unit.

<Modification 3>
The cycle in which the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 judges whether the setting key switch 608 is ON/OFF is set to be longer than the cycle of regular processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, but this is not limiting. When the effects of chattering are suppressed by setting invalid periods and standby periods, the respective cycles may be set to be the same, or the latter cycle may be set to be shorter.

<Modification 4>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the various components related to changing the setting values (setting key switches, setting change switches, setting display unit) are provided in the monitoring device 600, but these various components may be provided in the main control device 162. Also, they may be provided in other control devices such as the power supply and launch control device 243.

<Modification 5>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting change mode is extended if it is determined that the setting key switch 608 is in the ON state at a timing when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the setting key switch 608 was switched to the OFF state. When such an event occurs, it is possible that the cause is chattering occurring in the setting key switch 608. Therefore, in addition to or instead of the above-mentioned extension, it is also possible to configure the device to notify the user that chattering may be occurring in the setting key switch 608.

<Modification 6>
In the above thirteenth embodiment, the monitoring device 600 is provided separately from the main control device 162, but the main control board 401 and the monitoring device 600 (more specifically, the monitoring board 601) may be enclosed within the board box 163 that constitutes the main control device 162.

<Modification 7>
In a configuration in which the main unit 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported by an outer frame 11 fixed to the island equipment of the gaming hall, rattling may occur in the main unit 12 of the gaming machine, and such rattling may be a cause of chattering in the setting key switch 608.

Here, if a security vibration detection sensor is provided in the pachinko machine (e.g., the main gaming machine unit 12), the detection information from the vibration detection sensor may be referenced to determine whether or not chattering is likely to occur, and the determination as to whether or not to read the setting key switch 608 may be made based on the result of the determination. Specifically, when the setting key switch 608 is switched ON/OFF in a situation where vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor, the operation result may be retained, and the setting key switch 608 may not be newly read thereafter until the vibration subsides. Such a configuration can suppress increases in waiting time due to responses to chattering, and contribute to improved responsiveness when changing or checking settings.

<Modification 8>
A shock-absorbing material may be used to suppress shaking or the like at the mounting portion for mounting the device on which the setting key switch 608 is to be installed. With such a configuration, the occurrence of chattering can be reduced.

<Modification 9>
If at least one of the power switch 247 and the setting key switch 608 provided on the power supply/launch control device 243 is configured to be difficult or impossible to operate with one hand, the period (time lag) from when the setting key switch 608 is operated to when changing the settings until the power switch 247 is operated can be increased. For example, a movable (openable) cover may be provided on the setting key switch 608. When operating the setting key switch 608, the cover is moved from the cover position to the non-cover position, and then the setting key switch 608 is operated while being held in the non-cover position. This can suitably prevent the power switch 247 and the setting key switch 608 from being operated simultaneously.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, a configuration related to setting of a random number value when a change of a set value (setting change) and a confirmation of a set value (setting confirmation) are executed is characterized. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Fig. 75, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Fig. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration related to setting of a random number value.

The monitoring board 601 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a hardware random number circuit 650 that operates independently of the MPU 602. The hardware random number circuit 650 is for updating and acquiring numerical information (random number information) used for pass/fail judgments and the like. The hardware random number circuit 650 updates the numerical information at a timing asynchronous to the regular processing (normal processing) of the MPU 602, acquires the numerical information based on instructions from the MPU 602, and transmits the acquired numerical information to the main control device 162 via the MPU 602.

The hardware random number circuit 650 includes an update circuit 651 as a random number generating means for updating the winning random number counter CX used for winning/losing judgment. The update circuit 651 includes a clock circuit 652 that outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency (e.g., 16 MHz) and an update buffer 653 in which the winning random number counter CX is stored. The update buffer 653 has a memory area of 2 bytes, and the numerical range of the winning random number counter CX is set to "0 to 65535". The update circuit 651 adds 1 to the winning random number counter CX stored in the update buffer 653 in synchronization with the rising or falling edge of the clock signal of the clock circuit 652. After the winning random number counter CX reaches its maximum value, it is reset to "0". As a result, the winning random number counter CX is updated asynchronously with the regular processing (normal processing) of the MPU 602.

The update interval of the winning random number counter CX is the period of the clock signal of the clock circuit 652, specifically 62.5 nsec. As already explained, the execution period of the regular processing (normal processing) executed by the MPU 602 is 10 msec, so the update interval of the winning random number counter CX is sufficiently shorter than the execution period of the regular processing.

The hard random number circuit 650 is equipped with a hit random number register 654 for latching the hit random number counter CX updated by the update circuit 651. The hit random number register 654 has the same memory area as the update buffer 653, and more specifically, has a memory area of 2 bytes. The hit random number register 654 is connected to the update buffer 653, and more specifically, each memory area of the update buffer 653 and each memory area of the hit random number register 654 are connected one-to-one.

The hardware random number circuit 650 is equipped with a control circuit 655 that controls the latch signal. The control circuit 655 has an input terminal to which the MPU 602 is connected, and an output terminal to which the winning random number register 654 is connected. The control circuit 655 receives a latch signal from the MPU 602, and outputs the latch signal to the winning random number register 654 in synchronization with the rising edge of the latch signal. In synchronization with the input of the latch signal, the winning random number register 654 writes the data stored in each memory area of the update buffer 653 at that time into its own memory area. This allows the value of the winning random number counter CX at the input timing of the latch signal to be obtained.

One of the features of the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment is that the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the random number initial value counter CINI are set in the main processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when power supply is started, using the value of the winning random number counter CX. Below, the main processing executed by the MPU 402 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 76.

(Main processing)
The processes in steps S3501 to S3509 and S3517 in the main processing are similar to the processes in steps S101 to S109 and S112 in the main processing described in the first embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of step S3509 or step S3517, the process proceeds to step S3510. The main control board 401 of the main control device 162 is provided with a setting key switch 167, and in step S3510, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 167 is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S3510, the process proceeds to step S3511. In step S3511, the setting value when the power was OFF is set as the current setting value. In the following step S3512, an initial value setting process for the random number counter is executed. Specifically, the initial values of various counters such as the winning random number counter C1 are determined by referring to the initial value setting table stored in the various table storage area of the ROM 403, and the initial values are set in the winning random number counter C1, etc.

Returning to the explanation of step S3510, if a positive judgment is made in step S3510, the process proceeds to step S3513. In step S3513, a process of transitioning to the setting change mode is executed. In the process of transitioning to the setting change mode, a setting change mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of RAM 404, and a display corresponding to the initial setting value of setting 1 (more specifically, "1") is displayed in the setting value display unit 168. Note that the setting value display unit 610 shown in this embodiment is a so-called segment display, and in the selection change mode, the currently selected setting value is displayed with a flashing display, and the confirmed setting value is displayed with a lit display.

After executing the processing for transitioning to the setting change mode in step S3513, the setting change processing is executed in step S3514. After executing the processing of steps S3512 and S3514, the initial command output processing is executed in step S3515, and an interrupt is permitted in step S3516. Note that the processing of steps S3515 and S3516 is similar to the processing of steps S110 and S111. After executing the processing of step S3516, the main processing is terminated and a transition is made to normal processing.

Here, we will explain the setting change process of step S3514 with reference to the flowchart in Figure 77.

(Settings change processing)
In the setting change process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode flag described above is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the determination in step S3601 is negative, the setting change process is terminated. If the determination in step S3601 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3602.

In step S3602, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed based on a signal from the setting change switch 166. If a positive determination is made in step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3603. In step S3603, a process corresponding to the change operation is executed.

In the change operation response process, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area 436 (see FIG. 75) of the RAM 404 is rewritten to one corresponding to the current operation, and the display of the setting value display unit 168 is updated (changed) to one corresponding to the current setting value. This makes the currently selected setting value clearly visible to the operator.

Returning to the explanation of step S3602, if a negative judgment is made in step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3604. In step S3604, it is determined whether the setting key switch 167 is in the OFF state. If a negative judgment is made in step S3604, the setting change process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S3604, the process proceeds to step S3605.

In step S3605, a process for confirming the set value (setting confirmation process) is executed. In the setting confirmation process, rewriting of the set value memory area 436 is prohibited, and the display mode in the set value display unit 168 is switched to one corresponding to the confirmation result. In detail, the display mode in the set value display unit 168 is switched from a flashing display to a lit display. This clearly indicates to the operator that the set value has been confirmed.

In the next step S3606, a setting change mode termination process is executed. In the setting change mode termination process, the setting change mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, and a timer counter that specifies the timing for hiding the setting value displayed in the setting value display unit 610 is set. This timer counter is decremented each time the normal processing that is transitioned to after the setting change mode (main processing) is terminated is executed, and becomes "0" when a predetermined period (2 sec in this embodiment) has elapsed after the setting change mode is terminated. Then, when the timer counter becomes "0", the setting value display unit 168 is turned off and the setting value is hidden.

After executing the setting change mode end process in step S3606, the process proceeds to step S3607. In step S3607, a hard random number (random number value) is obtained from the hard random number circuit 650 (specifically, the winning random number register 654) of the monitoring device 600. Then, in the following step S3608, the random number value obtained in step S3607 is set as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI. For example, if the obtained hard random number is "120", the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 is set to "120", and the initial value of the random number initial value counter CINI is set to "120". Note that although the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI have the same maximum value, the timing of update is different. For this reason, the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the random number initial value counter CINI will differ as the game progresses, and the function of realizing diversification of update patterns using the random number initial value counter CINI is guaranteed.

After executing the initial value setting process in step S3608, this setting change process ends. This causes a transition from main processing to normal processing. Here, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 78, the normal processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Normal processing)
In normal processing, first, an external signal output process is executed in step S3701. In the external signal output process, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side and the hall computer HC. After executing the external signal output process in step S3701, an update of the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S3702. In the following step S3703, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed, and a game state transition process is executed in step S3704. After that, an electric role support process is executed in step S3705, and a game ball launch control process is executed in step S3706.

The processes in steps S3701 to S3706 are similar to those in steps S501 to S506 (see FIG. 23) above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

After executing the processing of step S3706, the process proceeds to step S3707, where the setting confirmation processing is executed. Here, the setting confirmation processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79.

(Settings confirmation process)
In the setting confirmation process, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the device is in a setting confirmation mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation mode flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the determination in step S3801 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3802.

In step S3802, it is determined whether the setting key switch 167 is ON based on the signal from the setting key switch 167. If the determination in step S3802 is negative, this setting confirmation process ends. If the determination in step S3802 is positive, the setting confirmation start process of steps S3803 to S3805 is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S3803, a setting display start process is executed. As a result, the current setting value is displayed (more specifically, lit) on the setting value display unit 168. In the following step S3804, a setting check mode transition process is executed. In the setting check mode transition process, a setting check mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, in the subsequent setting confirmation process, a positive determination is made in step S3801 until the setting check mode flag is erased. After the transition process of step S3804 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3805, where a random number counter update stop process is executed. Specifically, the interruption of the timer interrupt process, which is another periodic process, is prohibited. As a result, the update of the winning random number counter C1 and the like is temporarily suspended. After the process of step S3805 is executed, the process returns to step S3801. In other words, when the setting display start process is executed, the transition to the next step is temporarily suspended in the normal process, and the setting confirmation process is repeated until the setting confirmation mode is released.

Returning to the explanation of step S3801, if a positive judgment is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3806. In step S3806, a judgment is made as to whether or not the setting key switch 167 is in the OFF state based on a signal from the setting key switch 167. If a negative judgment is made in step S3806, the process returns to step S3801. If a positive judgment is made in step S3806, the process executes the setting confirmation end process of steps S3807 to S3811.

Specifically, first, in step S3807, a setting display end process is executed. As a result, the setting value display unit 168 is turned off and the setting value is not displayed. In the following step S3808, a setting check mode end process is executed. In the setting check mode end process, the setting check mode flag stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased. After executing the transition process in step S3808, the process proceeds to step S3809.

In step S3809, a hard random number (random number value) is obtained from the hard random number circuit 650 (more specifically, the winning random number register 654) of the monitoring device 600. Then, in the following step S3810, the random number value obtained in step S3809 is set as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI. For example, if the obtained hard random number is "120", the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 is set to "120", and the initial value of the random number initial value counter CINI is set to "120". Note that although the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI have the same maximum value, the timing of update is different. For this reason, the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the random number initial value counter CINI will differ as the game progresses, and the function of realizing diversification of update patterns using the random number initial value counter CINI is guaranteed.

After executing the initial value setting process in step S3810, the random number counter update restart process is executed in step S3811, and then this setting confirmation process is terminated. In the random number counter update restart process, the timer interrupt process that was prohibited in step S3805 is permitted to interrupt. This causes the update of the winning random number counter C1, etc. to be restarted.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 78, after the setting confirmation process of step S3707 is completed, the process proceeds to step S3708, where it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, i.e., whether or not one period (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. If a positive determination is made in step S3708, the process returns to step S3701, and if a negative determination is made in step S3708, the process repeatedly updates the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal process.

Now, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 80, we will explain how to set the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON while the setting key switch 167 is in the OFF state, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI are determined by referring to the table for determining initial values stored in the various table storage areas of the ROM 403.

In contrast, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON while the setting key switch 167 is ON, the machine transitions to the setting change mode. When the machine transitions to the setting change mode, a random number value is obtained from the hardware random number circuit 650 (win random number counter CX) of the monitoring device 600 at the timing when the setting change is completed, and the values of the win random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI are determined to be the same as this obtained random number value.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON and the setting key switch 167 is turned ON, the machine transitions to setting confirmation mode. When the machine transitions to setting confirmation mode, a random number is obtained from the hardware random number circuit 650 (win random number counter CX) of the monitoring device 600 at the timing when the setting confirmation is completed, and the values of the win random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI are determined to be the same as this obtained random number value.

The 14th embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When the manager of the game hall or the like changes the set of numerical information to be referenced (changes the settings) or checks the set of numerical information to be referenced (checks the settings), the game progress process (e.g., main process, normal process, timer interrupt process) executed by the main control device 162 can be temporarily stopped to prevent malfunctions of the game machine. However, considering that the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the like are updated in the game progress process, the update of the first numerical information stops during the setting change or setting check. This raises the concern that the update pattern of the winning random number counter C1 will be easily predicted from the timing of the setting change operation or setting check operation. In other words, if an update function for the winning random number counter C1 is incorporated into the game progress process, the update pattern can be diversified when the process is proceeding normally, but the above-mentioned inconveniences may occur when the process stops proceeding. Thus, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the update of numerical information in order to improve the security function of the game machine. In particular, in a configuration in which the winning random number counter C1 is updated as part of periodic processing as shown in this embodiment, the update of the winning random number counter C1 is also suspended when the periodic processing stops, and is resumed when the setting change or setting confirmation is completed. In such a configuration, there is a concern that it may become easier to predict the update cycle of the random number value from the timing at which the change operation ends. This is undesirable in terms of preventing fraudulent behavior such as playing games with the aim of reaching a specific random number value.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, when a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed, the value of the hit random number counter C1 of the main control device 162 is set based on the hit random number counter CX of the monitoring device 600. In this way, by using a hit random number counter CX provided separately from the hit random number counter C1, the update pattern of the hit random number counter C1 is made difficult to understand, and the deterioration of the security function of the game can be suitably suppressed.

The hit random number counter C1 and the hit random number counter CX have the same count number (upper and lower limits of the counter value), and the value obtained from the hit random number counter CX is input directly to the hit random number counter C1. This configuration prevents an increase in the control load caused by the strengthening of the security function.

The hit random number counter CX provided in the monitoring device 600 has a clock circuit 652 capable of outputting a pulse signal that switches on and off at a predetermined cycle when power is being supplied to the monitoring device 600, and the value of the hit random number counter CX can be updated while power is being supplied even before the startup of the MPU 602 is complete. In other words, when a change is made, the value of the hit random number counter CX is updated promptly when power supply starts, and the value of the hit random number counter CX can be updated independently of the periodic processing executed by the MPU even while a setting change or setting confirmation operation is being performed. This makes it difficult to identify or predict the value to be applied when the value of the hit random number counter CX is applied to the hit random number counter C1.

Even if the settings are changed when power supply starts, the value of the winning random number counter CX can be updated without going through various processes such as startup, which prevents the occurrence of inconveniences such as the random number counter CX not being updated in time when applied to the winning random number counter C1.

When performing change or confirmation work, there will be some variation in the time required for the work. In the configuration shown in this embodiment, this period is used to update the value of the hit random number counter CX, making it difficult to predict the random number value obtained from the hit random number counter CX.

As described above, there is technical significance in updating the winning random number counter CX during change or confirmation work. Furthermore, by updating this winning random number counter CX at short intervals, the above prediction becomes even more difficult. Therefore, in a configuration in which the winning random number counter CX is updated separately from the periodic processing in the main control unit 162, updating at intervals shorter than the periodic processing interval can contribute to further improving the crime prevention function. Note that shortening the update interval in the periodic processing related to game progress increases the processing load of the periodic processing, but by separating the update of the winning random number counter CX from the above periodic processing as shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

When a setting change or confirmation is performed, not only the winning random number counter C1 but also the random number initial value counter CINI is changed to match the value of the winning random number counter CX. This makes it difficult to predict the value of the random number initial value counter CINI, further improving crime prevention functions.

In a configuration in which a monitoring device 600 provided separately from the main control device 162 monitors the status of balls entering various entry areas, the monitoring device 600 is provided with a hard random number circuit 650, and information for determining the value of the winning random number counter C1 is transmitted from the monitoring device 600 to the main control device 162, thereby suppressing an increase in the control load on the main control device 162. This is a preferable configuration for smoothing the progress of the game. Note that the monitoring device 600 does not execute any processing related to the progress of the game. Therefore, even if the processing load becomes large, it will not become a factor that impedes the progress of the game.

The monitoring device 600 has a means for checking requests from the main control device 162 at a predetermined cycle, and the update cycle of the hit random number counter CX in the hard random number circuit 650 is shorter than the predetermined cycle. With this configuration, the actual request timing from the main control device 162 and the acquisition timing of the hit random number counter CX will be misaligned. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to adjust the operation timing (request generation timing) to coincide with the timing when the hit random number counter CX reaches a specific value.

The present invention is not limited to the contents of the fourteenth embodiment described above, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the fourteenth embodiment, or may be applied in part or in whole to the fourteenth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification 1>
In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, the initial settings of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI are performed using values obtained from the hard random number circuit 650 of the monitoring device 600, but this is not limited to this, and a similar technical idea can also be applied to other lottery counters (for example, the winning type counter C2, etc.).

<Modification 2>
In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, the winning random number counter C1 etc. is not updated while the setting is being changed or confirmed, but this does not deny a configuration in which the winning random number counter C1 etc. is updated even while the setting is being changed or confirmed.

<Modification 3>
In the above fourteenth embodiment, the random number value is read from the monitoring device 600 at the timing when the setting change and the setting confirmation are completed, but the timing at which the random number value is read when the setting change and the setting confirmation are performed is arbitrary. For example, the random number value may be read at the timing when the setting change and the setting confirmation start, or may be read in the middle of the setting change and the setting confirmation.

<Modification 4>
In the above fourteenth embodiment, when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 sets a random number value by referring to the monitoring device 600, the random number value stored in the winning random number register 654 is obtained via the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to configure the main control device 162 to obtain the random number value from the winning random number register 654 without passing through the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600.

<Modification 5>
In the above fourteenth embodiment, when a setting change or setting confirmation is performed, the initial values of the winning random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI are set by referring to the random number value of the hard random number circuit 650, but this may be modified as follows. That is, the initial value may be set using both a value obtained from an initial value setting table stored in the various table storage area of the ROM 403 and a value obtained from the hard random number circuit 650. For example, the sum of the two values (the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit if the upper limit is exceeded) may be set as the initial value.

<Modification 6>
In the above fourteenth embodiment, the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 is configured to monitor the operation of the hardware random number circuit 650, but this monitoring function may be omitted.

In addition, if the hardware random number circuit 650 is not operating normally, an alternative value is determined by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to provide an alternative value from the monitoring device 600 to the main control unit 162.

<Modification 7>
In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, the execution period of the regular processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 and the update period of the winning random number counter CX in the hard random number circuit 650 of the monitoring device 600 are configured to be inconsistent, but the respective periods may also be configured to be consistent.

<Modification 8>
In the above-mentioned fourteenth embodiment, the monitoring device 600 is provided separately from the main control device 162, but the main control board 401 and the monitoring device 600 (more specifically, the monitoring board 601) may be enclosed within the board box 163 that constitutes the main control device 162.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the setting value is suggested to the player (setting suggestion) in the same manner as in the above-mentioned ninth embodiment, but the specific configuration related to the setting suggestion is different from that in the ninth embodiment. Below, the configuration related to the setting suggestion in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the ninth embodiment, and the description of the same configuration as the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

First, with reference to Figures 81 and 82, we will provide additional information on the configuration of the game ball launching handle 41 in this embodiment. Figure 81 is a perspective view of the game ball launching handle 41 as seen from the front side of the gaming machine, and Figure 82 is a side view of the game ball launching handle 41. In Figure 81, the right hand H of the player operating the game ball launching handle 41 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

The game ball launch handle 41 comprises a generally cylindrical handle base 42 that protrudes from the frame body 20 of the front door frame 14 toward the front of the game machine, a cover member 43 that covers the open portion on the front side of the handle base 42, and a rotation operation member 44 that is rotated when launching game balls. By fixing the cover member 43 to the handle base 42, the rotation operation member 44 is sandwiched between the handle base 42 and the cover member 43, preventing the rotation operation member 44 from falling off.

A gear component and a variable resistor are installed inside the handle base 42 to detect the amount of rotation of the rotation operating member 44. The variable resistor is electrically connected to the power supply/launch control device 243, and when the rotation operating member 44 is rotated, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation of the gear component. The resistance value is then output to the power supply/launch control device 243, which is then able to grasp the amount of rotation.

The handle base 42 is also provided with a launch stop switch that stops the launch of game balls when the rotating operation member 44 is operated, and a touch sensor that detects whether the rotating operation member 44 is actually being touched by a hand. The launch stop switch and touch sensor are electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device 243. The power supply and launch control device 243 is capable of determining whether the launch stop switch is being operated based on information (detection signal) from the launch stop switch, and is capable of determining whether the hand is touching the rotating operation member 44 based on information (detection signal) from the touch sensor.

Next, the operation of the game ball launching handle 41 when playing a game will be briefly explained. The player adjusts the launching speed of the game ball by rotating the rotating operation member 44. Specifically, the launching speed of the game ball increases when the rotating operation member 44 is rotated (clockwise when viewed from the front of the game machine) against the biasing force of the biasing member built into the game ball launching handle 41, and the launching speed of the game ball decreases when the rotating operation member 44 is returned to the biasing direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front of the game machine). After adjusting the amount of rotation of the rotating operation member 44 and achieving the desired launching speed, the rotating operation member 44 is held so that it does not deviate from its rotation position (operation position). This allows the game to be continued while maintaining the desired launching speed. If the player releases his/her hand from the game ball launching handle 41 during play, the rotating operation member 44 returns to its initial position due to the biasing force of the biasing member. Therefore, when replaying, the above-mentioned operation of the rotating operation member 44 (adjustment of the firing speed) will be performed again.

A blower 750 is disposed behind the handle base 42, and the handle base 42 is formed with an air passage 42a that guides the air from the blower 750 to the front part (cover member 43) of the game ball launching handle 41. The cover member 43 is roughly hemispherical and convex toward the front of the game machine, and multiple fine holes 43a that communicate with the air passage 42a are formed in the center. The fine holes 43a penetrate the cover member 43 in the thickness direction, and the air that passes through the air passage 42a is emitted to the front of the game machine through the fine holes 43a. In other words, the fine holes 43a function as an air outlet or vent.

The air blower 750 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, which drives the air blower to blow air through the holes 43a when the setting suggestion conditions described below are met. More specifically, the air blower 750 is made up of a bass speaker, and performs output control so that an inaudible sound is output from the speaker. This allows a tactile change to be conveyed to the hand (e.g., the palm) operating the game ball launch handle 41.

In this embodiment, the air blower 750 is configured using a speaker, but is not limited to this. As long as the air blower can generate a tactile change, the specific configuration is arbitrary, and the air blower can be configured using a fan, for example.

The handle base 42 and cover member 43 are colored and opaque, and the blower device 750 is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the handle base 42 and cover member 43. This makes it difficult (effectively impossible) for the player to directly visually confirm the movement of the blower device 750. If a tactile change is generated to suggest a setting value to the player, the setting indication is likely to be overlooked. Therefore, in this embodiment, the action that triggers the setting suggestion is limited, and the setting suggestion can be executed when that action is performed. Specifically, one of the features is that the setting suggestion is incorporated into the operation-responsive presentation. Below, we will provide additional information on the configuration related to the setting suggestion.

As explained in the first embodiment, the upper bulge 31 of the front door frame 14 is provided with an operation button 35 that is operated by the player when a performance corresponding to the operation is executed (see FIG. 1, etc.). The operation button 35 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed based on a signal from the operation button 35.

The effects corresponding to the operation of the operation button 35 (hereinafter referred to as operation-responsive effects) include single-operation-responsive effects that execute an effect corresponding to the single operation when the operation button 35 is operated once, and continuous-operation-responsive effects that execute an effect corresponding to the continuous operations when the operation button 35 is operated multiple times in succession. When a continuous-operation-responsive effect is executed among these various operation-responsive effects, the continuous operation may serve as a trigger to suggest the current setting value.

Now, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 83, we will explain the presentation mode determination process that constitutes part of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 31) executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140, and is executed to determine the presentation mode for each game. Note that the presentation mode determination process corresponds to the processes in steps S1202 to S1206 in the fluctuation start process shown in the first embodiment.

(Performance mode determination process)
In the performance mode determination process, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command corresponding to a big win or a fluctuation start command corresponding to a miss reach has been received from the main control device 162. If a positive determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902. In step S3902, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command received this time corresponds to a super reach. If a positive determination is made in step S3902, the process proceeds to step S3903.

In step S3903, a process for determining whether or not a continuous operation compatible effect can be performed is executed. Specifically, a lottery table for continuous operation compatible effects stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 is referenced to determine by lottery whether or not a continuous operation compatible effect will be executed in this Super Reach. If this lottery is won, a positive determination is made in step S3904 and the process proceeds to step S3905.

In the next step S3905, a setting suggestion possibility determination process is executed. Specifically, a setting suggestion lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 is referenced to determine by lottery whether or not a setting suggestion will be executed in this Super Reach. The probability of a setting suggestion occurring is configured to be higher in the order Setting 3 < Setting 2 < Setting 1.

If a decision is made in step S3905 to make a setting suggestion, a positive judgment is made in step S3906, and the process proceeds to step S3907. In step S3907, a setting suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. Then, in step S3908, setting processing for a super reach that supports continuous operation is executed, and the performance mode determination process is terminated.

In the continuous operation compatible super reach shown in this embodiment, a predetermined display is executed when the number of times the operation button 35 is operated during the operation acceptance period reaches a preset specified number of operations, and the predetermined display is avoided when the operation acceptance period ends without the number of operations reaching the specified number of operations. In the continuous operation compatible super reach setting process, the specified number of operations is determined by referring to the specified number of operations determination table shown in FIG. 84(a). There are three patterns for the specified number of operations: 5 times, 10 times, and 15 times. If the current number of plays corresponds to a jackpot result, the order of 5 times < 10 times < 15 times is more likely to be selected, and if the current number of plays corresponds to a miss result, the order of 15 times < 10 times < 5 times is more likely to be selected.

In addition, in the setting suggestion in this embodiment, the air blower 750 built into the game ball launching handle 41 is driven to generate a tactile change in the hand of the player operating the game ball launching handle 41. At this time, the air blower 750 is switched between an air blowing state and a non-air blowing state. If the current Super Reach corresponds to the setting suggestion, the number of switches is determined by referring to the switch count determination table stored in ROM 443.

There are also differences in the number of switches for each setting value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 84(b), in setting 1, the probability that the number of switches will be 30%, 30% that it will be 5, and 40% that it will be 7; in setting 2, the probability that the number of switches will be 30%, 40% that it will be 5, and 30% that it will be 7; and in setting 3, the probability that the number of switches will be 30%, 30% that it will be 5, and 30% that it will be 7. In other words, the order of the number of switches when the setting is suggested is Setting 3 < Setting 2 < Setting 1.

Returning to the explanation of step S3904, if a negative judgment is made in step S3904, i.e., if the current Super Reach does not support consecutive operations, the process proceeds to step S3909, where the setting process for a Super Reach that does not support consecutive operations is executed, and then this presentation mode determination process is terminated. Returning to the explanation of step S3902, if a negative judgment is made in step S3902, i.e., if the current game round does not support a Super Reach, the process proceeds to step S3910, where the setting process for a normal Reach is executed, and then this presentation mode determination process is terminated. Returning to the explanation of step S3901, if a negative judgment is made in step S3901, i.e., if the current game round supports a complete miss, the process proceeds to step S3911, where the setting process for a complete miss is executed, and then this presentation mode determination process is terminated.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 85, we will explain the processing for continuous operation-compatible performance that is executed as part of the processing for during fluctuation (step S1105) of the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140.

(Processing for continuous operation effects)
In the continuous operation corresponding performance process, first, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the game time is related to the continuous operation corresponding performance, that is, whether or not the game time is related to the continuous operation corresponding super reach. If the determination is negative in step S4001, the continuous operation corresponding performance process is terminated. If the determination is positive in step S4001, the process proceeds to step S4002.

In step S4002, it is determined whether a suggestion for a rapid-fire operation has been made. In this pachinko machine 10, when a rapid-fire operation-compatible performance is to be started, a rapid-fire operation suggestion image (a rapid-fire operation prompting image) that prompts the player to repeatedly operate the operation button 35 multiple times is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. For example, the rapid-fire operation suggestion image is displayed as a moving image so that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and text such as "Please press the button repeatedly" is displayed. Note that the suggestion for rapid fire operations is not limited to what is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, and may be made by outputting sound from the speaker unit 29 in addition to or instead of what is displayed on the display screen 253a.

If it is determined in step S4002 that the suggestion of a consecutive operation has not been made, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the suggestion of a consecutive operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined timing after the state of the changing display of the pattern on the display screen 253a has switched from the normal changing display to the reach display.

If it is not the timing to start suggesting consecutive operations, the process for the consecutive operation corresponding performance is terminated. If it is the timing to start suggesting consecutive operations, in step S4004, the process for setting an image for suggesting consecutive operations is executed. As a result, an image for suggesting consecutive operations is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. The display of the image continues for a predetermined suggestion period.

In the next step S4005, a process for setting a state waiting for a consecutive operation is executed. Specifically, a consecutive operation waiting flag is stored in the consecutive operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 466 in the RAM 444. After that, the process for the consecutive operation corresponding performance is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S4002, if it is determined in step S4002 that a suggestion of a consecutive operation has been made, the process proceeds to step S4006. In step S4006, it is determined whether or not a consecutive operation waiting flag is stored in the consecutive operation waiting flag storage area of RAM 444, thereby determining whether or not a consecutive operation waiting state is in progress.

If the state is waiting for a repeat operation, the process proceeds to step S4007. In step S4007, it is determined whether or not the operation button 35 has been operated. The presence or absence of operation of the operation button 35 is monitored by a sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process in the MPU 442. In step S4007, if the processing result of the monitoring process is that an operation of the operation button 35 has occurred (specifically, if an operation flag is stored in the operation flag storage area of the various flag storage area 466 in the RAM 444), the process proceeds to step S4008, and a process of setting an image for accepting an operation is executed. As a result, the image for accepting an operation is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. The image is displayed, for example, as a moving image so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of the operation.

After executing the process of step S4008, the process proceeds to step S4009, where it is determined whether the number of repeated operations has reached the specified number of operations determined in the performance mode determination process. Specifically, the counter value in the counter area for consecutive operations in RAM 444 is configured to be incremented by "1" each time a positive determination is made in step S4007, and this counter value is compared with the specified number of operations to make the determination. Note that the value in the counter area for consecutive operations is initialized when the consecutive operation waiting flag is cleared.

If the determination in step S4009 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4010, where a process for setting an image for completing consecutive operations is performed. As a result, an image prompting the user to end the consecutive operations is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

After executing the processing of step S4010, the process proceeds to step S4011, where processing for a consecutive operation corresponding performance is performed. Details will be described later, but in the consecutive operation corresponding performance, a display is displayed indicating that the character displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 has successfully transformed.

In the next step S4012, it is determined whether or not a setting suggestion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a positive determination is made in step S4012, the first air blowing process is executed in step S4013.

In the first air blowing process, the air blower 750 is driven to blow air onto the player's hands. This indicates the set value. After the process of step S4013 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4012, the process proceeds to step S4017. In step S4017, the process of canceling the consecutive operation waiting state is executed, and then the process for the consecutive operation corresponding presentation is terminated. In the process of canceling the consecutive operation waiting state, the consecutive operation waiting flag stored in the various flags storage area 466 of the RAM 444 is erased.

If a negative judgment is made in either step S4007 or step S4009, that is, if the operation button 35 has not been operated, or if it has been operated but the number of consecutive operations does not reach the specified number of operations, the process proceeds to step S4014. In step S4014, it is judged whether it is the timing to end the acceptance of consecutive operations. Specifically, it is judged whether it is the timing to end the acceptance by referring to the value of the consecutive operation acceptance period counter provided in the timing counter area of RAM 444. If a negative judgment is made in step S4014, the process for the consecutive operation corresponding performance is ended as it is.

A predetermined value is input to the consecutive operation reception period counter when the consecutive operation waiting state setting process is performed, and the counter is updated each time a negative judgment is made in step S4014. Then, when the value of this consecutive operation reception period counter reaches the predetermined value, a positive judgment is made in step S4014, and the process proceeds to step S4015. In step S4015, a process for setting an image indicating that reception has ended is performed. As a result, an image indicating that the consecutive operation reception period has ended is displayed on the display screen 253a.

Then, the process proceeds to step S4016, where operation-incompatible presentation processing is executed. In operation-incompatible presentation processing, a message is displayed indicating that the character displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 has failed to transform, and the game result is announced via a presentation different from that when the above-mentioned operation conditions are met.

After executing the processing of step S4016, the process of canceling the consecutive operation waiting state is executed in step S4017, and then the process for the consecutive operation corresponding performance is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S4006, if a negative judgment is made in step S4006, that is, if it is judged that the game is not waiting for a continuous operation, the process proceeds to step S4018. In step S4018, it is judged whether or not the current game round corresponds to a chance-up effect. Specifically, in this embodiment, in a game round corresponding to a super reach, a chance-up effect may be executed as an effect suggesting that there is a high expectation of a jackpot result in the middle of the game round. In this chance-up effect, a tactile change is conveyed to the hand of the player operating the game ball launching handle 41 by driving the blower device 750.

Here, we will explain the flow of the display effects when consecutive operation-compatible effects are executed, with reference to the time chart in Figure 86.

When a game in which a continuous operation compatible effect is executed starts at the timing of tc1, the display of each symbol row that was statically displayed up until that point starts to change. After that, the upper symbol row is first statically displayed, followed by the lower symbol row at the timing of tc2. At this time, the same symbol (the "3" symbol in FIG. 18) is statically displayed on the above-mentioned pay line, and the reach display starts. After the reach display starts, the reach symbol is displayed in a reduced size at the top of the display screen 253a, and a character image of a girl is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. Then, at the timing of tc3, a message encouraging the user to repeatedly press the operation button 35 (for example, "Press it repeatedly!") is displayed on the display screen 253a, and the display screen switches to a state waiting for continuous operation.

Then, as the player repeatedly presses the operation button 35, the display of the operation reception count display section for consecutive operations, which is provided alongside the display screen 253a, changes. Specifically, the light-emitting device (LED), which had been off until then, switches to a lit state according to the number of operations, indicating to the player the number of operations. In conjunction with this, an effect is displayed surrounding the character image of a girl displayed on the display screen 253a, and as the number of operations increases, the effect is displayed to become larger.

In this embodiment, the expectation of winning the jackpot increases the more operations are performed from when a continuous operation is suggested until the operation is completed. For this reason, it is assumed that the player will perform the operation while hoping to perform the pressing operation as many times as possible, and this increases the attention paid to the pressing operation.

At the timing tc5 when the number of operations by repeated pressing operations reaches a preset number of operations, an image is displayed on the display screen 253a indicating that the continuous operation has been completed. In the example of FIG. 86, the current Super Reach corresponds to a setting suggestion, and at the timing tc5 when the number of operations reaches the preset number of operations, an image of the girl is displayed indicating that she has been successfully transformed, and the blower 750 starts blowing air, i.e., the setting suggestion is started.

Then, at timing tc6 before the confirmation display showing the game result, the blower 750 is driven again as a chance-up effect, and then, at timing tc7, the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is statically displayed. Specifically, if the current game round does not correspond to a jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to a miss result is statically displayed, and if the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot is statically displayed.

The fifteenth embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

The set value is suggested by transmitting a tactile change to the player's hand, etc., touching the game ball launch handle 41. With this configuration, compared to, for example, producing a visual change on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 or producing an auditory change in the speaker unit 29, etc., it is possible to reduce the opportunities for players other than the player playing the gaming machine to become aware of the presence or absence of a suggestion and its contents. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to encourage players who are trying to guess the set value to play, which can contribute to improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In particular, when the game ball launch handle 41 is being operated by a player, it is expected that the front portion of the game ball launch handle 41 will be covered by the player's hand, etc. This allows the above-mentioned concealment effect to be optimally achieved.

In this embodiment, a tactile change occurs by driving the air blower 750 built into the game ball launch handle 41, and the air blower 750 is difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish the driving state of the air blower 750, which constitutes the setting suggestion means, from the outside of the gaming machine, which effectively reduces the opportunities for other players to know whether or not there is a setting value suggestion.

The air blowing device 750 may blow air not only when implementing a setting suggestion, but also as part of a chance-up effect. In this way, by implementing the above-mentioned setting suggestion using a configuration that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot result, the complexity of the gaming machine's configuration is suppressed. Furthermore, when a tactile change occurs due to the operation of the air blowing device 750, an additional game is played in which the player guesses whether this is an indication of the likelihood of a jackpot result or an indication of a setting value. This can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

In a configuration in which the tactile change in the game ball launch handle 41 suggests the expectation of a jackpot result and suggests the set value, if the above-mentioned guessing becomes practically difficult, there is a concern that the player will be confused and the above-mentioned effect of increasing attention will not be achieved. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by varying the timing of the tactile change during the execution of the changing and stopping display of the images (during a game round) depending on which suggestion is made, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In a configuration in which a setting value is suggested by a tactile change, the suggestion is more likely to be overlooked than in a case in which the setting value is suggested by, for example, the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a), which is likely to attract the player's attention. Therefore, when a setting value is suggested, the chance of the suggestion being overlooked can be reduced by indicating the possibility that the suggestion will occur (by encouraging the player to operate the operation button 35). In this configuration, by encouraging a similar suggestion (operation of the operation button 35) even when no suggestion of a setting value is made, the setting value of the gaming machine can be prevented from being easily identified.

In this embodiment, setting suggestions are incorporated into the consecutive operation corresponding performance, and consecutive operation of the operation button 35 is one of the conditions for executing the setting suggestion. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage active participation in consecutive operation of the operation button 35.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the enjoyments is guessing the setting value while playing. When a reach effect is executed, the player's attention to the game is likely to be heightened. By configuring the machine to suggest a setting value (setting suggestion) when the player's attention is heightened, the chances that the setting suggestion will be overlooked can be reduced.

In addition, when a reach effect is executed, there is a possibility that a winning result will be announced via that reach effect, and so attention to the effect increases. However, when a non-winning result is announced when attention has been high in this way, there is a possibility that attention to the game will drop significantly as expectations decrease. In this regard, by configuring the game so that setting suggestions can be executed in the reach display effect corresponding to a non-winning result, as shown in this feature, it is possible to prevent a large drop in attention when a non-winning result occurs.

As described above, in a configuration in which the set value is suggested by a tactile change, if the player is not touching the target, there is a high possibility that the suggestion will be overlooked. In this regard, in this embodiment, the suggestion is given by the launch operation means (game ball launch handle 41), which the player has a high chance of touching as the game progresses, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

When the operation button 35 is provided as the operation means for the presentation, there is a possibility that the hand will come off the operation means (game ball launching handle 41) that generates a tactile change when the operation button 35 is operated. This is undesirable as it can reduce the actual operating rate of the gaming machine. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the operation means (game ball launching handle 41) other than the operation button 35 is configured to generate a tactile change, players who are hoping for setting suggestions and operation-responsive presentations can be encouraged to operate the operation means for launching the game ball (game ball launching handle 419) with a hand other than the hand that operates it. This can prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

<Modification 1>
In the above fifteenth embodiment, the front door frame 14 (game ball launching handle 41) is equipped with a blower 750, and the wind from the blower 750 transmits a tactile change to the hand operating the game ball launching handle 41. However, a specific configuration for transmitting a tactile change to the hand operating the game ball launching handle 41 may be provided around the game ball launching handle 41 separately from the game ball launching handle 41. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 87, a speaker 760 whose position can be changed is disposed below the game ball launching handle 41, and when a setting suggestion is made, the position of the speaker 760 is changed to face the game ball launching handle 41. By outputting an inaudible sound from the speaker 760 while the speaker 760 is facing the game ball launching handle 41, an air flow toward the game ball launching handle 41 is generated. This air flow is transmitted to the player's hand H operating the game ball launching handle 41 through small holes 767 formed in the front portion 766 of the cover member 765 .

<Modification 2>
In the fifteenth embodiment, a tactile change is transmitted to the hand of the player operating the game ball launching handle 41, but in order to generate a tactile change in an object touched by the player, such as an operating means, a configuration other than the game ball launching handle 41 can be applied as the object. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation button 35 for performance is targeted and a setting suggestion is made by transmitting a tactile change to the hand of the player operating the operation button 35. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 88, a blower 770 may be provided on the rear side of the operation direction of the operation button 775, and the wind output from the blower 770 may be output to the outside of the operation button 775 through a partition portion 777 (slit 779) and an operation surface portion 776 (slit 778) of the operation button 775.

<Modification 3>
In order to provide a setting suggestion through a tactile change, it is not necessarily necessary to generate a tactile change in the operation means operated by the player. For example, a configuration may be provided in the front door frame 14 that can generate a tactile change in a predetermined portion other than the operation means. In such a configuration, when a situation arises in which a setting suggestion may occur, the player is informed of this and prompted to touch the above-mentioned predetermined portion, thereby preventing the setting suggestion from being overlooked.

<Modification 4>
If an insertion section into which the player can insert his/her hand (fingers) is provided on the front section (front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 and a tactile change is conveyed to the hand inserted in the insertion section, the movement of the air blowing means can be prevented from being conspicuous. In this way, if the setting suggestion is made in a place out of the player's field of vision, it becomes even more difficult to identify the change by visual inspection, and it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the sense of surprise regarding the function of suggesting the setting value by a tactile change.

For example, in the specific example shown in FIG. 89, a recess 36 recessed toward the rear of the gaming machine is formed in the rear wall portion (rear wall portion of the lower tray 34) between the upper bulge portion 31 and the lower bulge portion 32 of the front door frame 14. The recess 36 is formed by expanding the most downstream portion (exit portion 37a) of the ball passage 37 leading to the lower tray 34, and is large enough for a player to insert his finger F. An air vent 39 is formed in the inner wall of this recess 36 (more specifically, the ceiling portion 38). If the wind from the air blower 750 built into the front door frame 14 is configured to be ejected into the recess 36 through the air vent 39, it becomes difficult to visually confirm the presence or absence of air blowing from the front of the gaming machine.

<Modification 5>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the setting value is suggested through successive operations of the operation button 35, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting value may be suggested through a single operation in which the operation button 35 is operated only once, or through a so-called long press operation in which the operation button 35 is kept pressed for a predetermined period of time.

In particular, in combination with variant example 2 (a configuration in which setting suggestions are made via operation button 775), by configuring the setting suggestion to be made before the conditions for executing the operation-responsive presentation are met when the setting suggestion is made via the above-mentioned long press operation, i.e., while the long press operation is being performed, it is possible to prevent the tactile changes caused by the setting suggestion from being poorly conveyed to the player.

<Modification 6>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the setting value is suggested based on the operation of the operation button 35, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value when the game ball launch handle 41 is operated at a predetermined timing during a game round, and to avoid suggesting a setting when no operation is performed at the predetermined timing.

<Modification 7>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the tactile change is caused by the wind from the air blower 750, but the specific configuration for causing the tactile change is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to cause a tactile change by changing the temperature of the part that the player touches, or to cause a tactile change by vibrating the part that the player touches.

<Modification 8>
In the above fifteenth embodiment, the variable display mode (super reach) when a tactile change related to a setting suggestion occurs is the same as the variable display mode (super reach) when a tactile change occurs as part of a chance-up performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to configure a configuration in which a tactile change related to a setting suggestion occurs in some of the super reaches A to C, and a configuration in which a tactile change occurs as part of a chance-up performance in other super reaches. Even in this case, since at least a part (more specifically, the first half) of the variable display mode is common in the game rounds related to the super reach, it is possible to avoid the trigger for the occurrence of a tactile change being revealed immediately after the start of the game round.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration is different from the above-mentioned ninth embodiment in that the probability of the suggestion of the setting value (setting suggestion) is corrected based on the reserved status. Specifically, the configuration is different from the ninth embodiment in that the probability of the occurrence of the setting suggestion is changed depending on the acquisition status of the reserved information (the ball entry status into the actuation port 83a, 83b). Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the ninth embodiment, and the description of the configuration common to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

First, the information acquisition process executed as part of the timer interrupt process by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 90 to 92.

(Information Acquisition Processing)
As shown in Fig. 90, in the information acquisition process, first in step S4101, it is determined whether the number of activated pending memories N stored in the reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 432, specifically, the number of activated pending memories N related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process among the upper actuation port 83a and the lower actuation port 83b, is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If the number of activated pending memories N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step S4102, the number of activated pending memories N of the corresponding actuation port is incremented by 1, and in step S4103, the total number of reserved memories (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) stored in the reserved number storage area is incremented by 1.

In the following step S4104, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS updated in the above step S203 are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area RE for the operating port, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN incremented by 1 in the above step S4102. After executing the storage process, proceed to step S4105.

In step S4105, a display update process is executed for the reserved number display section. In this embodiment, the reserved number display section is disposed in the main display section D of the main display unit 87. The reserved number display section is broadly divided into a reserved number display section for the upper operating port and a reserved number display section for the lower operating port, and in this display update process, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the upper operating port 83a, the display of the reserved number display section for the upper operating port is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the lower operating port 83b, the display of the reserved number display section for the lower operating port is updated.

The upper actuation port reservation number display is made up of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs matches the reservation number associated with the upper actuation port 83a. If the reservation number associated with the upper actuation port 83a increases as a result of the current win, the number of lit LEDs is increased accordingly. The lower actuation port reservation number display is similarly made up of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs matches the reservation number associated with the lower actuation port 83b. If the reservation number associated with the lower actuation port 83b increases as a result of the current win, the number of lit LEDs is increased accordingly.

In this embodiment, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays the number of reserved balls, making it easier to check the number of reserved balls, etc. Here, we will provide additional information about the display content of the display screen 253a in this embodiment.

In the display screen 253a, a reserved display area NE is set below the variable display area ME (see FIG. 94) of the pattern row. In the reserved display area NE, a reserved number display area Da is provided, which is partitioned by unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8 arranged in the left-right direction so that the number of unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8 is the same as the maximum number of reserved balls when game balls enter the operating ports 83a and 83b.

Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls is four when the game balls enter the upper operating port 83a, and four when the game balls enter the lower operating port 83b. In other words, a total of eight reserved balls are stored in the order of winning at the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b. Correspondingly, the reserved number display area Da has a first unit reserved display area Da1, a second unit reserved display area Da2, a third unit reserved display area Da3, a fourth unit reserved display area Da4, a fifth unit reserved display area Da5, a sixth unit reserved display area Da6, a seventh unit reserved display area Da7, and an eighth unit reserved display area Da8 set.

For example, if the number of reserved balls (total number of reserved balls) when a game ball enters the operating port 83a, 83b is 1, a predetermined reserved icon MP (image for displaying reserved balls) is displayed only in the first unit reserved ball display area Da1, and if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the operating port 83a, 83b is 4, a predetermined reserved icon MP is displayed in the first unit reserved ball display area Da1 to the fourth unit reserved ball display area Da4.

The hold display area NE also includes an execution target display area Db, which is arranged side-by-side with the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1), and displays a hold icon MP corresponding to the game play to be executed (being executed).

When a game round ends and the next game round begins, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da (first unit hold display area Da1) moves to the execution target display area Db, and the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da shifts downward.

The hold display in the hold display area NE is configured to be updated based on hold commands and shift commands output from the main control unit 162, and is linked to the hold display in the hold number display section.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 90, after the display update process of the hold number display section is executed in step S4105, the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed in step S4106. Here, the confirmation process for the hold notice will be explained with reference to FIG. 91.

(Confirmation process for pending notice)
In the confirmation process for the reserved ball notice, in step S4201, the activation reserved ball memory number N and the common reserved ball number CRN stored in the reserved ball number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432 are read, and the information on the reserved ball number is stored in the register of the MPU 402. After that, in steps S4202 to S4206, it is confirmed whether the reserved ball information acquired by the current winning includes information on a big win. Specifically, first, in step S4202, the information for determining a big win among the reserved ball information acquired in the above step S203 based on the current winning of the activation holes 83a and 83b is grasped, that is, the value of the already acquired winning random number counter C1.

In the next step S4203, it is determined whether or not the mode is low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current win/lose lottery mode is low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If it is low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S4204, and the win/lose table for the low probability mode (FIG. 16) is referenced to determine whether the information for determining the big win grasped in step S4202 (the value of the win random number counter C1) is included in the information group corresponding to the big win. If it is high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S4205, and the win/lose table for the high probability mode (FIG. 17) is referenced to determine whether the information for determining the big win grasped in step S203 (the value of the win random number counter C1) is included in the information set as the big win.

After step S4204 or step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4206, where it is determined whether the information for determining a jackpot obtained in step S4202 (the value of the winning random number counter C1) corresponds to a jackpot win. If it corresponds to a jackpot win, the jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4207, and the confirmation process for this pending notice ends.

In the process of step S4207, the information for determining the type of jackpot among the reserved information acquired in step S203 based on the current winning is obtained, i.e., the value of the already acquired win type counter C2, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the allocation table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4207 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4208. In step S2408, the information for determining whether or not a miss is in the pending information acquired in step S203 based on the current winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b is obtained, that is, the value of the already acquired reach random number counter C3.

In the following step S4209, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the reach determination information grasped in step S4208 (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as a reach win.

After executing the process of step S4209, the process proceeds to step S4210, where it is determined whether the information for reach determination grasped in step S4208 (the value of the reach random number counter C3) corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, in step S4211, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and then this confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

After executing the confirmation process for the hold notice in step S4106, proceed to step S4107 and execute the hold command setting process. Next, the hold command setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 92.

(Setting pending commands)
In the process of setting the reserved command, first, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and whether or not the information for jackpot determination was identified as corresponding to a jackpot win in the immediately preceding reserved notice confirmation process (FIG. 91). If jackpot information is stored, the process proceeds to step S4302, where a reserved command corresponding to a jackpot is set. The setting of the above command and the setting of various commands described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 404. The reserved command corresponding to a jackpot includes information regarding the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4301, that is, if it is judged that no jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S4303, where it is judged whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, thereby judging whether or not the information for reach judgment was identified as corresponding to the reach occurrence in the immediately preceding hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 91). If reach occurrence information is stored, a miss reach corresponding hold command is set in step S4304, and if reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete miss corresponding hold command is set in step S4305.

When setting a hold command in steps S4302, S4304, and S4305, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, and information related to the variable display time is stored in the hold command. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referenced, as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S808 above. The hold command set in this way is sent to the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 can grasp the variable display mode of the pattern, etc. based on the hold command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the variable display time may change depending on the number of hold information stored when starting a game round related to the hold information. Therefore, when setting a hold command for a complete miss, a provisional setting of the variable display time is performed.

After executing the command setting process of step S4302, step S4304, or step S4305, a process of setting the number of reserved items to the reserved command is executed in step S4306. Specifically, the information of the reserved command set above is configured as multiple bytes of information, some of which contain information indicating that the command is a reserved command and information on the type of reserved command, and the number of reserved items can be set.

In step S4306, first, the information on the number of reserved items stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4201 in the immediately preceding confirmation process for the reserved notice (FIG. 91) is read, and then the read information on the number of reserved items is stored in the bit for the information on the number of reserved items in the reserved command that has already been set, using an arithmetic process such as a logical OR. As a result, the reserved command set in any of the processes in steps S4302, S4304, and S4305 contains information for identifying which reserved information corresponds to that reserved command. After the process in step S4306 described above in detail is executed, this reserved command setting process ends.

The hold command containing the information on the number of hold items in step S4306 is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 by the external output process in step S501 in the next normal processing (Figure 23). By receiving the hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines that the amount of hold information has increased. The notification/performance control device 140 also adds hold notice information, which will be described later, to the hold command and sends it to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 executes processes such as hold display and hold notice based on the received hold command.

The method of setting the hold command is arbitrary as long as the notification/performance control device 140 can use the hold command to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot win, whether or not a reach has occurred in the case of a non-jackpot win, in other words, the manner in which the patterns change and are displayed. For example, combinations of hold commands corresponding to a jackpot, hold commands corresponding to a reach that is a miss, and hold commands corresponding to a complete miss are individually set in correspondence with each number of holds, and the hold command setting process can be configured to select one hold command depending on the confirmation result in the hold notice confirmation process (Figure 91).

Next, we will explain the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140. The process related to the hold notice is broadly divided into a command response process that determines the command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice performance setting process that determines the mode of the hold notice.

(Pending command handling process)
In the hold command response process, when a hold command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, a process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed. The hold command response process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

In the pending command response process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444. This command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been previously stored, so that even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. When determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the area of the command storage area 461 that is the current target for reading. Note that this configuration for reading commands is the same when reading out other commands, such as a command to start fluctuations.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area has the first area to the eighth area, and each area is configured to be able to store one hold information. The hold information stored in each area is shifted to the lower area side in order by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, ..., the eighth area to the seventh area, and so on. The hold information storage area of the notification/performance control device 140 is also configured to store hold information in chronological order regardless of the ball entry destination, similar to the hold ball storage area 432 (more specifically, the hold area RE) of the main control device 162. More specifically, the hold number information included in the command received this time is identified, and the above various information is stored in the area corresponding to the identified hold number information among the first area to the eighth area.

When the above-mentioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 444, and when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. Each of these flags triggers the setting process for the hold notice performance described below, and is erased when the setting process for the hold notice performance is completed.

The MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 performs setting processing for the hold notice performance based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. Here, the hold notice performance setting processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 93. Note that the hold notice performance setting processing is executed as part of periodic processing that is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 msec), and is executed on the condition that the above-mentioned hold command or shift command is received. In other words, in this embodiment, the hold notice performance is triggered when hold information is acquired in conjunction with a win at the operation port 83a, 83b, or when hold information is consumed as the game progresses.

(Setting process for holding notice performance)
In the setting process for the on-hold notice performance, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the on-hold notice performance is being performed. If the determination in step S4401 is affirmative, the setting process for the on-hold notice performance is terminated. If the determination in step S4401 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4402.

In step S4402, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a positive determination is made in step S4402, a lottery process is executed in step S4403 when a hold command is received, and it is determined whether or not a hold notice performance is to be performed. If a negative determination is made in step S4402, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a negative determination is made in step S4404, that is, if it is determined that neither a hold command nor a shift command has been received, the hold notice performance setting process is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S4404, a lottery process is executed in step S4405 when a shift command is received, and it is determined whether or not a hold notice performance is to be performed.

After executing the process of step S4403 or step S4405, the process proceeds to step S4406. In step S4406, it is determined whether or not the hold notice has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S4406, the process for setting the hold notice performance is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4406, the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area of RAM 444. The hold notice flag set in step S4407 will be erased when the hold notice performance ends. In the above step S4401, it is determined whether or not the hold notice is in progress based on whether or not the hold notice flag is set.

Then, in step S4408, the mode of the hold preview performance (hold preview pattern) is determined. After that, in step S4409, the preview performance start process is executed, and then the hold preview performance setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, two types of notice effects with different notice patterns are provided as the hold notice effect. Specifically, there is an explicit hold notice that indicates the game time (hereinafter referred to as the relevant game time) related to the hold information that triggered the hold notice (hereinafter referred to as the relevant hold or the relevant hold information) before the relevant game time, and an implicit hold notice that does not indicate the relevant hold and the relevant game time until the relevant game time. In step S4408, a single notice with an implicit notice effect, a single notice with an explicit notice effect, or a combined notice with an implicit notice effect and an explicit notice effect are selected. Each notice effect is explained below with reference to the schematic diagram in FIG. 94.

As shown in FIG. 94(a), the non-explicit preview effect is executed by displaying a predetermined preview pattern (more specifically, a video) in the variable display area ME on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. Specifically, it is executed by displaying a predetermined preview pattern during the game round that triggered the hold preview and during the game round executed prior to that.

More specifically, a specified preview image is displayed in conjunction with the start of the display of the changing patterns (in conjunction with the shift of the reserved balls). The display of this specified preview image continues until the game round (hereinafter referred to as the relevant game round) occurs, which is related to the reserved information that triggered the reserved preview (hereinafter referred to as the relevant reserved ball or the relevant reserved information). In this way, by focusing on the fact that it is not made clear which reserved information triggered the start of the reserved preview, i.e., it is not made clear, at least until the relevant game round occurs, it can be said that the non-disclosed preview performance is a reserved preview performance that has been given the function of increasing attention to all remaining reserved balls by making it difficult to identify the relevant reserved ball.

There are multiple patterns of preview images to be displayed in the non-declared preview performance. In this embodiment, an image of bubbles is displayed (variably displayed) as the preview image for the non-declared preview performance, and there are multiple patterns with different amounts and sizes of bubbles to be displayed. Specifically, there are three patterns: Level 1, which has a small amount of bubbles and small size; Level 2, which has a larger amount of bubbles and larger size than Level 1; and Level 3, which has an even larger amount of bubbles and larger size than Level 2.

Non-explicit preview effects include fixed preview effects in which the level selected at the start of the preview effect is maintained until the preview effect ends, and step-up preview effects in which the level increases as the game progresses (as the preview continues). The allocation of these types is based on a non-explicit preview effect allocation table stored in the lottery table storage area of ROM 443.

The non-display notice performance allocation table is composed of a table in which the corresponding reserve corresponds to a jackpot result, a table in which the corresponding reserve corresponds to each of the Super Reach A to C that misses, a table in which the corresponding reserve corresponds to each of the Normal Reach A and B that misses, and a table in which the corresponding reserve corresponds to a complete miss. As already explained, in this embodiment, the order of the jackpot expectation at the time of occurrence of the variable display is set to be higher in the order of Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A > Complete Miss. And, the above-mentioned tables are configured so that the higher the jackpot expectation set in the various variable display modes, the higher the proportion (the higher the selection rate) of the final level, in the order of Level 1 < Level 2 < Level 3. Therefore, the expectation of a jackpot result is higher when a non-display notice performance corresponding to Level 2 is executed than when a non-display notice performance corresponding to Level 1 is executed, and the expectation of a jackpot result is even higher when a non-display notice performance corresponding to Level 3 is executed.

Whether a fixed or step-up preview performance is selected, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation of a big win. When a non-explicit preview performance is executed, it is difficult to tell from appearance whether it is a fixed or step-up type when the preview performance starts, and the expectation that the level will rise remains until the preview performance ends. When the non-explicit preview performance starts, the player will expect the level to rise as the non-explicit preview performance continues for many more play times. Therefore, by deliberately not indicating the number of play times, it is possible to maintain the expectation.

Next, we will explain the explicit notice performance, focusing on the differences from the non-explicit notice performance. As shown in Figure 94 (b), the explicit notice performance is executed by changing the appearance of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) to one that corresponds to the hold notice. Specifically, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da that corresponds to the relevant play count (relevant hold) is changed (in this embodiment, the color is changed).

Explicit preview effects are broadly divided into fixed preview effects, in which the color of the changed pending icon MP is maintained until it shifts to the execution target display area Db, and step-up preview effects, in which the color changes before it shifts to the execution target display area Db.

Even in the explicit preview performance, there are multiple patterns set for the color of the hold icon MP displayed. Specifically, there are three patterns set: blue level 1, yellow level 2, and red level 3. Note that the color of the hold icon MP that is not the subject of the explicit preview performance is white.

In the case of a clear notice performance, if the reserved position corresponds to a jackpot result, level 3
> Level 2 > Level 1 are more likely to be selected in that order, and if the reserved ball corresponds to a missed ball result, it is more likely to be selected in the order of Level 1 > Level 2 > Level 3. In other words, when the explicit notice performance is selected, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation of a big win result.

The difference between the above-mentioned non-explicit advance notice effect and the explicit advance notice effect is that it does not clearly indicate which reserved information triggered the start of the reserved advance notice until the relevant play round is reached, whereas the explicit advance notice effect clearly indicates which reserved information triggered the start of the reserved advance notice. In this way, by clearly indicating the relevant reserve, it is possible to effectively increase attention to the relevant play round.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram in FIG. 95, a supplementary explanation will be given on the relationship between the setting value and the degree of advantage. As already explained, the degree of advantage for the player is configured to increase in the order of setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1. When the probability of winning into the actuation ports 83a, 83b is within a preset reference range, settings 1 and 2 are configured to be more advantageous for the player than the game hall, and setting 3 is configured to be more advantageous for the game hall than the player. In particular, when comparing settings 1 and 2, setting 1 is more advantageous for the player than setting 2.

In this embodiment, the setting suggestions are configured so that their occurrence probability increases in the order of Setting 3 < Setting 2 < Setting 1, and it is assumed that players hoping for a setting that is advantageous to them will pay attention to the setting suggestions while playing. Here, an overview of the setting suggestions in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 96. Figure 96(a) is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged variable display area ME of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a), and Figure 96(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the occurrence probability of the setting suggestions.

In this embodiment, the image (image imitating bubbles) used for the preview effect (non-explicit preview effect) described above is repurposed as a setting suggestion. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(a), the setting suggestion is executed by displaying the image imitating bubbles under the condition that the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is displayed in a stopped state (determined display). In the following description, the image imitating bubbles displayed during the determined display is referred to as the setting suggestion image.

Whether or not to display this setting suggestion image is determined by lottery with reference to the setting suggestion lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443. As shown in FIG. 96(b), the probability of the setting suggestion being executed by this lottery is 30% for setting 3.
The settings are set in the order of increasing value: < Setting 2 < Setting 1. For this reason, the more frequently (the more times) the setting suggestion image is displayed, the greater the expectation that the setting value will be advantageous to the player.

In more detail, the probability that a setting suggestion image will be displayed when the setting is set to 3 is approximately 1%, the probability that a setting suggestion image will be displayed when the setting is set to 2 is approximately 1.5%, and the probability that a setting suggestion image will be displayed when the setting is set to 1 is approximately 2%. Considering that a lottery for determining whether a setting suggestion is possible is held for each game played, if approximately 500 games are played, the number of times that a setting suggestion image will be displayed when the setting is set to 1 is approximately 10, the number of times that a setting suggestion image will be displayed when the setting is set to 2 is approximately 7.5, and the number of times that a setting suggestion image will be displayed when the setting is set to 3 is approximately 5. In contrast, if approximately 2000 games are played, the number of times that a setting suggestion image will be displayed when the setting is set to 1 is approximately 40, the number of times that a setting suggestion image will be displayed when the setting is set to 2 is approximately 30, and the number of times that a setting suggestion image will be displayed when the setting is set to 3 is approximately 20. In other words, it takes a certain amount of time to improve the accuracy of predicting the setting value.

Here, the probability of winning through the actuation ports 83a, 83b can vary for various reasons. That is, the probability of winning varies due to the influence of long-term factors such as deformation of the game pins 93 caused by repeated collisions of game balls with the game pins 93 over time, individual differences during the manufacture of the game machine, and deformation of the game pins 93 during maintenance work such as cleaning, and short-term factors such as temporary bias in winning. Since the drawing of the setting suggestion is triggered by the execution of a game round (winning through the actuation ports 83a, 83b), variations in the probability of winning may also cause variations in the probability of a setting suggestion occurring.

One of the features of this embodiment is that the suggested probability of the set value is changed depending on the winning status of the game balls in the actuation port 83a. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 97, the above-mentioned reference range is set for the winning probability in the actuation port 83a, and if the winning probability falls outside this reference range, the suggested probability of the set value is changed. In this embodiment, the interval time of the game balls is 0.6 sec, and approximately 100 game balls are launched in one minute. The above reference range is a design value that specifies the number of game balls that will enter the actuation port 83a out of the game balls launched in one minute.

The setting value suggestion setting process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 will be described below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 98. The setting suggestion setting process is a process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 as part of the periodic processing (processing for starting fluctuations: see Figure 31).

(Setting process for suggesting setting values)
In the setting value suggestion setting process, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If a positive determination is made in step S4501, the setting value suggestion setting process is terminated. In other words, in this embodiment, setting suggestions are avoided during the high frequency support mode. Note that, since the fluctuation start process is not executed during the opening/closing execution mode, setting suggestions are avoided in the same manner as in the high frequency support mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4501, the process proceeds to step S4502. In step S4502, it is judged whether or not the above-mentioned preview performance is being performed. Specifically, it is judged whether or not the above-mentioned hold preview flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a positive judgment is made in step S4502, the setting value suggestion setting process is terminated. In other words, in this embodiment, when the hold preview performance is being performed, the setting suggestion is avoided.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4502, the process proceeds to step S4503. In step S4503, it is judged whether the currently stored pending information includes information corresponding to a jackpot result. If a negative judgment is made in step S403, the process proceeds to step S4504. In step S4504, the winning status in the actuation port 83a is identified. In this embodiment, one minute is one cycle, and the number of pending information obtained (number of winnings in the actuation port 83a) is stored for each cycle. In step S4504, if one cycle has elapsed in the current setting suggestion setting process, the current number of obtained information (number of winnings) is identified, and if one cycle has elapsed, the number of obtained information (number of winnings) in the previous cycle is identified. In the following explanation, one minute is also referred to as a "unit time".

In the next step S4505, it is determined whether the number of pending information acquisitions per unit time is within a reference range. If a negative determination is made in step S4505, i.e., if it is outside the reference range, a probability correction process is executed in step S4506.

The probability correction process first checks the current setting value. If the setting value is setting 1 or setting 2, the first correction process is performed, and if the setting value is setting 3, the second correction process is performed.

In the first correction process, the lottery table to be referenced in the lottery process described below is switched from the lottery table corresponding to the reference range to the lottery table corresponding outside the reference range, among the lottery tables provided for each set value. As a result, the winning probability is lowered when the number of pending information acquisitions exceeds the upper limit of the reference range, and the winning probability is raised when the number of pending information acquisitions is below the lower limit of the reference range.

In more detail, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 99, when the number of pending information acquisitions exceeds the upper limit, the probability of winning decreases as the deviation from the upper limit increases until it reaches the lower limit of the winning probability, and when the number of pending information acquisitions is below the lower limit, the probability of winning increases as the deviation from the lower limit increases until it reaches the upper limit of the winning probability. However, even when such a change in probability is made, the lower limit of the winning probability in setting 1 is higher than the upper limit of the winning probability in setting 2, and the lower limit of the winning probability in setting 2 is higher than the winning probability (upper limit) in setting 3, ensuring a difference in the winning probability for each setting.

In contrast, the second correction process references a standard table regardless of the reference range, and is configured so that the probability of winning remains constant even if the result is outside the reference range.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 98, if a positive judgment is made in step S4503, or if a positive judgment is made in step S4505, the process proceeds to step S4507 after executing the processing of step S4506, and the setting suggestion lottery processing is executed.

If the lottery process in step S4507 results in a non-winning result, the setting process for this setting suggestion is terminated. If the lottery process in step S4507 results in a winning result, the process proceeds to step S4509. In step S4509, a setting suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444, and the setting process for this setting suggestion is terminated.

When the setting suggestion flag is set in the setting suggestion setting process, the above-mentioned setting suggestion image is displayed after the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed in the variation end process (see Figure 30) (during the confirmation display).

The 16th embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

In general, a flow path is formed in the game area by arranging game components such as game pins, but in such a configuration, variations in the frequency of balls entering the game may occur due to individual differences in game machines and temporary biases. For example, if balls enter the game at a fairly constant rate, the game progresses smoothly and dissatisfaction with the game decreases, whereas if balls do not enter the game successfully for a long period of time, the player's dissatisfaction increases and his motivation to play decreases. This decrease in motivation to play is undesirable because it hinders efforts to improve the operation rate of game machines. Here, as shown in this embodiment, in a game machine with a setting change function, it is expected that the attention to the game will be increased by suggesting the setting value. By using such a configuration and changing the suggestion probability according to the ball entry situation (for example, by configuring the suggestion probability to be increased when balls do not enter the game successfully), the decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suitably suppressed, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Changing the probability of setting suggestions depending on the winning situation is preferable in terms of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play. However, when making such adjustments, there is a concern that the increased control load in monitoring the winning situation may hinder smooth game progress. In this regard, if the winning situation is determined based on the number of reserved information stored, as shown in this embodiment, the winning situation can be easily monitored, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be effectively prevented.

When the number of balls entering the actuation port 83a is less than expected (reference value) in a situation where the setting value is relatively favorable to the player (in this embodiment, setting 1 to setting 2), the probability of the setting value being suggested is adjusted to be higher. In this way, by increasing the opportunities for the setting value to be suggested in a situation where the player's motivation to play is likely to decrease, the effect of suppressing the decrease in motivation to play can be preferably exerted.

When the number of balls entering the actuation port 83a is greater than expected (standard) under conditions where the setting value is relatively favorable to the player (setting 1 to setting 2 in this embodiment), the probability of suggesting the setting value is adjusted to be lower. In this way, by reducing the opportunities for the setting value to be suggested in conditions where the player's motivation to play is unlikely to decrease, it is possible to prevent the number of suggestions for the setting value from becoming excessively large overall, even if, for example, the number of balls entering the ball increases. Note that when balls enter the ball with a certain degree of consistency, the game will proceed smoothly and the player's motivation to play is unlikely to decrease. Therefore, it is meaningful to have a configuration that does not intentionally increase the probability of suggestion in such conditions.

Actively informing the player that the setting value is unfavorable can reduce the player's motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, when the setting value is set to Setting 3, the occurrence probability is avoided from being corrected even if the ball-scoring situation is below the standard, so that the occurrence of such inconveniences can be effectively suppressed.

If the stored reserved information includes information corresponding to a jackpot result, the player's motivation to play is unlikely to decrease even if the setting suggestion probability is not changed. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by specifying the lottery result in advance and determining whether or not to change the occurrence probability based on that result.

For example, when an effect that suggests a big win is executed, attention to the game increases. In such a situation, it is expected that a decline in motivation to play will be suppressed even if the occurrence probability is not changed. Therefore, by configuring the game so that the occurrence probability of the hint is not changed when such an effect is expected to occur, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

In the high-frequency support mode, where the ball entry frequency is high, balls will enter the operating port with a certain degree of frequency. For this reason, even if the ball entry frequency decreases due to individual differences or bias, it is unlikely to become a factor that leads to a decrease in motivation to play. Therefore, by configuring the low-frequency support mode so that the occurrence probability can be changed, while configuring the high-frequency support mode so that the occurrence probability is not changed, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

<Modification 1>
In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the notification/performance control device 140 is configured to store the transition of the reserved number over time for each cycle, and the setting suggestion probability is determined based on the transition, but the specific configuration for determining the setting suggestion probability taking into account the winning situation is not limited to this. For example, when the winning is monitored by the monitoring device 600, it is also possible to read out the information (the number of game balls shot and the number of balls that enter) stored in the monitoring device 600 and determine the setting suggestion probability based on the winning probability calculated from the information.

<Modification 2>
In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the suggested probability of the set value is determined based on the ball entry status into the operating port 83a, but instead of or in addition to this, the suggested probability of the set value may be determined based on the ball entry status into other ball entry sections (for example, the general winning port 81 or the variable winning device 82).

<Modification 3>
In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the setting value of the suggestion probability (winning probability) is corrected according to the number of reserved information acquired within a unit time (1 minute), but this may be modified as follows. That is, the winning probability may be corrected by using a first correction value that corrects the winning probability according to the number of reserved information acquired within a first predetermined time (e.g., 1 minute) in combination with a second correction value that corrects the winning probability according to the number of reserved information acquired within a second predetermined time (e.g., 1 hour) that is longer than the first predetermined time. That is, the first correction value when the winning probability is temporarily decreased/increased and the second correction value when the winning probability is constantly low/high may be used in combination. The above-mentioned winning probability is affected by individual differences of the gaming machine and temporary variations. Therefore, by using the above-mentioned two correction values in combination (e.g., actual suggestion probability = standard suggestion probability x first correction value x second correction value), a suggestion probability suitable for each situation can be obtained.

<Modification 4>
In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the setting value suggestion probability (winning probability) is configured to deviate from the reference value more as the number of pending information acquisitions deviates from the reference range, but this is not limited to this. As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 100 (a), the number of pending information acquisitions may be divided into a plurality of ranges, and a correction value may be set for each range.

<Modification 5>
In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the suggestion probability (winning probability) of each set value is distinguished so as not to overlap, but it is not limited to this. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 100 (b), it is also possible to configure the winning probability to overlap partially for a plurality of set values.

<Modification 6>
When the number of pending information items obtained is within a standard range, the lottery table for setting suggestions that is referenced can also be subdivided according to the number of pending information items obtained.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the setting value is suggested to the player (setting suggestion) in the same manner as in the ninth embodiment, but the specific configuration related to the setting suggestion is different from that of the ninth embodiment. The configuration related to the setting suggestion in this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the ninth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), in this embodiment, the configuration of the game board unit 80 (play area forming body 80a) is different from that of the ninth embodiment. Specifically, an actuation port unit 83 having an upper actuation port 83a and a lower actuation port 83b is disposed in the lower center of the play area PE.

As shown in FIG. 101(b), the operating port unit 83 is formed with a guide passage 83c that guides game balls that flow into the upper operating port 83a to a recovery passage provided on the back side of the play area forming body 80a. The guide passage 83c branches into a first branch passage 83d and a second branch passage 83e at a midpoint.

At the branching position in the guide passage 83c, a distribution means 83g is provided that alternately distributes game balls that reach the branching position to the first branching passage 83d and the second branching passage 83e. The distribution means 83g is switchable between a first guide state in which the game ball that reaches the branching position is guided to the first branching passage 83d and a second guide state in which the game ball is guided to the second branching passage 83e. This distribution means 83g is configured to switch from one guide state to the other guide state based on the game ball that has been guided. Therefore, the game balls that flow into the upper operating port 83a are sequentially distributed to the first branching passage 83d/second branching passage 83e.

The lower actuation port 83b is connected to the second branch passage 83e via the communication passage 83f, and game balls that flow into the lower actuation port 83b flow directly into the second branch passage 83e. In other words, game balls that flow into the upper actuation port 83a can flow into both branch passages 83d and 83e, while game balls that flow into the lower actuation port 83b flow only into the second branch passage 83e.

A detection sensor 811c for detecting game balls is disposed in the first branch passage 83d (hereinafter also referred to as the first ball entry section 83d), and a detection sensor 811d for detecting game balls is disposed in the second branch passage 83e (hereinafter also referred to as the second ball entry section 83e) downstream of the communicating section of the connecting passage 83f. These detection sensors 811c, 811d are connected to the main control device, and the main control device determines whether or not a ball has entered the branch passages 83d, 83e, i.e., whether or not a prize has been awarded at the ball entry sections 83d, 83e, based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensors 811c, 811d.

In this embodiment, the main control device 162 (more specifically, the reserved ball storage area 432) is provided with a reserved area Rx, which is a combination of the reserved areas Ra and Rb shown in the first embodiment, and an execution area AE. The reserved area Rx is provided with a first area Rx1 to an eighth area Rx8, and reserved information acquired by winning in the first ball entry section 83d and the second ball entry section 83e is stored in the first area Rx1 to the eighth area Rx8 in the order of winning.

Next, referring to FIG. 101(c), the main display section D of the main display unit 87 will be described. The main display section D has a first ball entry section display section 843 that displays the results of a lottery based on winning in the first ball entry section 83d, and a second ball entry section display section 844 that displays the results of a lottery based on winning in the second ball entry section 83e.

In the display unit 843 for the first ball entry section, a winning entry into the first ball entry section 83d is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the first ball entry section 83d. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the first ball entry section 83d is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the display stopping in the display unit 843 for the first ball entry section is stopped, a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the transition to the opening and closing execution mode is made.

In the second ball entry section display section 844, a changing image display is triggered by winning in the second ball entry section 83e, and the result of the changing display stopping is the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning in the second ball entry section 83e being clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the second ball entry section 83e is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot or special win, the changing display is stopped in the second ball entry section display section 844, a specified image is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening/closing execution mode is entered depending on the result.

Here, based on a win in any of the winning sections 83d, 83e, a variable display is started in the corresponding winning section display section 843, 844, and a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped (confirmed display) corresponds to one round of play. However, one round of play is not limited to the above, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the variable display is performed in that single display area regardless of whether a win occurs in any of the winning sections 83d, 83e, a variable display may be started in that single display area and a game round may be considered to be until the variable display is stopped (confirmed display) with the predetermined stop result displayed.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which game balls are reserved for up to four times each through the first ball entry section 83d and the second ball entry section 83e (up to eight balls in total), and the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is provided with a first reserved number display section 845 and a second reserved number display section 846 that display the number of reserved balls in each of the ball entry sections 83d and 83e, respectively.

In addition to the ball entry section displays 843 and 844, the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is also provided with a through gate display section 847 that displays the lottery results based on winning at the through gate 84. The through gate display section 847 displays the changing patterns of the image triggered by winning at the through gate 84, and the result of the stopping of the changing display is displayed as the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning at the through gate 84. If the result of the internal lottery (support lottery) based on winning at the through gate 84 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role opening state, the through gate display section 847 displays a predetermined stopping result, the changing display is stopped, and then the electric role opening state is entered. In the electric role opening state, the electric role 91 provided in the operating port unit 83 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In this embodiment, the reserved number is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 in conjunction with the display of the reserved number display sections 845 and 846 of the main display section D, thereby taking into consideration the convenience of the player when checking the reserved number. Below, an overview of the reserved display on the pattern display device 253 will be explained with reference to FIG. 102.

In the display screen 253a, a reserve display area NE is set below the variable display area ME, which includes the variable display area for the upper pattern row, the variable display area for the middle pattern, and the variable display area for the lower pattern. In the reserve display area NE, a reserve number display area Da is provided, which is partitioned so that unit reserve display areas Da1 to Da8, the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the operation port 83a, 83b (specifically, when a ball enters the ball entry section 83d, 83e), are lined up in the left-right direction.

Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls is four when the game ball enters the first ball entry section 83d, and four when the game ball enters the second ball entry section 83e. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, a total of eight reserved balls are stored in the order of winning in the first ball entry section 83d and the second ball entry section 83e. Corresponding to this, the reserved number display area Da is set with a first unit reserved display area Da1, a second unit reserved display area Da2, a third unit reserved display area Da3, a fourth unit reserved display area Da4, a fifth unit reserved display area Da5, a sixth unit reserved display area Da6, a seventh unit reserved display area Da7, and an eighth unit reserved display area Da8. Reserve icons MP are displayed in these unit reserved display areas as predetermined reserved display images.

For example, if the number of reserved balls is 0 when the game ball enters the operating port 83a, 83b, i.e., if the current winning brings the number of reserved balls (total number of reserved balls) to 1, the reserved icon MP is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Da1. If the number of reserved balls becomes 4 when the game ball enters the operating port 83a, 83b, the reserved icon MP is displayed in the first unit reserved display area Da1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Da4. Note that Figure 102 shows an example where the number of reserved balls is 3.

The pending display area NE also has an execution target display area Db, which is arranged side by side with the pending number display area Da (specifically, the first unit pending display area Da1), and in which a pending icon MP corresponding to the number of plays to be executed (being executed) is displayed. In this embodiment, the execution target display area Db is arranged to the left of the pending number display area Da, but the positional relationship between these is arbitrary. For example, the execution target display area Db may be arranged to the right of the pending number display area Da.

When a game round ends and the next game round begins, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1) shifts (moves) to the execution target display area Db. If there are other hold icons MP displayed in the hold number display area Da, these hold icons MP will also shift to the (adjacent) unit hold display area closer to the execution target display area Db. For ease of explanation, hereafter, the side closer to the execution target display area Db will be referred to as the "downstream side" and the side opposite the execution target display area Db as the "upstream side."

Next, referring to the block diagram in FIG. 103, we will provide additional explanation on the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410.

The notification/performance control board 441 provided in the notification/performance control device 140 is equipped with an MPU 442. The MPU 442 has built-in ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, RAM 444 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 443 and RAM 444 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 442, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This is also true for the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives from the main control device 162 game round control commands (game round control information) such as the fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command, as already explained. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and furthermore, open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the display lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 140 are sent to the display control device 410 with the information format maintained as is.

The display control device 410 includes an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are integrated into a chip, a display control board 471 on which a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 472, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 140, or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the various commands received, to control the VDP 475 (specifically, generates internal commands for the VDP 475). More specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process to identify the variable display pattern for each game round in the pattern display device 253 based on the commands sent from the notification/performance control device 140, as well as a process related to the hold notice described below, and executes a drawing process for the VDP 475 in response to the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 472 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 474.

The VDP 475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 253. The VDP 475 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 472, video RAM 477, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 477 from the character ROM 476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 253.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 253. This character ROM 476 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and the like.

The character ROM 476 also has, as part of the above data, a reserved image data storage area 481 in which image data (reserved icon MP) for display in the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 253 and image data for the partition frame to be displayed in the execution target display area Db are stored, and a preview performance image data storage area 482 in which image data to be displayed when a preview performance described below is executed is stored. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 476 and have each character ROM 476 store image data, etc., in a shared manner. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 476 to store JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 253, and the display content of the pattern display device 253 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 477. The video RAM 477 is provided with a hold display area 491 and an execution display area 492 that correspond to the hold display area NE.

In the hold display area 491, the first to eighth unit areas are set so as to correspond one-to-one with the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 in the hold area RE for the operating port. In each unit hold display area Da1 to Da8 of the hold number display area Da on the display screen 253a, the hold icon MP is displayed according to the hold display information (data) written in each unit area. Note that in the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 corresponding to unit areas for which no data is set, no image is displayed or the background image of the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is displayed.

The execution display area 492 corresponds to the execution area AE. In the execution target display area Db on the display screen 253a, the above-mentioned pending icon MP is displayed according to the data written in the execution display area 492. Note that if no data is set, the background image on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is displayed.

As described above, the hold display on the pattern display device 253 is linked to the display of the hold number display sections 845, 846 of the main display unit 87, and is controlled by hold commands and shift commands sent from the main control device 162. Here, the hold command and shift command response processing executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 104 to 106. The hold command and shift command response processing is included in the command response processing executed as part of regular processing.

(Hold command and shift command handling)
As shown in FIG. 104, in the pending command and shift command corresponding processing, a pending notice display process is executed in step S4601, a setting suggestion process is executed in step S4602, and the various information determined in steps S4601 and S4602 is added to the pending command and shift command in step S4603, and then the pending command or shift command is transferred to the display control device 410 in step S4604.

(Processing for holding notice performance)
As shown in FIG. 105, in the process for the reserved notice performance in step S4601, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not a reserved command has been received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reserved command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a positive determination is made in step S4601, the process proceeds to step S4602, and it is determined whether or not the special display mode is in effect. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, a normal display mode and a special display mode are provided as the display mode of the reserved number in the pattern display device 253, and if the special display mode is in effect, a positive determination is made in step S4702, and the process for the reserved notice performance is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703.

In step S4703, a lottery process is executed when a hold command is received. In the lottery process related to the hold command, the lottery target for the hold notice is limited to the newly added hold information. In other words, a lottery for the hold notice is performed based on the information stored in the area corresponding to the hold command received this time out of the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the hold information storage area 467 of RAM 444. This lottery is performed by determining from the stored information whether the game round related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether a reach display will be displayed, and if a reach display is displayed, the pattern, and based on the corresponding lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 463.

In the lottery table storage area of ROM 443, the following lottery tables are stored as lottery tables to be used when a hold command is received: a lottery table for a jackpot, a lottery table for a miss normal reach A, a lottery table for a miss normal reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach A, a lottery table for a miss super reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach C, and a lottery table for a complete miss.

These tables are set up so that the probability of winning increases in the following order: Jackpot > Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A > Complete Miss.

Returning to the explanation of step S4701, if a negative determination is made in step S4701, i.e., if it is determined that a hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4704. In step S4704, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S4704, i.e., if neither a hold command nor a shift command has been received, the process for setting up the hold notice performance is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4704, a lottery process is executed at the time of receiving a shift command in step S4705.

In the lottery process related to the shift command, the lottery subject for the hold notice is all the hold information remaining after the shift. In other words, the lottery for the hold notice is conducted based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the hold information storage area 467 of the RAM 444. This lottery is conducted individually for each piece of stored information. The lottery order (priority order) is specified to be the most recent first (eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7 → ... → first area Rc1). For example, if the common hold number CRN is "2", first the lottery is conducted based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, and if this lottery is not successful, the lottery is conducted based on the information stored in the first area Rc1.

In particular, in this embodiment, as the value of the common hold number CRN increases, the variable display time in the game round corresponding to a complete miss is shortened. Therefore, by giving priority to new hold information as described above, the period of the preview performance when a hold preview is executed can be suitably secured. The variable display time is set to be shorter the more hold information is stored, but in particular, when the number of stored hold information has reached the upper limit (8), the degree of time reduction is configured to be greater, taking into consideration the fact that hold information is not acquired even if a new ball enters the operating port 83a.

As with the case of receiving a hold command, the lottery method is carried out by determining from the stored information whether the game related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether a reach display will be displayed, and if a reach display is displayed, the pattern, and then based on the corresponding lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 463.

In the lottery table storage area of ROM 443, the following lottery tables are stored as lottery tables to be used when a shift command is received: a lottery table for a jackpot, a lottery table for a miss normal reach A, a lottery table for a miss normal reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach A, a lottery table for a miss super reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach C, and a lottery table for a complete miss.

These tables are set so that the probability of winning increases in the following order: jackpot > Super reach C > Super reach B > Super reach A > Normal reach B > Normal reach A > Complete miss. However, these lottery tables for when a shift command is received are set so that the probability of winning the reserved notice is lower when compared to the lottery tables for when the above-mentioned hold command is received. For example, when comparing lottery tables for jackpots, the probability of winning when referring to the lottery tables for when a shift command is received is set lower than the probability of winning when referring to the lottery tables for when a hold command is received.

However, if the value of the common hold number CRN (number of holds) is less than a predetermined number ("4" in this embodiment), the overall probability of winning is lower than when the hold command was received, but if the value of the common hold number CRN (number of holds) is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the overall probability of winning is set to be higher than when the hold command was received.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the value of the common hold number CRN exceeds the above-mentioned specified number ("4"), the degree of shortening of the variable display time in a game turn corresponding to a complete miss becomes greater compared to when the value of the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the above-mentioned specified number ("4"). While this can speed up the game progress, there is a concern that the monotony of the game progress becomes more noticeable. In this regard, with the above configuration, when the number of holds increases and the shortening of the variable display time becomes noticeable, a hold notice is more likely to occur. This is preferable in terms of speeding up the game progress while preventing a decrease in attention to the game.

After the lottery process of step S4703 or step S4705 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4706. In step S4706, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the hold notice performance are met in the lottery process. If a negative determination is made in step S4706, i.e., if no winner is found in steps S4703 and S4705, the hold notice performance setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S4706, a hold notice performance pattern determination process is executed in the following step S4707, and the hold notice performance pattern determined in the following step S4708 is stored, after which the hold notice performance setting process is terminated.

If a decision is made to perform a hold notice performance, based on the information stored in step S4708, the hold information will not be included in the lottery for the hold notice performance until the game round related to the hold information is executed. The stored information is then erased when the hold information moves to the execution area.

Here, we will explain the types of hold preview effects (more specifically, the preview effects executed in the hold display area NE).

(Types of reserved notice performance)
All of the reserved notice performances have in common that they are configured to suggest the likelihood of a big win by changing the display mode of the reserved icon MP displayed in the reserved display area NE. The display mode (color) of the reserved icon MP is set to four colors: white, blue, yellow, and red. Of these colors, white is the standard, and when the reserved notice performance is executed, the reserved icon MP becomes another color (blue, yellow, red).

The colors of the reserved icon MP are set in the order of white < blue < yellow < red, so that the likelihood of a jackpot result increases. Specifically, when a reserved notice is issued with a reserved icon MP corresponding to a game that will result in a jackpot, the colors are more likely to be selected in the order of white < blue < yellow < red, whereas when a reserved notice is issued with a reserved icon MP corresponding to a game that will result in a miss, the colors are more likely to be selected in the order of red < yellow < blue < white.

The reserved notice performance is broadly divided into a first type notice performance, which is a fixed reserved notice performance, and a second type notice performance, which is a step-up reserved notice performance, according to the display mode (color change) of the reserved icon MP. In the first type notice performance, after the color of the reserved icon MP changes, the color of the reserved icon is maintained until the corresponding game round (until it moves to the execution target display area Db). In contrast, in the second type notice performance, the color of the reserved icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the color that will eventually change is red, it will first change to a lower color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation level, and then step up (promote) to a higher color with a higher expectation level at the timing when the reserved icon MP shifts. By using these two types of reserved notice performances in combination, even if the color has a low expectation level, there is a possibility that it will change to a color with a higher expectation level by the time the corresponding game round is reached. This prevents the attention to the reserved notice performance from decreasing early.

The color of the hold icon MP does not only change in the hold number display area Da, but may also change when moving to the execution target display area Db. For example, when a hold icon MP that is yellow in the hold number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP may change to red, or when a hold icon MP that is white in the hold number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP may change to another color (blue, yellow, red)

In this embodiment, the information provided to the player in the pending display area NE includes not only the number of game balls and the expected outcome such as winning or losing, but also information related to setting value suggestions. Specifically, the pending display mode may be switched to the above-mentioned special display mode to provide setting suggestions. Here, the setting suggestion process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 106. The setting suggestion process is executed on the condition that the pending display mode in the pending display area NE is the normal display mode.

(Setting suggestion processing)
In the setting suggestion process, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not a reserved child command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a reserved command has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S4801, and this setting suggestion process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4801, the process proceeds to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information items stored has reached a predetermined number (seven in this embodiment) by adding reserved information with the current reserved command. If a negative determination is made in step S4802, this setting suggestion process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4803. In step S4803, it is judged whether or not the currently ongoing game round is not compatible with the reach display. If a negative judgment is made in step S4803, i.e., if the reach display is compatible, the setting suggestion process ends as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S4803, i.e., if the reach display is not compatible, the process proceeds to step S4804.

In step S4804, it is determined whether the remaining time in the current game round, more specifically, the remaining variable display time, is longer than a predetermined time. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, a certain amount of time is required to switch display modes (more specifically, to switch from normal display mode to special display mode), and the above-mentioned predetermined time is specified to be slightly longer than this required time. If a negative determination is made in step S4804, the setting suggestion process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4804, the process proceeds to step S4805. In step S4805, a judgment is made as to whether or not a hold notice performance is being performed. Specifically, a judgment is made as to whether or not a hold notice flag is stored in the various flags storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a hold notice performance is being performed, a positive judgment is made in step S4805, and the setting suggestion process is terminated. On the other hand, if a hold notice performance is not being performed, a negative judgment is made in step S4805, and the process proceeds to step S4806.

In step S4806, a special display mode transition lottery process is executed to determine by lottery whether or not the above-mentioned reserved display mode will be transitioned from the normal display mode to the special display mode. Specifically, the special display mode transition lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 and the value of the special display mode transition lottery counter provided in the lottery counter area 463 of the RAM 444 are referenced to determine whether or not to transition to the special display mode. If the transition to the special display mode is selected in the lottery process of step S4806, an affirmative determination is made in step S4807 and the process proceeds to step S4808.

In step S4808, a setting suggestion lottery process is executed to determine by lottery whether or not a setting suggestion is to be made. Specifically, the setting suggestion lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 and the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter provided in the lottery counter area 463 of the RAM 444 are referenced to determine whether or not a setting suggestion is to be made. If the setting suggestion is selected in the lottery process of step S4808, a positive judgment is made in step S4809 and the process proceeds to step S4810.

In step S4810, a display setting process corresponding to the setting suggestions is executed. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, after switching to the special display mode, a number corresponding to the setting suggestion is displayed by a combination of hold icons MP displayed in the hold number display area Da. In the display setting process corresponding to the setting suggestions, the hold icons MP displayed in which unit hold display areas Da1 to Da7 are to be moved to the execution target display area Db in the order in which the numbers corresponding to the setting suggestions are formed as the hold icons MP decrease, for the hold number display area Da whose form has changed due to the switch to the special display mode.

On the other hand, if the setting suggestion is not selected in the lottery in step S4808, a negative judgment is made in step S4809 and the process proceeds to step S4811.

In step S4811, a display setting process that does not support setting suggestions is executed. In the display setting process that does not support setting suggestions, a hold display update pattern is determined for the hold number display area Da whose form has changed due to the transition to the special display mode, so that the hold icons MP displayed in which unit hold display areas Da1 to Da7 are moved to the execution target display area Db in order such that numbers corresponding to the above setting suggestions are not formed as the hold icons MP decrease.

After executing the display setting processes of steps S4810 and S4811, the process proceeds to step S4812, where a transition process to the special display mode is executed. In the transition process to the special display mode, the speaker unit 29 starts to output sound effects corresponding to the transition to the special display mode, and a special display mode transition flag is stored in the various flags storage area 466 of the RAM 444. In the process of step S4603 described above, based on the fact that the special display mode transition flag is stored, information instructing a transition to the special display mode is added to the pending command sent (transferred) to the display control device 410. Note that the special display mode transition flag is erased when the game round related to the pending information that triggered the transition to the special display mode ends.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 performs display control of the hold display area NE, etc., based on the hold commands and shift commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 140. Below, the hold display control command response processing executed by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 107. The hold display control command response processing is processing executed as part of periodic processing (command response processing) that is activated at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Hold display control command response processing)
In the hold display control command response process, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the notification/performance control device 140. If a positive determination is made in step S4901, the process proceeds to step S4902. In step S4902, the value of the hold number counter (hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 474 is incremented by 1.

After executing the counter update process in step S4902, proceed to step S4903. In step S4903, an addition flag is set in the work RAM 474. In the hold display control process described below, a hold icon MP is added to the hold number display area Da based on this addition flag.

In the next step S4904, it is determined whether the current hold command includes information instructing a transition to the special display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4904, the process for handling the hold display control command is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S4904, the process proceeds to step S4905. The update pattern for the hold display is identified from the information included in the currently received hold command.

Then, in step S4906, a transition flag to the special display mode is set in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474, and the pending display control command response process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S4901, if a negative judgment is made in step S4901, i.e., if a hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4907. In step S4907, it is judged whether or not a shift command has been received from the notification/performance control device 140. If a negative judgment is made in step S4907, the process for handling commands for control of hold display is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S4907, the process proceeds to step S4908. In step S4908, the value of the hold number counter (hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 474 is decremented by 1.

After executing the counter update process in step S4908, proceed to step S4909. In step S4909, a shift flag is set in the work RAM 474. In the hold display control process described below, a process is performed to shift the hold icon MP based on this shift flag.

In the following step S4910, it is determined whether or not the current shift command includes information instructing a transition to normal display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4910, the process for handling commands for controlling hold display is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S4910, the process proceeds to step S4911, where a transition flag to normal display mode is set in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474, and the process for handling commands for controlling hold display is terminated.

Next, the hold display control process executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 will be described. The hold display control process includes a display mode switching process (step S5001) for switching the display mode, and a hold display process (step S5002) for moving/adding/deleting hold icons, etc. (see FIG. 108(a)). The display mode switching process will be described below with reference to FIG. 108(b).

(Display mode switching process)
In the display mode switching process, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the reserved display mode is in the special display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special display mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area of the work RAM 474. If the determination in step S5101 is negative, that is, if the display mode is in the normal display mode, the process proceeds to step S5102.

In step S5102, it is determined whether or not a transition flag to the special display mode is stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If a negative determination is made in step S5102, the display mode switching process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S5102, the process proceeds to step S5103. In step S5103, it is determined whether or not it is time to transition to the special display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S5103, the display mode switching process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S5103, the process proceeds to step S5104.

In step S5104, a process for switching to the special display mode is executed. Here, the display mode of the pending number display area Da in each display mode is explained with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the pending number display area Da in the normal display mode (normal display mode), and FIG. 109(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the pending number display area Da in the special display mode (special display mode).

As shown in FIG. 109(a), in the normal display mode, the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 in which the hold icon MP is displayed are arranged in a row aligned horizontally. On the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, the hold number display area Da is colored in a specified color to distinguish it from the surrounding area, and dividing lines are displayed so that the individual unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 can be identified.

The unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 are arranged in the following order from closest to the execution target display area Db to the furthest from the execution target display area Db: first unit hold display area Da1, second unit hold display area Da2, third unit hold display area Da3, fourth unit hold display area Da4, fifth unit hold display area Da5, sixth unit hold display area Da6, seventh unit hold display area Da7, and eighth unit hold display area Da8, and the hold icons are configured to shift towards the execution target display area Db as the game progresses.

In contrast, in the special display form, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da7 in which the hold icon MP is displayed are arranged in the shape of an eight. In this special display form, the hold number display area Da extends into the variable display area ME and is formed so as to straddle the variable display area ME and the hold display area NE. The special display form is similar to the normal display form in that the hold number display area Da is colored a specific color to distinguish it from the surrounding area, and dividing lines are displayed to make the individual unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 identifiable.

In addition, in the special display mode, in addition to the hold number display area Da, an auxiliary display area Dc is formed. In the special display mode, even if new hold information is acquired, the hold icon MP corresponding to the hold information is displayed in the auxiliary display area Dc, not in the hold number display area Da.

As described above, in the special display form, numbers suggesting settings may be formed depending on the order in which the reserved icons are consumed, and the arrangement of the unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da7 differs depending on the order in which they are consumed. In other words, although Figure 109(b) shows an example of a special display form, the arrangement pattern of the unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da7 changes depending on the order in which they are consumed.

In the process of switching to the special display form, a process is executed to switch the display form of the pending number display area Da from the normal display form shown in FIG. 109(a) to the special display form shown in FIG. 109(b).

After executing the process for switching to the special display mode in step S5104, the transition flag to the special display mode stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 is erased in step S5105, and the special display mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 in the following step S5106. After that, the process for moving the reserved icon corresponding to the special display mode is executed, and then this display mode switching process is terminated.

Here, we will refer to the schematic diagram in Figure 110 to illustrate the flow of transition to the special display mode.

(Switch to special display mode)
In the example shown in Fig. 110(a), the display mode of reserved balls is the normal display mode, and the number of reserved balls stored in the reserved ball storage area 432, excluding the reserved balls corresponding to the game round being played, is 6, which is less than the above-mentioned predetermined number. Here, when a winning ball is entered into the actuation port unit 83 (the first ball entry section 83d or the second ball entry section 83e), new reserved balls are acquired accordingly, and the number of reserved balls stored reaches the above-mentioned predetermined number (7).

When a decision is made to switch from the normal display mode to the special display mode through a lottery that is executed under the condition that the time required to switch to the special display mode is secured in the current game round, the display mode of the reserved number display area Da will first be switched from the normal display mode to the special display mode, as shown in Figure 110(b) → Figure 110(c). At this time, the reserved number display area Da is configured to extend toward the variable display area ME, preventing a player who is closely watching the movement of the patterns in the variable display area ME from missing the switch to the special display mode.

When the display format is changed, the hold icons MP leave the hold number display area Da slightly prior to the change in display format. Even after the display format of the hold number display area Da has changed, the hold icons MP continue to orbit around the hold number display area Da for a certain period of time, after which each hold icon MP moves to the associated unit hold display area Da1 to Da8.

More specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 111, even when a display mode change occurs, the relationship between the hold icon MP and the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da7 is maintained. In other words, the hold icon MP that was located in the first unit hold display area Da1 in the normal display mode is still located in the first unit hold display area Da1 after the change to the special display mode, the hold icon MP that was located in the second unit hold display area Da2 in the normal display mode is still located in the second unit hold display area Da2 after the change to the special display mode, the hold icon MP that was located in the third unit hold display area Da3 in the normal display mode is still located in the third unit hold display area Da3 after the change to the special display mode, and the hold icon MP that was located in the fourth unit hold display area Da4 in the normal display mode is still located in the fourth unit hold display area Da5 in the normal display mode. The hold icon MP that was placed in the fifth unit hold display area Da5 in the normal display form is still placed in the fifth unit hold display area Da5 after switching to the special display form, the hold icon MP that was placed in the sixth unit hold display area Da6 in the normal display form is still placed in the sixth unit hold display area Da6 after switching to the special display form, and the hold icon MP that was placed in the seventh unit hold display area Da7 in the normal display form is still placed in the seventh unit hold display area Da7 after switching to the special display form.

Here, the appearance (shape, etc.) of the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da7 is the same even in the special display form, making it difficult to visually determine the order of the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da7. Also, when switching from the normal display form to the special display form, all unit hold display areas Da1 to Da7 are hidden once and then reappear in a different position and shape, so even if one closely watches the process of switching the display form, it is difficult to determine the order of the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da7.

As shown in Figure 110(c) → Figure 110(d), after all the reserved icons MP have completed moving to the reserved number display area Da (or the auxiliary display area Dc in some cases), the illumination level of each unit reserved display area Da1 to Da7 in which the reserved icons MP are located increases. Note that in Figure 110(d), this state is represented by dot hatching. This marks the end of the change in display format (transition of display mode) during one play round (before the final display appears).

Returning to the explanation of step S5101 in FIG. 108(b), if a positive judgment is made in step S5105, i.e., if the special display mode is in effect, the process proceeds to step S5108. In step S5108, it is determined whether or not a transition flag to the normal display mode is stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If a negative judgment is made in step S5108, the process proceeds to step S5109. In step S5109, it is determined whether or not it is time to return to the normal display mode. In other words, it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined timing after the last pending icon MP displayed in the pending number display area Da in the special display form has moved to the execution target display area Db. If a negative judgment is made in step S5109, the process proceeds to step S5110. If a positive judgment is made in step S5109, the process proceeds to step S5110.

In step S5110, a process for switching to the normal display mode is executed. Then, in step S5111, the transition flag to the normal display mode stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 is erased, and in the following step S5112, the special display mode flag is erased. Then, in step S5107, a hold icon movement process corresponding to the normal display mode is executed, and this display mode switching process is terminated.

Here, we will refer to the schematic diagram in Figure 112 to illustrate the flow of transition to normal display mode.

(Switch to normal display mode)
In the example shown in Fig. 112(a), the state is immediately after the transition to the special display mode shown in Fig. 110(d). When the reserved icons MP move sequentially to the execution target display area Db and the number of reserved icons MP displayed in the reserved number display area Da decreases, the illumination level of the unit reserved display area where the reserved icons MP are not placed decreases, and the unit reserved display area where the reserved icons MP are placed is differentiated from the other unit reserved display areas where the reserved icons MP are placed.

When new reserved information is acquired in the process of depleting the reserved icons MP displayed in the reserved number display area Da as the game progresses, as shown in Figure 112 (a) → Figure 112 (b), the reserved icon MP corresponding to the newly acquired reserved information is additionally displayed in the auxiliary display area Dc, and additional display in the reserved number display area Da is avoided. In other words, in the reserved number display area Da alone, the number of displayed reserved icons MP will steadily decrease.

The hold icons MP that are additionally displayed in the auxiliary display area Dc are displayed in a row from right to left in the order in which the hold information is acquired, and will wait in the auxiliary display area Dc until the normal display mode is restored. Note that, unlike the hold count display area Da, there are no images indicating the auxiliary display area Dc, such as section lines.

As shown in FIG. 112(b)→FIG. 112(c), when the last reserved icon MP displayed in the reserved number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db and the reserved number display area Da becomes empty, the display form of the reserved number display area Da switches from the special display form to the normal display form during the game turn related to the last reserved icon MP (more specifically, before the confirmation display). More specifically, the dividing lines of the reserved number display area Da corresponding to the special display form are temporarily hidden, and then the dividing lines of the reserved number display area Da corresponding to the normal display form are displayed. Then, the reserved icon MP that was previously displayed in the auxiliary display area Dc shifts to the reserved number display area Da (see FIG. 112(d)).

As already explained, one of the features of this embodiment is that the setting is suggested by changes in the hold display (changes in the arrangement of the hold icons MP) as the game progresses. Below, the hold display process shown in Figure 108 (a) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 113.

(Pending display processing)
In the pending display process, first, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not an additional flag is stored in the various flag storage area of the work RAM 474. If the determination in step S5201 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S5202. In step S5202, it is determined whether or not the special display mode is in progress.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5202, additional processing corresponding to the normal display mode is performed in step S5203. Specifically, if the execution target display area Db is empty, a hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the execution target display area Db. If the execution target display area Db is filled, a hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the youngest unit hold display area (closest to the execution target display area Db) among the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 in which a hold icon MP is not displayed (is empty).

If a positive judgment is made in step S5202, additional processing corresponding to the special display mode is performed in step S5204. Specifically, the hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the auxiliary display area Dc, lined up from the left (see FIG. 112(c)).

After executing the processing of steps S5203 and S5204, in step S5405, the additional flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are erased, and the pending display processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5201, if a negative judgment is made in step S5201, the process proceeds to step S5206. In step S5206, it is determined whether or not a shift flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If a negative judgment is made in step S5206, the pending display process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5206, the process proceeds to step S5207. In step S5207, it is determined whether or not the special display mode is in effect.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5207, that is, if the normal display mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S5208. In step S5208, a shift process corresponding to the normal display mode is executed. In the shift process corresponding to the normal display mode, the hold icon MP displayed in the execution target display area Db is hidden, and then the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da is shifted to the execution target display area Db side. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 114, the hold icon MP displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 is moved to the execution target display area Db, and the hold icons MP displayed in the other unit hold display areas Da2 to Da8 are each moved to the adjacent unit hold display area to the left. By repeating such a movement, the displayed hold icons MP are moved to the execution target display area Db in order of oldest to newest, and are erased via the execution target display area Db.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5207, i.e., if the special display mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S5209. In step S5209, a shift process corresponding to the special display mode is executed. As already explained, when transitioning to the special display mode, the update pattern of the hold display is determined at the time when transitioning to the special display mode is determined. In the shift process corresponding to the special display mode, the hold icon MP is moved based on the determined update pattern.

After executing the shift processing in steps S5208 and S5209, in step S5210, the shift flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are erased, and the pending display processing is terminated.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the update patterns of the hold display in the special display mode. The update patterns are broadly divided into update patterns that correspond to setting suggestions, and update patterns that do not correspond to setting suggestions. In the update pattern that corresponds to setting suggestions, during the update process of the hold display in the special display mode, a number corresponding to the setting value is displayed in the hold number display area Da by multiple hold icons MP and the unit hold display area in which these hold icons MP are arranged, while in the update pattern that does not correspond to setting suggestions, these numbers are not displayed.

In more detail, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 115, the number corresponding to setting 1 is set to "1," and the number corresponding to setting 2 is set to "2." Note that no number is set for setting 2, which is the least favorable to the player.

As shown in FIG. 116, there are multiple update patterns corresponding to setting suggestions for setting 1, multiple update patterns corresponding to setting suggestions for setting 2, and multiple update patterns not corresponding to setting suggestions, and it is difficult to identify which update pattern will occur until midway through the update.

The 17th embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In a configuration that displays a hold icon (hold image), its main function is to clearly show the player the number of hold information stored, i.e., the number of holds remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot result by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the hold icon. This aims to increase attention to the hold icon (the game round to be played later).

In the configuration shown in this feature, the display form of the pending number display area Da switches between a normal display form and a special display form depending on the situation. In the normal display form, the number of pending information stored can be displayed, and in the second display form, in addition to the number of pending information stored, other game information (e.g. a set value) is displayed. By configuring the display form of the pending number display area Da to change and display additional information, it is possible to further increase attention to the game.

The unit reserve display areas, which are arranged side-by-side in the normal display mode, are arranged in a figure-8 shape in the special display mode. By differentiating the arrangement pattern of the unit reserve display areas in each display mode in this way, it is possible to clearly differentiate between the display modes. In particular, the normal display mode has an arrangement that makes it easy to intuitively grasp the number of reserved information and the order in which it is consumed, while the special display mode has an arrangement that makes it difficult to intuitively grasp the order in which it is consumed. In this embodiment, multiple update patterns for the reserve display in the special display mode are provided, and in some update patterns, numbers suggesting a set value are displayed. In this way, by devising not only the display mode of the reserve icon but also the update pattern of the reserve number display as the game progresses, the attention-increasing effect described above can be more effectively achieved.

When the special display mode is selected, numbers are displayed as information corresponding to the set value based on a combination of hold icons. Even if the information cannot be displayed by individual hold icons, it can be displayed by using a combination of multiple hold icons, dramatically improving the expressiveness of the information.

In particular, an upper limit is often set on the number of reserved information that can be stored for various reasons. Furthermore, there may be a certain degree of variation in the number of reserved information acquired due to individual differences in gaming machines, etc. In light of these circumstances, there is concern that even if the above-mentioned information display function is applied, the function may not be performed properly. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, if the above-mentioned information is configured to be displayed using numbers, letters, and symbols, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved information required to realize the display from becoming excessively large, and to prevent the function from not being performed properly due to the above-mentioned circumstances, etc.

If the display position of the reserved icon changes significantly when the display format is switched, it is expected that the player will be more likely to lose track of the reserved icon. This is undesirable as it can confuse the player. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by configuring each display format so that at least a portion of the reserved number display area Da overlaps, it is possible to make it less likely that the above inconvenience will occur even when the display format is switched.

In a configuration in which the shape of the reserved number display area Da changes by switching the display form, the impact can be enhanced by making the difference before and after the switch larger. However, if the difference in appearance becomes larger, it becomes difficult to understand the relationship between the normal display form and the special display form (that they are the same), which is likely to confuse the player. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, if the reserved icon itself displayed in the reserved number display area Da is the same even when switching the display form, it can be easily predicted from the commonly used reserved icon that each display form shows the same reserved number display area Da, with only the display form being different. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When new hold information is stored, the display format of the hold number display area Da may be changed. In this case, a hold icon corresponding to the hold information is first added and displayed, and then the display format is changed, so that the addition of a hold icon is not overlooked while the display format is changed. Also, for example, in diversifying the order in which hold icons are erased, there is technical significance in avoiding the addition of a hold icon corresponding to newly acquired hold information being displayed after switching to a special display format.

Frequent changes in form when the information corresponding to the set value (the number above) cannot be displayed can give the player the impression that it is bothersome. There is a concern that repetition of such events will make it easier for players to miss certain game information when it is displayed. In this regard, in this embodiment, switching to the special display form is performed based on the fact that the number of reserved information stored has reached a certain number, which is the number required to display the information (number) corresponding to the set value in the special display form. This makes it possible to effectively prevent the above inconvenience.

In addition, players who want to check information corresponding to the set value can be encouraged to play in a way that actively earns reserved information, which can contribute to improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

To make it easier to understand that both the normal display form and the special display form are display forms in the reserved number display area Da, or to increase the difference between the normal display form and the special display form, the time required to switch the display form may become longer. Therefore, by configuring the display form to switch to the special display form when a certain length of time is secured for the variable display time of the patterns (when the reserved number is at the upper limit, i.e., when the time-saving function is not at its maximum), the time required to switch the display form can be gained. In other words, as shown in this embodiment, there is technical significance in setting the reserved number to 7 instead of 8 as the condition for switching to the special display form.

It is common for these reserved icons to move in a similar manner with each game round, and the manner of movement (operation or shifting manner) is often very monotonous. As shown in this embodiment, in the special display mode, the movement of the reserved icons can be prevented from becoming monotonous by diversifying the additional display patterns when additional reserved icons are displayed in the reserved number display area Da, and the shift display patterns when the reserved icons displayed in the reserved number display area are shifted. By devising the display of the reserved icons in this way, it is possible to realize innovative display effects that have never been seen before using the reserved icons, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

In the special display mode, even if the number of pending icons is changed from the same number (prescribed number), the update patterns vary. In some update patterns, numbers are displayed as information corresponding to the set value. This configuration encourages players who wish to see through the set value to pay attention to the game.

A configuration in which the time it takes for the pattern to change is shortened depending on the number of pending information stored is preferable in terms of speeding up game progress. However, as described above, when information (numbers) corresponding to a set value is displayed by a combination of pending icons, the display time of the information depends on the above-mentioned display time. Therefore, by configuring the information to be displayed when the number of pending information is less than the number that triggers a transition to the special display mode, the time that the information is maintained (the time that it is visible) is prevented from becoming extremely short compared to a configuration in which information corresponding to a set value is displayed when the number of pending information is greater than the number that triggered the transition, for example, and coexistence with the above-mentioned time-saving function can be preferably realized.

When the arrangement of the hold icons is changed when switching to the special display mode, the arrangement of the hold icons will be the same regardless of whether or not information corresponding to the set value will be displayed later. This makes it difficult to guess whether or not information corresponding to the set value will be displayed later when switching to the display mode.

As shown in the configuration of this feature, the arrangement of the reserved images at the time of switching the change display mode is the same, so it is possible to avoid it becoming obvious which special change display mode is being used when the change display mode is switched.

<Modification 1>
In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, the number for setting suggestion is formed by a combination (arrangement pattern) of multiple reserved icons MP displayed in the reserved number display area Da in the special display mode, but this is not limited to this. As long as the information for setting suggestion can be formed by a combination of multiple reserved icons MP in the special display mode, the specific form is arbitrary, and for example, it may be configured to form letters or patterns for setting suggestion. Below, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the special arrangement pattern and the setting suggestion, and FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram showing the update pattern corresponding to the setting suggestion.

In this modified example, as special arrangement patterns corresponding to the setting value suggestion, a first special arrangement pattern that uses three unit reserve display areas to form the letter "v", and a second special arrangement pattern that uses five unit reserve display areas to form the letter "V" are provided. When the setting value is setting 1, the appearance rate of "v" is 10% and the appearance rate of "V" is 10%, when it is setting 2, the appearance rate of "v" is 10% and the appearance rate of "V" is 5%, and when it is setting 3, the appearance rate of "v" is 5% and the appearance rate of "V" is 5%. In other words, the more "v" and "V" appear, the higher the player's expectations for a favorable setting value, and the more "V" appears than "v", the higher the possibility of the setting being 2.

In setting 1, the appearance rate of "V" is favored over other settings, while the overall appearance rate of all settings is set to be lower than that of "v". As shown in FIG. 117(b), during the process of updating the hold display, the number of displayed hold icons MP decreases in sequence, so first a branch occurs as to whether or not "V" is displayed, and then a branch occurs as to whether or not "v" is displayed. By passing through the branch as to whether or not to display "V", which has a lower appearance rate than "v", first, and leaving for later the branch as to whether or not to display "v", which has a relatively high appearance rate, attention to the special display mode is prevented from fading too quickly.

<Modification 2>
In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, the setting suggestion is made by the combination (arrangement pattern) of the multiple reserved icons MP displayed in the reserved number display area Da in the special display mode, but instead of or in addition to this configuration, the combination (arrangement pattern) of the multiple reserved icons MP displayed in the reserved number display area Da may be configured to suggest (inform) the expectation of a jackpot result. For example, it is also possible to configure the expectation of a jackpot result to increase by displaying a specific letter, number, or pattern.

In the above variants 1 and 2, it is assumed that the maximum number of times a special arrangement pattern occurs during one special display mode is one, but this is not limited to this. If multiple special arrangement patterns are provided with different numbers of reserved icons MP that form numbers, letters, patterns, etc., it is also possible to configure the game to go through multiple special arrangement patterns during one special display mode.

<Modification 3>
In the seventeenth embodiment, the display form of the pending number display area Da is changed from the normal form to the special form when the number of reserved information stored increases to seven, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to change the display form of the pending number display area Da from the normal form to the special form when the number of reserved information stored reaches the upper limit number that can be stored (eight in this embodiment).

In addition, in the above seventeenth embodiment, the number of pending information items, which is the condition for switching the display mode of the pending number display area Da, is limited to seven items, but this may be changed to provide a plurality of numbers of pending information items, which are the conditions for switching the display mode of the pending number display area Da. For example, the display mode of the pending number display area Da may be changed to a special mode not only when the number of pending information items is seven, but also when the number is eight.

Incidentally, it is also possible to configure the system so that it determines whether or not to use the special display mode on the condition that the number of pending icons MP related to the setting suggestion or more pending information is stored.

<Modification 4>
In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, the number of reserved information, which is a prerequisite for changing the display mode to the special display mode, is unified for all the set values, but this is not limited to this. In a configuration in which the number of dots required to form letters, numbers, symbols, etc. corresponding to the suggestion of the set value differs, the condition for switching to the special display mode may be set individually according to the number of dots required. For example, when the number of dots required is 3, the configuration may be such that the special display mode is switched to when the number of reserved information stored is 3 (preferably a number greater than that: for example, 4), and when the number of dots required is 5, the configuration may be such that the special display mode is switched to when the number of reserved information stored is 5 (preferably a number greater than that: for example, 6).

<Modification 5>
In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, the configuration is such that the normal display mode is switched to the special display mode when the number of reserved information stored reaches seven due to the addition of new reserved information. However, instead of or in addition to this, it is also possible to configure the configuration to switch from the normal display mode to the special display mode when the number of reserved information stored decreases as the game progresses and reaches seven.

<Modification 6>
In the seventeenth embodiment, the arrangement of the unit reserved display area is changed from a straight line to one that resembles the number 8 by switching to the special display mode, but this is not limited to this. As long as the arrangement pattern of the displayed reserved icons MP can display information related to the game, such as setting suggestions, the specific arrangement is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the unit reserved display area may be arranged to form a triangle (more specifically, an inverted triangle). In this case, for example, a configuration in which "v" (see FIG. 118(b)) or "V" (see FIG. 118(c)) is formed as a character corresponding to information related to the game, such as setting suggestions, may be used.

<Modification 7>
In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, the unit reservation display area is partitioned by a thin frame line or the like to clearly indicate which part is the unit reservation display area, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to omit the partition display of the unit reservation display area, and not clearly indicate which part is the unit reservation display area.

<Modification 8>
In the above seventeenth embodiment, the illumination level of the unit reservation display area in which the reservation icon MP is displayed is changed (by adding an effect) to differentiate it from the unit reservation display area in which the reservation icon MP is not displayed, but the specific configuration for differentiating the reservation icon MP based on the presence or absence of the reservation icon MP is arbitrary. For example, the color of the unit reservation display area may be changed to differentiate it.

<Modification 9>
In the above 17th embodiment, the hold icon MP used in the normal display mode and the hold icon MP used in the special display mode are common, but this can be changed and the hold icon used in the normal display mode and the hold icon used in the special display mode can be provided separately.For example, it is also possible to provide the shape, size, etc. of the hold icon separately depending on the display mode.

In particular, in special display modes, when combinations of reserved icons are used to form letters, numbers, patterns, etc., the letters, etc. may be difficult to read due to the shape of the reserved icons, etc. This is a concern as it could confuse players or cause them to overlook information. Therefore, by changing the shape of the reserved icon itself to match the letters, etc., it is possible to effectively prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

<Modification 10>
In the seventeenth embodiment, the normal display mode and the special display mode are switched, but such a switching function is not essential. When performing setting suggestions, etc., by the arrangement pattern of the reserved icon MP, the normal display mode can be omitted.

<Modification 11>
In the seventeenth embodiment, the number of unit hold display areas constituting the hold number display area Da in the normal display mode is different from the number of unit hold display areas constituting the hold number display area Da in the special display mode, but this is not limited to this. The two may be configured to be the same.

In addition, if the shape of the unit hold display area in the normal display mode does not match the shape of the unit hold display area in the special display mode, it is desirable to strengthen the correlation between the unit hold display areas in each display mode by aligning their numbers.

<Modification 12>
For example, for a player who is playing in the hope that information corresponding to a set value will be displayed, switching to the opening/closing execution mode just before the information is displayed in the special display mode will leave a strong impression that he or she missed the opportunity to check the information. Therefore, by configuring the device not to set the second change display mode in such a situation, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the hold notice performance is performed using the hold icon MP to increase the attention to the game, which is similar to the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, but the content of this hold notice performance is partially different from that of the 17th embodiment. First, an overview of the hold notice performance will be explained, and then the details of the hold notice performance in this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the 17th embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 119, in this embodiment, all of the hold preview effects are configured to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot result by changing the display mode of the hold icon MP displayed in the hold display area NE. Four colors are set for the display mode (color) of the hold icon MP: white, blue, yellow, and red. Of these colors, white is the standard, and when the hold preview effect is executed, the hold icon MP will be one of the other colors (blue, yellow, red).

The colors of the reserved icon MP are set in the order of white < blue < yellow < red, so that the likelihood of a jackpot result increases. Specifically, when a reserved notice is issued with a reserved icon MP corresponding to a game that will result in a jackpot, the colors are more likely to be selected in the order of white < blue < yellow < red, whereas when a reserved notice is issued with a reserved icon MP corresponding to a game that will result in a miss, the colors are more likely to be selected in the order of red < yellow < blue < white.

This reserved notice performance is broadly divided into a first type notice performance and a second type notice performance according to the display mode (color change) of the reserved icon MP. As shown in FIG. 120(a), in the first type notice performance (first type notice performance A described later in detail), after the color of the reserved icon MP changes, the color of the reserved icon MP is maintained until the corresponding game round (until it moves to the execution target display area Db). In contrast, in the second type notice performance (second type notice performance B described later in detail), as shown in FIG. 120(b), the color of the reserved icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the color that will eventually change is red, it is first changed to a lower color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation, and then stepped up (promoted) to a higher color with a higher expectation at the timing when the reserved icon MP shifts. By using these two types of reserved notice performances in combination, even if the color has a low expectation, there is a possibility that it will change to a color with a higher expectation by the time the corresponding game round is reached. This prevents the attention to the reserved notice performance from decreasing early.

The color of the hold icon MP does not only change in the hold number display area Da, but may also change when moving to the execution target display area Db. For example, when a hold icon MP that is yellow in the hold number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP may change to red, or when a hold icon MP that is white in the hold number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP may change to another color (blue, yellow, red)

As shown in FIG. 121, the first type of preview performance is roughly divided into a first type of preview performance A that changes the color of the reserved icon MP corresponding to the reserved information that triggered the preview performance, and a first type of preview performance B that changes the color of the reserved icon MP corresponding to the reserved information following the reserved information that triggered the preview performance, and the second type of preview performance is roughly divided into a second type of preview performance A that changes the color of the reserved icon MP corresponding to the reserved information that triggered the preview performance, and a second type of preview performance B that changes the color of the reserved icon MP corresponding to the reserved information preceding the reserved information that triggered the preview performance. The expectation of a jackpot result is different such that the first type of preview performance A < the second type of preview performance A < the first type of preview performance B < the second type of preview performance B.

Here, the flow of the first type preview performance B will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram in FIG. 122. FIG. 122(a) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162, and FIG. 122(b) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 253.

As shown in the 17th embodiment, the main control device 162 (more specifically, the reserved ball storage area 432) is provided with a reserved area Rx, which is a combination of the reserved areas Ra and Rb shown in the first embodiment, and an execution area AE. The reserved area Rx is provided with a first area Rx1 to an eighth area Rx8, and the reserved information acquired by winning in the first ball entry section 83d and the second ball entry section 83e is stored in the first area Rx1 to the eighth area Rx8 in the order of winning.

(Type 1 preview performance B)
In the example shown in Fig. 122(1), reserved information is stored in the execution area AE and the first area Rx1 to the fifth area Rx5 in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162. In the following description, the reserved information stored in the execution area AE is referred to as reserved information I0, the reserved information stored in the first area Rx1 is referred to as reserved information I1, the reserved information stored in the second area Rx2 is referred to as reserved information I2, the reserved information stored in the third area Rx3 is referred to as reserved information I3, the reserved information stored in the fourth area Rx4 is referred to as reserved information I4, and the reserved information stored in the fifth area Rx5 is referred to as reserved information I5.

The execution target display area Db of the display screen 253a (pending display area NE) of the pattern display device 253 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I0, the first unit pending display area Da1 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I1, the second unit pending display area Da2 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I2, the third unit pending display area Da3 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I3, the fourth unit pending display area Da4 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I4, and the fifth unit pending display area Da5 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I5.

The reserved information I0 corresponds to a losing result, and when the game corresponding to the reserved information I0 ends and moves to the next game, the reserved information I0 stored in the execution area AE is erased and the reserved information I1 stored in the first area Rx1 moves to the execution area AE, as shown in FIG. 122(a1)→FIG. 122(a2). In addition, the reserved icon MP displayed in the first unit reserved display area Da1 shifts to the execution target display area Db, the reserved icon MP displayed in the second unit reserved display area Da2 shifts to the first unit reserved display area Da1, the reserved icon MP displayed in the third unit reserved display area Da3 shifts to the second unit reserved display area Da2, the reserved icon MP displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Da4 shifts to the third unit reserved display area Da3, and the reserved icon MP displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Da5 shifts to the fourth unit reserved display area Da4. Movement of each hold icon MP will be performed in the hold display area NE.

In the example shown in FIG. 122, the reserved information I2 that has been moved to the first area Rx1 corresponds to a jackpot result, and the reserved notice performance lottery is won based on this reserved information I2. More specifically, the first type of notice performance B is won. In the first type of notice performance B, the color of the reserved icon MP displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Da4, rather than the reserved icon MP corresponding to the reserved information I2 (the reserved icon MP displayed in the first unit reserved display area Da1), is changed from "white" to "red." This suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the next play four times will result in a jackpot.

The reserved information I1 corresponds to a losing result, and the game round corresponding to the reserved information I1 ends, and the game moves to the next game round. At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (a3), the shift mode of the reserved icon MP becomes a special mode. Specifically, the reserved icon MP displayed in the execution target display area Db is erased, and the movement target of the reserved icon MP when it shifts from the reserved number display area Da to the execution target display area Db becomes a special mode.

Specifically, each hold icon MP displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 to the third unit hold display area Da3 will remain in place, and the hold icon MP displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Da4, which has turned red, will overtake each of the preceding hold icons MP and shift into the execution target display area Db.

The reserved icon MP that shifts from the fourth unit reserved display area Da4 to the execution target display area Db leaves the reserved display area NE and passes through the variable display area ME, specifically, it moves to the execution target display area Db by skipping over the preceding reserved icon MP group. This makes it look as if the order in which the reserved information is consumed has been changed. Normally, the reserved icon MP shifts to the execution target display area Db in the order in which it was acquired, but in the above special mode, this rule is made to look broken, which enhances the impact on the player. Note that although the reserved icon MP in the fourth unit reserved display area Da4 appears to have been moved to the execution target display area Db, the order in which the reserved information is actually consumed has not been changed. In addition, the display of the reserved number display section of the main display unit 87 will also be updated regardless of the above special mode (one LED will be turned off).

Next, the flow of the second type preview performance B will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 123. Figure 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162, and Figure 123(b) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 253.

(Type 2 preview performance B)
The example shown in Fig. 123 (1) shows a case where newly acquired reserved information is stored in the fifth area Rx5 under a situation where reserved information is stored in the execution area AE and the first area Rx1 to the fourth area Rx4 in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162. In the following description, the reserved information stored in the execution area AE is referred to as reserved information I0, the reserved information stored in the first area Rx1 is referred to as reserved information I1, the reserved information stored in the second area Rx2 is referred to as reserved information I2, the reserved information stored in the third area Rx3 is referred to as reserved information I3, the reserved information stored in the fourth area Rx4 is referred to as reserved information I4, and the reserved information stored in the fifth area Rx5 is referred to as reserved information I5.

The execution target display area Db of the display screen 253a (pending display area NE) of the pattern display device 253 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I0, the first unit pending display area Da1 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I1, the second unit pending display area Da2 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I2, the third unit pending display area Da3 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I3, the fourth unit pending display area Da4 displays a pending icon MP indicating pending information I4, and based on the fact that new pending information I5 has been acquired and stored, an additional pending icon MP indicating pending information I5 is displayed in the fifth unit pending display area Da5.

The reserved information I0 corresponds to a losing result, and when the game corresponding to the reserved information I0 ends and moves to the next game, the reserved information I0 stored in the execution area AE is erased and the reserved information I1 stored in the first area Rx1 moves to the execution area AE, as shown in FIG. 123(a1)→FIG. 123(a2). In addition, the reserved icon MP displayed in the first unit reserved display area Da1 shifts to the execution target display area Db, the reserved icon MP displayed in the second unit reserved display area Da2 shifts to the first unit reserved display area Da1, the reserved icon MP displayed in the third unit reserved display area Da3 shifts to the second unit reserved display area Da2, the reserved icon MP displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Da4 shifts to the third unit reserved display area Da3, and the reserved icon MP displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Da5 shifts to the fourth unit reserved display area Da4. Movement of each hold icon MP will be performed in the hold display area NE.

In the example shown in FIG. 123, the reserved information I5 that has been moved to the fourth area Rx4 corresponds to a jackpot result, and the reserved notice performance lottery is won based on this reserved information I5. More specifically, the second type of notice performance B is won. In the second type of notice performance B, the color of the reserved icon MP displayed in the second unit reserved display area Da2, rather than the reserved icon MP corresponding to the reserved information I5 (the reserved icon MP displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Da4), has been changed from "white" to "blue." This suggests to the player that the next play may result in a jackpot.

Here, if the color of the reserved icon MP is "blue", there is room for it to step up in two stages to "yellow" and then to "red", and attention to that reserved icon MP increases in the hope that the "blue" reserved icon MP displayed in the second unit reserved display area Da2 will change to a more promising color by the time it becomes the target for execution.

The reserved information I2 corresponds to a miss result, and the game round related to the reserved information I2 does not support reach display. In this game round, the reserved icon MP is swapped at the timing when the upper pattern row is displayed as stopped and the lower pattern row is displayed as stopped (the middle pattern row is being displayed as changing). Specifically, the "blue" reserved icon displayed in the first unit reserved display area Da1 is swapped with the "white" reserved icon displayed in the third unit reserved display area Da3, i.e., the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved information I5 that triggered the color change of the reserved icon.

In this replacement, the reserved icon MP to be replaced leaves the unit reserved display area Da1, Da3 and moves through the variable display area ME to the other party's unit reserved display area Da1, Da3. At this time, since the lower pattern row is already displayed as stopped, the moving reserved icon MP is prevented from becoming mixed up with the lower pattern row and becoming difficult to see.

By moving the "blue" reserve icon MP to the third unit reserve display area Da3, an additional opportunity for the reserve icon MP to change color is provided. For example, there is an additional possibility that the color may change to "yellow" or "red" when shifting to the second unit reserve display area Da2 or the first unit reserve display area Da1. Note that although the order of the reserve icons has been rearranged in the reserve display area NE of the pattern display device 253, the above-mentioned rearrangement does not occur in the display in the reserve ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162 or the reserve number display section of the main display unit 87.

Since the reserved information I2 also corresponds to a losing result, when the game round corresponding to the reserved information I2 ends, the next reserved information I3 moves to the execution area AE, and the game round corresponding to the reserved information I3 is executed. The color of the reserved icon MP displayed in the third unit reserved display area Da3 changes from "blue" to "yellow" with this shift (see FIG. 123 (b6)).

Since the reserved information I3 also corresponds to a losing result, when the game round corresponding to the reserved information I3 ends, the next reserved information I4 moves to the execution area AE, and the game round corresponding to the reserved information I4 is executed. The color of the reserved icon MP displayed in the second unit reserved display area Da2 changes from "yellow" to "red" in accordance with this shift (see FIG. 123 (b7)).

Next, the on-hold notice presentation setting process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 124. The on-hold notice presentation setting process is executed as part of the command response process periodically executed by the MPU 442.

(Setting process for holding notice performance)
In the setting process for the on-hold notice performance, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not a on-hold notice regulation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. The on-hold notice regulation flag is a flag that is stored when the above-mentioned on-hold notice performance is executed, and it avoids duplication of the on-hold notice performance. If a positive determination is made in step S5301, the setting process for the on-hold notice performance is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S5301, the process proceeds to step S5302.

In step S5302, it is determined whether or not a hold command or a shift command has been received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S5302, the setting process for the hold notice performance is terminated.

If the currently received command is a hold command, an affirmative judgment is made in step S5303 and the process proceeds to step S5304. In step S5304, a lottery process is executed when a hold command is received. In the lottery process related to the hold command, a lottery is performed for each of the newly added hold information and the hold information previously acquired. This lottery is performed by determining from the stored information whether the game round related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether a reach display will be displayed, and if a reach display is displayed, the pattern, and then based on the corresponding lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 463.

In the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443, the following lottery tables are stored as lottery tables to be used when a hold command is received: a lottery table for a jackpot, a lottery table for a miss normal reach A, a lottery table for a miss normal reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach A, a lottery table for a miss super reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach C, and a lottery table for a complete miss.

These tables are set up so that the probability of winning increases in the following order: Jackpot > Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A > Complete Miss.

If the command received this time is a shift command, a negative judgment is made in step S5303 and the process proceeds to step S5305. In step S5305, a lottery process is performed when a shift command is received. In the lottery process related to the shift command, the lottery object for the reserved notice is all the reserved information remaining after the shift. In other words, a lottery for the availability of the reserved notice is performed based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the reserved information storage area 467 of the RAM 444. This lottery is performed individually for each piece of stored information. The lottery order (priority order) is specified to be in reverse chronological order (eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7 → ... → first area Rc1). For example, if the common reserved number CRN is "2", a lottery is first performed based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, and if the lottery is not successful, a lottery is performed based on the information stored in the first area Rc1.

In particular, in this embodiment, as the value of the common hold number CRN increases, the variable display time in the game round corresponding to a complete miss is shortened. Therefore, by giving priority to new hold information as described above, the period of the preview performance when a hold preview is executed can be appropriately secured.

As with the case of receiving a hold command, the lottery method is carried out by determining from the stored information whether the game related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether a reach display will be displayed, and if a reach display is displayed, the pattern, and then based on the corresponding lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 463.

In the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443, the following lottery tables are stored as lottery tables to be used when a shift command is received: a lottery table for a jackpot, a lottery table for a miss normal reach A, a lottery table for a miss normal reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach A, a lottery table for a miss super reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach C, and a lottery table for a complete miss.

These tables are set so that the probability of winning increases in the following order: jackpot > Super reach C > Super reach B > Super reach A > Normal reach B > Normal reach A > Complete miss. However, these lottery tables for when a shift command is received are set so that the probability of winning the reserved notice is lower when compared to the lottery tables for when the above-mentioned hold command is received. For example, when comparing lottery tables for jackpots, the probability of winning when referring to the lottery tables for when a shift command is received is set lower than the probability of winning when referring to the lottery tables for when a hold command is received.

However, if the value of the common hold number CRN (number of holds) is less than a predetermined number ("4" in this embodiment), the overall probability of winning is lower than when the hold command was received, but if the value of the common hold number CRN (number of holds) is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the overall probability of winning is set to be higher than when the hold command was received.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the value of the common hold number CRN exceeds the above-mentioned specified number ("4"), the degree of shortening of the variable display time in a game turn corresponding to a complete miss becomes greater compared to when the value of the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the above-mentioned specified number ("4"). While this can speed up the game progress, there is a concern that the monotony of the game progress becomes more noticeable. In this regard, with the above configuration, when the number of holds increases and the shortening of the variable display time becomes noticeable, a hold notice is more likely to occur. This is preferable in terms of speeding up the game progress while preventing a decrease in attention to the game.

After the lottery process of step S5304 or step S5305 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5306. In step S5306, it is determined whether the conditions for executing the hold notice performance are met in the lottery process. If a negative determination is made in step S5306, that is, if no winner is found in steps S5304 and S5305, the setting process for this hold notice performance is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S4706, the process for determining the hold notice performance pattern is executed in the following step S5307, and after the hold notice restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444 in the following step S5308, the setting process for this hold notice performance is terminated. While the hold notice restriction flag is stored, other hold notice performances are restricted. Then, this hold notice restriction flag is erased when the corresponding hold notice performance is completed.

Next, we will provide additional explanation on the hold notification pattern determination process in step S5307 with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 125 to 127.

(Hold notice pattern determination process)
In the reserved notice pattern determination process, first, in step S5401, it is determined whether the reserved information that triggered the winning of the reserved notice performance is stored with the reserved information that follows. If a negative determination is made in step S5401, the process proceeds to step S5402, and a process of removing the first type of notice performance B from the selection candidates of the reserved notice performance is performed. After the process of step S5402 is executed, or if a positive determination is made in step S5401, the process proceeds to step S5403. In step S5403, it is determined whether there is reserved information preceding the reserved information that triggered the winning of the reserved notice performance. If a negative determination is made in step S5403, the process proceeds to step S5405, and a process of removing the second type of notice performance B from the selection candidates of the reserved notice performance is performed. After the process of step S5404 is executed, or if a positive determination is made in step S5403, the process proceeds to step S5405.

In step S5405, the hold preview performance selection table stored in ROM 443 is referenced to determine by lottery which hold preview performance will be used. The hold preview performance selection table includes a table in which all of the first type preview performance A, the first type preview performance B, the second type preview performance A, and the second type preview performance B are selection candidates, a table in which the first type preview performance A, the second type preview performance A, and the second type preview performance B are selection candidates, a table in which the first type preview performance A, the first type preview performance B, and the second type preview performance A are selection candidates, and a table in which the first type preview performance A and the second type preview performance A are selection candidates. The table to be referenced this time is determined based on the results of each process in steps S5401 to S5404. In addition, with regard to these various tables, if the hold information that triggered this hold notice performance corresponds to a jackpot result, they are more likely to be selected in the following order: Type 1 notice performance A < Type 2 notice performance A < Type 1 notice performance B < Type 2 notice performance B. If the result is a miss, they are more likely to be selected in the following order: Type 2 notice performance B < Type 1 notice performance B < Type 2 notice performance A < Type 1 notice performance A.

After selecting the pending preview performance to be executed this time in step S5404, proceed to step S5406 to execute the preview performance setting process and end this preview performance pattern determination process. The preview performance setting process is broadly divided into a setting process for the first type preview performance A corresponding to the first type preview performance A, a setting process for the second type preview performance A corresponding to the second type preview performance A, a setting process for the first type preview performance B corresponding to the first type preview performance B, and a setting process for the second type preview performance B. Of these, the setting process for the first type preview performance A identifies the pending icon MP corresponding to the corresponding pending information and determines the display mode (color) of the pending icon MP. The setting process for the second type preview performance B identifies the pending icon MP corresponding to the corresponding pending information and determines the step-up pattern of the display mode by referring to the number of shifts until the pending icon MP moves to the execution target display area Db.

In this embodiment, the setting process for the first type preview performance B and the setting process for the second type preview performance B are distinctive. Below, the setting process for the first type preview performance B is explained with reference to FIG. 126, and then the setting process for the second type preview performance B is explained with reference to FIG. 127.

(Setting process for first type preview performance B)
In the setting process for the first type notice performance B, first, in step S5501, the reserved icon MP to be the object of the change of display mode is determined. Specifically, the reserved information stored in the reserved area Rx after the corresponding reserved information is determined to be the object of the change of display mode. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 122(1), there are three reserved information stored after the corresponding reserved information, and the reserved icon MP (see the fifth unit reserved display area Da5) corresponding to the oldest reserved information among these three reserved information is determined to be the object of the change of display mode.

In the next step S5502, a display mode determination process is executed. In the display mode determination process, it is determined whether the pending information is a jackpot result or not, and if it is a miss result, the specific variable display mode is identified, and the display mode (color) to be changed is determined based on the identified result. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 122(2), the color of the pending icon MP to be changed is changed from "white" to "red."

After determining the object to be changed in step S5501 and the display mode in step S5502, a process for changing the display mode is executed in step S5503. Specifically, information instructing the display control device 410 to change the display mode in order to change the display mode in accordance with the shift of the hold icon MP and the information determined in steps S5501 and S5502 (including information indicating that the first type preview performance B has been selected) are added to the shift command. Then, a sound effect output setting process is performed to output a sound effect related to the change in display mode from the speaker unit 29.

Based on the information contained in the shift command, the display control device 410 identifies the target whose display mode is to be changed and the display mode after the change, and changes the display mode of the target hold icon MP to match the shift of the hold icon MP (see FIG. 122 (b)).

Then, in step S5506, the first type preview performance B flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and the setting process for the first type preview performance B is terminated.

Next, the second type preview performance B setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 127.

(Second type notice performance B setting process)
In the second type preview performance B setting process, first, in step S5601, the final display mode (color after step-up) of the reserved icon MP is determined. In the following step S5602, the initial display mode (color before step-up) of the reserved icon MP is determined. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 123, the display mode of the preceding reserved icon MP is changed from "white" to "blue", and the reserved icon MP is replaced and finally stepped up to "red".

In step S5603, the remaining number of shifts until the reserved item that triggered the second type notice performance B reaches the execution area AE is determined. Then, in step S5605, the game round in which the reserved item MP will be replaced, i.e., the timing of the replacement, is determined. In the following step S5606, the step-up pattern of the display mode of the reserved item MP is determined based on the processing results of steps S5601 to S5605. In the example shown in FIG. 123, when the reserved item MP corresponding to the reserved item information shifts from the fifth unit reserved item display area Da5 to the fourth unit reserved item display area Da4, the color of the reserved item MP displayed in the second unit reserved item display area Da2 is changed to "blue", and the reserved item is replaced during the game round in which the reserved item MP is waiting in the first unit reserved item display area Da1 (during the game round related to the reserved item information I3). The display mode of the hold icon that has moved from the first unit hold display area Da1 to the third unit hold display area Da3 steps up from "blue" to "yellow" as it moves from the third unit hold display area Da3 to the second unit hold display area Da2, and steps up from "yellow" to "red" as it moves from the second unit hold display area Da2 to the first unit hold display area Da1. Then, in the state of "red," which is the most promising display mode in this embodiment, it moves from the first unit hold display area Da1 to the execution target display area Db.

After the details of the second type preview performance B are determined in steps S5601 to S5606, the process proceeds to step S5607, where a process for changing the display mode is executed. Specifically, information instructing the display control device 410 to change the display mode in order to change the display mode in accordance with the shift or addition of the hold icon MP, and the information determined in steps S5601 to S5606 (including information indicating that the second type preview performance B has been selected) are added to the hold command or shift command. Then, a sound effect output setting process is performed to output a sound effect related to the change in display mode from the speaker unit 29.

Based on the information included in the hold command or shift command, the display control device 410 identifies the target for which the display mode should be changed, the display mode after the change, the hold icon to be replaced, the timing of replacing the hold icon, and the step-up pattern of the display mode, and controls the display of the hold icon based on the identified information (see FIG. 123 (b)). After that, in step S5608, the second type preview performance B flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and the setting process for the second type preview performance B is terminated.

Next, the preview performance execution process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 according to the items set in the preview performance setting process of the pending preview pattern determination process (Figure 125) will be described. The preview performance execution process is a process executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140, and is broadly divided into a first type preview performance A process that executes a first type preview performance A based on the settings in the first type preview performance A setting process, a second type preview performance A process that executes a second type preview performance A based on the settings in the second type preview performance A setting process, a first type preview performance B process that executes a first type preview performance B based on the settings in the first type preview performance B setting process, and a second type preview performance B process that executes a second type preview performance B based on the settings in the second type preview performance B setting process.

In the processing for the first type preview performance A, the hold command or shift command updated in the first type preview performance A setting processing is transferred to the display control device 410, and a sound effect corresponding to the change in the display mode of the hold icon MP is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 410 changes the display mode of the designated hold icon MP based on the information contained in the hold command or shift command, and maintains the display mode until the hold icon MP passes through the execution target display area Db and is erased.

In the processing for the second type preview performance B, the hold command or shift command updated in the second type preview performance B setting processing is transferred to the display control device 410, and a sound effect corresponding to the change in the display mode of the hold icon MP is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 410 changes the display mode of the designated hold icon MP based on the information contained in the hold command or shift command. Then, when shifting the hold icon MP, the display mode of the hold icon MP is changed at any time so as to match the designated step-up pattern.

Next, we will explain the processing for the first type preview performance B with reference to the flowchart in Figure 128.

(Processing for Type 1 Preview Performance B)
In the processing for first type preview performance B, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the first type preview performance B is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S5701, the process proceeds to step S5702. In step S5702, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the first type preview performance B, i.e., whether or not the first type preview performance B flag has been stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S5702, the processing for first type preview performance B is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S5702, a display mode change process is executed in step S5703.

In the display mode change process of step S5703, the hold command or shift command to which information has been added in the first type preview performance B setting process is transferred to the display control device 410, and a sound effect corresponding to the change in the display mode of the hold icon MP is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 410 changes the display mode of the designated hold icon MP based on the information contained in the hold command or shift command, and maintains the display mode until the hold icon MP passes through the execution target display area Db and is erased.

Returning to the explanation of step S5701, if a positive judgment is made in step S5701, i.e., if the first type of preview performance B is currently being executed, the process proceeds to step S5704. In step S5704, a judgment is made as to whether or not partial shift restrictions are in progress. Details will be described later, but a judgment is made as to whether or not the first type of preview performance B is currently restricting the shifting of some of the reserved icons MP. If a negative judgment is made in step S5704, the process proceeds to step S5705.

In step S5705, it is determined whether it is the timing to cause a special shift. In other words, it is determined whether it is the timing to move the reserved icon MP so as to skip over the preceding reserved icon MP. If a negative determination is made in step S5705, the processing for this first type preview performance B is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5705, the processing proceeds to step S5706. In step S5706, it is determined whether the subsequent reserved information (reserved icon MP) to be subject to the change in display mode is stored.

If the pending information (pending icon MP) that follows the change in display mode is not stored, a negative judgment is made in step S5706 and the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, a first special shift process is executed. In the first special shift process, information indicating that the first special shift should be performed and information indicating the target of the special move are added to the shift command to be sent to the display control device 410, and the shift command is sent to the display control device 410. Then, a sound effect corresponding to the special move (special shift) is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 410 executes the special move of the pending icon MP based on the receipt of this shift command.

Then, in step S5708, the flag for the first type preview performance B stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 is erased, and in the following step S5706, the pending preview restriction flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 is erased, and then the processing for the first type preview performance B is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5706, if a positive judgment is made in step S5706, that is, if there is subsequent reserved information, the process proceeds to step S5702. In step S5702, the second special shift process is executed. In the second special shift process, the shift command to be sent to the display control device 410 is added with information indicating that the second special shift should be performed and information indicating the target of the special movement, and the shift command is sent to the display control device 410. Then, a sound effect corresponding to the special movement (special shift) is output from the speaker unit 29. In the display control device 410, the special movement of the reserved icon MP is executed based on the reception of this shift command. Here, if there is a reserved icon MP following the reserved icon MP that is the target of the special movement, the movement of the subsequent reserved icons MP to the unit reserved display area vacated by the special movement is restricted, and the subsequent reserved icons MP remain in the same position. In other words, the shift is restricted until the reserved icon MP that has moved to the execution target display area Db is erased. Incidentally, during this restriction, a 9th unit hold display area is temporarily added next to the 8th unit hold display area Da8 (until the shift restriction is lifted), and if new hold information is acquired and there is a shortage of unit hold display areas, a hold icon MP corresponding to that hold information will be additionally displayed in the 9th unit hold display area.

In the following step S5711, a partial shift restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and the processing for this first type preview performance B is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5704, if a positive judgment is made in step S5704, i.e., if a partial shift restriction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444, the process proceeds to step S5712. In step S5712, it is judged whether or not the start timing is the confirmation display (final stop display of the pattern) in the game round in which the special movement occurred. If a negative judgment is made in step S5712, the process for the first type of preview performance B is terminated as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S5712, the process proceeds to step S5713. In step S5713, the shift process of the subsequent reserved icon MP is executed. Specifically, a partial shift restriction release command is sent to the display control device 410. As a result, the reserved icon MP that was stopped in its original position without shifting is shifted to the unit reserved display area where it should be.

After that, in steps S5714, S5708, and S5709, the partial shift restriction flag, the first type preview performance B flag, and the hold preview restriction flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 are erased, and the processing for the first type preview performance B is terminated.

Next, we will explain the processing for the second type preview performance B with reference to the flowchart in Figure 129.

(Processing for Type 2 Preview Performance B)
In the processing for second type preview performance B, first, in step S5801, it is determined whether or not second type preview performance B is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S5801, the process proceeds to step S5802. In step S5802, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start second type preview performance B, i.e., whether or not a second type preview performance B flag has been stored in the various flags storage area 466 of RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S5802, the processing for second type preview performance B is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S5802, a display mode change process is executed in step S5803.

In the display mode change process of step S5803, the hold command or shift command to which information has been added in the second type preview performance B setting process is transferred to the display control device 410, and a sound effect corresponding to the change in the display mode of the hold icon MP is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 410 changes the display mode of the specified hold icon MP based on the information contained in the hold command or shift command.

Returning to the explanation of step S5801, if a positive judgment is made in step S5801, i.e., if the second type preview performance B is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S5804. In step S5804, it is determined whether or not it is time for a shift to occur. If a positive judgment is made in step S5804, the process proceeds to step S5805. In step S5805, it is determined whether or not the current shift corresponds to a change in the display mode (step up).

If the determination in step S5805 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S5806, where a display mode change process is executed. In the display mode change process in step S5806, information indicating that the display mode should be changed and information indicating the target are added to the shift command, and then the shift command is transferred to the display control device 410. Then, a sound effect corresponding to the change in the display mode of the hold icon MP is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 410 changes the display mode of the designated hold icon MP based on the information included in the shift command.
After executing the processing of step S5806, or if a positive judgment is made in step S5805, the process proceeds to step S5807. In step S5807, it is judged whether or not the reserved icon to be replaced (the reserved icon MP that has moved away from the execution target display area Db) has reached the judgment target display area. If a negative judgment is made in step S5807, the process for the second type preview performance B is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5807, the second type preview performance B flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 is erased in step S5808, and then the pending preview restriction flag is erased in the following step S5809, after which the processing for the second type preview performance B is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5804, if a negative judgment is made in step S5804, i.e., if it is determined that it is not the timing for a shift to occur, the process proceeds to step S5810. In step S5810, it is determined whether or not this is a game round in which the reserved icon MP will be replaced. If a negative judgment is made in step S5810, the process for this second type preview performance B is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5810, the process proceeds to step S5811. In step S5811, it is judged whether or not the timing has come when the variable display of the lower pattern row has ended. If a negative judgment is made in step S5811, the process for this second type of preview performance B is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5811, the process proceeds to step S5812, a pending icon replacement process is executed, and then the process for this second type of preview performance B is terminated.

In the hold icon replacement process, a hold icon replacement command is sent to the display control device 410, and a sound effect corresponding to the replacement of the hold icon MP is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on receiving the hold icon replacement command, the display control device 410 replaces the preceding hold icon with the following hold icon.

The 18th embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

In the configuration for displaying the reserved icon, its main function is to clearly indicate to the player the number of reserved information stored, that is, the remaining number of reserved items. In recent years, a technology has been proposed that suggests the expectation of a bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved icon. This aims to increase the attention to the reserved icon (for example, the game round to be executed later). Here, it is common knowledge that the reserved icons move in the same manner each time the game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in the embodiment, when multiple reserved icons are displayed in the reserved number display area Da, a movement manner in which the reserved icons are moved to the execution target display area Db in the additional display order (the order in which the reserved information is acquired) and a movement manner in which the reserved icons are moved to the execution target display area Db in a different order are used in combination, so that, for example, an event occurs in which the subsequent reserved icon suddenly overtakes the preceding reserved icon and moves to the execution target display area Db, thereby preventing the movement of the reserved icons from becoming monotonous. Diversifying the movement patterns of the reserved icons in this way makes it possible to create innovative display effects that have never been seen before, which can help further increase attention to the game.

When a specific pending information becomes the target of judgment, the pending icon that would have been added and displayed later is moved to the execution target display area Db, rather than the pending icon corresponding to the specific pending information. With this special movement pattern, a different pending icon than the pending icon that was expected to move to the execution target display area Db is moved to the execution target display area Db. Diversifying the movement pattern by overtaking in this way can favorably exert the effect of increasing the attention level described above.

By changing the display mode (color) of the reserved icon, even when multiple reserved icons are displayed, it is possible to create differences in the likelihood of each reserved icon resulting in a jackpot. Here, a reserved icon whose display mode has been changed is more likely to attract the player's attention than other reserved icons. Therefore, by configuring the reserved icon whose display mode has been changed to move to the execution target display area Db, skipping over other reserved icons, it is possible to reduce the chances that the movement will be overlooked.

Furthermore, when there is a difference in expectation, attention is more likely to be drawn to the reserved icon with the relatively high expectation, and less attention is paid to other reserved icons preceding that reserved icon. In this case, a certain amount of waiting occurs until the game turn related to the reserved icon with the relatively high expectation occurs. In this regard, by configuring the reserved icon to be able to move all at once to the execution target display area Db when a reserved icon with a relatively high expectation is displayed, not only is the waiting time alleviated, but attention can be maintained in an optimal manner by stimulating expectations that an overtaking will suddenly occur even during the waiting period.

The change in display mode of the pending icon corresponding to the special information that triggered the special move (overtake) described above is restricted, which prevents the special move from being buried. It also prevents the effects of the display mode change from remaining after the normal movement mode is restored after the special move (the occurrence of a discrepancy between the expectation set for each display mode and reality).

When a special move (overtake) is made, the display mode of the reserved icon can be maintained (not changed) at least during that move, thereby reducing confusion for the player. Also, in a configuration in which the expected probability of a winning result is indicated by the display mode of the reserved icon, for example, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the change in the display mode. Therefore, by avoiding changes to the display mode of the reserved icon during a special move, it is possible to prevent a decrease in attention to the special move.

In gaming machines where the lottery results are announced by symbols, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the variable display area ME of the symbols. If the above-mentioned special move occurs while the player is paying attention to the symbols, the reserved icon will pass through the variable display area ME, which effectively prevents the special move from being overlooked.

When a special move (overtake) occurs, reserved icons other than the targeted reserved icon will remain stationary in place. In this way, by displaying the moving reserved icon together with the stationary reserved icon, the moving reserved icon can be made to stand out.

When a special move (overtake) occurs, the unit reserved display area from which the move originates is prevented from filling up until a specified time has elapsed (until the transition to the next game round), so even if you miss the special move itself, you can find out about it after the fact.

In this embodiment, if multiple reserved icons are displayed in the reserved number display area Da and the preceding reserved icon is switched with the succeeding reserved icon, not only the appearance of the reserved icon but also its movement becomes distinctive. Therefore, by diversifying the movement patterns of the reserved icons, it becomes possible to create innovative display effects that have never been seen before, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

When moving closer to the execution target display area Db, the pending icon closer to the execution target display area Db (the preceding pending icon) is switched with the pending icon farther from the execution target display area Db (the subsequent pending icon image), which makes it easier for the player to get the impression that the order in which the pending icons are consumed has changed due to the change in the positional relationship between the execution target display area Db and each pending icon.

If this is applied to a configuration in which the display mode of the pending icon changes (steps up) during the process of moving toward the execution target display area Db, the process of moving to the execution target display area Db can be extended, making it appear as if there are more opportunities to step up.

By switching between reserved icons with different display modes, the change in appearance at the time of the switch can be effectively emphasized. Furthermore, even if the player misses the moment when the reserved icons are switched, the player can later grasp that the switch of the reserved icons has occurred, making it possible to effectively achieve the attention-increasing effect described above.

In a configuration in which the display mode (e.g., color) of the reserved icon indicates the degree of expectation, it is expected that the player's attention will increase for those whose display mode has changed. Therefore, if a reserved icon whose display mode has been changed to one with high expectation is moved to the back as shown in this embodiment, the state of high attention can be preferably maintained. Also, once the display mode has changed, further changes are likely to be expected, and the player's attention is likely to be drawn to it. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which an icon whose display mode has changed is moved to the back, it is possible to encourage the player to look forward to further changes in the display mode (step-up). In other words, it is possible to make it appear as if the step-up has restarted from a state where a certain degree of step-up has been achieved. This can further enhance the effect of increasing attention to the game.

When a special move (swap display) occurs, the reserved icon to be replaced passes through the variable display area ME. This configuration makes it less likely that the display state of each reserved icon to be replaced has simply changed at the same time (i.e., that no swap has occurred). This allows the special move to ideally exert its effect of increasing attention to the game.

Instead of the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved information that triggered the change in display mode, the display mode of the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved information stored at an earlier timing is changed, and then the reserved icons are swapped. With this configuration, an unprecedented and innovative display can be realized, and the attention-increasing effect described above can be more effectively achieved. Furthermore, when executing the special move (swap display), it is not necessary to add to the execution conditions that the display mode of the target reserved icon has already been changed, so the conditions for the special move to occur can be appropriately relaxed.

In a configuration in which the reserved icons displayed in the reserved number display area Da move sequentially to the execution target display area Db, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the execution target display area Db or the area immediately preceding it (the adjacent first unit reserved display area Da1). Therefore, when a reserved icon whose display mode has been changed is placed in this first unit reserved display area Da1, the impact of the switch can be enhanced by replacing it with a subsequent reserved icon.

By replacing the reserved icon while the pattern is being displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, i.e., while the reserved icon is displayed stationary and not moving (shifting), it is possible to preferably prevent the replacement of the reserved icon from being confused with the shift movement and becoming difficult to understand.

<Modification 1>
In the first type notice performance B in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, when the reserved icon MP overtakes, the destination of the subsequent reserved icon MP that is the target of the special movement is set to be the execution target display area Db, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the destination of the subsequent reserved icon that is the target of the special movement to be within the reserved number display area Da. In other words, the subsequent reserved icon MP may be configured to move so as to interrupt the multiple reserved icons MP that were displayed in a series in the reserved number display area Da.

When using this type of configuration, it is advisable to use a configuration in which a special movement occurs during variable display instead of or in addition to a configuration in which a special movement occurs when shifting.

<Modification 2>
In the first type notice performance B in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, by restricting the overlap of the reserved notice performance, the display mode of the reserved icon MP waiting in the first unit reserved display area Da1 immediately before the execution target display area Db when the special move occurs (the reserved icon MP that would normally move to the execution target display area Db) is configured to be "white", but it is sufficient as long as the display mode is one with a lower expectation of a jackpot result than the display mode of the reserved icon MP that is the target of the special move, and it is not necessarily necessary to limit it to "white". For example, if the display mode of the reserved icon MP that is the target of the special move is "red", the impact can be strengthened even if it is "white", "blue", or "yellow", which has a lower expectation than that.

<Modification 3>
In the first type notice performance B in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the display mode of the reserved icon MP that is the target of the special move does not change before and after the special move, but it is also possible to configure the display mode of the reserved icon MP that is the target of the special move to change before and after the special move. For example, when a "yellow" reserved icon MP displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Da4 is specially moved to the execution target display area Db, it is also possible to configure the display mode of the reserved icon MP to change from "yellow" to "red" (a display mode with a higher expectation than the original display mode) with the special move.

<Modification 4>
In the first type preview performance B in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the display mode (color) of the reserved icon MP that is the target of the special move is changed and the reserved icon MP is moved to the execution target display area Db. However, in order to make it appear as if the subsequent reserved icon MP is overtaking the preceding reserved icon MP and moving to the execution target display area Db, it is not necessarily necessary to change the display mode of the reserved icon MP that is the target of the special move.

<Modification 5>
In the first type notice performance B in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, when there is pending information succeeding the pending information that triggered the pending notice performance, the first type notice performance B can be selected, but this may be changed as follows. That is, the change in the display mode due to the second type notice performance B is planned in advance, and when the pending information is newly acquired before the pending information moves to the execution area AE, the display mode of the pending icon for the newly acquired pending information is changed, and when the pending information moves to the execution area, the pending icon MP whose display mode has changed in advance may overtake other pending icons MP and move to the execution target display area Db.

<Modification 6>
In the second type notice performance B in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the reserved icon is replaced in the game round immediately before the fake reserved icon moves to the execution area, but the replacement may be performed before the previous game round. Also, it is possible to replace the reserved icon after the fake reserved icon moves to the execution area.

<Modification 7>
In the second type preview performance B in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, an example is given of a case where another hold icon exists between the fake hold icon and the corresponding hold icon, but this does not deny a configuration in which no other hold icon exists between the fake hold icon and the corresponding hold icon.

<Modification 8>
In the second type preview performance B in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the display mode of the preceding fake hold icon is changed to either "blue,""yellow," or "red," and then replaced with the subsequent hold icon MP, which is "white." However, it is sufficient for at least the subsequent hold icon to be replaced to have a display mode with a lower expectation level than the preceding fake hold icon, and it does not necessarily have to be "white."

<Modification 9>
In the second type notice performance B in the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the reserved icon MP is replaced during the variable display of the pattern, but this is not limited to this. The reserved icon MP may be replaced during the stopped display of the pattern (during the fixed display).

In addition, in the second type preview performance, the reserved icon MP is replaced by passing through the variable display area ME for the lower pattern row, but in order to achieve coexistence with the lower pattern row, it is also possible to configure the reserved icon MP to be replaced when the variable display speed of the lower pattern row is either low (high identification state) or high (low identification state).

<Modification 10>
In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is provided with a pattern variable display area ME and a reserved display area NE, and when the reserved icon MP performs a special movement (overtake) in the first type notice performance B and when the reserved icon MP performs a special movement (replacement) in the second type notice performance B, the reserved icon MP moves in the variable display area ME, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the movement area of the reserved icon MP to fit within the reserved display area NE.

<Modification 11>
In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the reserved display is performed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, but instead of or in addition to this, a reserved display section may be provided separately from the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 253. Also, it is possible to provide an area (second display area) that displays the reserved number separately from the reserved number display area Da (first display area) on the display screen 253a.

<Modification 12>
In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the pending number display area Da is configured to be clearly indicated by a frame line, but this does not deny a configuration in which the pending number display area Da is not clearly indicated. Similarly, the execution target display area Db is configured to be clearly indicated by a frame line, but this does not deny a configuration in which the execution target display area Db is not clearly indicated.

<Modification 13>
In the case where a "rainbow" display mode that does not cause any further step-up other than "white", "yellow", and "red" is provided as the display mode of the reserved icon, the "rainbow" may be removed from the display mode change candidates for the reserved icon (the preceding reserved icon) that is the replacement target of the reserved icon. This allows room for step-up and can favorably increase the attention of the reserved icon after replacement.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-mentioned embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball launched to the right route in the game area PE is prevented from entering the upper operating port 83a, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to configure the game ball to be allowed to enter the upper operating port 83a even if it is launched to the right route.

(2) A game round based on a ball entering the upper operating port 83a and a game round based on a ball entering the lower operating port 83b may be performed in parallel. For example, when reserved information based on a ball entering the upper operating port 83a and reserved information based on a ball entering the lower operating port 83b coexist, a variable display area of a pattern corresponding to the reserved information related to the upper operating port 83a and a variable display area of a pattern corresponding to the reserved information related to the lower operating port 83b may be formed on the display screen 253a, and both variable displays may be performed in parallel in each variable display area.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 83a (corresponding to the "ball entry section") and the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 83b (corresponding to the "ball entry section") are consumed in order (alternately), more specifically, in the order in which the balls enter. This can be modified as follows. That is, it is also possible to configure the system to preferentially consume either the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 83a or the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 83b. For example, if a difference in the degree of advantage is set between the lottery related to the upper actuation port 83a (reserved information) and the lottery related to the lower actuation port 83b, it is also possible to configure the system to preferentially consume the reserved information related to the actuation port set to be advantageous to the player.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the "ball entry section" is configured to have an upper operating port 83a and a lower operating port 83b, but the number of operating ports does not necessarily need to be multiple and may be one.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410 are provided separately, but it is also possible to provide a single control device that integrates the functions of each of these control devices 140, 410.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the monitoring device 600 is provided separately from the main control device 162, but the main control device 162 may also have the functions of the monitoring device 600.

(6) It is optional whether the information stored in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162 or elsewhere is erased (reset) or not erased by a setting change operation.

(7) The gaming machine may be configured to execute a setting suggestion when the player touches the game ball launch handle 41 while the gaming machine is in a standby state (non-operating state). Note that the condition for executing the setting suggestion may be such that, when the time that has elapsed while the gaming machine is in a standby state (non-operating time) exceeds a predetermined time, the probability of the setting suggestion occurring is higher than when the predetermined time has not been exceeded.

(8) When the gaming machine is in a standby state (non-operating state), a setting suggestion may be made every time a preset time has elapsed. For example, when the gaming machine transitions to a standby state while a symbol combination corresponding to a setting suggestion is still displayed, the gaming machine may be configured to temporarily transition from the demo screen to a gaming screen (a screen on which the symbol combination can be confirmed) when the above-mentioned time has elapsed.

(9) The setting suggestion may be implemented by the image displayed at the end of the jackpot.

(10) In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion is based on the final symbol combination displayed in response to a miss result, but the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion may be based on the final symbol combination displayed in response to a jackpot result.

(11) In a situation where the number of reserved symbols related to the actuation port 83a has reached the upper limit and a winning symbol is also entered into the actuation port 83a, the final stopping symbol combination corresponding to the currently executed game may be rewritten to one corresponding to the setting suggestion.

(12) The device may be configured to have a time determination means such as a real-time clock, and the probability of a setting suggestion occurring may be changed depending on the time of day.

(13) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that are different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop by operating a stop switch, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns appears on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating the effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
The following feature A group has been made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various efforts have been made to improve the reliability of the operation of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing improved reliability."

Feature A1. A storage means (RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing information related to games;
A starting ball entry section (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE);
The system includes an information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot being scored into the starting shot section,
The storage means includes an acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
A gaming machine having a judgment means (a function of executing a win/lose judgment process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined judgment information (e.g., winning information),
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
A set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
an erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means when the setting value is changed by the setting value changing means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a change restriction means (a setting change restriction function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for restricting the change based on the operation of the setting value changing means depending on the game situation.

If information about a game is suddenly erased during play, it is expected that the behavior of the gaming machine will suddenly change. For example, if game balls that should have been paid out to the player are no longer paid out, or if a game round related to the acquired special information is no longer executed, it is feared that this will confuse the player and cause a decrease in trust in the gaming machine. In this regard, the configuration shown in this characteristic restricts changes to the setting values (setting changes) depending on the game situation, making it possible to suppress changes in the behavior of the gaming machine during play. This can contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature A2. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A game machine having a judgment means (a function of executing a win/loss judgment process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for sequentially judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined judgment information (e.g., winning information),
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
A set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a change restriction means (a setting change restriction function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for restricting the change based on the operation of the setting value changing means depending on the game situation.

If the setting value is changed during play, the behavior of the gaming machine may suddenly change, confusing the player. In this regard, if the configuration restricts changes to the setting value (setting changes) based on the game situation, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed. This is desirable in terms of improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature A3. The game machine includes a game ball launching mechanism 110 that launches game balls into the game area based on the player's operation.
The gaming machine described in Feature A1 or Feature A2, characterized in that the change regulating means has a means for regulating the change when the gaming ball launching means is performing a gaming ball launching operation, and continuing the regulation until a first predetermined period has elapsed after the launching operation is completed.

It takes a certain amount of time from when the game ball launch operation is completed until the game ball is discharged from the game area. Therefore, instead of immediately releasing the restriction when the game ball launch operation is completed, the restriction is continued until the first predetermined period has elapsed, thereby preventing the setting value from being changed while the game ball remains in the game area.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in feature A1 or feature A2, which is characterized in that it is equipped with a gaming ball launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 110) that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on the player's operation, and the change restriction means has a means for restricting the change until a first predetermined period has elapsed after the gaming ball launching means has finished launching the gaming ball."

Feature A4. The gaming machine described in Feature A3, characterized in that the first predetermined period is set to be longer than the period required for the gaming ball launched by the gaming ball launching means to reach the gaming area and be discharged from the gaming area.

As shown in feature A4, by making the first predetermined period longer than the period required for the game ball to be discharged, it is possible to effectively prevent the setting value from being changed while the game ball is flowing down the game area.

Feature A5. A storage section (e.g., upper tray 33 or lower tray 34) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and can store gaming balls;
A payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls to the storage unit based on a payout request,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the change regulating means has a means for regulating the change when the payout operation of a gaming ball is being performed by the payout means, and continuing the regulation until a second predetermined period has elapsed after the payout operation is completed.

When a payout request occurs due to a ball entering the ball entry area, etc., there is a certain amount of time lag between the ball entering and the payout. If the set value is changed during this time, it becomes unclear which set value the current payout corresponds to. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by continuing the restriction until the second specified period has elapsed even after the payout operation has ended, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be effectively suppressed.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, which is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14), and is equipped with a storage section (e.g., upper tray 33 or lower tray 34) capable of storing gaming balls, and a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out gaming balls to the storage section based on a payout request, and the change restriction means has a means for restricting the change until a second predetermined period has elapsed after the payout operation of the payout means is completed.

Feature A6. A guide passage for guiding the game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the storage section is provided,
The gaming machine described in feature A5, wherein the second predetermined period is set to be longer than the period required for the gaming ball to reach the storage section from the payout means through the guide passage.

As shown in feature A6, by making the second predetermined period longer than the period required for the game ball to reach the player, it is possible to effectively prevent the setting value from being changed during payout.

Feature A7. A storage section (for example, an upper tray 33 or a lower tray 34) that is provided on the front part of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and can store gaming balls;
and a payout device (224) for sequentially paying out game balls to the storage unit based on a payout request.
A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A6, characterized in that the change regulating means has a means for regulating the change when there is a gaming ball waiting to be paid out by the payout means, at least until the payout of that gaming ball is completed.

In gaming machines, there are cases where it becomes difficult to immediately dispense game balls due to factors such as a shortage of game balls. In such a situation, the dispensing operation may be temporarily interrupted, but will resume when a situation becomes possible for dispensing. In such cases, by restricting changes to the setting value at least until dispensing is completed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused as to which setting value the dispensed game balls correspond to.

Feature A8. A detection means for detecting a ball entering a ball entry section provided in the game area is provided,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that the change control means has a means for controlling the change until a third predetermined period has elapsed from the detection means detecting a ball entering the game.

According to feature A8, when a ball enters the ball entry section, a game round presentation or payout of game balls is executed based on that. Therefore, when a ball enters the ball entry section, by restricting changes to the setting value until a third predetermined period has elapsed since the ball entry was detected, it is possible to preferably prevent it from becoming unclear which setting value the game round presentation or payout of game balls corresponds to.

The "goal entry section" described in this feature may be the same as the "starting goal entry section" described in feature A1, or it may be different.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A8, characterized in that the change restriction means has a means for restricting the change when the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means.

According to feature A9, when special information is stored, setting changes are restricted. This makes it possible to preferably prevent, for example, a judgment result that does not correspond to the specified judgment information for special information that would normally correspond to the specified judgment information (e.g., winning information) from occurring, or a judgment result that corresponds to the specified judgment information for special information that does not correspond to the specified judgment information.

Feature A10. A destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes a judgment target by the judgment means at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes a target of the judgment;
The gaming machine described in feature A9 is characterized in that it is equipped with a suggestion means for suggesting the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means at a timing before the specified special information becomes the subject of the judgment.

For example, in a situation where special information that will result in a judgment corresponding to specified judgment information is pending, a setting change occurs while the special information is being suggested, and if the special information results in a judgment result that does not correspond to the specified judgment information, the content of the suggestion may contradict the judgment result related to the special information. In a configuration that suggests a judgment result related to special information in advance, there is a possibility that the suggestion will contradict the actual judgment result, causing distrust among players. In this regard, by combining this with a configuration that restricts setting changes when special information is stored as shown in feature A9, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned contradictions. This makes it possible to effectively suppress a decline in the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature A11. A determination means for determining the number of game balls supplied to the game area and the number of game balls discharged from the game area is provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A10, characterized in that the change control means has a means for controlling the change when the number of gaming balls identified by the identification means corresponds to the number of gaming balls remaining in the gaming area.

According to feature A11, when a game ball remains in the game area, the setting change is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a game ball that should have been launched under a certain setting value from entering a ball entry area under a different setting value.

Feature A12. An openable and closable door body (inner frame 13),
an operation unit (setting change switch 166) that is disposed in a position that becomes operable when the door body is opened and that is operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determination means;
A position detection means (opening detection sensor 706) for detecting the opening of the door body,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A11, characterized in that the change control means has a means for controlling the change when the position detection means detects that the door body is in a closed position.

According to feature A12, the door must be opened to change the settings. This action is conspicuous, so it can prevent unauthorized changes to the settings and contribute to improving the security function of the gaming machine.

Feature A13. A game status monitoring means (monitoring device 600) is provided separately from the main control means (main control device 162) having the information acquisition means, the acquired information storage means, and the judgment means, and monitors the game status based on the game information input from the main control means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A12, characterized in that the game status monitoring means has a game information storage means (memory unit 604) that stores game information from the main control means in correspondence with the setting value set in the main control means.

For example, if a time lag can occur between when special information is acquired and when it is stored in the game information storage means, a change in settings may result in a difference in the corresponding settings. In this regard, by applying the technical ideas shown in feature A1, etc. to the configuration shown in this feature, the effects of such timing discrepancies can be effectively suppressed.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature B group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to improve the reliability of the operation of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing improved reliability."

Feature B1. A main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (a prize ball command) based on a ball entering a ball entry section (e.g., a general winning port 81) provided in a game area (game area PE);
In the gaming machine, a payout control means (payout control device 242) is provided for controlling a payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information.
The main control means
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the payout command information output from the main control means includes specific information (code) indicating the setting value determined by the setting value determination means.

According to feature B1, the payout command information output from the main control means includes information indicating the set value determined by the main control means. In the payout control means, the set value set in the main control means can be identified from the payout command information (specifically, the identification information). In this way, the set value is shared between the main control means and the payout control means, thereby strengthening the cooperation between the two control means. Since the payout command information is information that is frequently output to the payout control means as the game progresses, adding information indicating the set value to such existing payout command information can increase the opportunities to check the set value. This is a preferable configuration for improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

It is also possible to define the configuration shown in this characteristic as "a gaming machine having a main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (prize ball command) based on the entry of a ball into a ball entry section (e.g., general winning port 81) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE), and a payout control means (payout control device 242) that controls the payout means (payout device 224) so that gaming balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information, a setting value determination means (function of executing setting change processing in MPU 402 of main control device 162) that determines one setting value from among the setting values, and a setting value change means (setting change switch 166 attached to main control device 162) that is operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determination means, and the payout command information output from the main control means includes information corresponding to the setting value determined by the setting value determination means."

Feature B2. The main control means has a means for outputting setting value information (a code included in a setting change command) indicating the setting value determined by the setting value determination means to the payout control means when the setting value is changed by the setting value change means;
The dispensing control means
a setting value information storage means for storing the setting value information inputted in association with a change in the setting value;
The gaming machine described in feature B1 is characterized in that it has an information determination means (a function of executing a comparison process in the MPU of the payout control device 242) that determines whether the payout command information is normal or not when the payout command information is input based on the specific information contained in the payout command information and the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage means.

According to the configuration shown in feature B2, when a setting change is made, setting value information corresponding to the setting value determined by the setting value determination means is input to the dispensing control means, and the dispensing control means stores this setting value information. After that, when dispensing command information is input from the main control means, it is determined whether the setting value identified from this dispensing command information (specific information) corresponds to (for example, matches) the setting value stored at the time of the setting change. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior, such as replacing the main control means with an unauthorized one.

Feature B3. The gaming machine described in Feature B2, characterized in that the payout control means pays out game balls based on the payout command information when the determination result by the information determination means is normal, and has a means for restricting the payout of game balls based on the payout command information when the determination result by the information determination means is abnormal.

If there is a mismatch between the previously stored setting value and the currently specified setting value, an abnormality will be detected and the payout of game balls will be avoided. This makes it more difficult to obtain game balls illegally, and strengthens the crime prevention function of the gaming machine.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or Feature B3, wherein the payout control means has a means for restricting the payout of gaming balls based on the payout command information when the payout command information is input under a circumstance where the set value information is not stored in the set value information storage means.

In a configuration in which whether or not to pay out game balls is determined based on the result of comparing set values, there is a possibility of fraudulent acts such as clearing the set value information. In such cases, a configuration that restricts the payout of game balls even if payout command information is input can be used to realize a practically preferable configuration.

Feature B5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B4, characterized in that the main control means is configured to prioritize the output of the set value information over the output of the payout command information.

In a configuration where the possibility of payout is determined by comparing the set value, by outputting the set value information as a priority when changing the setting, it is possible to avoid the payout command information being judged as abnormal even though it is normal. This makes it possible to suitably improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature B6. The dispensing control means is
a first storage means for storing information on the number of game balls to be paid out corresponding to the payout command information as payout number information when the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal;
a payout drive control means for controlling the payout means to pay out a number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the first storage means;
having
A gaming machine described in any one of features B2 to B5, characterized in that when the information judgment means judges that the information is abnormal, the gaming balls that had been stored in the first storage means up to that point are paid out, and the payout of the payout command information that was the subject of the judgment is restricted.

There is a certain amount of time lag between when payout command information is input to the payout control means and when payout is actually performed. This time lag becomes large when payout command information is input continuously and the payout of game balls cannot keep up. Here, if it is confirmed that an abnormality has occurred based on the set value, payouts that have already been determined to be paid out will continue, while payouts of new payout command information that is determined to be abnormal will be restricted. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of inconveniences such as players not being able to receive the payouts that they should have received due to enhanced security functions, etc.

Feature B7. The dispensing control means is
a first storage means for storing information on the number of game balls to be paid out corresponding to the payout command information as payout number information when the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal;
a payout drive control means for controlling the payout means to pay out a number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the first storage means;
A second storage means for storing information on the number of game balls to be paid out corresponding to the payout command information when the payout command information is determined to be abnormal by the information determination means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B2 to B6, characterized in that it has an information transfer means for transferring the information on the number of game balls to be paid out stored in the second storage means to the first storage means when the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal when information on the number of game balls to be paid out is stored in the second storage means.

According to feature B7, if the payout command information is determined to be abnormal, the payout of game balls based on that payout command information is reserved, and if the subsequent payout command information is determined to be normal, the reservation is released. For example, since it cannot be denied that the above abnormality may occur accidentally due to the inclusion of noise, etc., as shown in this feature, if it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the subsequent payout command information, the reserved balls are paid out, which makes it possible to preferably prevent players from suffering disadvantages due to enhanced security features, etc.

Feature B8. A main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (a prize ball command) based on a ball entering a ball entry section (e.g., a general winning port 81) provided in the game area (game area PE);
In a gaming machine having a payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling a payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
The main control means
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
A set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A first output means for outputting setting value information indicating the setting value determined by the setting value determination means to the dispensing control means when the setting value is changed by the setting value change means;
A second output means for outputting setting value information indicating the setting value determined by the setting value determination means at a preset cycle to the dispensing control means,
The dispensing control means
a setting value information storage means for storing the setting value information output by the first output means;
an information determination means for determining whether the setting value information output by the second output means coincides with the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage means;
A gaming machine characterized in that it has a payout control means for controlling the payout of gaming balls when the information determination means determines that the setting value information output by the second output means does not match the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage means.

According to feature B8, the setting value determined by the main control means in response to a setting change operation or the like is transmitted to the payout control means and stored in the setting value information storage unit of the payout control means. Thereafter, the main control means periodically outputs setting value information to the payout control means, and it is determined whether the setting value stored at the time of the setting change matches the newly acquired setting value. If the setting value information does not match, the payout of game balls is restricted. This configuration strengthens the cooperation between the main control means and the payout control means, contributing to improved security functions and reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature B9. The gaming machine described in Feature B8, wherein the payout restriction means is configured to restrict the payout of gaming balls at least until the set value information is received from the second output means if the set value information that is to be output by the second output means has not been input after the period has elapsed.

According to feature B9, if the preset period has elapsed but no setting value information has been input from the main control means, the payout of game balls is restricted until the setting value information is received. With this configuration, the crime prevention function described in feature B8 can be suitably strengthened.

Feature B10. A first control means (main control device 162) that outputs winning ball information (a winning ball command) based on a winning ball into a winning ball section (e.g., a general winning hole 81) provided in a game area (game area PE);
A second control means (payout control device 242) that executes a predetermined control process based on the winning ball information output from the first control means;
a game status monitoring means (monitoring device 600) for monitoring a game status based on information from the first control means and the second control means;
The first control means is
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
The first control means is
a first output means for outputting, to the second control means, specific information indicating the set value determined by the set value determination means;
a second output means for outputting specific information indicating the set value determined by the set value determination means to the game status monitoring means;
The second control means is
a specific information storage means for storing the specific information input from the first control means;
a third output means for outputting the specific information stored in the specific information storage means to the game status monitoring means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the game status monitoring means has a comparison means for comparing the specific information input by the second output means with the specific information input by the third output means.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the setting value may be illegally changed in order to obtain bonuses illegally. In this case, if the information input to the monitoring device is tampered with, there is a concern that the fact of the fraud may be concealed and difficult to discover. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, the specific information indicating the setting value is not only input directly from the first control means to the gaming status monitoring means, but is also input to the gaming status monitoring means via the second control means. By comparing these specific information, the gaming status monitoring means is able to determine whether the specific information has been tampered with. This strengthens the defense against the above-mentioned fraudulent activities and improves the crime prevention function of the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The first control means is configured to output ball payout command information as the ball entry information,
The second control means is configured to control a payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
the first control means outputs specific information to the second control means and the game status monitoring means when outputting the payout command information;
The gaming machine described in feature B10, wherein the second control means outputs specific information to the game status monitoring means when a payout of a gaming ball is executed based on the payout command information.

When comparing specific information, if the timing is significantly off, there is a possibility that an erroneous judgment will be made if the settings are changed properly. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the specific information to be input and output in accordance with the series of movements from ball entry to payout, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned timing deviation and appropriately improve the accuracy of the judgment result.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group B described above.

<Characteristics Group C>
The following feature C group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various efforts have been made to improve the reliability of the operation of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing improved reliability."

Feature C1. A main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (a prize ball command) based on a ball entering a ball entry section (e.g., a general winning port 81) provided in a game area (game area PE);
In a gaming machine having a payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling a payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
The main control means
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
The device is provided with a monitoring means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a monitoring device 600) for monitoring the game status,
The monitoring means includes:
A game information storage means (storage unit 604) for storing game information (number of wins and win probability);
A determination means (a function of executing a determination process such as step S1904 in the notification/performance control device 140) for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means corresponds to a preset reference information (e.g., a threshold value);
A predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing the abnormality notification start processing of step S1908 in the notification/performance control device 140) that executes a predetermined processing (for example, a processing for abnormality notification) based on the judgment result by the judgment means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the reference information is provided for each of the setting values.

Due to the nature of gaming machines with setting change functions, there is a possibility that the behavior will differ for each setting value. For this reason, in a configuration that monitors the game situation and performs a predetermined process (e.g., an abnormality notification) based on the monitoring results (determination results), if a unique determination is made for each setting value, it will be difficult to improve the reliability of the determination result. For example, if common reference information corresponding to all setting values is set, the range of the reference information will be large, making it difficult to improve the reliability of the determination result. In this regard, if a configuration is used in which reference information is set for each setting value, as shown in this feature, the reliability of the determination result can be improved, and the reliability of the gaming machine (particularly the monitoring device) can be suitably improved.

Note that the "predetermined processing execution means (function of executing abnormality notification start processing of step S1908 in the notification/performance control device 140) that executes a predetermined process (e.g., processing for abnormality notification) based on the judgment result by the judgment means" in this feature can also be expressed as "alarm control means (function of executing abnormality notification start processing of step S1908 in the notification/performance control device 140) that controls the alarm means (e.g., error display lamp unit 27 or speaker unit 29) so that a predetermined alarm is executed based on the judgment result by the judgment means."

Feature C2. A main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (a prize ball command) based on a ball entering a ball entry section (e.g., a general winning port 81) provided in the game area (game area PE);
In a gaming machine having a payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling a payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
The main control means
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A monitoring means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a monitoring device 600) for monitoring the state of balls entering the ball entry section is provided,
The monitoring means includes:
A ball-entry information storage means (storage unit 604) for storing ball-entry information (number of winning balls) corresponding to the number of balls that enter the ball-entry section;
A determination means (a function of executing the determination process of step S1904 in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for determining whether or not the scoring information stored in the scoring information storage means corresponds to a preset reference information (e.g., a threshold value);
A predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing the abnormality notification start processing of step S1908 in the notification/performance control device 140) that executes a predetermined processing (for example, a processing for abnormality notification) based on the judgment result by the judgment means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the reference information is provided for each of the setting values.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, due to their characteristics, the behavior of the gaming ball varies for each setting value, and the probability of the ball entering the ball entry area may differ depending on the setting value. For this reason, in a configuration in which the gaming situation is monitored and a predetermined process (e.g., an abnormality notification) is performed based on the monitoring result (determination result), it is difficult to improve the reliability of the determination result if a unique determination is made for each setting value. For example, if common reference information corresponding to all setting values is set, the range of the reference information will be large, making it difficult to improve the reliability of the determination result. In this regard, if a configuration is adopted in which reference information is set for each setting value, as shown in this feature, the reliability of the determination result can be improved, and the reliability of the gaming machine (especially the monitoring device) can be suitably improved.

Note that the "predetermined processing execution means (function of executing abnormality notification start processing of step S1908 in the notification/performance control device 140) that executes a predetermined process (e.g., processing for abnormality notification) based on the judgment result by the judgment means" in this feature can also be expressed as "alarm control means (function of executing abnormality notification start processing of step S1908 in the notification/performance control device 140) that controls the alarm means (e.g., error display lamp unit 27 or speaker unit 29) so that a predetermined alarm is executed based on the judgment result by the judgment means."

Feature C3. The monitoring means is
A setting value specifying means for specifying the setting value determined by the setting value determining means (for example, a function for specifying a setting value in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140);
A gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2, characterized in that it has a reference information switching means (a function of executing the threshold setting process of step S1804 in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that switches the reference information to be referenced depending on the setting value identified by the setting value identification means.

By configuring the system to perform judgment only on the current setting value, rather than on all setting values assigned to the gaming machine, it is possible to simplify the judgment process. This is a preferable configuration for reducing the control load associated with the addition of a monitoring function.

Feature C4. The game area is provided with a first ball entry section (e.g., a variable winning device 82) that can be switched between an acceptance state in which a game ball can enter and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot enter;
The frequency at which the first ball entry section switches to the receiving state is varied depending on the set value,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the standard information is set according to the frequency.

As shown in feature C4, when a variable ball entry section is provided that has a different frequency at which it switches to the receiving state depending on the set value, the movement of this ball entry section will cause a difference in the frequency of balls entering that ball entry section and the frequency of balls entering other ball entry sections. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the reference information taking into account the movement of the variable ball entry section, the technical ideas shown in features C1 etc. can be ideally realized.

Feature C5. The ball entry section has the first ball entry section and a second ball entry section (e.g., a general winning opening 81d) different from the first ball entry section,
The first ball entry section is disposed on a predetermined path (right route) along which the game ball flows down toward the second ball entry section,
The monitoring means has a storage unit that stores ball entry information (number of winning balls) corresponding to the number of balls that enter the second ball entry section,
The determination means has a means for determining whether or not the shot information stored in the storage unit corresponds to the reference information,
The gaming machine described in feature C4 is characterized in that the standard information is determined according to the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry section, which differs for each set value.

As shown in feature C5, in a configuration in which a variable first ball entry section is disposed upstream of the second ball entry section, the movement of the first ball entry section can cause differences in the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry section. Therefore, in monitoring the situation of balls entering the second ball entry section, as shown in this feature, by determining standard information according to the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry section, the accuracy of ball entry monitoring and judgment can be suitably improved.

Feature C6. The game state includes a first game state and a second game state in which the first ball entry portion is more likely to switch to the receiving state than the first game state;
The reference information is a threshold value indicating a range of the goal frequency,
A gaming machine as described in feature C5, characterized in that the lower limit of the threshold value is determined according to the frequency of balls entering the second entry section in the first gaming state, and the upper limit of the threshold value is determined according to the frequency of balls entering the second entry section in the second gaming state.

As shown in feature C6, when a first game state in which the first ball entry section is relatively unlikely to enter a receiving state and a second game state in which the first ball entry section is relatively likely to enter a receiving state are provided, the reliability of the judgment result can be improved by setting upper and lower threshold values according to the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry section in each of these game states.

Feature C7. The set value includes a first set value and a second set value at which the first ball entry section is more likely to switch to the receiving state than the first set value,
The reference information is information corresponding to a frequency of the ball entering the first ball entry section, and the reference information includes first reference information corresponding to the first set value and second reference information corresponding to the second set value,
A gaming machine described in feature C5 or feature C6, characterized in that the scoring frequency associated with the first reference information is set to be higher than the scoring frequency associated with the second reference information.

As shown in feature C7, when the setting value causes a difference in the frequency of balls scoring into the first scoring area, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by setting the first reference information to correspond to the first setting value which has a low scoring frequency, and setting the second reference information to correspond to the second setting value which has a high scoring frequency.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group B to Feature Group C described above.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group was made with the problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to improve the reliability of the operation of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing improved reliability."

Feature D1. A main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (a prize ball command) based on a ball entering a ball entry section (e.g., a general winning port 81) provided in a game area (game area PE);
In a gaming machine having a payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling a payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
The main control means
A setting value determination means (a function of executing the setting change process of step S1313 in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A ball-entry status monitoring means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a monitoring device 600) is provided for monitoring the status of balls entering the ball-entry section,
The ball scoring status monitoring means includes:
A ball-entry information storage means (storage unit 604) for storing ball-entry information (number of winning balls) corresponding to the number of balls that enter the ball-entry section;
A judgment means (a function of executing the judgment process of step S2006 in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for judging whether or not the scoring information stored in the scoring information storage means corresponds to a preset reference information (threshold value);
A predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing the abnormality notification start process of step S2010 in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that executes a predetermined process (for example, a process for an abnormality notification) based on the determination result by the determination means;
A setting value storage means (a function of storing a setting value in the notification/performance control device 140) for storing the setting value determined by the setting value determination means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the winning ball information storage means stores the winning ball information in a state corresponding to a setting value stored in the setting value storage means.

If the ball entry status is monitored by the ball entry status monitoring means, for example, if an event occurs in which the ball entry frequency significantly deviates from the design value due to deformation of the game pins, etc., this can be discovered early. This is preferable in terms of minimizing disadvantages to game halls and players and improving the reliability of the game machine. Here, in game machines with a setting change function, the behavior of the game ball may differ depending on the setting value, which may result in a difference in the probability of the ball entering the ball entry area. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, the ball entry information is stored in a state corresponding to the setting value. In such a configuration, the ball entry information can be sorted according to the setting value, which improves the accuracy of the judgment when judging whether it corresponds to the reference information. Therefore, the reliability of the monitoring results in the ball entry monitoring can be increased, which contributes to improving the reliability of the game machine.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the judgment means has a selection means for selecting the winning ball information associated with the set value stored in the set value storage means from the winning ball information stored in the winning ball information storage means, and makes the judgment based on the selected winning ball information.

When monitoring the scoring situation, it is important to handle temporary variations in the number of goals scored. For example, if the bias in the number of goals scored temporarily increases, it is difficult to determine whether this is due to accidental factors, but by reusing past information to calculate an average, etc., the variation can be reduced. In other words, it is preferable to have a certain amount of data to refer to when making a judgment. However, as shown in feature D1, the stored data contains a mixture of data corresponding to different setting values, so the accuracy of the data decreases when these data are referenced together. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the scoring information corresponding to the same setting value as the current setting value is selected from the scoring information stored in the past and used for the judgment, the effect shown in feature D1 can be preferably exerted.

Feature D3. The ball entry information storage means stores, as the ball entry information, the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry section when a predetermined number of game balls are supplied to the game area;
A gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for restricting the storage of winning ball information if the setting value is changed before the specified number is reached.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the timing of setting changes varies. For this reason, the possibility of a setting change occurring during the process of accumulating information (before a certain number is reached) cannot be denied. In a configuration that stores winning information in association with a setting value, even if the data is stored incompletely, the usefulness of the data is low and storage capacity is strained, which is an inconvenience. Therefore, as shown in this feature, a configuration that is practically preferable can be realized by restricting the storage of winning information if a setting change is made midway.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D3, characterized in that the winning ball information storage means specifies an upper limit on the number of winning ball information items that can be stored for each of the set values.

Even gaming machines that have a setting change function do not necessarily change the settings frequently, and there may be cases where the same setting value is maintained for a certain period of time. In such cases, if the setting value causes a bias in the stored winning information, there is a concern that the effects shown in feature D1 and others will not be fully realized. For example, even if settings 1 to 3 are provided as setting values, if there is excessively little information for setting 1, it is expected that when a judgment is made for setting 1 under such circumstances, there will be a lack of data to refer to, and the accuracy of the judgment result will decrease. In this regard, if a configuration is adopted that specifies an upper limit on the number of winning information that can be stored for each setting value, as shown in this feature, it is possible to effectively prevent the accuracy of the judgment from decreasing due to a lack of data.

Feature D5: The scoring information storage means has a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the scoring information, and when the number of the stored scoring information reaches an upper limit, the means is configured to overwrite any of the storage areas with newly acquired scoring information;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that it has a means for determining a memory area to be overwritten depending on the number of setting values associated with each scoring information stored in the scoring information storage means.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, for example, if there is a shortage of scoring information at one set value and there is an excess of scoring information at another set value, the scoring information with the excess can be overwritten. This makes it possible to prevent the number of scoring information stored from becoming too biased for each set value.

Feature D6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D5, characterized in that the reference information is provided for each of the set values.

Due to the nature of gaming machines with setting change functions, there is a possibility that the behavior will differ for each setting value. For this reason, in a configuration that monitors the game situation and performs a predetermined process (for example, a process for anomaly notification) based on the monitoring result (determination result), if an attempt is made to make a unique determination for each setting value, it becomes difficult to improve the reliability of the determination result. If reference information is set to correspond to all setting values, the range of the reference information will become large, making it difficult to improve the reliability. In this regard, if a configuration is adopted in which reference information is provided for each setting value, as shown in this feature, the reliability of the determination result can be improved, and the reliability of the gaming machine (particularly the monitoring device) can be suitably improved.

Feature D7. The gaming machine described in Feature D1 or Feature D2, characterized in that the judgment means has information conversion means for converting the stored scoring information into information corresponding to the current setting value using a correction value when a setting value corresponding to the scoring information stored in the scoring information storage means differs from the current setting value, and means for making the judgment based on the scoring information corresponding to the current setting value and the scoring information converted by the information conversion means.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, there are various settings to choose from, and the setting value used when making the above judgment does not necessarily match the setting value of the winning ball information stored in the past. Here, with the configuration shown in this feature, even if a stored sample is associated with a setting value different from the current setting value, it is converted to match the current setting value through correction. This makes it possible to secure winning information that can be used as a judgment sample regardless of the difference in setting value. This contributes to improving the reliability of the judgment result.

Feature D8. The game area is provided with a first ball entry section (e.g., a variable winning device 82) that can be switched between an accepting state in which a game ball can enter and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot enter, and a second ball entry section (e.g., a general winning port 81d) different from the first ball entry section;
The first ball entry section is disposed on a predetermined path (right route) along which the game ball flows down toward the second ball entry section,
The winning ball information storage means has a storage unit that stores winning ball information (number of winning balls) corresponding to the number of winning balls into the second winning ball section,
The determination means has a means for determining whether or not the shot information stored in the storage unit corresponds to the reference information,
The gaming machine described in feature D7, characterized in that the correction value is determined according to the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry section, which differs for each set value.

As shown in feature D8, in a configuration in which a variable first ball entry section is arranged upstream of the second ball entry section, the movement of the first ball entry section can cause differences in the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry section. Therefore, in monitoring the status of balls entering the second ball entry section, as shown in this feature, by determining a correction value according to the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry section, it is possible to suitably improve the conversion accuracy when converting stored ball entry information into information corresponding to the current setting value using the correction value.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group C to Feature Group D described above.

<Features Group E>
The following feature E group has been made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve with regard to the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various efforts have been made to improve the reliability of the operation of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing improved reliability."

Feature E1. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A game machine equipped with a lottery means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the multiple setting values;
A set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A monitoring information storage means (a first storage area 605 in the storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information related to games;
A determination means (a function of executing a determination process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for determining whether or not an abnormality, which is a specific event, has occurred based on the monitoring information stored in the monitoring information storage means and predetermined determination criterion information (threshold value);
A notification means (a function of executing an abnormality notification start process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that performs a predetermined notification (e.g., an abnormality notification) when the determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred;
A cancellation means for canceling the predetermined notification by the notification means based on a cancellation operation (a function for executing an abnormality notification end process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140);
A gaming machine characterized by having a cancellation count storage means (a second memory area 606 in the memory unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) that stores the number of times the specified notification has been cancelled by the cancellation means.

According to feature E1, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring information, a predetermined notification is issued in response to the occurrence of the abnormality. This makes it possible to quickly deal with the abnormality and prevent players, the gaming hall, etc. from suffering disadvantages. If the cause of the abnormality is not resolved, the predetermined notification will be repeated. If consideration is given to the turnover of players, the hall manager, etc., it becomes difficult to determine how many times the abnormality has been repeated. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined notification is released based on a release operation, and the number of times the release operation was performed is stored. Therefore, it is possible to know after the fact how many times the release operation has been performed. This can, for example, prevent repeated abnormalities (for example, inappropriate handling of the abnormality) from being overlooked, which can contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Even if a fraudster intentionally cancels an abnormality notification to conceal the fraud, the number of times the notification was cancelled is stored. This makes it possible to infer from the stored number of times the notification was cancelled that there is a possibility that the fraudster intentionally attempted to conceal the fraud. Incidentally, in a configuration in which the number of times an abnormality occurred or was notified is stored, for example, it may be possible to identify the fact that an abnormality occurred, but it becomes difficult to identify whether the abnormality was due to accidental factors or human factors. In light of these circumstances, there is a clear technical significance in storing the number of times the notification was cancelled.

Feature E2. A state determination means for determining the state of the gaming machine when the release operation is performed;
a state determination means for determining whether or not the state of the gaming machine specified by the state determination means is a predetermined state,
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the release count storage means has a means for storing the release count at least when the release operation is performed in the specified state.

By configuring the machine to take into account the state of the gaming machine when storing the number of releases, it is possible to improve the accuracy of estimating whether the release operation is fraudulent. For example, if a release operation is performed in a situation where it would normally be difficult or impossible to perform, it is possible to determine that the release operation is highly likely to be fraudulent.

Feature E3. A setting value specification unit that specifies a setting value before the release operation is performed and a setting value after the release operation is performed,
A gaming machine described in feature E1 or feature E2, characterized in that the release count storage means has a means for storing the release count at least when a set value has been changed before and after the release operation.

For example, if the criteria for determining an abnormality differ depending on the setting value, the possibility of fraudulent activity such as using such differences to conceal the occurrence of an abnormality cannot be denied. In this regard, with the configuration shown in this characteristic, if the setting value is changed following a release operation, the number of releases is stored. This makes it possible to prevent a release operation suspected of fraud from being mixed in with other release operations. This is a desirable configuration for improving the security functions of gaming machines.

Feature E4: A reference information switching unit that switches the judgment reference information referred to by the judgment unit based on a predetermined release that is the release operation,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the release count memory means has a means for storing the release count when the judgment criteria information is changed in conjunction with the specified release operation.

In a configuration in which the judgment criteria information is changed by a specified release operation, the specified release operation may be performed to prevent fraud from becoming noticeable due to a notification accompanying the occurrence of an abnormality. Therefore, if the number of such release operations is stored, it is possible to prevent a release operation suspected of being fraudulent from being mixed in with other release operations. This is a preferable configuration for improving the security functions of the gaming machine.

Feature E5: A reference information switching means (a function of executing the threshold setting process of step S1804 in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that switches the judgment reference information according to the setting value determined by the setting value determination means;
The frequency of the ball entering the ball entry section varies depending on the set value,
The monitoring information storage means is configured to store, as the monitoring information, ball entry information indicating the number of balls that enter a ball entry section provided in the game area,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the release count memory means has a means for storing the release count when a set value is changed in accordance with a specified release operation.

In a configuration in which the frequency of balls entering the goal area varies depending on the set value, the accuracy of the judgment result can be improved by configuring the judgment criteria information to be switched for each set value. However, with such a configuration, it cannot be denied that there is a possibility that the switching function for the judgment criteria information may be abused to conceal the fact that an abnormality has actually occurred, even when the situation should actually be judged to be abnormal. Therefore, by applying the technical ideas shown in feature E1 etc. to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to effectively prevent an abnormality from being overlooked when the set value (judgment criteria information) is switched in conjunction with the cancellation of the alarm.

Feature E6. The setting value includes a first setting value and a second setting value,
The judgment criterion information includes first judgment criterion information that defines a judgment criterion range corresponding to the first set value, and second judgment criterion information that defines a judgment criterion range corresponding to the second set value so as to be a range shifted from the reference range defined by the first judgment criterion information,
The gaming machine described in feature E4 or feature E5, wherein the number of times the release is possible is stored in the memory means for storing the number of times the release is possible when, under a situation in which the first set value is reached and the ball entry information deviates from the first judgment criterion information toward the second judgment criterion information, the judgment means judges that an abnormality has occurred, and when the judgment criterion information switches from the first judgment criterion information to the second judgment criterion information upon the release of the specified notification based on the specified release operation.

When a notification has been issued with the first set value, simply performing a release operation will immediately result in an abnormality being determined and a notification being issued upon resumption of play. If we assume that a fraudster taking such circumstances into consideration attempts to avoid an abnormality notification by also changing the set value in order to shift the judgment criteria range to a side where it is less likely to be determined to be abnormal, it is undesirable for the release operation to be mixed in with other release operations. In this regard, the configuration shown in this characteristic is configured to store the number of releases in such cases, thereby preventing release operations that are likely to have been performed for fraudulent purposes from being overlooked, and contributing to further improvements in crime prevention functions.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group D to Feature Group E described above.

<Feature Group F>
The following feature group F was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to improve the reliability of the operation of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing improved reliability."

Feature F1. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A game machine equipped with a lottery means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
A set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A monitoring information storage means (a storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information related to games;
A determination means (a function of executing a determination process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for determining whether or not an abnormality, which is a specific event, has occurred based on the monitoring information stored in the monitoring information storage means and predetermined determination criterion information (threshold value);
A notification means (a function of executing an abnormality notification start process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that performs a predetermined notification (e.g., an abnormality notification) when the determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred;
A canceling means for canceling the predetermined notification by the notifying means based on a predetermined canceling operation (a function for executing an abnormality notification canceling process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an initial setting means (a function of executing setting change processing in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) that sets a predetermined setting value as the initial setting value when the setting value is changed by the setting value change means when the predetermined notification is canceled by the cancellation means.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the results of monitoring the monitoring information, the fact is notified. This can prompt, for example, the manager of the gaming hall to take action on the abnormality. It is preferable for improving convenience in the gaming hall that the cancellation operation can be performed without eliminating the cause of the abnormality. However, in such a configuration, if the game is played again with the notification canceled without eliminating the cause of the abnormality, the player and the gaming hall may suffer unexpected disadvantages. This is not preferable because it reduces the reliability of the gaming machine. The setting value is managed by the gaming hall and is a configuration that is directly related to profits, so it is easy for the hall manager to pay attention to it. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the cancellation operation is performed, the initial setting value at the time of the setting change is forcibly set to a predetermined setting value. This can suggest to the hall manager that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is, and contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature F2. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A game machine equipped with a lottery means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
A set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A monitoring information storage means (a storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information related to games;
A determination means (a function of executing a determination process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for determining whether or not an abnormality, which is a specific event, has occurred based on the monitoring information stored in the monitoring information storage means and predetermined determination criterion information (threshold value);
A notification means (a function of executing an abnormality notification start process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that performs a predetermined notification (e.g., an abnormality notification) when the determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred;
A canceling means for canceling the predetermined notification by the notifying means based on a predetermined canceling operation (a function for executing an abnormality notification canceling process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
an initial setting means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for setting an initial setting value when the setting value is changed by the setting value change means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the initial setting means has a means for setting the setting value before the change operation was performed as the initial setting value when the specified release operation has not been performed, and for setting a specified setting value as the initial setting value when the specified release operation has been performed.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the results of monitoring the monitoring information, the fact is notified. This can prompt, for example, the manager of the gaming hall to take measures to deal with the abnormality. It is preferable to be able to perform the cancellation operation without eliminating the cause of the abnormality in order to improve convenience in the gaming hall. However, in such a configuration, if the game is played again with the notification canceled without eliminating the cause of the abnormality, the player and the gaming hall may suffer unexpected disadvantages. This is not preferable because it is a factor that reduces the reliability of the gaming machine. The setting value is a configuration that is directly related to profits and is managed by the gaming hall. Therefore, it is easy for the hall manager to pay attention to it. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, if the cancellation operation is not performed, the setting value before the change operation is carried over as the initial setting value, while if the cancellation operation is performed, the initial setting value at the time of the setting change is forcibly set to the specified setting value. This can suggest to the hall manager that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is, and contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature F3. The setting value includes a first setting value and a second setting value that is greater than the first setting value,
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that the initial setting means is configured to set the second setting value as the specified setting value.

If the prescribed setting value when a forced change is made is a setting value that is frequently used in an amusement hall, there is a concern that confusion may easily arise in identifying whether or not a forced change has occurred. Here, in an amusement hall, there are fewer opportunities for a setting value that is advantageous to a player to be used than for a setting value that is disadvantageous to a player to be used. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, taking such circumstances into consideration, a relatively advantageous second setting value is set as the prescribed setting value. This makes it possible to suppress the above-mentioned confusion.

Feature F4: The set values include a first set value advantageous to a gaming hall and a second set value advantageous to a player;
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that the initial setting means is configured to set the second setting value as the predetermined setting value.

If the prescribed setting value when a forced change is made is a setting value that is frequently used in an amusement hall, there is a concern that confusion may easily arise in identifying whether or not a forced change has occurred. Here, in an amusement hall, there are fewer opportunities for a setting value that is advantageous to the player to be used than for a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player to be used. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, taking such circumstances into consideration, a second setting value that is advantageous to the player is set as the prescribed setting value. This makes it possible to suppress the confusion described above.

Feature F5. The gaming machine described in Feature F1 or Feature F2, wherein the initial setting means is configured to set the setting with the highest expected acquisition value among multiple setting values as the predetermined setting value.

If the prescribed setting value when a forced change is made is a setting value that is frequently used in an amusement hall, there is a concern that confusion may easily arise in identifying whether or not a forced change has occurred. Here, in an amusement hall, there are fewer opportunities for a setting value that is advantageous to a player to be used than for a setting value that is disadvantageous to a player to be used. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, taking such circumstances into consideration, the second setting value that is most advantageous to the player is set as the prescribed setting value. This makes it possible to suppress the confusion described above.

Feature F6: A reference information switching means (a function of executing the threshold setting process of step S1804 in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that switches the judgment reference information according to the setting value determined by the setting value determination means is provided;
The frequency of the ball entering the ball entry section varies depending on the set value,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the monitoring information storage means is configured to store ball entry information indicating the number of balls that have entered a ball entry section provided in the gaming area as the monitoring information.

In a gaming machine in which a gaming ball flows down a gaming area, the gaming nail may be deformed by contacting the gaming nail arranged in the gaming area during cleaning or maintenance. If the flow path of the gaming ball changes due to such deformation, the ball may enter the game more frequently than the original design value, or may enter the game more frequently than the original design value. This causes disadvantages to the gaming hall and the player. Therefore, by configuring the ball entry information to be stored by the monitoring information storage means, it is possible to identify the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience (abnormality). However, ball entries do not always occur at a constant frequency, and if the monitoring period is short, there will be some variation. In contrast, if the monitoring period is set long, it will be possible to suppress the variation, but it will take time to identify the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. For these reasons, configuring the notification based on the result of the abnormality judgment to be able to be canceled at will has the advantage of being able to consider the reliability of the judgment result and improvement of responsiveness. However, in this type of configuration, the abnormality itself is difficult to identify visually, and there is a possibility that the fact will be forgotten after a certain amount of time has passed since the alarm was turned off. By applying the technical idea shown in Feature F1 to this type of configuration, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature F7. The setting value includes a first setting value and a second setting value,
The judgment criterion information includes first judgment criterion information that defines a judgment criterion range corresponding to the first set value, and second judgment criterion information that defines a judgment criterion range corresponding to the second set value so as to be a range shifted from the reference range defined by the first judgment criterion information,
the predetermined release operation is a setting change operation by the setting value change means,
The gaming machine described in feature F6 is characterized in that the initial setting means is configured to set the specified setting value as the initial setting value when, when the ball entry information deviates from the first judgment criterion information to the second judgment criterion information side while the first setting value is set and the judgment means judges that an abnormality has occurred, the judgment criterion information switches from the first judgment criterion information to the second judgment criterion information upon the cancellation of the specified notification based on the specified cancellation operation.

When an alarm has been issued with the first set value, simply performing a release operation will immediately result in an abnormality determination and an alarm being issued. In cases where a fraudster considering this situation attempts to avoid an abnormality alarm by also changing the set value in order to shift the determination criteria range to a side where an abnormality is less likely to be determined, a specific set value is set as the initial setting value. This prevents release operations that are likely to have been performed with fraudulent intent from being overlooked, contributing to further improvements in crime prevention functions.

Feature F8: The setting value determination means has a startup determination means for determining the setting value when the gaming machine is powered on;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that the startup determination means has a means for determining the setting value before the power was cut off as the new setting value if the specified release operation has not been performed, and for determining the specified setting value as the new setting value if the specified release operation has been performed.

Settings are not necessarily changed every day, and settings once determined may be maintained for a certain number of days. When taking such circumstances into consideration, this feature allows the setting to be inherited/forcibly changed when determining the setting at power-on, making it possible to deal with such situations appropriately.

Feature F9. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A game machine equipped with a lottery means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
A set value changing means (a set value changing switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A monitoring information storage means (a storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information related to games;
A determination means (a function of executing a determination process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for determining whether or not an abnormality, which is a specific event, has occurred based on the monitoring information stored in the monitoring information storage means;
A notification means (a function of executing an abnormality notification start process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that performs a predetermined notification (e.g., an abnormality notification) when the determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred;
A canceling means for canceling the predetermined notification by the notifying means based on a predetermined canceling operation (a function for executing an abnormality notification canceling process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
an initial setting means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for setting an initial setting value when the setting value is changed by the setting value change means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the initial setting means has a means for setting the setting value before the change operation was performed as the initial setting value when the specified release operation has not been performed, and for setting the setting value different from the setting value before the change operation was performed as the initial setting value when the specified release operation has been performed.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the results of monitoring the monitoring information, the fact is notified. This can prompt, for example, the manager of the gaming hall to take measures to deal with the abnormality. It is preferable to be able to perform the cancellation operation without eliminating the cause of the abnormality in order to improve convenience in the gaming hall. However, in such a configuration, if the game is played again with the notification canceled without eliminating the cause of the abnormality, the player and the gaming hall may suffer unexpected disadvantages. This is not preferable because it is a factor that reduces the reliability of the gaming machine. The setting value is a configuration that is directly related to profits and is managed by the gaming hall. Therefore, it is easy for the hall manager to pay attention to it. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, if the cancellation operation is not performed, the setting value before the change operation is carried over as the initial setting value, while if the cancellation operation is performed, the initial setting value at the time of the setting change is forcibly set to the specified setting value. This can suggest to the hall manager that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is, and contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group E to Feature Group F described above.

<Feature Group G>
The following feature group G was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1)."

Feature G1. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A pattern display device (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns (pattern rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen;
A display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for statically displaying the pictures after the pictures are variably displayed in a pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means;
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to the special game state after the picture is stopped and displayed by the display control means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state;
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a setting value changing means (a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means,
The display control means
a first notification means (a function of executing a winning reach by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for notifying a transition to the special game state by stopping and displaying the first pattern combination after starting a variable display of patterns and then stopping and displaying the final stopped patterns in a situation where the other patterns, except for the final stopped pattern, among the patterns that may form the first pattern combination corresponding to the winning result are stopped and displayed after starting a variable display of patterns;
a second notification means (a function of executing a miss reach by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for notifying that the special game state will not be entered by stopping and displaying a second pattern combination corresponding to the non-winning result after starting the variable display of patterns when the lottery results in a non-winning result that does not correspond to the transition to the special game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a suggestion means (a function of executing a setting suggestion in the notification/presentation control device 140) that suggests the setting value determined by the setting value determination means when the notification is executed by the second notification means.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the enjoyments is guessing the setting value while playing. Here, when the reach fluctuation display is executed, the player's attention to the game is likely to be heightened. By configuring the machine to suggest a setting value (setting suggestion) when the player's attention is heightened, the chances that the setting suggestion will be overlooked can be reduced.

In addition, when a reach fluctuation display is executed, there is a possibility that a winning result will be announced via the reach fluctuation display, so attention to the presentation increases. However, when a non-winning result is announced when attention has been high in this way, there is a possibility that attention to the game will drop significantly as expectations decrease. In this regard, by configuring the device to provide setting suggestions in conjunction with the reach fluctuation display as shown in this feature, it is possible to prevent a large drop in attention when a non-winning result occurs.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1, characterized in that the suggestion means provides the suggestion on the display screen of the picture display device.

In a configuration in which the lottery result is indicated by a picture combination that is stopped and displayed on the display screen as shown in feature G2, when a reach fluctuation display is executed, the player's attention is likely to shift from the game area (more specifically, the game ball flowing down the game area) to the display screen. Therefore, if the above-mentioned setting suggestions are executed on the display screen, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of setting suggestions being overlooked even though they have been made. This allows the effect shown in feature G1 to be optimally exerted.

Feature G3. The gaming machine described in Feature G1 or Feature G2, characterized in that the suggestion means gives the suggestion after the reach fluctuation display is activated.

In a configuration in which the winning result is notified via a reach change display, the transition to the reach change display increases attention to the image change display. In this way, a configuration in which setting suggestions are made under conditions of high attention can effectively reduce the chances of missing the above-mentioned result.

Feature G4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G3, characterized in that the suggestion means gives the suggestion in association with the stopped display of a picture combination corresponding to the lottery result.

In a configuration in which the lottery result is clearly indicated by the picture combination that is frozen and displayed on the display screen, there is a possibility that the level of attention will suddenly drop when it becomes clear that the result is not a winning one. Therefore, by configuring the game so that setting suggestions can occur at such times, it is possible to effectively prevent such a drop in attention.

Feature G5. The display control means is configured to perform a final display (final stop display) in which the picture combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed and then the picture combination is maintained stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (determined display period);
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the suggestion means makes the suggestion during the specified period.

In a configuration in which the lottery result is clearly indicated by the picture combination that is frozen and displayed on the display screen, there is a possibility that the level of attention will suddenly drop when it becomes clear that the result is not a winning one. Therefore, by configuring the game so that setting suggestions can occur at such times, it is possible to effectively prevent such a drop in attention.

Feature G6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G5, characterized in that the suggestion means has a continuation means for continuing the suggestion started in a previous game round so as to span the next game round.

There is a concern that the shorter the execution period of the setting suggestions described above, the higher the chance of them being overlooked. In this regard, with the configuration shown in this characteristic, a setting suggestion that was started in a previous play round can be continued across to the next play round, reducing the chance of such an oversight. For example, in a configuration in which play rounds proceed one after the other, this is preferable in terms of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine. However, the fact that the player cannot stop a play round midway at any time can be a factor in causing setting suggestions to be overlooked. In this regard, with the configuration shown in this characteristic, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be effectively suppressed.

Feature G7: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information;
The lottery means is configured to sequentially perform the lottery for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The gaming machine described in feature G6 is characterized in that the continuation means is configured to continue the suggestion across to the next game round if special information corresponding to the next game round is stored before the previous game round ends.

According to feature G7, the accumulation of special information extends the setting suggestion period, encouraging the launch of game balls and contributing to improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Feature G8. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information;
The lottery means is configured to sequentially perform the lottery for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G7, characterized in that the suggestion means has an execution period determination means for determining the execution period of the suggestion based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.

According to feature G8, it is assumed that players who want to check the setting suggestions will play in the hope that the setting suggestions will be made as long as possible. Here, if the execution period of the setting suggestions is determined by the number of special information stored, the player will play while aiming to set the number of special information stored to as advantageous a number as possible for the player so that the setting suggestions will continue for a long time, which will contribute to preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G8, characterized in that the suggestion means has a means for suggesting the set value by making the picture combination corresponding to the suggestion when the picture combination corresponding to the non-winning result is stopped and displayed by the second notification means after the reach fluctuation display.

As shown in feature G9, if the setting suggestion is implemented using the non-winning result pattern combination, the setting suggestion information may be included when the non-winning result is displayed, which is expected to draw the player's attention to the pattern combination. With this configuration, the attention-increasing effect described above can be effectively achieved.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be "a gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that the suggestion means has a means for setting a picture combination corresponding to the non-winning result and the suggestion when the picture combination corresponding to the non-winning result is stopped and displayed by the second notification means via the reach variation display."

Feature G10. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information;
The lottery means is configured to sequentially perform the lottery for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The display control means is configured to perform a final display (final stop display) in which the picture combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed and then the picture combination is maintained stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (determined display period);
The suggestion means has a means for suggesting the set value by setting the picture combination corresponding to the suggestion when the picture combination corresponding to the non-winning result is stopped and displayed through the reach variation display by the second notification means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the suggestion means terminates the suggestion based on the lapse of the specified period.

If the setting suggestion is based on the combination of pictures that are frozen and displayed, players who do not want to miss the setting suggestion may play irregularly, progressing through the game one round at a time. This is expected to be an obstacle to smooth game progress and improving the operating rate of the gaming machine. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, the setting suggestion ends when the confirmation period has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively prevent inconveniences such as unnecessary delays in playing due to concerns about missing a setting suggestion.

Feature G11. As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high frequency support mode) are provided in which the frequency of the ball entering the starting ball entry section is set to be higher than that of the first normal game state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G10, characterized in that the suggestion means is configured to give the suggestion in the first normal gaming state.

In the configuration shown in feature G11, gameplay progresses more smoothly in the second normal game state compared to the first normal game state. In a situation where gameplay progresses quickly in the second normal game state, it is expected that the player's attention will be immediately drawn to the next round of play if a non-winning result occurs. There is a concern that even if setting suggestions are made in such a situation, there will be more opportunities for them to be overlooked. In light of these circumstances, there is technical significance in the configuration shown in this feature of making setting suggestions in the first normal game state, where gameplay progresses relatively slowly, as being able to prevent the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Feature G12. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a first winning result (e.g., a normal jackpot result) and a second winning result (e.g., a special jackpot result) that is more advantageous to the player than the first winning result are provided;
The display control means has a means for stopping and displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the first winning result when the first winning result is obtained, and a means for stopping and displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the second winning result when the second winning result is obtained,
The gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G11, characterized in that the suggestion means has a means for executing the suggestion when a reach fluctuation display is executed in which there is a possibility that a picture combination corresponding to the second winning result will be established.

The higher the player's expectations, the greater the disappointment when a non-winning result is announced. This is undesirable as it can lead to a decrease in motivation to play. In light of this, as shown in this feature, a configuration in which setting suggestions are executed in the reach fluctuation display where there is a possibility of a pattern combination corresponding to the second winning result being achieved is preferable in mitigating the decrease in motivation to play when a non-winning result occurs.

Feature G13: As the reach variation display, a first reach variation display and a second reach variation display having a higher expectation of winning than the first reach variation display are provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G12, characterized in that the suggestion means has a means for making the suggestion in the second reach fluctuation display.

The higher the likelihood of a winning result for a reach variation display, the greater the disappointment when a non-winning result is notified (a so-called hot miss). This is undesirable as it can lead to a decrease in motivation to play. In light of this, configuring the second reach variation display to execute setting suggestions, as shown in this feature, is preferable in mitigating the decrease in motivation to play when a non-winning result occurs.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group F to Feature Group G described above.

<Feature H Group>
The following feature H group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1)." The problem that the invention is trying to solve is, "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature H1. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A pattern display device (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen;
A display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for statically displaying the pictures after the pictures are variably displayed in a pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means;
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to the special game state after the picture is stopped and displayed by the display control means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state;
A setting value determination means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a setting value changing means (a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means,
The display control means
a first notification means for executing a first notification indicating that a transition to the special game state will occur by stopping and displaying the first pattern combination after starting a variable display of patterns when the lottery result by the lottery means has resulted in the winning result, and then stopping and displaying the first pattern combination after a reach variable display for varying and displaying the final stopped pattern in a situation where the other patterns among the patterns that may result in a first pattern combination corresponding to the winning result, except for the final stopped pattern, are stopped and displayed;
and a second notification means for executing a second notification indicating that the game will not be transitioned to the special game state by stopping and displaying a second pattern combination corresponding to the non-winning result after starting the variable display of patterns and passing through the reach variable display when the lottery results in a non-winning result that does not correspond to the transition to the special game state,
A suggestion means (a function of executing setting suggestion in the notification/performance control device 140) for suggesting the setting value determined by the setting value determination means,
The suggestion means is
An execution count storage means for storing the number of times the second notification is executed by the second notification means (a function for storing the number of times a miss reach is executed by the notification/performance control device 140);
A gaming machine characterized by having a feasibility determination means (a function of executing a setting suggestion feasibility determination process in the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140) that determines whether or not to execute the suggestion based on the number of executions stored in the execution count memory means.

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, the expectation of a special gaming state is heightened by the execution of the reach variation display. However, even if the reach variation display is executed, it does not necessarily transition to a special gaming state, and in some cases the special gaming state is not transitioned to. If such an event continues, it will be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, whether or not a setting value suggestion (setting suggestion) is executed is determined based on the number of times that a non-winning result has been notified after the reach variation display (the number of times the second notification has been executed). Therefore, even if the reach variation display is unsuccessful, it is possible to give the player the impression that the setting suggestion is approaching, and a decrease in willingness to play can be suppressed. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature H2. A lottery number storage means for storing the number of times the lottery has been executed by the lottery means,
The gaming machine described in feature H1 is characterized in that the yes/no decision means is configured to make it more likely to make a decision to execute the suggestion when the number of lotteries by the lottery means reaches a predetermined number, compared to when the number of lotteries is less than the predetermined number.

According to feature H2, the more times the reach fluctuation display is missed, the more likely the setting suggestion is to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing even when the normal game state continues.

Feature H3. The gaming machine described in Feature H2, wherein the possibility determination means is configured so that the more the number of lottery draws, the fewer the predetermined number of times.

In a configuration where hopes for a setting suggestion increase as the reach change display turns into a non-winning result, the player's motivation to play may decrease as the game progresses without the reach change display being executed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the threshold for setting suggestions becomes lower the more times the lottery turns into a non-winning result, the decrease in motivation to play when the reach change display does not occur can be mitigated.

Feature H4. The gaming machine described in Feature H3, wherein the suggestion means has an erasure means for erasing the information stored in the execution count storage means when the first notification is executed by the first notification means.

According to feature H4, the number of executions is reset when the first notification is executed (i.e., when a winning result is obtained). This makes it possible to prevent frequent occurrence of setting suggestions.

Feature H5. The predetermined number of times is set for each of the set values,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H2 to H4, characterized in that a difference is set so that the higher the set value for the expected value of acquiring game balls, the more the specified number of times becomes.

If a setting suggestion is never executed, this can be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a difference is set so that the more advantageous the setting value is to the player, the more the predetermined number of times that serve as the basis for setting suggestions is increased, it is possible to increase the player's expectations that the setting value is advantageous when no setting suggestion is issued, which can contribute to increasing interest in the game.

Feature H6. As the reach fluctuation display, a first reach fluctuation display and a second reach fluctuation display which is more likely to become the first notification than the first reach fluctuation display are provided,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H5, characterized in that the execution count memory means is configured to store the number of times that a second notification corresponding to the second reach variation display has been executed by the second notification means.

Feature H6 can effectively mitigate the sense of loss felt when a highly anticipated reach fluctuation display is not achieved.

Feature H7: A first state in which the probability that the suggestion will be determined by the suggestion determination means is relatively low, and a second state in which the probability that the suggestion will be determined by the suggestion determination means is relatively high,
a lottery number storage means for storing the number of times the lottery has been executed by the lottery means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H6, characterized in that it is equipped with a switching means for switching between the first state and the second state based on the number of lottery draws stored in the lottery draw count memory means.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, there will be sections where setting suggestions are more likely to occur and sections where they are less likely to occur depending on the number of lotteries. This will enhance the excitement when playing in hopes of setting suggestions.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group G to Feature Group H described above.

<Characteristics Group I>
The following feature group I was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various efforts have been made to improve the security of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of improving security."

Feature I1. A main control device (main control device 162) that performs main control related to the game,
A pattern display device (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display screen;
A display control device (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) that controls the display of the picture display device under the control of the main control device,
The main control device includes:
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on a ball entering a starting ball entry section (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE);
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information;
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means becomes one game round;
An execution period setting means for determining an execution period of the game operation based on the determination result of the transition determination means (a function for determining a variable display time by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A transmission means (a function of outputting a fluctuation start command in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transmitting execution period information corresponding to the execution period set by the execution period setting means to the display control device,
The display control device has a variable display period setting means (a function of setting a variable display time in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for setting a variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display device based on the execution period information received from the main control device,
A setting value determination means (a function of executing setting change processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a setting value changing means (a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means,
As the execution period, a common execution period common to each of the set values and a specific execution period specific to each of the set values are provided,
The display control device is a gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a suggestion means (a function of executing setting suggestion in the notification/presentation control device 140) that suggests the setting value when it receives execution period information indicating the unique execution period.

According to feature I1, the execution period information transmitted from the main control device upon the start of a game operation includes information indicating a setting value. With this configuration, the main control device can indicate whether or not to suggest a setting value (setting suggestion), and it is possible to prevent setting suggestions from being improperly executed due to improper operation of a display control device that has a lower defense function than the main control device.

In addition, since the execution period information sent from the main control device is the basis for setting suggestions, there is no need for the display control device to store and hold information indicating the setting values. Having a configuration in which there is no need to store setting values in a display control device with low defense capabilities is advantageous in preventing the leakage of information indicating setting values.

Furthermore, because the execution period information periodically transmitted from the main control device also serves as information indicating the setting value, it is more difficult to target that information and illegally obtain it, compared to a configuration in which information indicating the setting value is transmitted separately.

Feature I2. The gaming machine described in Feature I1, wherein the suggestion means is configured to execute the suggestion in a game round executed in the specific execution period when the specific execution period is set as the execution period.

According to feature I2, when execution period information indicating a unique execution period is received from the main control device, the suggestion is executed in a game round executed in the unique execution period. In this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to illegally read setting values from the display control device, compared to a configuration in which the suggestion is carried over to a later game round.

Feature I3. The gaming machine described in Feature I1 or Feature I2, characterized in that the display control device has a means for erasing the execution period information indicating the unique execution period and information indicating the current setting value based on the execution period information before the corresponding game round ends, when the display control device receives the execution period information indicating the unique execution period.

According to feature I3, when execution period information indicating a unique execution period is received from the main control device, the execution period information and the information indicating the current setting value determined from it are erased before the next game round. In other words, the information indicating the setting value is not carried over to other game rounds. By limiting the handling period of the information indicating the setting value in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally read the setting value from the display control device.

Feature I4. The common execution period and the specific execution period each have a corresponding predetermined variable display executed by the picture display device,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the period of the specific execution period corresponding to the specified variable display is set to be longer than the period of the common execution period corresponding to the specified variable display.

According to feature I4, the variable display related to the common execution period and the variable display related to the specific execution period are the same, making it difficult to identify the setting value from differences in the appearance of the variable display, etc.

In addition, especially when combined with feature I3, a difference is set so that the unique execution period is longer, making it easier to extend the execution period of the setting suggestion in a configuration in which the setting suggestion is only executed during the relevant play count.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I4, wherein the display control device has a regulating means for regulating the suggestion by the suggesting means when a predetermined regulating condition is met.

According to feature I5, for example, depending on the game situation, the display control device can determine whether or not to restrict suggestions. This makes it possible to prevent excessive suggestions from being made.

Feature I6. The common execution period and the specific execution period each have a corresponding predetermined variable display executed by the picture display device,
A gaming machine as described in feature I5, characterized in that the period of the common execution period corresponding to the specified variable display is configured to be a period that is recognized by the player as being the same as the period of the specific execution period corresponding to the specified variable display.

As shown in feature I5, in a configuration in which a specific execution period is received and suggestions can be avoided, it is undesirable for a setting value to be inferred from a slight difference in period when a specified variable display is executed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the difference between the common execution period and the specific execution period is limited to a level that allows them to be recognized as being the same, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Feature I7. The gaming machine described in Feature I5 or Feature I6, characterized in that the opening part of the variable display corresponding to the common execution period and the opening part of the variable display corresponding to the unique execution period are configured so that the outline of the variable display is common.

In a configuration such as feature I5, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a setting suggestion by counting the time the variable display on the picture display device is taking place. However, as shown in this feature, by making the beginning of the variable display common, it is possible to make it difficult to count the execution period in order to target the number of plays in which a setting suggestion may occur. This makes it possible to prevent the presence or absence of a setting suggestion from being identified, even if the display control device is configured to partially restrict setting suggestions.

Feature I8. The common execution period includes a first execution period and a second execution period that is longer than the first execution period;
A gaming machine described in any one of features I5 to I7, characterized in that the unique execution period is configured to be a period that is recognized by the player as being the same as when a variable display corresponding to the second execution period is executed.

When a first execution period and a second execution period exist within a common execution period, the specific execution period can be set based on the relatively long second execution period, making it difficult to visually identify the difference between the common execution period and the specific execution period, etc.

Feature I9. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially perform a transition determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information,
The display control device has a means for notifying the judgment result by stopping and displaying a picture combination corresponding to the judgment result by the transition judgment means, and for maintaining the picture combination until the start of the next game round;
The suggestion means, when receiving execution period information indicating the specific execution period, executes the suggestion by making the symbol combination displayed in a stopped state correspond to the specific execution period;
A gaming machine described in any one of features I5 to I8, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to regulate the suggestion as the specified regulating condition being established if no subsequent special information is stored, even if execution period information indicating the unique execution period is received from the main control device.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if a unique execution period is specified, if no subsequent special information is stored, the picture combination corresponding to the setting suggestion will not be subject to the stopped display. This makes it possible to encourage players who are hoping for a setting suggestion to refrain from actions that unnecessarily delay play (e.g. irregular play), which contributes to improving the operating rate of the gaming machine. In addition, for example, by preventing a picture combination corresponding to a setting suggestion from being left on the stopped display, excessive reliance on the setting suggestion can be suppressed, contributing to the soundness of play.

Feature I10. A reach fluctuation display is provided as one of the fluctuation displays,
The specific execution period is a period corresponding to the reach fluctuation display,
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, wherein the suggestion means has a means for executing the suggestion on the display screen.

When a reach fluctuation display is executed, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the reach fluctuation display because of the increased anticipation of a transition to a special game state. By executing a suggestion when the player's attention is high, the chances that the suggestion will be overlooked can be reduced.

Feature I11. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially perform a transition determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I1 to I10, characterized in that the likelihood of the unique execution period being set increases as the number of pending information stored in the acquired information storage means increases.

With this feature, players who play in the hope of getting setting suggestions are expected to play in a way that maximizes the amount of special information stored. This can contribute to improving the operating rate of gaming machines.

In addition, as shown in feature I1, in a configuration in which the execution period includes setting suggestion information, it is possible to determine the setting suggestion by counting the execution period. In this case, since counting becomes difficult when game rounds proceed consecutively, there is a concern that delaying measures will be taken to prevent game rounds from proceeding consecutively. This will be an obstacle to improving the operation rate of the gaming machine. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by increasing the probability that a unique execution period will be set when the number of reserved information items is large (i.e., when game rounds proceed consecutively), it is possible to encourage the avoidance of delaying measures and suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Feature I12. A main control device (main control device 162) that performs main control related to the game,
A pattern display device (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display screen;
A display control device (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) that controls the display of the picture display device under the control of the main control device,
The main control device includes:
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on a ball entering a starting ball entry section (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE);
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information;
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means becomes one game round;
An execution period setting means for determining an execution period of the game operation based on the determination result of the transition determination means (a function for determining a variable display time by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A transmission means (a function of outputting a fluctuation start command in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transmitting execution period information corresponding to the execution period set by the execution period setting means to the display control device,
The display control device has a variable display period setting means (a function of setting a variable display time in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for setting a variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display device based on the execution period information received from the main control device,
A setting value determination means (a function of executing setting change processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a setting value changing means (a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means,
The set values include a first set value and a second set value having an expected acquisition value smaller than the first set value,
As the execution period, a common execution period common to each of the set values and a specific execution period specific to each of the set values are provided,
means for setting a first execution period as the execution period when the first setting value is set as the setting value, and for setting the first execution period or the second execution period as the execution period when the second setting value is set as the setting value;
The display control device is a gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a suggestion means (a function of executing setting suggestion in the notification/presentation control device 140) that suggests the setting value when it receives execution period information indicating the second execution period.

According to feature I12, the execution period information transmitted from the main control device upon the start of a game operation includes information indicating a setting value. With this configuration, the main control device can indicate whether or not to suggest a setting value (setting suggestion), and it is possible to prevent setting suggestions from being improperly executed due to improper operation of a display control device that has a lower defense function than the main control device.

In addition, since the execution period information sent from the main control device is the basis for setting suggestions, there is no need for the display control device to store and hold information indicating the setting values. Having a configuration in which there is no need to store setting values in a display control device with low defense capabilities is advantageous in preventing the leakage of information indicating setting values.

Furthermore, because the execution period information periodically transmitted from the main control device also serves as information indicating the setting value, it is more difficult to target that information and illegally obtain it, compared to a configuration in which information indicating the setting value is transmitted separately.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group H to Feature Group I described above.

<Characteristics Group J>
The following feature J group has been made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a ball enters a winning section provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will be generated, and if the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various efforts have been made to improve the reliability of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of improving reliability."

Feature J1: A setting value setting means (a function of executing various processes for changing settings in the main control device 162 or the monitoring device 600) that has multiple settings (settings 1 to 3) corresponding to the expected value of acquisition of a gaming medium (e.g., gaming balls) and sets one of the settings;
a change operation means (e.g., a setting key switch 608 or a setting change switch 609 attached to the monitoring device 600) that is operated to change the setting value set by the setting value setting means,
The change operation means has a first operation section (setting key switch 608) and a second operation section (setting change switch 609) that can be switched between a non-operation state and an operation state,
The set value setting means
a means for switching a control state of the gaming machine from a prohibition state in which the change of the setting value is prohibited to an authorization state (setting change mode) in which the change of the setting value is permitted when the first operation unit is in the operation state;
a means for changing the setting value based on the second operation unit being operated in the permitted state; and
a determination means for determining, when the first operation unit is switched from a first state, which is one of the operation state and the non-operation state, to a second state, which is the other of the operation state and the non-operation state, whether the state at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the first operation unit was switched to the second state is the second state;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for permitting a predetermined process corresponding to the operation of the first operating unit when the judgment means judges that the second state is reached, and a means for prohibiting the predetermined process when the judgment means judges that the second state is not reached.

In gaming machines with a function for changing the set value, the diversification of the behavior of the gaming machine can contribute to increasing the attention to the game. However, in this type of gaming machine, an event (so-called chattering) may occur in which the operating state/non-operating state is frequently switched during operation due to rattling of the change operation means. It is feared that such an event will reduce the operational stability of the gaming machine and cause a decrease in reliability of the gaming machine. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the first operation unit switches from the first state to the second state, the state of the first operation unit is confirmed at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the switching to the second state. Normally, when the predetermined period has elapsed, it is determined that the state is the second state and a predetermined process is permitted, but if the state is not the second state, the predetermined process is prohibited. This configuration can suppress malfunctions of the gaming machine and contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature J2. The gaming machine described in Feature J1, characterized in that the predetermined process is prohibited from the time the first operating unit is operated until the determination is made by the determination means.

As shown by this feature, by configuring the device to prohibit a specific process from being performed until a specific period of time has elapsed since switching to the second state (until a determination is made by the determination means), the occurrence of malfunctions can be effectively suppressed.

Feature J3. The first state is the operating state, and the second state is the non-operating state;
the determination means includes means for determining, when the first operation unit is switched from the operation state to the non-operation state, whether a state at a timing when the predetermined period has elapsed since the switching to the non-operation state is the non-operation state,
A gaming machine as described in feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that when the judgment means determines that the non-operation state is present, the specified processing is permitted, and when the judgment means determines that the non-operation state is not present, the specified processing is prohibited.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when switching from the permitted state to the prohibited state, the specified process is avoided regardless of the state of the first operation unit until at least a specified period of time has elapsed after switching to the non-operated state. Therefore, even if the above-mentioned chattering occurs when switching the first operation unit to the non-operated state, it is possible to avoid the specified process being executed under the circumstances in which the chattering is occurring. This makes it possible to prevent chattering that occurs when switching to the non-operated state from becoming a cause of malfunction.

Feature J4: Equipped with a power supply device (power supply/launch control device 243) and a power supply operation unit (power switch 247) that is operated to start power supply from the power supply device;
The setting value setting means is configured to switch the control state of the gaming machine to the permitted state (setting change mode) when the power supply operation unit is turned on while the first operation unit is in the operating state,
a means for switching the control state of the gaming machine to a notification control state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) for notifying the setting value set by the setting value setting means by switching the first operation unit from the non-operation state to the operation state under a circumstance in which the power operation unit is in the ON state and the control state is in the prohibited state (e.g., a function for executing a setting confirmation process);
the first state is the operating state, and the second state is the non-operating state,
the determination means includes means for determining, when the first operation unit is switched from the operation state to the non-operation state, whether a state at a timing when the predetermined period has elapsed since the switching to the non-operation state is the non-operation state,
A gaming machine as described in feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that when the judgment means determines that the non-operation state is present, the transition process to the notification control state, which is the specified processing, is permitted, and when the judgment means determines that the non-operation state is not present, the transition process to the notification control state, which is the specified processing, is prohibited.

In a gaming machine having two functions, changing the set value (setting change) and checking the set value (setting check), the operation system can be unified into the change operation means (particularly the first operation unit) to prevent the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated. However, in such a configuration, chattering as described above occurs in the first operation unit, and an inconvenience may occur in which the permitted state is switched to the prohibited state against the operator's intention, when the permitted state is supposed to be switched to the prohibited state. The occurrence of such a malfunction is undesirable because it causes confusion for the operator. In this regard, even if the first operation unit is switched to the non-operated state in the permitted state, the prohibited state is not immediately switched to until a predetermined period has passed, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably prevented.

Feature J5. The gaming machine described in Feature J4, further comprising a notification means for notifying the set value set by the set value setting means when the first operation unit switches from the operating state to the non-operating state.

When a switching operation to a non-operating state is performed, the setting value is notified accordingly. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the switching operation was not properly accepted, even though they performed it.

Feature J6. The first state is the non-operation state, and the second state is the operation state;
the determination means includes means for determining, when the first operation unit is switched from the non-operation state to the operation state, whether a state at a timing when the predetermined period has elapsed since the switching to the operation state is the operation state;
A gaming machine as described in feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that when the judgment means judges that the operation state is present, the specified processing is permitted, and when the judgment means judges that the operation state is not present, the specified processing is prohibited.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when switching from the prohibited state to the permitted state, a predetermined process (e.g., a process of returning to the prohibited state) is avoided regardless of the state of the first operation unit until at least a predetermined period of time has elapsed after switching to the operation state. Therefore, even if the above-mentioned chattering occurs when switching the first operation unit to the operation state, it is possible to avoid the termination of the permitted state due to the chattering. This makes it possible to prevent chattering that occurs when switching to the operation state from becoming a cause of malfunction.

Feature J7: Equipped with a power supply device (power supply/launch control device 243) and a power supply operation unit (power switch 247) that is operated to start power supply from the power supply device;
The setting value setting means is configured to switch the control state of the gaming machine to the permitted state (setting change mode) when the power supply operation unit is turned on while the first operation unit is in the operating state,
a means for switching the control state of the gaming machine to a notification control state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) for notifying the setting value determined by the setting value setting means by switching the first operation unit from the non-operation state to the operation state under a circumstance in which the power operation unit is in the ON state and the control state is in the prohibited state (e.g., a function for executing a setting confirmation process);
the first state is the non-operation state, and the second state is the operation state,
the determination means includes means for determining, when the first operation unit is switched from the non-operation state to the operation state, whether a state at a timing when the predetermined period has elapsed since the switching to the operation state is the operation state;
A gaming machine as described in feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that when the judgment means judges that the operation state is reached, the predetermined processing, which is the switching process to the prohibited state, is permitted, and when the judgment means judges that the operation state is not reached, the predetermined processing, which is the switching process to the prohibited state, is prohibited.

In a gaming machine having two functions, changing the set value (setting change) and checking the set value (setting check), the operation system can be unified into the change operation means (particularly the first operation unit) to prevent the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated. However, in such a configuration, chattering as described above occurs in the first operation unit, and when the prohibited state is supposed to be switched to the permitted state, an inconvenience may occur in which the permitted state ends (switches to the notification control state) against the operator's intention. The occurrence of such a malfunction is undesirable because it causes confusion for the operator. In this regard, even if the first operation unit is switched to the operation state in the prohibited state, the prohibited state is not immediately restored, but the permitted state is maintained until a predetermined period has passed, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably prevented.

Feature J8. A main control means (main control device 162) that repeatedly executes a first periodic process (e.g., a timer interrupt process or normal process in the main control device 162) at a first periodic time set in advance, and executes an output process of payout command information based on balls entering a ball entry section (e.g., an actuation port 83a, 83b) provided in a play area (play area PE) in the first periodic process;
In a gaming machine having a payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling a payout means (payout device 224) so that game balls are paid out based on the input of the payout command information,
A ball entry status monitoring means (monitoring device 600) is provided for monitoring the status of balls entering the ball entry section by repeatedly executing a second periodic process at a second preset cycle,
The ball scoring status monitoring means includes:
A setting value setting means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and sets one setting value from among the setting values;
A change operation means (e.g., a setting key switch 608 or a setting change switch 609 attached to the monitoring device 600) that is operated to change the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
a determination unit (a determination function in the MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600) for determining an operation of the change operation unit in the second periodic processing,
The main control means is configured to execute the first periodic process based on the set value determined by the set value setting means,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the second period during which the second periodic process is executed is longer than the first period during which the first periodic process is executed.

In gaming machines with a function for changing the setting value, the diversification of the behavior of the gaming machine can contribute to increasing the attention to the game. However, in this type of gaming machine, an event (so-called chattering) may occur in which the operating state/non-operating state is frequently switched during operation due to the rattle of the change operation means. It is feared that such an event will reduce the operational stability of the gaming machine and cause a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine. In particular, shortening the cycle of the first periodic process is effective in realizing smooth progress of the game and improved responsiveness, but chattering is easily picked up in a configuration in which operation is judged by a periodic process with a short execution cycle. In other words, it is feared that an event that would not be a big problem if the execution cycle was long may become a cause of malfunction. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, various configurations related to setting changes are arranged in the ball entry status monitoring means set so that the execution cycle of the periodic process is longer than that of the main control means. Therefore, it is possible to preferably reduce the occurrence of malfunctions due to the influence of chattering. This can contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, the description of "main control means that repeatedly executes a first periodic process (e.g., timer interrupt process or normal process in the main control unit 162) at a first predetermined cycle, and executes output process of payout command information based on balls entering the ball entry section (e.g., operation ports 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE) at the first periodic process" and "ball entry status monitoring means that monitors the ball entry status at the ball entry section by repeatedly executing a second periodic process at a second predetermined cycle" can also be expressed as "main control means that repeatedly executes a first periodic process (e.g., timer interrupt process or normal process in the main control unit 162) at a predetermined cycle, and executes output process of payout command information based on balls entering the ball entry section (e.g., operation ports 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE) at the first periodic process" and "ball entry status monitoring means that monitors the ball entry status at the ball entry section by repeatedly executing a second periodic process at a cycle different from the predetermined cycle".

Feature J9: The first periodic process is a process for controlling the progress of a game;
A gaming machine as described in feature J8, characterized in that it is provided with a means for regulating the first periodic processing in the main control means when the change operation means is operated by the ball entry status monitoring means.

If the main configuration related to the setting change is arranged in the ball entry status monitoring means, when the setting value is changed in the ball entry monitoring means while the game is in progress, a time lag occurs before it is reflected in the main control means. Therefore, when the change operation means is being operated, the first periodic processing is regulated to avoid the effects of such timing discrepancies.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group I to Feature Group J described above.

<Feature K group>
The following feature K group was made with the problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a ball enters a winning section provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will be generated, and if the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various efforts have been made to improve the security of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of improving the security of the gaming machines."

Feature K1. In a gaming machine equipped with a periodic processing execution means (a function of executing periodic processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the progress of a game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (for example, normal processing or timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle,
The periodic processing execution means includes:
A first updating means (a counter updating function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for updating the first numerical information (e.g., the winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing;
a numerical information acquiring means (a function of acquiring and storing the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring the first numerical information at the time when a ball enters a ball entry section (e.g., the operating port 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE) and storing the acquired first numerical information in a first storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404);
a lottery means (a function of performing a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery (for example, a winning/losing lottery) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and a winning information group (winning/losing table) in which winning information is determined;
The winning information group includes a plurality of winning information groups (e.g., winning/losing tables corresponding to settings 1 to 3) configured so that the number of winning information resulting in a winning result in the lottery is different, and the lottery selection means performs the lottery by referring to one of the plurality of winning information groups,
An operation means (such as a setting key switch 167 or a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means or to confirm which winning information group is to be referred to by the lottery means;
A second update means (update circuit 651) for updating second numerical information (e.g., a winning random number counter CX) different from the first numerical information at a predetermined period asynchronous with the update of the first numerical information by the first update means;
A second storage means (a winning random number register 654) for storing the second numerical information updated by the second update means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a numerical information setting means (a function of executing an initial value setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) which sets the first numerical information based on the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the reference object is changed by the operating means or when the reference object is confirmed.

When the manager of the gaming hall or the like changes the set of numerical information to be referenced (changes the settings) or checks the set of numerical information to be referenced (checks the settings), malfunctions of the gaming machine can be suppressed by, for example, temporarily suspending the periodic processing. However, considering that the first numerical information is updated in the periodic processing, the update of the first numerical information stops while the settings are being changed or checked. This raises concerns that the update pattern of the first numerical information may be easily predicted from the timing of the setting change operation or setting check operation. In other words, if an update function for the first numerical information is incorporated into the update processing, the update pattern can be diversified when the periodic processing is proceeding normally, but the above-mentioned inconveniences may occur when the periodic processing stops proceeding. As such, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the update of numerical information in order to improve the security function of gaming machines.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed, the first numerical information is set based on the second numerical information (so that it is the same numerical information as, for example). In other words, by using the second numerical information that is provided separately from the first numerical information, it is possible to make the update pattern of the first numerical information difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the periodic processing stops as described above and the update of the first numerical information is halted, the resulting deterioration of the security function can be suitably suppressed.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "a gaming machine equipped with periodic processing execution means (a function for executing periodic processing in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for controlling the progress of a game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (e.g., normal processing or timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle, the periodic processing execution means comprising a first updating means (a counter updating function in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for updating first numerical information (e.g., winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing, and a second updating means (a counter updating function in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for updating first numerical information (e.g., winning random number counter C1) when a ball enters a ball entry section (e.g., operating holes 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE). The system further includes a numerical information acquisition means (a function of acquiring and storing the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring the first numerical information at the timing when the ball enters the game and storing the acquired first numerical information in a first storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404), and a lottery means (a function of conducting a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for conducting a lottery (for example, a winning/losing lottery) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and a winning information group (a winning/losing table) in which winning information is determined, and a winning number that is a winning result in the lottery is stored as the winning information group. The lottery means performs the lottery by referring to one of the plurality of winning information groups, and the lottery means changes the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means or confirms which winning information group is being referred to by the lottery means (such as a setting key switch 167 or a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control unit 162) and updates the first numerical information by the first update means at a predetermined cycle asynchronously. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second updating means (update circuit 651) for updating second numerical information (e.g., a winning random number counter CX) different from numerical information, a second storage means (winning random number register 654) for storing the second numerical information updated by the second updating means, and a numerical information setting means (a function of executing an initial value setting process in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for setting the first numerical information so that it becomes the same numerical information as the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the reference object is changed by the operation means or when the reference object is confirmed. " or "In a gaming machine equipped with periodic processing execution means (a function of executing periodic processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the progress of a game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (e.g., normal processing or timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle, the periodic processing execution means includes a first updating means (a counter updating function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for updating first numerical information (e.g., a winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing, and a ball entry section (e.g., operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE). a numerical information acquiring means (a function of acquiring and storing the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring the first numerical information at the timing when the ball enters the lottery winning area 432 of the RAM 404 ...) and a lottery means (a function of performing a lottery for a winning or losing result in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery (for example, a lottery for a winning or losing result) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and a winning information group (a winning or losing table) in which winning information is determined. ), the winning information group includes a plurality of winning information groups configured so that the number of winning information resulting in the lottery is different, the lottery means refers to one of the plurality of winning information groups to perform the lottery, and the lottery means includes an operation means (such as a setting key switch 167 or a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control unit 162) that is operated to either change the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means or to confirm which winning information group is to be referred to by the lottery means, a second update means (update circuit 651) that updates second numerical information (e.g., a winning random number counter CX) different from the first numerical information at a predetermined period that is asynchronous with the update of the first numerical information by the first update means, and a numerical information setting means (a function of executing an initial value setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) that acquires the second numerical information and sets the first numerical information to be the same numerical information as the acquired second numerical information when the reference target is changed by the operation means or when the reference target is confirmed.

Feature K2. The gaming machine described in Feature K1 is characterized in that it is provided with a means for regulating the progress of the periodic processing by the periodic processing execution means when the reference object is changed or confirmed by the operation of the operating means.

In a configuration in which the first numerical information is updated as part of periodic processing, the update of the first numerical information is also interrupted when the periodic processing stops. The update of the first numerical information is resumed, for example, based on the completion of the setting change or setting confirmation. In such a configuration, there is a concern that the update cycle of the random number value, etc., may be easily predicted from the timing at which the change operation ends. This is undesirable in terms of preventing fraudulent behavior such as playing games while aiming for a specific random number value. By applying the technical ideas shown in feature K1, etc. to such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to predict the random number value, and to suitably improve the crime prevention function of the game.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to Feature K1 or Feature K2, characterized in that the second updating means has an oscillator means capable of outputting a pulse signal that switches on and off at a predetermined cycle when power is supplied, and is configured to update the second numerical information based on the pulse signal from the oscillator means.

According to the configuration shown in feature K3, the second numerical information can be updated while power is being supplied. In other words, the second numerical information can be updated by the second update means independent of the periodic processing even while a change or confirmation operation is being performed. This makes it difficult to identify or predict the second numerical information to be applied when applying the second numerical information to the first numerical information, for example, during or at the end of a change or confirmation operation.

In addition, even if settings are changed when power supply starts, the second numerical information can be updated without going through various processes such as startup, which prevents the occurrence of inconveniences such as the second numerical information not being updated in time to be applied to the first numerical information.

Feature K4: The numerical information setting means is configured to acquire the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the change of the reference object or the confirmation of the reference object is completed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that the second update means is configured to update the second numerical information even while the reference object is being changed or the reference object is being confirmed.

When performing change or confirmation work, there is a certain degree of variability in the time required for the work. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, the second numerical information is updated using that period, making it difficult to predict the second numerical information that will be obtained.

Feature K5. The gaming machine described in Feature K4, characterized in that the update period of the second numerical information by the second update means is shorter than the update period of the first numerical information by the first update means.

As shown in feature K4, there is technical significance in updating the second numerical information during change or confirmation work. Furthermore, by updating this second numerical information at short intervals, it becomes even more difficult to predict the second numerical information. Therefore, in a configuration in which the second numerical information is updated separately from periodic processing as shown in feature K1, etc., updating at intervals shorter than the periodic processing interval can contribute to further improving crime prevention functions. Furthermore, shortening the update interval in periodic processing related to game progress increases the processing load of the periodic processing. The configuration shown in this feature can effectively suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Feature K6: The periodic processing execution means is
A third updating means (a counter updating function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for updating third numerical information (e.g., a winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing;
a means for setting the first numerical information so that the first numerical information becomes the same numerical information as the third numerical information when the first updating means updates the first numerical information to become predetermined numerical information;
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K5, characterized in that the numerical information setting means has a means for setting the third numerical information to be the same numerical information as the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the reference object is changed by the operation means or when the reference object is confirmed.

Resetting the first numerical information using the third numerical information (setting to the initial value) when the first numerical information becomes a specified numerical information is advantageous in diversifying the update pattern of the first numerical information and making the first numerical information more difficult to predict. Here, when the above-mentioned setting change or setting confirmation is performed, not only the first numerical information but also the third numerical information is changed to match the second numerical information. This makes it difficult to predict the third numerical information itself, contributing to further improvements in crime prevention functions.

Feature K7: A main control means (main control device 162) having the periodic processing execution means;
a ball entry status monitoring means (monitoring device 600) for monitoring the ball entry status into the ball entry area based on information from the main control means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that the ball entry status monitoring means has the second update means, the second storage means, and a transmission means for transmitting second numerical information stored in the second storage means to the main control means based on a request from the main control means.

In a configuration in which the entry status at the entry section is monitored by a ball entry status monitoring means provided separately from the main control means as shown in feature K7, the entry status monitoring means is provided with a second update means and a second storage means, and second numerical information is sent from the ball entry status monitoring means to the main control means, thereby suppressing an increase in the control load on the main control means. This is a preferable configuration for smoothing the progress of the game, etc. Note that since the ball entry monitoring means does not execute any processing related to the progress of the game, even if the processing load increases, it will not become a factor that impedes the progress of the game.

Feature K8. The device is provided with a main control means (main control device 162) for controlling the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (e.g., normal processing or timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle;
The main control means
A first updating means (a counter updating function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for updating the first numerical information (e.g., the winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing;
a numerical information acquiring means (a function of acquiring and storing the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring the first numerical information at the time when a ball enters a ball entry section (e.g., the operating port 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE) and storing the acquired first numerical information in a first storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404);
a lottery means (a function of performing a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery (for example, a winning/losing lottery) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and a winning information group (winning/losing table) in which winning information is determined;
the winning information group includes a plurality of winning information groups configured so that the number of winning information resulting in a winning result in the lottery is different, and the lottery selection means performs the lottery by referring to one of the plurality of winning information groups;
An operation means (such as a setting key switch 167 or a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means or to confirm which winning information group is to be referred to by the lottery means;
a ball entry status monitoring means (monitoring device 600) for monitoring the ball entry status into the ball entry area based on information from the main control means;
The ball entry status monitoring means includes a second updating means (update circuit 651) for updating second numerical information (e.g., a winning random number counter CX) different from the first numerical information at a predetermined period asynchronous with the updating of the first numerical information by the first updating means, and a second storage means (winning random number register 654) for storing the second numerical information updated by the second updating means,
The main control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it has a numerical information setting means (a function of executing an initial value setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the reference object is changed by the operation means or when the reference object is confirmed, and sets the first numerical information to be the same numerical information as the second numerical information.

When the manager of the gaming hall or the like changes the set of numerical information to be referenced (changes the settings) or checks the set of numerical information to be referenced (checks the settings), malfunctions of the gaming machine can be suppressed, for example, by temporarily suspending the periodic processing. However, considering that the first numerical information is updated in the periodic processing, the update of the first numerical information stops while the settings are being changed or checked. This raises concerns that the update pattern of the first numerical information may be easily predicted depending on the timing of the setting change operation or setting check operation. In other words, if an update function for the first numerical information is incorporated into the update process, the update pattern can be diversified when the periodic processing is proceeding normally, but the above-mentioned inconveniences may occur when the periodic processing stops proceeding. As such, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the update of numerical information in order to improve the security function of gaming machines.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed, the first numerical information is set so that it becomes the same numerical information as the second numerical information. In other words, by using the second numerical information that is provided separately from the first numerical information, it is possible to make the update pattern of the first numerical information difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the periodic processing stops as described above and the update of the first numerical information is halted, the resulting deterioration of the security function can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, in a configuration in which the entry status at the entry section is monitored by a ball entry status monitoring means provided separately from the main control means, the entry status monitoring means can be provided with a second update means and a second storage means, and second numerical information can be sent from the entry status monitoring means to the main control means, thereby suppressing an increase in the control load on the main control means. This is a preferable configuration for smoothing the progress of the game, etc. Note that since the ball entry monitoring means does not execute any processing related to the progress of the game, even if the processing load increases, it will not become a factor that impedes the progress of the game.

Feature K9. The gaming machine described in Feature K7 or Feature K8, wherein the ball entry status monitoring means has a means for confirming a request from the main control means at a predetermined cycle, and the update cycle of the second numerical information by the second update means is shorter than the predetermined cycle.

According to this feature, the timing of the actual request from the main control means and the timing of obtaining the second numerical information are shifted. This makes it difficult to aim for the desired second numerical information.

Feature K10. A power supply device (power supply/launch control device 243) that supplies power to each of the main control means and the ball entry status monitoring means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features K7 to K9, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for delaying the progress of processing in the main control means when power supply from the power supply device to the main control means and the ball entry status monitoring means is started.

According to feature K10, when the main control means requests the ball entry status monitoring means for second numerical information at the start of power supply, an opportunity to update the second numerical information can be secured in the ball entry status monitoring means. This makes it difficult to change settings or check settings by targeting specific second numerical information.

Feature K11. The gaming machine described in any one of Features K7 to K10, characterized in that the ball entry status monitoring means has a means for monitoring whether the second updating means is updating the second numerical information normally.

For example, in order to make it more difficult to target specific second numerical information, there is technical significance in shortening the update cycle of the second numerical information. However, shortening the update cycle also increases the control load when checking whether the numerical information is being updated normally. An increase in control load is undesirable as it impedes smooth game progress. Therefore, in a configuration in which the second numerical information is updated by the ball entry status monitoring means as shown in feature K8, etc., it is possible to preferably avoid impairing the smoothness of game progress due to improved security functions by having the ball entry status monitoring means monitor whether the update is being performed normally.

Feature K12. In a gaming machine equipped with a periodic processing execution means (a function of executing periodic processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the progress of a game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (for example, normal processing or timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle,
The periodic processing execution means includes:
A first updating means (a counter updating function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for updating the first numerical information (e.g., the winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing;
a numerical information acquiring means (a function of acquiring and storing the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring the first numerical information at the time when a ball enters a ball entry section (e.g., the operating port 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE) and storing the acquired first numerical information in a first storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404);
a lottery means (a function of performing a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery (for example, a winning/losing lottery) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and a winning information group (winning/losing table) in which winning information is determined;
the winning information group includes a plurality of winning information groups configured so that the number of winning information resulting in a winning result in the lottery is different, and the lottery selection means performs the lottery by referring to one of the plurality of winning information groups;
An operation means (such as a setting key switch 167 or a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the winning information group that is the subject of reference by the lottery means;
A second update means (update circuit 651) for updating second numerical information (e.g., a winning random number counter CX) different from the first numerical information at a predetermined period asynchronous with the update of the first numerical information by the first update means;
A second storage means (a winning random number register 654) for storing the second numerical information updated by the second update means;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a numerical information setting means (a function of executing an initial value setting process in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) that sets the first numerical information so that it becomes the same numerical information as the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the reference object is changed by the operating means.

When the manager of the gaming hall or the like changes the set of numerical information to be referenced (changes the settings), malfunctions of the gaming machine can be suppressed, for example, by temporarily suspending the periodic processing. However, considering that the first numerical information is updated during the periodic processing, the update of the first numerical information stops while the settings are being changed. This raises concerns that the update pattern of the first numerical information may become easier to predict depending on the timing of the setting change operation. In other words, if a function to update the first numerical information is incorporated into the update processing, it is possible to diversify the update pattern when the periodic processing is proceeding normally, but the above-mentioned inconveniences may occur when the periodic processing stops proceeding. As such, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to updating the numerical information in order to improve the security functions of gaming machines.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed, the first numerical information is set so that it becomes the same numerical information as the second numerical information. In other words, by using the second numerical information that is provided separately from the first numerical information, it is possible to make the update pattern of the first numerical information difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the periodic processing stops as described above and the update of the first numerical information is halted, the resulting deterioration of the security function can be suitably suppressed.

Feature K13. In a gaming machine equipped with a periodic processing execution means (a function of executing periodic processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the progress of a game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (for example, normal processing or timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle,
The periodic processing execution means includes:
A first updating means (a counter updating function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for updating the first numerical information (e.g., the winning random number counter C1) in the periodic processing;
a numerical information acquiring means (a function of acquiring and storing the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring the first numerical information at the timing when a predetermined event (e.g., a ball entering the actuation port 83a, 83b) occurs and storing the acquired first numerical information in a first storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404);
a lottery means (a function of performing a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery (for example, a winning/losing lottery) using the first numerical information stored in the first storage means and a winning information group (winning/losing table) in which winning information is determined;
the winning information group includes a plurality of winning information groups configured so that the number of winning information resulting in a winning result in the lottery is different, and the lottery selection means performs the lottery by referring to one of the plurality of winning information groups;
An operation means (such as a setting key switch 167 or a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the winning information group to be referred to by the lottery means or to confirm which winning information group is to be referred to by the lottery means;
A second update means (update circuit 651) for updating second numerical information (e.g., a winning random number counter CX) different from the first numerical information at a predetermined period asynchronous with the update of the first numerical information by the first update means;
A second storage means (a winning random number register 654) for storing the second numerical information updated by the second update means;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a numerical information setting means (a function of executing an initial value setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) which sets the first numerical information so that it becomes the same numerical information as the second numerical information stored in the second storage means when the reference object is changed by the operating means or when the reference object is confirmed.

When the manager of the gaming hall or the like changes the set of numerical information to be referenced (changes the settings) or checks the set of numerical information to be referenced (checks the settings), malfunctions of the gaming machine can be suppressed, for example, by temporarily suspending the periodic processing. However, considering that the first numerical information is updated in the periodic processing, the update of the first numerical information stops while the settings are being changed or checked. This raises concerns that the update pattern of the first numerical information may be easily predicted depending on the timing of the setting change operation or setting check operation. In other words, if an update function for the first numerical information is incorporated into the update process, the update pattern can be diversified when the periodic processing is proceeding normally, but the above-mentioned inconveniences may occur when the periodic processing stops proceeding. As such, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the update of numerical information in order to improve the security function of gaming machines.

Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed, the first numerical information is set so that it becomes the same numerical information as the second numerical information. In other words, by using the second numerical information that is provided separately from the first numerical information, it is possible to make the update pattern of the first numerical information difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the periodic processing stops as described above and the update of the first numerical information is halted, the resulting deterioration of the security function can be suitably suppressed.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group J to Feature Group K described above.

<Feature L group>
The following group of features L was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1)."

Feature L1. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to the special game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state;
A setting value setting means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and sets one of the setting values;
A set value changing means (such as a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value set by the set value setting means;
An operating means (a game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a setting value suggestion means (a setting suggestion function in the blower device 750 and the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140) that suggests the setting value set by the setting value setting means by changing the tactile sensation to a player touching the operating means.

According to feature L1, the set value is suggested by conveying a tactile change to the player's hand, etc., touching the operating means. With this configuration, compared to, for example, a visual change on a display screen or an auditory change through a speaker, etc., it is possible to reduce the opportunities for players other than the player playing the gaming machine to become aware of the presence or absence of a suggestion and its contents. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to encourage players who are trying to guess the set value to play, which can contribute to improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Feature L2. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A lottery means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to the special game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state;
A setting value setting means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and sets one of the setting values;
A set value changing means (such as a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value set by the set value setting means;
An operating means (a game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a setting value suggestion means (a setting suggestion function in the blower device 750 and the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140) that suggests to a player the setting value set by the setting value setting means by switching the operating means from a first state to a second state having a different tactile sensation from the first state.

According to feature L2, the set value is suggested by conveying a tactile change to the player's hand, etc., touching the operating means. With this configuration, compared to, for example, a visual change on a display screen or an auditory change through a speaker, etc., it is possible to reduce the opportunities for players other than the player playing the gaming machine to become aware of the presence or absence of a suggestion and its contents. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to encourage players who are trying to guess the set value to play, which can contribute to improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In particular, when the operating means is being operated by a player, at least a portion of the operating means will be covered by the player's hand, etc. This allows the above-mentioned concealment effect to be optimally achieved.

In addition, with regard to the setting value suggestion means shown in features L1 and L2, the specific configuration for generating a tactile change is arbitrary, and for example, it may be configured to generate vibrations using a vibration unit, may be configured to blow air using a blowing unit, or may be configured to change the temperature using a heating unit or a cooling unit.

Feature L3. The gaming machine described in Feature L2, characterized in that the operation means is configured so that it is difficult or impossible for a player to distinguish whether the operation means is in the first state or the second state from the appearance of the operation means.

As shown in feature L3, if the state of the operating means is configured to be difficult or impossible to identify from its appearance, the opportunities for other players to learn about the presence or absence of setting value suggestions, etc., can be effectively reduced.

Feature L4. A gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3, characterized in that it is provided with an expectation suggestion means (a function of executing a chance-up effect using a blower 750 or the like) that suggests the expectation that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the winning result by switching the operation means from the first state to the second state.

By using a configuration that suggests the likelihood of winning by switching the state of the operating means to suggest the set value shown in feature L2, etc., a game is added in which the player guesses whether the change in the state of the operating means suggests the likelihood of winning or the set value. This can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in feature L2 or feature L3, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification means (a function of executing a chance-up effect using a blower 750 or the like) that performs a notification indicating the likelihood that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the winning result by switching the operating means from the first state to the second state."

Feature L5. A pattern display device (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns (pattern rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen;
and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for statically displaying the pictures after the pictures are variably displayed in a pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The gaming machine described in feature L4, wherein the setting value suggestion means and the expectation suggestion means are configured to switch the operation means from the first state to the second state when the display control means performs the varying display of the picture and the stopping display, and the timing at which the setting value suggestion means switches to the second state and the timing at which the expectation suggestion means switches to the second state are different during the period in which the varying display and the stopping display are executed.

In a configuration in which the expectation level and the set value are suggested by the operating means as shown in feature L4, a game of guessing what is suggested when the operating means switches to the second state is added. Here, if such guessing becomes practically difficult, there is a concern that the player will be confused and the above-mentioned effect of increasing attention will not be achieved effectively. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the timing of switching to the second state to differ depending on what is suggested while the image is being displayed from changing to stationary (during a game round), the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature L6. A pattern display device (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns (pattern rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen;
and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for statically displaying the pictures after the pictures are variably displayed in a pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The display control means includes a first display effect (operation response effect) and a second display effect (special effect) as a display effect in the picture display device,
the expectation degree suggestion means has a means for switching the operation means to the second state when the first display performance is executed,
The gaming machine described in feature L4, wherein the setting value suggestion means has a means for switching the operation means to the second state when the two display effects are executed.

In a configuration in which the expectation level and the set value are suggested by the operating means as shown in feature L4, an additional game is played in which the player guesses what is suggested when the operating means switches to the second state. If such guessing becomes practically difficult, there is a concern that the player will become confused and the above-mentioned effect of increasing attention will not be achieved. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the flow of the display presentation in which the switch to the second state occurs to be different, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature L7. The gaming machine described in Feature L6, characterized in that the first display effect and the second display effect have a common portion that is common to the first display effect and the second display effect, and a unique portion that is unique to the first display effect and the second display effect.

In a configuration in which the degree of expectation is suggested by causing a switch to the second state in the first display effect, and the degree of expectation is suggested by causing a switch to the second state in the second display effect, common and unique parts are provided in each display effect, so that the suggestion can be inferred by looking at the entire display effect (particularly the unique parts). With such a configuration, the effect of increasing attention to the game can be optimally achieved by integrating the display effect and the suggestion by switching to the second state.

Feature L8: A first prompting means for prompting a player to operate the operation means when the operation means is switched from the first state to the second state by the setting value suggestion means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features L2 to L7, characterized in that it is equipped with a second prompting means for prompting the player to operate the operating means when the operating means cannot be switched from the first state to the second state.

As shown in feature L2, etc., in a configuration in which a setting value is suggested by a tactile change, the suggestion is more likely to be overlooked than in a case in which the setting value is suggested by, for example, a picture display means that is likely to attract the player's attention. Therefore, when suggesting a setting value, the opportunity for overlooking it can be reduced by encouraging the player to operate the operating means. In such a configuration, by providing a configuration in which no suggestion is given as a prompt to operate even when no suggestion of a setting value is given, it is possible to prevent the setting value of the gaming machine from being easily identified.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be "a gaming machine described in any one of features L2 to L7, characterized in that it is provided with a means for prompting a player to operate the operating means in some cases where the operating means can be switched from the first state to the second state by the setting value suggestion means, and a means for prompting a player to operate the operating means when the operating means cannot be switched from the first state to the second state."

Feature L9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features L2 to L8, characterized in that the setting value suggestion means switches the operation means from the first state to the second state based on a predetermined operation being performed on the operation means.

A configuration in which the operating means is switched to the second state when a specified operation is performed is preferable in terms of encouraging active participation in the game. In particular, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, since the operation target and the target for which the setting value is suggested are the same, there is no need to move the hand or the like significantly to check for the presence or absence of a setting suggestion after performing a specified operation. This makes it possible to make it less likely that the player will feel bothered, even if a specified operation is set as a condition for executing a setting suggestion.

Feature L10. A pattern display device (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns (pattern rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen;
and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for statically displaying the pictures after the pictures are variably displayed in a pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means,
the display control means includes a reach display effect as a display effect in the picture display device,
A gaming machine described in any one of features L2 to L9, characterized in that the setting value suggestion means has a means for switching the operation means to the second state in both a reach display effect that is executed when the lottery result by the lottery means is a non-winning result and a reach display effect that is executed when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the enjoyments is guessing the setting value while playing. When a reach display effect is executed, the player's attention to the game is likely to be heightened. By configuring the machine to suggest a setting value (setting suggestion) when the player's attention is heightened, the chances that the setting suggestion will be overlooked can be reduced.

In addition, when a reach display effect is executed, there is a possibility that a winning result will be announced via that reach display effect, and so attention to the effect increases. However, when a non-winning result is announced when attention has been high in this way, there is a possibility that attention to the game will drop significantly as expectations decrease. In this regard, by configuring the game so that setting suggestions can be executed in the reach display effect corresponding to a non-winning result, as shown in this feature, it is possible to prevent a large drop in attention when a non-winning result occurs.

Incidentally, it is advisable to configure the switch to the second state at or after the timing when the image is displayed still during the reach display effect.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Features L3 to L10 described above to Feature L1.

Feature L11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features L1 to L10, characterized in that the operating means is a first operating means (game ball launching handle 41) that is operated to launch a game ball by a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110).

As shown in feature L1, etc., in a configuration in which the set value is suggested by a tactile change, if the player is not touching the target, the suggestion is likely to be overlooked. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by configuring the suggestion to be given by the firing operation means that the player has a high chance of touching as the game progresses, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature L12. The operating means is a first operating means (a game ball launching handle 41) that is operated to launch a game ball by a game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110);
A second operating means (operation button 35) provided separately from the first operating means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L10, characterized in that when a specified operation is performed on the second operation means, it is equipped with a means for executing an operation-responsive presentation corresponding to the specified operation (a function for executing an operation-responsive presentation on the notification/presentation control device 140 and the display control device 410).

When a second operating means for presentation is provided as in feature L12, there is a possibility that the hand may come off the first operating means when the second operating means is operated. This is undesirable as it reduces the actual operating rate of the gaming machine. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature makes it possible to encourage players who are looking forward to setting suggestions and operation-responsive presentations to operate the operating means for launching the game ball with a hand other than the hand that is operating the operating means for launching the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group I to Feature Group L described above.

<Feature M group>
The following group of features M was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature M1. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PE) can enter;
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A lottery means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to the special game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state;
A setting value setting means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and sets one of the setting values;
A set value changing means (a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value set by the set value setting means;
A suggestion setting means for setting the suggestion by the setting value suggestion means according to the score situation in the starting score section (a function for setting the setting suggestion in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a setting value suggestion means (a function of executing setting suggestion in the notification/presentation control device 140 and the display control device 410) that suggests a setting value set by the setting value setting means based on the setting by the suggestion setting means.

In general, a flow path is formed in the game area by arranging game components such as game pegs, but in such a configuration, variations in the frequency of balls entering the game may occur due to individual differences in the game machines and temporary biases. For example, if balls enter the game at a fairly constant rate, the game progresses smoothly and dissatisfaction with the game decreases, whereas if balls do not enter the game successfully for a long time, the player's dissatisfaction increases and his motivation to play decreases. This decrease in motivation to play is undesirable because it hinders the improvement of the operation rate of the game machine. Here, as shown in this characteristic, in a game machine having a setting change function, it is expected that attention to the game will be increased by suggesting the setting value. By using such a configuration and configuring it to set suggestions according to the ball entry situation (for example, the probability of balls entering the game, the frequency of balls entering the game, and the number of balls entering the game per unit time), for example, if balls are not entering the game successfully, the suggestion probability can be increased and adjusted. This makes it possible to appropriately suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play and to appropriately suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

The "suggestion setting means" described in this feature includes not only a configuration for changing the probability of a suggestion occurring, but also a configuration for changing the reliability of the suggestion.

Feature M2. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 83a, 83b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PE) can enter;
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A lottery means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to the special game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the special game state;
A setting value setting means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and sets one of the setting values;
A set value changing means (a setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value set by the set value setting means;
A setting value suggestion means (a function of executing setting suggestion in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that suggests the setting value set by the setting value setting means;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a probability change means (probability change function in MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that changes the probability of occurrence of the suggestion by the setting value suggestion means depending on the ball entry situation at the starting ball entry section.

In general, a flow path is formed in the game area by arranging game components such as game pegs, but in such a configuration, variations in the frequency of balls entering the game may occur due to individual differences in the game machines and temporary biases. For example, if balls enter the game at a fairly constant rate, the game progresses smoothly and dissatisfaction with the game decreases, whereas if balls do not enter the game successfully for a long time, the player's dissatisfaction increases and his motivation to play decreases. This decrease in motivation to play is undesirable because it hinders the improvement of the operation rate of the game machine. Here, as shown in this characteristic, in a game machine having a setting change function, it is expected that attention to the game will be increased by suggesting the setting value. By using such a configuration and configuring it to set suggestions according to the ball entry situation (for example, the probability of balls entering the game, the frequency of balls entering the game, and the number of balls entering the game per unit time), for example, if balls are not entering the game successfully, the suggestion probability can be increased and adjusted. This makes it possible to appropriately suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play and to appropriately suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Feature M3. The gaming machine described in Feature M2, characterized in that the probability changing means is configured to identify the ball-scoring situation based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and to change the probability of occurrence of the suggestion by the set value suggestion means based on the identification result.

The suggestion probability change function shown in feature M2 appropriately suggests a set value depending on the ball-scoring situation, which is preferable in terms of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play. However, if the suggestion probability is changed depending on the ball-scoring situation, there is a concern that the increased control load in monitoring the ball-scoring situation may hinder smooth game progress. In this regard, if the ball-scoring situation is identified based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, as shown in this feature, the ball-scoring situation can be easily monitored, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be effectively prevented.

Feature M4. The setting values include a first setting value (e.g., setting 3) and a second setting value (e.g., setting 1) that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value;
The gaming machine described in feature M3 is characterized in that the probability changing means has a means for changing the probability of occurrence of the suggestion to be higher based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means being lower than a predetermined reference value when the setting value set by the setting value setting means is the second setting value.

When the number of balls entering the starting ball entry area is less than expected (reference value) in a situation where the second set value is relatively favorable to the player, the probability of suggesting the set value is adjusted to be higher. In this way, by increasing the opportunities for the set value to be suggested in a situation where the player's motivation to play is likely to decrease, the effect of suppressing the decrease in motivation to play, as shown in feature M2, can be optimally exerted.

In addition, the description in this characteristic that "includes a first setting value (e.g., setting 3) and a second setting value (e.g., setting 1) that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value" may be changed to "includes a first setting value (e.g., setting 3) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second setting value (e.g., setting 1) that is relatively advantageous to the player."

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in feature M3, characterized in that the setting values include a first setting value (e.g., setting 3) that is disadvantageous to the player when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is included in a predetermined reference value, and a second setting value (e.g., setting 1) that is disadvantageous to the player when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is included in the reference value, and the probability changing means has a means for changing the probability of occurrence of the suggestion to be higher based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means being below the reference value when the setting value set by the setting value setting means is the second setting value."

Feature M5. The gaming machine described in Feature M4, characterized in that the probability changing means is configured not to change the probability of occurrence of the suggestion when the setting value set by the setting value setting means is the first setting value, even if the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is below the reference value.

Actively informing the player that the setting value is unfavorable can reduce the player's motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the setting value is the first setting value, the occurrence probability is avoided from being corrected even if the ball-scoring situation is below the standard, so that the occurrence of such inconveniences can be effectively suppressed.

Feature M6: The setting values include a first setting value (e.g., setting 3) and a second setting value (e.g., setting 1) that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value;
A gaming machine described in any one of features M3 to M5, characterized in that the probability changing means has a means for changing the probability of occurrence of the suggestion to be lower based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means exceeding a predetermined reference value when the setting value set by the setting value setting means is the second setting value.

In a situation where the second set value is relatively favorable to the player, and the number of balls entering the starting ball entry area is higher than expected (standard), the probability of the set value being suggested is adjusted to be lower. In this way, by reducing the opportunities for the set value to be suggested in a situation where the player's motivation to play is unlikely to decrease, it is possible to prevent excessively frequent suggestions of the set value even if the opportunities for setting value suggestions are increased by, for example, the configuration shown in feature M4.

In addition, the description in this characteristic that "includes a first setting value (e.g., setting 3) and a second setting value (e.g., setting 1) that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value" may be changed to "includes a first setting value (e.g., setting 3) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second setting value (e.g., setting 1) that is relatively advantageous to the player."

The configuration shown in this feature can also be "a gaming machine described in any one of Features M3 to M5, characterized in that the setting values include a first setting value (e.g., setting 3) that is disadvantageous to the player when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is included in a predetermined reference value, and a second setting value (e.g., setting 1) that is disadvantageous to the player when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is included in the reference value, and the probability changing means has a means for changing the probability of occurrence of the suggestion to be lowered based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means exceeding the reference value when the setting value set by the setting value setting means is the second setting value."

Feature M7. The gaming machine described in Feature M6, characterized in that the probability changing means is configured not to change the probability of occurrence of the suggestion when the setting value set by the setting value setting means is the first setting value, even if the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means exceeds the reference value.

When winning balls occur fairly consistently, the game progresses smoothly and the player's motivation to play is unlikely to wane. Therefore, in such a situation, it is meaningful to have a configuration that does not intentionally increase the probability of hints occurring. Also, if the player can quickly determine that the set values are unfavorable to him, he can avoid increasing his investment by continuing to play in an unfavorable state. Therefore, by having a configuration that does not lower the probability of hints occurring, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the opportunities for such detection.

Feature M8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features M4 to M7, characterized in that the reference value is set for each set value.

When taking into account the variability in shots, as described in feature M2, etc., it is preferable to set a certain range for the reference value. However, if this range is too large, the probability adjustment function will not function properly. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the reference value is set according to the set value, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Feature M9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features M2 to M8, characterized in that the probability change means has a first change means for changing the occurrence probability of the suggestion based on the ball-scoring situation in a first monitoring period, and a second change means for changing the occurrence probability of the suggestion based on the ball-scoring situation in a second monitoring period that is longer than the first monitoring period.

The variation in the probability of hitting the ball can be broadly divided into variation due to permanent factors such as individual differences and changes over time, and variation due to temporary bias. Therefore, by using the two change methods shown in this feature in combination, it is possible to make appropriate probability adjustments (corrections).

Feature M10. A destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to a lottery result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes a subject of a lottery by the lottery means, at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes a subject of the lottery;
A gaming machine described in any one of features M2 to M9, characterized in that the probability changing means makes the change based on the fact that the special information stored in the acquired information storage means does not include anything that corresponds to a transition to the special game state, and does not make the change if the special information stored in the acquired information storage means includes something that will be a winning result that corresponds to a transition to the special game state.

If the acquired information storage means contains information corresponding to the winning result, the decrease in the player's motivation to play is appropriately suppressed without changing the probability of the setting suggestion. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the lottery result to be specified in advance and deciding whether or not to change the probability of occurrence based on that result, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature M11. The gaming machine described in any one of Features M2 to M10, characterized in that the probability change means makes the change based on the fact that the special information stored in the acquired information storage means does not include information corresponding to a predetermined effect, and does not make the change when the special information stored in the acquired information storage means includes information corresponding to a predetermined effect.

For example, when an effect that is expected to transition to a special game state (a specified effect) is executed, attention to the game increases. In such a situation, it is expected that a decrease in motivation to play will be suppressed even if the occurrence probability is not changed. Therefore, by configuring the system so that the occurrence probability of the hint is not changed when a specified effect is expected to occur, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature M12. As the normal game state, a first normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low frequency support mode) and a second normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to score into the starting scoring section than in the first normal game state are provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features M2 to M11, characterized in that the probability change means makes the change based on the gaming state being the first normal gaming state, and does not make the change when the gaming state is the second normal gaming state.

As shown in feature M12, in the second normal game state where the ball entry frequency is high, balls will enter the starting entry area with a certain degree of frequency. For this reason, even if the ball entry frequency decreases due to individual differences or bias, it is unlikely to become a factor that leads to a decrease in motivation to play. Therefore, by configuring the first normal game state so that the occurrence probability can be changed, while configuring the second normal game state so that the occurrence probability is not changed, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

The technical ideas shown in Features M3 to M12 may also be applied to Feature M1.

Incidentally, it is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Feature Group A to Feature Group L to Feature Group M described above in detail.

<Feature N group>
The following group N of features were made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1)." The problem that the invention is trying to solve is, "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature N1. A starting ball entry section (e.g., an actuation port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (winning information);
A picture display means (main display unit 87) having a display unit (ball-entering display unit 843, 844 of main display unit D) capable of variably displaying a picture and capable of stopping and displaying a picture corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
A hold display control means (a function of executing a process for hold display in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) displays a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area (hold number display area Da),
The reserved display area has a plurality of unit display areas (unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8) each capable of displaying the reserved image,
As a change display mode when changing the number of reserved images displayed in the reserved display area according to a change in the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a first change display mode (e.g., a special change display pattern in which a setting suggestion corresponding pattern is not formed) and a second change display mode (e.g., a special change display pattern in which a setting suggestion corresponding pattern is formed) in which the reserved images are displayed on a different target within the unit display area from the first change display mode are provided;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the pending display control means has a change display mode setting means for setting any one of the change display modes, including the first change display mode and the second change display mode, as the change display mode when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes.

In a configuration that displays a reserved image, the main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information stored, i.e., the number of reserved balls remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a special bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. This aims to increase attention to the reserved image (e.g., the number of games to be played later).

It is common knowledge that these reserved images move in a similar manner each time a game round progresses, and the manner in which they move (operational manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. As shown in this feature, by diversifying the additional display patterns when additional reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, and the shift display patterns when the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area are shifted, the movement of the reserved images can be prevented from becoming monotonous. By devising the display of reserved images in this way, it is possible to realize unprecedented and innovative display effects using reserved images, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

In addition, the description of this feature as "a hold display control means (a function of executing processing for hold display in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that displays a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the hold display area (hold number display area Da)" can also be interpreted as "a hold display control means (a function of executing processing for hold display in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that displays a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the hold display area (hold number display area Da) and changes the number of hold images displayed in the hold display area according to a change in the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means."

Feature N2. The gaming machine according to Feature N1, wherein the change display mode setting means is configured to set any one of the change display modes including the first change display mode and the second change display mode as the change display mode when the number of special information changes from a state in which a specified number (e.g., seven) of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means.

According to feature N2, even if the number of pending images is changed from the same number (prescribed number), the pattern differs between the first change display mode and the second change display mode, so that monotony of the display can be effectively suppressed.

Feature N3. The gaming machine described in Feature N1 or Feature N2, characterized in that the first change display mode and the second change display mode are configured such that the pattern formed by the multiple reserved images differs during at least a portion of the process in which the number of reserved images is changed.

As shown in feature N3, if the patterns (numbers, letters, pictures, etc.) formed by multiple pending images are different when pending images are added or shifted (decreased), the attention-increasing effect shown in feature N1 etc. can be more effectively achieved.

Feature N4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features N1 to N3, characterized in that in the second change display mode, a predetermined pattern showing any of letters, numbers, and symbols is formed in the process of changing the number of reserved images, and in the first change display mode, the predetermined pattern is not formed in the process of changing the number of reserved images.

As shown in feature N4, if the process of changing the number of reserved images creates a difference in whether or not a specific pattern is visible, a game of checking whether or not a specific pattern is present can be added, encouraging players who are hoping to see a specific pattern to pay attention to the reserved display. This allows the technical idea shown in feature N3 to be ideally embodied.

Feature N5. A game round control means (function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided that controls the picture display means so that the picture display means starts to display a variable picture before the judgment is made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ends the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round, and the picture display means performs variable display of the picture for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
The variable display period of the picture by the game number control means is set to be shorter as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases,
the change-display mode setting means is configured to set any one of the change-display modes including the first change-display mode and the second change-display mode as a change-display mode when a specified number (e.g., seven) of special information pieces is stored in the acquired information storage means and the number of the special information pieces is changed,
The gaming machine described in feature N4 is characterized in that in the second change display mode, the predetermined pattern is formed when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes a predetermined number (e.g., three) that is less than the specified number.

As shown in feature N5, a configuration in which the variable display period of the image is shortened depending on the number of special information stored is preferable in terms of speeding up the game progress. However, as shown in feature N4, etc., when a predetermined pattern such as numbers, letters, or images is displayed by combining reserved images, the display period of the predetermined pattern depends on the variable display period. Therefore, by configuring the predetermined pattern to be formed when a predetermined number is reached, which is a number less than a specified number, it is possible to prevent the period during which the predetermined pattern is maintained (the period during which it is visible) from becoming extremely short compared to, for example, a configuration in which the predetermined pattern is formed when the number is greater than a specified number, and it is possible to preferably achieve coexistence with the period shortening function.

Feature N6. In the first change display mode, when a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area are reduced in a first order;
In the second change display mode, when a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area are reduced in a second order different from the first order, and when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes a predetermined number less than the prescribed number, the predetermined pattern is formed.
A gaming machine described in feature N4 or feature N5, characterized in that the first change display mode and the second change display mode are configured so that it is difficult or impossible to identify which change display mode is which until the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means reaches the specified number.

Feature N6 makes it difficult or impossible to predict in advance whether the display will be in the first or second change display mode. This makes it possible to prevent the effect of increasing interest through the display innovations shown in features N2, etc. from being lost.

Feature N7: A destination specifying means (a function of specifying the destination of reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) is provided for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes a judgment target by the judgment means at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes a target of the judgment,
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein the change display mode setting means performs the setting based on the result of determination by the destination determination means.

As shown in feature N7, by identifying special information in advance, it is possible to effectively prevent the function of displaying a specific image based on a combination of reserved images from interfering with game progress, etc.

Feature N8. In the second change display mode, a predetermined pattern indicating any of letters, numbers, and symbols is formed in the process of changing the number of reserved images, and in the first change display mode, the predetermined pattern is not formed in the process of changing the number of reserved images;
The gaming machine described in feature N7 is characterized in that the pending display control means has a means for determining whether or not the special information to be determined before the specified pattern is formed based on the result of destination determination by the destination determination means includes special information corresponding to the transition to the special game state, and is configured not to set the second change display mode when it is determined that the special information corresponding to the transition to the special game state is included.

For example, for a player who is playing in the hope of seeing a specific image being formed, the missed opportunity to see the specific image due to the transition to a special game state immediately before that is likely to leave a lasting impression. Therefore, by configuring the game so that the second change display mode is not set in such a situation, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed.

Feature N9: The first change display mode is a first special change display mode, the second change display mode is a second special change display mode, and the change display mode set by the change display mode setting means includes a normal change display mode in addition to the first special change display mode and the second special change display mode,
The hold display control means has a means for changing an arrangement of the unit display area and the hold images displayed in the unit display area when the first special change display mode or the second special change display mode is set by the change display mode setting means,
In the second special change display mode, a predetermined pattern indicating any one of letters, numbers, and symbols is formed in the process of changing the number of the reserved images, and in the first special change display mode, the predetermined pattern is not formed in the process of changing the number of the reserved images,
The hold display control means has a display mode change means (a function of executing a hold notice performance in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that changes the display mode (e.g., color) of the hold image based on the identification result by the destination identification means,
The gaming machine described in feature N7 or feature N8, characterized in that the change display mode setting means is configured to be able to set the first special change display mode and the second special change display mode when the display modes of each reserved image being displayed in the reserved display area are common.

Feature N9 suggests that a situation has arisen in which the above-mentioned specified pattern may be formed due to the occurrence of rearrangement of the unit reserved display area and the reserved images. In this case, since the display format of the reserved images is common, it becomes difficult to predict, for example, the order in which the reserved images will decrease from the state immediately after the rearrangement.

Feature N10. The gaming machine described in Feature N9 is configured such that, in the first special change display mode and the second special change display mode, at least the position of the reserved image at the time when the change display mode is switched is the same.

As shown in the configuration of this feature, the arrangement of the reserved images at the time of switching the change display mode is the same, so it is possible to avoid it becoming obvious which special change display mode is being used when the change display mode is switched.

Feature N11. A starting ball entry portion (e.g., an actuation port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (winning information);
A pattern display means (pattern display device 253) having a display unit (display screen 253a) capable of variably displaying a pattern and causing a pattern corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means to be stopped and displayed on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
a hold display control means (a function of executing a process for hold display in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that displays a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area (hold number display area Da) and moves the hold images from the hold display area to a judgment target display area (execution target display area Db;
The reserved display area has a plurality of unit display areas (unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8) each capable of displaying the reserved image,
As an additional display mode when the reserved image is additionally displayed based on the acquisition of the special information,
A first additional display mode is provided in which the reserved images are additionally displayed in the unit display area in a first order, and a second additional display mode is provided in which the reserved images are additionally displayed in the unit display area in a second order different from the first order,
The pending display control means is characterized in that it has a means for setting any one of the additional display modes, including the first additional display mode and the second additional display mode, as the additional display mode when the pending image is additionally displayed.

In a configuration that displays a reserved image, the main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information stored, i.e., the number of reserved balls remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a special bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. This aims to increase attention to the reserved image (e.g., the number of games to be played later).

It is common knowledge that these reserved images move in a similar manner each time a game round progresses, and the manner of movement (operation or shifting manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by diversifying the additional display patterns when additional reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, it is possible to prevent the movement of the reserved images from becoming monotonous. By devising the display of reserved images in this way, it is possible to realize unprecedented and innovative display effects using reserved images, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features N2 to N10 can also be applied to this feature.

Feature N12. A starting ball entry section (e.g., an actuation port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (winning information);
A pattern display means (pattern display device 253) having a display unit (display screen 253a) capable of variably displaying a pattern and causing a pattern corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means to be stopped and displayed on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
a hold display control means (a function of executing a process for hold display in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that displays a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area (hold number display area Da) and moves the hold images from the hold display area to a judgment target display area (execution target display area Db;
When a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, a first movement mode for moving the reserved images to the judgment target display area in a first order and a second movement mode for moving the reserved images to the judgment target display area in a second order different from the first order are provided as movement modes for moving the reserved images to the judgment target display area in a first order,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the pending display control means has a means for setting either the first movement mode or the second movement mode as the movement mode when moving the pending image.

In a configuration that displays a reserved image, the main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information stored, i.e., the number of reserved balls remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a special bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. This aims to increase attention to the reserved image (e.g., the number of games to be played later).

It is common knowledge that these reserved images move in a similar manner each time a game round progresses, and the manner of movement (operation or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by diversifying the shift display pattern when shifting the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area, the movement of the reserved images can be prevented from becoming monotonous. By devising the display of reserved images in this way, it is possible to realize unprecedented and innovative display effects using reserved images, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features N2 to N10 can also be applied to this feature.

Feature N13. A starting ball entry portion (e.g., an actuation port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (winning information);
A picture display means (main display unit 87) having a display unit (ball-entering display unit 843, 844 of main display unit D) capable of variably displaying a picture and capable of stopping and displaying a picture corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
A display control means (a function of executing processing for displaying reserved information in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) displays a number of predetermined images (reserved icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined image display area (reserved number display area Da),
The predetermined image display area has a plurality of unit display areas (unit reservation display areas Da1 to Da8) each capable of displaying the predetermined image,
As change display modes when changing the number of predetermined images displayed in the predetermined image display area according to a change in the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a first change display mode (e.g., a special change display mode in which a setting suggestion corresponding pattern is not formed) and a second change display mode (e.g., a special change display pattern in which a setting suggestion corresponding pattern is formed) in which the target in the unit display area in which the predetermined image is displayed is different from the first change display mode are provided;
The display control means is characterized in that it has a change display mode setting means for setting any one of the change display modes, including the first change display mode and the second change display mode, as the change display mode when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes.

In a configuration that displays a predetermined image, its main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information stored, i.e., the number of reserved balls remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the predetermined image. This aims to increase attention to the predetermined image (for example, the game round to be played later).

Here, it is common knowledge that these predetermined images move in a similar manner each time a game round progresses, and the manner of movement (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by diversifying the additional display pattern when additionally displaying a predetermined image in a predetermined image display area, and the shift display pattern when shifting displaying a predetermined image displayed in a predetermined image display area, it is possible to prevent the movement of the predetermined images from becoming monotonous. By devising the display of the predetermined images in this way, it is possible to realize unprecedented and innovative display effects using the predetermined images, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

Incidentally, the "prescribed image" shown in this feature can also be the "pending-related image" and the "prescribed image display area" can also be the "pending-related image display area."

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group M to Feature Group N described above.

<Feature P group>
The following feature P group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1)."

Feature P1. A starting ball entry section (e.g., an operating port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 provided in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (a function for executing a pass/fail determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A pattern display means (a function of executing a pattern display process in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) having a display unit (pattern display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern and stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
a hold display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for displaying in a hold display area (hold number display area Da) a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means, and for moving the hold images displayed in the hold display area to a judgment target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the hold display control means has a display form switching means (a function of changing the arrangement pattern of the unit hold display area in the notification/presentation control device 140 and the display control device 410) that switches the display form of the hold display area between a first display form (a horizontal row arrangement) that indicates the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and a second display form (a figure-of-eight arrangement) that can display the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means and predetermined game information that is information regarding the game and different from the number.

In a configuration that displays a reserved image, the main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information stored, i.e., the number of reserved balls remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a special bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. This aims to increase attention to the reserved image (e.g., the number of games to be played later).

In the configuration shown in this feature, the display form of the pending display area switches between a first display form and a second display form. In the first display form, the number of special information stored can be displayed, and in the second display form, in addition to the number of special information stored, other game information (e.g., a set value) is displayed. By configuring the display form of the pending display area to change and additional information is displayed, it is possible to further increase attention to the game.

Feature P2. The reserved display area is a combination of a plurality of display units (unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8) each capable of displaying a reserved image;
The gaming machine according to feature P1, wherein the first display form and the second display form have different layout patterns of the display unit.

According to feature P2, by making the arrangement pattern of the display parts in the first display form different from the arrangement pattern of the display parts in the second display form, it is possible to clearly differentiate between the display forms. For example, in the first display form, it is possible to use an arrangement (arrangement pattern) that makes it easy to grasp the number of special information, and in the second display form, it is possible to use an arrangement (arrangement pattern) that allows the above-mentioned specified game information to be displayed.

Feature P3. The reserved display area is a combination of a plurality of display units (unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8) each capable of displaying a reserved image;
The gaming machine described in feature P1 is characterized in that the first display form and the second display form are configured such that the number of display units in the first display form is the same as the number of display units in the second display form, while the arrangement pattern of the display units in the first display form is different from the arrangement pattern of the display units in the second display form.

According to feature P3, by configuring the number of display parts in the first display form to match the number of display parts in the second display form, it is possible to diversify the display form of the pending display area while preventing it from becoming a cause of confusion for the player.

Feature P4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features P1 to P3, characterized in that the hold display control means has an information display means that displays the predetermined gaming information by a combination of hold images displayed on the display unit in the second display form.

According to feature P4, when the display mode is switched to the second display mode, predetermined game information is displayed by a combination of reserved images. Even if the information cannot be displayed by an individual reserved image, it can be displayed by using a combination of multiple reserved images, and the expressiveness of the information can be dramatically improved.

Feature P5. The gaming machine described in Feature P4, characterized in that the information display means is configured to display any of numbers, letters, or symbols as the predetermined gaming information by combining multiple reserved images.

For various reasons, an upper limit is often set on the number of special information items stored in the acquired information storage means. Also, there may be a certain degree of variation in the number of special information items acquired due to individual differences in gaming machines, etc. In light of these circumstances, there is concern that even if the function shown in feature P1 is applied, the function may not be performed properly. Therefore, by configuring the specified gaming information to be displayed using numbers, letters, and symbols as shown in this feature, it is possible to prevent the number of special information items required from becoming excessively large, and to prevent the function from not being performed properly due to the above circumstances, etc.

Feature P6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P5, characterized in that the reserved display area in the second display mode is configured such that at least a portion of the reserved display area overlaps with the reserved display area in the first display mode.

If the display position of the reserved image changes significantly when the display format is switched, it is expected that the player will be more likely to lose sight of the reserved image. This is undesirable as it can confuse the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring each display format so that at least a portion of the reserved display area overlaps, it is possible to make it less likely that the above inconvenience will occur even when the display format is switched. This makes it possible to optimally achieve the effects shown in feature P1, etc.

Feature P7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P6, characterized in that the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area in the first display mode and the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area in the second display mode are configured to be the same.

In a configuration in which the shape of the reserve display area changes by switching the display form, the impact can be enhanced by increasing the difference before and after the switch. However, if the difference in appearance becomes greater, it becomes difficult to understand the relationship between the first display form and the second display form, which is likely to confuse the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the reserve image displayed in the reserve display area is the same even when switching the display form, it is easy to predict from the reserve image that the two are the same reserve display area, with only the display form being different. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned inconveniences from occurring and to optimally achieve the effects shown in feature P1, etc.

Feature P8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features P1 to P7, characterized in that the display mode switching means has a means for switching the display mode of the reserved display area from the first display mode to the second display mode when new special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and is configured to first additionally display a reserved image corresponding to the newly acquired special information and then switch to the second display mode when the switching is performed.

According to feature P8, the display format of the pending display area is switched when new special information is stored. At this time, a pending image corresponding to the special information is first additionally displayed, and then the display format is switched, so that the addition of special information is prevented from being overlooked while the display format is being switched. Also, for example, in diversifying the order in which pending images are erased, there is technical significance in avoiding the additional display of a pending image corresponding to newly acquired special information after switching to the second display format.

Feature P9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P8, characterized in that the display mode switching means is configured to switch from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means reaching a first predetermined number, which is the number required to display the predetermined information in the second display mode.

The change in form when no information is displayed can be seen as annoying, and there is concern that repeated occurrences of this kind of phenomenon may lead to players missing certain game information when it is displayed. The configuration shown in this characteristic can prevent such inconvenience.

In addition, players who want to check specific game information can be encouraged to play in a way that actively earns special information, which can contribute to improving the operating rate of gaming machines.

Feature P10. The picture display means includes a first period and a second period longer than the first period as a variable display period of the picture,
A gaming machine described in any one of features P1 to P9, characterized in that the display form switching means is configured to switch between the first display form and the second display form while the image is variably displayed so that the variable display period becomes the second period.

To make it easier to understand that both the first and second display forms are reserved display areas, or to increase the difference between the first and second display forms, the period required to switch the display form may become longer. Therefore, by configuring the display form to switch to the second display form when a relatively long second period is set as the variable display period of the image, the period required to switch the display form can be gained.

It is assumed that the second display form, which contains an increased amount of information, is more likely to attract the player's attention than the first display form. When such circumstances are taken into consideration, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in any one of features P1 to P9, characterized in that a first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided as a variable display period for the picture in the picture display means, and the display form switching means is configured to switch from the first display form to the second display form while the picture is being variably displayed such that the variable display period is the second period."

Feature P11. A starting ball entry section (e.g., an operating port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 provided in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (a function for executing a pass/fail determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A pattern display means (a function of executing a pattern display process in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) having a display unit (pattern display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern and stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for displaying a number of predetermined images (reserved icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined image display area (reserved number display area Da) and for moving the predetermined images displayed in the predetermined image display area to a judgment target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses;
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it has a display form switching means (a function of changing the arrangement pattern of the unit reserve display area in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that switches the display form of the specified image display area between a first display form (a horizontal row arrangement) that indicates the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and a second display form (a figure-of-eight arrangement) that can display the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means and specified game information that is information regarding the game and different from the number.

In a configuration that displays a predetermined image, its main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information stored, i.e., the number of reserved balls remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the predetermined image. This aims to increase attention to the predetermined image (for example, the game round to be played later).

In the configuration shown in this feature, the display form of the specified image display area switches between a first display form and a second display form. In the first display form, the number of special information stored can be displayed, and in the second display form, in addition to the number of special information stored, different game information (e.g., a set value) is displayed. By configuring the display form of the specified image display area to change and adding additional information, it is possible to further increase attention to the game.

Incidentally, the "prescribed image" shown in this feature can also be the "pending-related image" and the "prescribed image display area" can also be the "pending-related image display area."

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features P1 to Q10 can also be applied to this feature.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group N to Feature Group P described above.

<Feature Q group>
The following feature Q group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1)." The problem that the invention is trying to solve is, "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature Q1. A starting ball entry section (e.g., an operating port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 provided in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (a function for executing a pass/fail determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A pattern display means (a function of executing a pattern display control process in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) having a display unit (pattern display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern and stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
a hold display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for displaying in a hold display area (hold number display area Da) a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means, and for moving the hold images displayed in the hold display area to a judgment target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses,
The hold display control means includes:
a first moving means for moving a plurality of reserved images from the reserved display area to the judgment target display area in a first order in which the reserved images are added and displayed when the reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area;
A gaming machine characterized in that it has a second moving means for moving multiple reserved images from the reserved display area to the judgment target display area in a second order different from the first order when multiple reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area.

In a configuration that displays a reserved image, the main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information stored, i.e., the number of reserved balls remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a special bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. This aims to increase attention to the reserved image (e.g., the number of games to be played later).

Here, it is common knowledge that the reserved images move in the same manner each time a game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when multiple reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, a movement manner in which the reserved images are moved to the judgment target display area in additional display order (special information acquisition order) and a movement manner in which the reserved images are moved to the judgment target display area in a different order are used in combination, so that, for example, an event occurs in which the subsequent reserved information suddenly overtakes the preceding reserved image and moves to the judgment target display area, thereby preventing the movement of the reserved images from becoming monotonous. Diversifying the movement manner of the reserved images in this way makes it possible to create unprecedented and innovative display presentations, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

Feature Q2. A starting ball entry section (e.g., an operating port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 provided in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a pass/fail determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information in a predetermined order;
A pattern display means (a function of executing a pattern display control process in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) having a display unit (pattern display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern and stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
a hold display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for displaying in a hold display area (hold number display area Da) a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means, and for moving the hold images displayed in the hold display area to a judgment target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses,
The hold display control means includes:
a first moving means for moving the displayed reserved images from the reserved display area to the judgment target display area in the same order as the predetermined order when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means and a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area and the special information is to be judged by the judgment means in the predetermined order;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a plurality of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means and a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area and the special information is to be subject to judgment by the judgment means in the predetermined order, the gaming machine has a second moving means for moving the displayed reserved images from the reserved display area to the judgment target display area in an order different from the predetermined order.

In a configuration that displays a reserved image, the main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information stored, i.e., the number of reserved balls remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a special bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. This aims to increase attention to the reserved image (e.g., the number of games to be played later).

Here, it is common knowledge that the reserved images move in the same manner each time a game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when multiple reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, a movement manner in which the reserved images are moved to the judgment target display area in additional display order (special information acquisition order) and a movement manner in which the reserved images are moved to the judgment target display area in a different order are used in combination, so that, for example, an event occurs in which a subsequent reserved image suddenly overtakes a preceding reserved image and moves toward the judgment target display area, thereby preventing the movement of the reserved images from becoming monotonous. Diversifying the movement manner of the reserved images in this way makes it possible to create unprecedented and innovative display presentations, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

Feature Q3. The gaming machine described in Feature Q2, characterized in that the second moving means is configured to move a reserved image that is additionally displayed after the reserved image corresponding to the predetermined special information among the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area from the reserved display area to the judgment target display area when a plurality of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means and a plurality of reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area and the special information is made the subject of judgment by the judgment means in the predetermined order, and when a predetermined special information among the plurality of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is made the subject of judgment by the judgment means.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when a specific special information becomes the subject of judgment, the reserved image that would have been added and displayed after the specific special information is moved to the judgment subject display area, rather than the reserved image corresponding to the specific special information. With this special movement mode, a reserved image different from the reserved image that was expected to move to the judgment subject display area moves to the judgment subject display area. Diversifying the movement mode by overtaking in this way can favorably exert the effect of increasing the level of attention shown in feature Q2.

Feature Q4. The hold display control means is
A decision means for deciding whether or not to change the display mode (e.g., color) of the reserved image based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
and a change means for changing the display mode of another reserved image subsequent to the reserved image corresponding to the special information that triggered the change when the decision means has been made to change the display mode,
A gaming machine described in feature Q2 or feature Q3, characterized in that a reserved image whose display mode has been changed by the change means is configured to be the target for movement to the judgment target display area by the second movement means.

As shown in feature Q4, by changing the display mode of the reserved image, differences in expectation level, etc. can be created for each reserved image even when multiple reserved images are displayed. Here, a reserved image whose display mode has been changed is more likely to attract the player's attention than other reserved images. Therefore, by configuring the reserved image whose display mode has been changed to skip over other reserved images and move to the judgment target display area, the chances of that movement being overlooked can be reduced.

Furthermore, when there is a difference in expectation, attention is more likely to be drawn to the reserved image with a relatively high expectation, and less attention is paid to other reserved images before that reserved image. In this case, a certain amount of waiting occurs until the game corresponding to the reserved image with a relatively high expectation is played. In this regard, by configuring the reserved image with a relatively high expectation to move in one go to the judgment target display area when the reserved image with a relatively high expectation is displayed, not only is the waiting time alleviated, but the expectation of a sudden overtaking even during the waiting period can be aroused, thereby favorably maintaining attention.

Feature Q5. The display mode of the reserved image is provided with a first display mode (e.g., "white") and a second display mode (e.g., "blue,""yellow," or "red") that is set so that the result of the determination by the determination means is more likely to be a winning result than the first display mode;
The hold display control means includes:
A decision means for deciding whether or not to change the display mode (e.g., color) of the reserved image based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A change means for changing the display mode of the reserved image when the decision means decides to change the display mode,
The change means is
A normal change means for changing a display mode of a reserved image corresponding to the special information that triggered the decision by the decision means to the second display mode;
A special change means for changing a display mode of another reserved image following the reserved image corresponding to the special information that triggered the decision by the decision means,
The first moving means is configured to move the reserved image to the judgment target display area in the predetermined order regardless of the presence or absence of the change by the normal change means,
The gaming machine described in feature Q3 or feature Q4, characterized in that the second movement means is configured to move the reserved image whose display mode has been changed to the second display mode by the special change means to the judgment target display area ahead of other reserved images when a change is made by the special change means.

As shown in feature Q5, by changing the display mode of the reserved image, differences in expectation level, etc. can be created for each reserved image even when multiple reserved images are displayed. Here, a reserved image whose display mode has been changed is more likely to attract the player's attention than other reserved images. Therefore, by configuring the reserved image whose display mode has been changed to skip over other reserved images and move to the judgment target display area, the chances of that movement being overlooked can be reduced.

Furthermore, when there is a difference in expectation, attention is more likely to be drawn to the reserved image with a relatively high expectation, and less attention is paid to other reserved images before that reserved image. In this case, a certain amount of waiting occurs until the game corresponding to the reserved image with a relatively high expectation is played. In this regard, by configuring the reserved image with a relatively high expectation to move in one go to the judgment target display area when the reserved image with a relatively high expectation is displayed, not only is the waiting time alleviated, but the expectation of a sudden overtaking even during the waiting period can be aroused, thereby favorably maintaining attention.

Feature Q6. The gaming machine described in Feature Q5 is configured to avoid changing the display mode of the additional reserved image displayed in response to the acquisition of the special information that triggered the change when the display mode of the subsequent reserved image is changed to the second display mode by the change means.

According to feature Q6, changes in display mode of the reserved image corresponding to the special information that triggered the special move are restricted, so that the special move can be prevented from being buried. In addition, it is possible to prevent the effects of the display mode change from remaining after the normal movement mode is restored after the special move (the occurrence of a discrepancy between the expectation set for each display mode and reality).

Feature Q7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features Q2 to Q5, characterized in that when the second moving means moves a predetermined reserved image to the judgment target display area so as to overtake other preceding reserved images, the display mode of the reserved image is maintained at least during the movement.

When performing a special move such as that shown in feature Q2, the display mode of the reserved image can be maintained (not changed) at least during the movement, thereby reducing confusion for the player.

For example, in a configuration in which the expected probability of a winning result is indicated by the display mode of the reserved image, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the change in the display mode. Therefore, by avoiding changes to the display mode of the reserved image during a special move, it is possible to prevent a decrease in attention to the special move.

Feature Q8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features Q2 to Q7, characterized in that a movement process display area (variable display area ME) capable of displaying the movement process of the reserved image when the reserved image is moved to the judgment target display area by the second movement means is arranged alongside the reserved display area.

As shown in feature Q8, if the movement of the reserved image when a special movement occurs is shown in the movement process display area arranged alongside the reserved display area, it becomes easier to visually grasp that an overtaking of the reserved image has occurred.

Feature Q9. The gaming machine described in Feature Q8, wherein the movement process display area is part of the area in which the image is variably displayed.

In gaming machines where the lottery results are announced by a picture, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the variable display area of the picture. If the special move described above occurs while the player is paying attention to the picture, the reserved image will pass through the variable display area, making it possible to effectively prevent the special move from being overlooked.

Feature Q10. The gaming machine described in any one of Features Q2 to Q9, characterized in that the second moving means is configured to move the reserved image that is the object of movement by the second moving means to the judgment object display area, while causing the other reserved images to remain in their original positions.

According to feature Q10, when a special movement (overtaking) occurs, the reserved images other than the target reserved image remain stationary. In this way, by configuring the display so that the moving reserved image and the stationary reserved image are displayed together, the moving reserved image can be made to stand out.

Feature Q11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features Q2 to Q10, characterized in that the reserved display control means has a means for maintaining the display area that has become vacant due to the movement by the second movement means in that state for a predetermined period of time when there is a reserved image that has been additionally displayed after the reserved image that has been moved by the second movement means.

When a special movement occurs using the second movement means, the source of the movement is prevented from being filled until a specified period of time has passed, so even if the special movement itself is overlooked, it is possible to grasp the fact after the fact.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features Q3 to Q11 can also be applied to Feature Q1.

Feature Q12. A starting ball entry section (e.g., an operating port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 provided in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (a function for executing a pass/fail determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A pattern display means (a function of executing a pattern display control process in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) having a display unit (pattern display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern and stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for displaying a number of predetermined images (reserved icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined image display area (reserved number display area Da) and for moving the predetermined images displayed in the predetermined image display area to a judgment target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses;
The display control means
a first moving means for moving, when a plurality of predetermined images are displayed in the predetermined image display area, the predetermined images from the predetermined image display area to the judgment target display area in a first order that is the order in which the predetermined images were added and displayed;
A gaming machine characterized in that it has a second moving means for moving a plurality of predetermined images from the predetermined image display area to the judgment target display area in a second order different from the first order when the predetermined images are displayed in the predetermined image display area.

In a configuration that displays a predetermined image, its main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information stored, i.e., the number of reserved balls remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the predetermined image. This aims to increase attention to the predetermined image (for example, the game round to be played later).

Here, it is common knowledge that the predetermined images move in the same manner each time a game round progresses, and the movement manner (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when multiple predetermined images are displayed in the predetermined image display area, a movement manner in which the predetermined images are moved to the judgment target display area in the additional display order (the order in which special information is acquired) and a movement manner in which the images are moved to the judgment target display area in a different order are used in combination, so that, for example, an event occurs in which the subsequent predetermined information suddenly overtakes the preceding predetermined image and moves toward the judgment target display area, thereby preventing the movement of the predetermined images from becoming monotonous. Diversifying the movement manner of the predetermined images in this way makes it possible to create unprecedented and innovative display presentations, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

Incidentally, the "prescribed image" shown in this feature can also be the "pending-related image" and the "prescribed image display area" can also be the "pending-related image display area."

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features Q2 to Q11 can also be applied to this feature.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group P to Feature Group Q described above.

<Feature R group>
The following feature R group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1)."

Feature R1. A starting ball entry section (e.g., an actuation port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (a function for executing a pass/fail determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A pattern display means (a function of executing a pattern display control process in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) having a display unit (pattern display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern and stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
a hold display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for displaying in a hold display area (hold number display area Da) a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means, and for moving the hold images displayed in the hold display area to a judgment target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses,
The hold display control means includes:
When new special information is acquired by a ball entering the starting ball entry section, an additional means for adding the reserved image to the reserved display area (a function for additionally displaying a reserved icon in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) is provided;
A moving means for sequentially moving the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area in the order of addition to the reserved display area to the judgment target display area;
A gaming machine characterized in that it has a replacement means for replacing a preceding reserved image with a succeeding reserved image when multiple reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area.

In a configuration that displays a reserved image, the main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information stored, i.e., the number of reserved balls remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a special bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the reserved image. This aims to increase attention to the reserved image (e.g., the number of games to be played later).

Here, it is common knowledge that these reserved images move in a similar manner each time a game round progresses, and the manner of movement (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the preceding reserved image and the succeeding reserved image are switched when multiple reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, not only the appearance of the reserved images but also their movement becomes distinctive. Therefore, by diversifying the manner in which the reserved images move, it becomes possible to create unprecedented and innovative display presentations, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

In addition, the description in this feature that "when multiple reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, an exchange means for exchanging a preceding reserved image with a succeeding reserved image" can also be changed to "when multiple reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, an exchange means for exchanging the display positions of a preceding reserved image with a succeeding reserved image".

Feature R2. The moving means is configured to move the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area so as to gradually approach the judgment target display area,
The gaming machine described in feature R1 is characterized in that the replacement means replaces the preceding reserved image with a reserved image displayed farther from the judgment target display area than the preceding reserved image, as the subsequent reserved image.

When moving closer to the display area to be judged, the reserved image closer to the display area to be judged (the preceding reserved image) is replaced with the reserved image farther from the display area to be judged (the subsequent reserved image), which makes it easier for the player to get the impression that the order in which the images are consumed has changed due to the change in the positional relationship between the display area to be judged and each reserved image.

Feature R3. As the display mode of the reserved image, a plurality of display modes (for example, four colors of “white”, “blue”, “yellow”, and “red”) are provided, which have different expectation rates that the judgment result by the judgment means is a winning result;
A gaming machine described in feature R1 or feature R2, characterized in that it is equipped with a display mode change means (a function of executing a step-up display of the hold icon in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that changes the display mode of the hold image as the hold image moves within the hold display area toward the judgment target display area.

As shown in feature R3, if this is applied to a configuration in which the display mode of the pending image changes (steps up) during the process of moving toward the display area to be judged, the process of moving to the display area to be judged can be extended, making it appear as if there are more opportunities to step up.

Feature R4. As the display mode of the reserved image, a plurality of display modes (for example, four colors of “white”, “blue”, “yellow”, and “red”) are provided, which have different expectation rates that the result of the judgment by the judgment means is a winning result;
A gaming machine described in any one of features R1 to R3, characterized in that the replacement means is configured to perform the replacement under a situation where the display mode of the preceding reserved image and the display mode of the subsequent reserved image are different.

As shown in feature R4, by switching between reserved images with different display modes, the change in appearance at the time of switching can be suitably emphasized. Furthermore, even if the player misses the moment when the reserved images are switched, the player can later grasp that the reserved images have been switched, making it possible to suitably achieve the attention-increasing effect shown in feature R1, etc.

Feature R5. The display mode of the reserved image includes a first display mode (e.g., "white") and a second display mode (e.g., "yellow") that is set so that the expectation that the result of the determination by the determination means is a winning result is higher than the first display mode;
The gaming machine described in feature R3 or feature R4, wherein the replacement means is configured to perform the replacement under a situation where the display mode of the preceding reserved image is changed to the second display mode.

As shown in feature R3, etc., in a configuration in which the display mode (e.g. color) of the reserved image indicates the degree of expectation, it is expected that the player's attention will increase when the display mode changes. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a reserved image in the second display mode is postponed, the state of high attention can be preferably maintained.

In addition, particularly in combination with feature R3, once the display mode has changed, further changes are likely to occur, and the player's attention is likely to be drawn to it. Therefore, if the display mode that has changed is left for later, it is possible to encourage the player to look forward to further changes in the display mode (step-up). This can further enhance the effect of increasing attention to the game.

Feature R6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features R3 to R5, characterized in that the replacement means has a means for performing the replacement under a situation in which the display mode of the preceding reserved image to be replaced has a higher expectation than the display mode of the subsequent reserved image.

The configuration shown in feature R6 makes it appear as if the step-up has restarted after a certain level of step-up, which can dramatically increase the player's attention.

Feature R7. The display modes of the reserved image include a first display mode (e.g., "white"), a second display mode (e.g., "yellow") set to have a higher expectation that the result of the judgment by the judgment means is a winning result than the first display mode, and a third display mode (e.g., "red") set to have the highest expectation that the result of the judgment by the judgment means is a winning result;
A gaming machine described in any one of features R3 to R6, characterized in that the replacement means is configured not to replace a reserved image in the third display mode with the preceding reserved image.

The third display mode shown in characteristic R7 is the display mode with the highest expectation, and there is no room for stepping up, etc. Therefore, by configuring the reserved image that is the third display mode not to be used as the preceding reserved image, it is possible to leave room for stepping up.

Feature R8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features R3 to R7, characterized in that the reserved display control means is configured to maintain the display mode of the reserved images that have been replaced for a predetermined period of time when the replacement is performed by the replacement means.

As shown in feature R8, if the display mode of the reserved image is maintained for a specified period of time after replacement, it is possible to prevent the special movement of the reserved image from becoming a cause of confusion for the player.

Feature R9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features R1 to R8, characterized in that the reserved display area is provided with a passing display area (variable display area ME) through which each reserved image passes when the reserved image is replaced by the replacement means.

As shown in feature R9, by configuring the display to display the process of the pending image replacement by providing a passing display area, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the display mode of each of the pending images to be replaced has simply changed at the same time (i.e., that no replacement is occurring). This allows the special movement mode to be optimally effective in increasing attention to the game.

Feature R10. As the display mode of the reserved image, a plurality of display modes (for example, four colors of “white”, “blue”, “yellow”, and “red”) are provided, which have different expectation rates that the result of the judgment by the judgment means is a winning result;
a special change means for changing a display mode of a reserved image corresponding to the special information stored at a timing prior to the special information that triggered the change in the display mode, instead of the reserved image corresponding to the special information that triggered the change, when the acquired information storage means contains special information stored at a timing prior to the special information that triggered the change;
A gaming machine described in any one of features R1 to R9, characterized in that the replacement means has a means for replacing a reserved image corresponding to the specified special information with a reserved image whose display mode has been changed by the special change means.

According to feature R10, instead of the reserved image corresponding to the special information that triggered the change in display mode, the display mode of the reserved image corresponding to the special information stored at an earlier timing is changed, and then the reserved images are replaced. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel display that has never been seen before, and it is possible to more effectively exert the attention-increasing effect shown in feature R1, etc.

Feature R11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features R1 to R10, characterized in that the replacement means has a means for performing the replacement when a reserved image with a changed display mode is placed in an area in the reserved display area immediately before the judgment target display area.

In a configuration in which reserved images displayed in the reserved display area move sequentially to the judgment target display area, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the judgment target display area or the area immediately preceding it (the adjacent area). Therefore, if a reserved image with a changed display mode is placed in the area immediately preceding it, the impact of the switch can be enhanced by replacing it with the subsequent reserved image.

Feature R12. A gaming machine according to any one of Features R1 to R11, characterized in that the replacement means has a means for performing the replacement under a condition in which the image is variably displayed on the display unit.

As shown in feature R12, by replacing the reserved image during variable display of the image, i.e. during a stationary display where the reserved image does not move (shift), it is possible to preferably prevent the replacement of the reserved image from becoming confused with the shift movement and becoming difficult to understand.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in any one of features R1 to R11, characterized in that the replacement means has a means for moving the reserved image after the image display means stops and displays the image, and a means for performing the replacement after the movement by the means."

Feature R13. A starting ball entry section (e.g., an operating port 83a) provided in the play area (play area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (a function for executing a pass/fail determination process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A pattern display means (a function of executing a pattern display control process in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) having a display unit (pattern display device 253) capable of variably displaying a pattern and stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means on the display unit;
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information;
a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for displaying a number of predetermined images (reserved icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined image display area (reserved number display area Da) and for moving the predetermined images displayed in the predetermined image display area to a judgment target display area (execution target display area Db) as the game progresses;
The display control means
When new special information is acquired by a ball entering the starting ball entry section, an additional means for adding the predetermined image to the predetermined image display area (a function of additionally displaying a hold icon in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410);
a moving means for sequentially moving the predetermined images, which are displayed in the order in which they were added to the predetermined image display area, to the judgment target display area;
A gaming machine comprising: a replacement means for replacing a preceding predetermined image with a succeeding predetermined image when a plurality of predetermined images are displayed in the predetermined image display area.

In a configuration that displays a predetermined image corresponding to the number of special information pieces, the main function is to clearly show the player the number of special information pieces stored, i.e., the number of reserved pieces remaining. In recent years, technology has been proposed that suggests the likelihood of receiving a bonus by changing the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the predetermined image. This aims to increase attention to the predetermined image (for example, the game round to be played later).

It is common knowledge that these predetermined images move in a similar manner each time a game round progresses, and the manner of movement (operation manner or shift manner) is extremely monotonous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the preceding predetermined image and the succeeding predetermined image are switched when multiple predetermined images are displayed in the predetermined image display area, not only the appearance of the predetermined images but also their movement becomes distinctive. Therefore, by diversifying the manner in which the predetermined images move, it becomes possible to create unprecedented and innovative display presentations, which can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

Incidentally, the "prescribed image" shown in this feature can also be the "pending-related image" and the "prescribed image display area" can also be the "pending-related image display area."

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features R2 to R12 can also be applied to this feature.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group R to the Feature Group R described above.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that includes an operating means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (guiding passage 103) that guides the launched game ball to a specified game area, and various game components (game nails 93, etc.) arranged within the game area (game area PE), and that awards a bonus to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section (general winning opening 81, etc.) of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that changes and displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols, and then displays the series of symbols at its final stop; the change in symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the change in symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 14... Front door frame, 29... Speaker unit, 35... Operation button, 41... Game ball launching handle, 80... Game board unit, 80a... Game area forming body, 81... General winning port, 82... Variable winning device, 83a... Upper operating port, 83b... Lower operating port, 87... Main display unit, 91... Electric role, 140... Notification/performance control device, 162... Main control device, 253... Pattern display device, 391 a-391f...detection sensor, 401...MPU, 403...ROM, 404...RAM, 410...display control device, 442...MPU, 500...game information display device, 600...monitoring device, 602...MPU, 603...information acquisition unit, 604...storage unit, 750...blower device, D...main display unit, Da...reserved number display area, Db...execution target display area, ME...variable display area, NE...reserved display area, PE...game area.

Claims (1)

A starting ball entry means provided in the game area;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a shot made to the starting shot means;
an acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a determination means for sequentially determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
A pattern display means having a display unit capable of variably displaying a pattern;
a game round control means for controlling the picture display means so that a game round is played when the display unit starts to display a variable display of the picture based on the judgment made by the judgment means, a stop result corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means is displayed, and the variable display of the picture is terminated, the stop result being counted as one game round;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state to a special game state when a determination result by the determination means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
a hold display control means for controlling the display of hold images so that when one ball is scored into the start ball scoring means under a circumstance where the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means has not reached the upper storage limit number, a hold image is additionally displayed in a predetermined order in the hold display area;
As a display form of the reserved display area,
a first display mode in which a player can recognize the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means based on a reserved image displayed in the reserved display area ;
a second display mode different from the first display mode, in which a player can recognize the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means based on the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area ;
There is a system in place,
The hold display control means has a display mode switching means for switching the display mode from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition,
The reserved display area has a plurality of areas each capable of displaying a reserved image ,
The first display form and the second display form have different arrangement patterns of the plurality of regions,
In the second display mode, in a situation where a predetermined number of reserved images are displayed in the plurality of areas, a player can recognize predetermined game information that is information about a game and is different from the number based on an arrangement of the predetermined number of reserved images;
When the display mode is set to the second display mode, the second display mode is configured to be continued over a plurality of times of the game,
A first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided as a variable display period of the picture in the picture display means,
a means for changing the display form to the second display form when the variable display period is the second period;
A gaming machine characterized in that the pending display area in the first display form is switched from a displayed state to a hidden state, and after the hidden state, the pending display area in the second display form is configured to be in a displayed state.

Images